JWST Near Infrared Camera

User Documentation for Cycle 1
Near Infrared
Camera Instrument
(NIRCam)
This PDF document was updated on July 9, 2022. It is an

archive of pre-commissioning information. For the most
current information, please visit https://jwst-docs.stsci.edu
and use the online documentation.
HELP DESK
JWST WEBSITE
REPORT WEBSITE PROBLEMS
Copyright © 2022 The NASA James Webb Space Telescope, developed in partnership with
All rights reserved ESA and CSA, is operated by AURA’s Space Telescope Science Institute.
1. JWST User Documentation Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1 JWST JDox Latest Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2 About JDox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3 JWST User Video Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.4 JWST Proposal Handbook PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.5 JWST Help Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.6 JWST Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.7 JWST Near Infrared Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.7.1 NIRCam Observing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
NIRCam Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
NIRCam Time-Series Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
NIRCam Grism Time Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1.7.2 NIRCam Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
NIRCam Field of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
NIRCam Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
NIRCam Optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
NIRCam Dichroics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
NIRCam Pupil and Filter Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
NIRCam Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
NIRCam Coronagraphic Occulting Masks and Lyot Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
NIRCam Filters for Coronagraphy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
NIRCam Grisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
NIRCam Weak Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
NIRCam Detector Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
NIRCam Detector Subarrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
NIRCam Detector Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
NIRCam Detector Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
1.7.3 NIRCam Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
NIRCam Dithers and Mosaics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
NIRCam Primary Dithers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
NIRCam Subarray Primary Dithers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy Dithers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
NIRCam Subpixel Dithers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
NIRCam Mosaics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
NIRCam Coronagraphic PSF Estimation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
NIRCam Coronagraph Astrometric Confirmation Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
NIRCam Apertures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
NIRCam Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
NIRCam Grism Time-Series Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target Acquisition

1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
1.7.4 NIRCam Predicted Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
NIRCam Point Spread Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
NIRCam Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
NIRCam Bright Source Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
NIRCam Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
NIRCam Flat Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
NIRCam WFSS Field of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
NIRCam WFSS Backgrounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
NIRCam Dragon's Breath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
1.7.5 NIRCam APT Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
NIRCam Imaging APT Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging APT Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
NIRCam Time-Series APT Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
NIRCam Grism Time-Series APT Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy APT Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
1.7.6 NIRCam Observing Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Recommended Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
NIRCam Time-Series Observation Recommended Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
NIRCam WFSS Recommended Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
1.7.7 NIRCam Example Science Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels . .
453
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels . .
463
NIRCam Parallel Imaging and NIRISS WFSS of Galaxies in Lensing Clusters . . . . . . . . . 472
Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam Parallel Imaging and NIRISS WFSS of Galaxies in
Lensing Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam Parallel Imaging and NIRISS WFSS of Galaxies in
Lensing Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations . . . . . . . . . . 498
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations . . . . . . . . . . 506
NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b . . . . . . . 527
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b . . . . . . . 541
NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris
Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris
Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18b . . . . . . . . . 628
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b . . . . . . . . 633
NIRCam Grism Time-Series Observations of GJ 436b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam Grism Time-Series of GJ 436b . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam Grism Time-Series of GJ 436b . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
3
JWST User Documentation Home
Welcome to the
JWST User Documentation Homepage
This website holds a comprehensive collection of documentation (known as JDox) on the JWST spacecraft and
instruments, preparing observing proposals, and getting started on data analysis.
Latest JDox Updates

Video Tutorials
PDF Documentation
Observatory
Hardware
Characteristics
Instruments
Mid Infrared Instrument
Near Infrared Camera
Near Infrared Imager and Slitless Spectrograph
Near Infrared Spectrograph

For Proposers
Getting Started
Opportunities and Policies
Methods and Roadmaps
Recommended Observing Strategies
Example Science Programs
Duplication Checking
Proposing Tools
Exposure Time Calculator
Astronomer's Proposal Tool
Other Tools
Data
4
Data
Getting Started with JWST Data
Understanding Data Files
Obtaining Data
Science Calibration Pipeline
Post-Pipeline Data Analysis
Data Calibration Considerations
Additional Resources
JWST for Scientists Website
JWST Observer YouTube Channel
JWST Pocket Guide

Technical Reports
"Read the Docs" (Data Calibration and Analysis)
Mikulski Archives
5
JWST JDox Latest Updates
Recently updated JDox articles are listed below.
Updated 01 May 2022
Article Updated Update description

on
NIRSpec Target 21-Apr-22 Added section on MSATA considerations for crowded fields
Acquisition
Recommended
Strategies
NIRSpec MOS 21-Apr-22 Moved discussion of MSATA in crowded fields to the NIRSpec target
Recommended acquisition strategies article.
Strategies
NIRSpec MPT - 19-Apr-22 Catalog update instructions moved to new article MOS and MSATA Program
Catalogs Updates.
NIRSpec MSA 19-Apr-22 Content about MSA Program Updates moved to new article on the topic.
Target Acquisition
JWST Multi-Object 19-Apr-22 Added steps to the roadmap for MOS program updates (contaminant
Spectroscopy checking and catalog updates). Also added advice about keeping MPT plans
Roadmap and original catalog.
NIRSpec MOS 19-Apr-22 Clarified what is meant by pre-imaging to include images other than
Operations - Pre- NIRCam
Imaging Using
NIRCam
NIRSpec MSA 14-Apr-22 Warning added to tell users that this tool is no longer actively supported.
Spectral
Visualization Tool
Help
JWST Data Absolute 28-Feb-22 Updated contents to reflect changes by Mullally et al. (2022) and Gordon et
Flux Calibration al. (2022)
NIRCam WFSS Field 28-Feb-22 Aladin visualizations of FOVs added in APT 2021.2
of View
6
NIRCam Wide Field 28-Feb-22 Updated to be consistent with APT 2022.1
Slitless
Spectroscopy APT
Template
MIRI Imaging 24-Feb-22 Added Figure 2 to show that the Lyot FOV is valid data for imaging
JWST ETC 24-Feb-22 Added configuration dictionary examples

Instrument
Throughputs
JWST Guide Stars 24-Feb-22 Removed outdated text section and Figure on visualizing guide stars.
NIRCam 24-Feb-22 Clarified that all 4 SW detectors return science data when using SUBARRAY
Coronagraphic FULL. Astrometric confirmation images always use SUBARRAY FULL and
Imaging APT return data in 4 SW detectors or 1 LW detector, superseding the update
Template below.
APT Special 23-Feb-22 Background Limited section updated to use percentiles for consistency with
Requirements ETC.
Pandeia Batch Mode 18-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.
Pandeia 18-Feb-22 Updated examples and list for ETC 1.7.

Configuration
Dictionaries
Pandeia Reports 18-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.
Pandeia Quickstart 18-Feb-22 Updated examples for ETC 1.7.
APT Visit Planner 17-Feb-22 Updated Fig. 1 and minor text clarifications.
Constraints
Moving Target ETC 15-Feb-22 Updated text on ETC template spectra.

Instructions
Moving Target 15-Feb-22 Updated JWST orbit text for post-launch and replaced images to show the
Ephemerides new JPL/Horizons UI.
JWST ETC Source 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

Spectral Energy
Distributions
JWST ETC 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

Coronagraphy
Strategy
7
JWST ETC MSA 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.
Aperture
Photometry
Strategy
JWST ETC Images 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

and Plots
JWST ETC NIRSpec 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

Target Acquisition
JWST ETC Defining 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

a New Source
JWST ETC MSA Full 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

Shutter Extraction
Strategy
JWST ETC MSA 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

Shutter Photometry
Strategy
JWST ETC Time- 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

Series Modes
JWST Observing 25-Jan-22 Minor updates for clarification.

Overheads and
Time Accounting
Overview
MIRI Imaging 20-Jan-22 Changed FAST to FASTR1 and SLOW to SLOWR1

Recommended
Strategies
Latest updates 01 May 2022
Originally published 11 Oct 2021
8
About JDox
JWST User Documentation, informally known as "JDox," is intended as an agile, user-friendly source of
information inspired by the Wikipedia style. Its goal is to provide short, focused, well-linked articles about the
observatory and instruments, tools for proposing, advice on observing strategies, roadmaps for the proposal
preparation process, and JWST data calibration and analysis.
Additional linked documentation
Proposal Parameters
In addition to JDox User Documentation, a related collection of articles called Proposal Parameters contain
technical documentation on legal values for each "field" (parameter) in the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT).
These articles are not designed as a primary reference and not displayed on the left-hand navigation sidebar of
the JDox site. However, some links in JDox may point to a Proposal Parameters article. If the article you are
viewing is in the Proposal Parameters area, the left-hand sidebar will look different and the background color will
change. Use the JDox Home button to return to the primary JDox User Documentation area.
Read the Docs

Articles in the Data section of JDox provide high level information about JWST data calibration and analysis. Many
JDox Data articles, especially in the JWST science calibration pipeline section, contain links to detailed technical
documentation maintained in Readthedocs. Again, the appearance of these page and presence of a different
sidebar will alert users that they are in this different documentation area. Use your browser's back arrow to
return the the main JDox User Documentation site.
How to cite JDox
To cite the JWST User Documentation Website:
In-text ref.: (JWST User Documentation, 2016-)
End reference: JWST User Documentation (JDox). Baltimore, MD: Space Telescope Science Institute; 2016-
[access date in year month day]. https://jwst-docs.stsci.edu
For citation formats including BibTeX, AASTeX, MNRAS, Icarus, and XML, use the Astrophysics Data System
(ADS) Export Citation selection from the left side menu within ADS: https://ui.adsabs.harvard.edu/abs
/2016jdox.rept....../abstract
JDox content contributors

9
JDox content contributors
S. Alberts, C. Alves de Oliveira, T. Beck, S. Birkmann, B. Blacker, W. Blair, T. Böeker, M. L. Boyer, G. Brammer, B.
Brooks, R. Brown, H. Bushouse, A. Canipe, L. Chambers, C. Chen, D. Coe, M. Correnti, M. Cracraft, A. Deshpande,
R. Diaz, R. Downes, N. Earl, N. Espinoza, H. Ferguson, P. Ferruit, J. Filippazzo, P. Forshay, O. Fox, J. Fraine, A.
Fullerton, M. Garcia Marin, M. Gennaro, G. Giardino, K. Gilbert, J. Girard, S. Gonzaga, K. Gordon, C. Gosmeyer, P.
Goudfrooij, T. Greene, B. Hagan, J. Hargis, R. Hawkins, A. Henry, B. Hilbert, D. Hines, S. Holfeltz, B. Holler, J.
Hunkeler, G. Kanarek, D. Karakla, S. Kassin, S. Kendrew, T. Keyes, A. Koekemoer, S. La Massa, D. Law, J. Lee, P-
L Lim, J. Leisenring, J. Lotz, N. Lützgendorf , C. Martlin, J. V. Medina, L. McCuen, S. Milam, T. Morishita, A. Moro-
Martin, K. Murray, J. Muzerolle, S. Neff, E. Nelan, B. Nickson, M. Oboryshko, P. Ogle, S. Osborne, C. Pavlovsky, M.
Pena-Guerrero, M. Perrin, K. Peterson, N. Pirzkal, K. Pontoppidan, C. Proffitt, E. Puga, L. Pueyo, S. Ravindranath,
T. Rawle, I. N. Reid, M. Ressler, A. Riedel, G. Rieke, M. Rieke, J. Rigby, C. Ritchie, M. Robberto, S. Rose, J.
Sahlmann, B. Sargent, E. Schlawin, R. Shaw, M. Sirianni, A. Sivaramakrishnan, G. Sloan, D. Soderblom, G.
Sonneborn, J. Stansberry, K. Stevenson, L. Strolger, T. Temim, D. Thatte, L. Ubeda, J. Valenti, K. Volk, G.
Wahlgren, B. Williams, C. Willmer, E. Wislowski, B. York
JDox Project Team

JDox Project Lead
Alaina Henry
Ori Fox (previous)
Jennifer Lotz (previous)
JDox Deputy Project Lead

Shireen Gonzaga
Stephanie La Massa (previous)
Dan Coe (previous)
Dave Soderblom (previous)
JWST User Support Project Scientist

William Blair
JDox IT Technologists
Paul Mulgrew
Matthew Bonnitt
Hsing-Ying Liu
Stacy Smith
JDox Content and Technical Editors

Shireen Gonzaga (lead)
Susan Rose (retired)
10
JDox NASA Reviewers
Susan Neff
Jane Rigby
George Sonneborn (previous)
Latest updates
11 Oct 2021
Originally published 01 Feb 2018
11
JWST User Video Tutorials
Video tutorials are available on many topics related to JWST proposal preparation and JWST data reduction and
analysis.
These videos are available on the JWST Observer YouTube Channel and other STScI websites.
Two JDox articles, listed below, are available to help you navigate to these resources.
Proposal Planning Video Tutorials
This articles includes links to videos on using APT, ETC, and NIRSpec tools.
JWST Data Pipeline and Analysis Video Tutorials
This article provides guidance on accessing JWebbinar videos, that cover issues in data reduction and analysis,
at the JWST Observer YouTube Channel and the JWST Observer JWebbinar webpage.
Latest updates
12
JWST Proposal Handbook PDFs
The official—and most up-to-date—JWST user documentation are available in the webpage articles on
this website.
Downloadable PDF collections of the documentation are provided below as a courtesy, made available
and updated when feasible.
Updated October 29, 2020
The PDF documents listed below were created on October 29, 2020. They include all updates to article between
January 23, 2020 and October 22, 2020.
Cycle 1 Call for Proposals
Proposal Preparation Handbook
Proposing Tools Handbook
MIRI Handbook
NIRCam Handbook
NIRISS Handbook
NIRSpec Handbook
Data Calibration and Analysis Handbook
Released January 23, 2020
The PDF documents listed below represent the state of JDox on January 23, 2020.
Cycle 1 Call for Proposals
Proposal Preparation Handbook
Proposing Tools Handbook
MIRI Handbook
NIRCam Handbook
13
NIRISS Handbook
NIRSpec Handbook
Data Calibration and Analysis Handbook
Latest updates
29 Oct 2020
Added new set of PDF documents
Originally published 23 Jan 2020
14
JWST Help Desk
If you have questions, please contact us via the JWST Help Desk:
jwsthelp.stsci.edu
This web portal powered by ServiceNow offers features including:
Announcements on the front page

Knowledge Base articles addressing frequently asked questions
Search bar for JDox and Knowledge Base articles
Cards to submit your question directly to the appropriate experts
One-stop access to all your submitted questions
Any user unable to access ServiceNow should please e-mail us at helpsn(at)stsci.edu for assistance.
15
Figure 1. JWST Help Desk web portal
The front page of the JWST Help Desk offers a search bar and links to a Knowledge Base, help topics, announcements, and more.
Latest updates
Originally published 13 Dec 2019
16
JWST Acronyms and Abbreviations
A reference list of acronyms and abbreviations used in JWST user documentation is provided in this article.
Also, the University of Arizona NIRCam team have provided a more extensive project-wide listing of JWST
acronyms that you may find useful. (This link goes outside the JWST documentation site.)
Updates to this listing will be republished periodically as new articles/acronyms are added.
Item Description
2MASS Two Micron All-Sky Survey
4QPM 4-quadrant phase mask (also FQPM)
4QPMC 4-quadrant phase mask coronagraph
AA Associate Administrator
AC Association Candidate
ACS Context sensitive:
Hubble Space Telescope Advanced Camera for Surveys, or
JWST attitude control subsystem
AD Attempt Duration
ADI/ADIS Angular Differential Imaging/ADI Strategy
ADU analog-to-digital units
AGB Asymptotic Giant Branch
AGN active galactic nuclei
ALMA Atacama Large Millimeter/submillimeter Array
AMI aperture masking interferometry
AO adaptive optics
APA aperture position angle (also PA)
APT Astronomer's Proposal Tool
17
AR anti-reflective
ASDF Advanced Scientific Data Format
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AU Astronomical Unit
APO Anamorphic Pre Optics
BB Blackbody
BF Blocking Filter
BMG Background Model Generator
BOTA bright object target acquisition
BOTS bright object time series
C contrast (used in high contrast imaging discussions)
C&DH Command & Data Handling
CAA Calibration Assembly (NIRSpec)
CANDELS Cosmic Assembly Near-Infrared Deep Extragalactic Legacy Survey
CANUCS Canadian NIRISS Unbiased Cluster Survey
CCD charge-coupled device
CDBS Calibration Database System
CDS correlated double sampling
CFM coarse focus mechanism
CHM constrained heat map
COBE Cosmic Background Explorer
CoI co-investigator
COLL Collimator Optics
COM coronagraphic optical mount
CSA Canadian Space Agency
18
CSV Comma separated variable
CVT Coronagraphic Visibility Tool
CVZ Continuous Viewing Zone
CV3 cryo-vacuum test #3
DBS dichroic beam splitter
DCL Detector Characterization Laboratory
DD-ERS director’s discretionary early release science (see also ERS)
DDT director's discretionary time
Dec/DEC declination
DHS dispersed Hartman sensing
DMS/DMSWG Data Management System/Data Management System Working Group
DN digital number
DP Discovery Portal
DPA Double Prism Assembly
DRM Design Reference Mission
DSFG Dusty Star Forming Galaxies
DSN Deep Space Network
DSS Digital Sky Survey
EE Encircled Energy
EGS Extended Groth Strip
ELG Emission Line Galaxy
EOG Extreme Outer Galaxy
EPPO Every Page is Page One
19
ERS early release science (see also DD-ERS)
ESA European Space Agency
ETC Exposure Time Calculator
FC failed closed
FDF Fight Dynamics Facility
FGS Fine Guidance Sensor
FFA full-frame astrometry
FITS Flexible Image Transport System
FO failed open
FOR field of regard
FOT Flight Operations Team
FOV field of view
FP Failure Probability
FPA focal plane array
FPE Focal Plane Electronics
FQPM 4-quadrant phase mask (also 4QPM)
FRC Financial Review Committee
FRD focal ratio degradation
FS fixed slit
FSW FGS Flight Software
FSM fine steering mirror
FW filter wheel
FWA filter wheel assembly
FWHM full width at half maximum
20
GO general observer
GOODS Great Observatories Origins Deep Survey
GS guide star
GSC Guide Star Catalog
GSFC Goddard Space Flight Center
GSC2.3 Guide Star Catalog 2.3
GSMF Galaxy Stellar Mass Function
GSSS Guide Star Selection System
GTO guaranteed time observer
GTVT General Target Visibility Tool
GUI graphical user interface
GWA grating wheel assembly
H2RG HAWAII 2RG Astronomical Wide Area Infrared Imager
HCI high-contrast imaging
HDU Header data unit
HFF Hubble Frontier Field
HGA high gain antenna
HgCdTe mercury-cadmium-telluride
HLA Hubble Legacy Archive
HSC Hubble Source Catalog
HST Hubble Space Telescope (a.k.a. Hubble)
HUDF Hubble Ultra-Deep Field
HWHM half width at half maximum
IBC impurity-band conduction
21
ICDH ISIM Command and Data Handling
ICE Instrument Control Electronics
ICRS International Celestial Reference System
IDS Interdisciplinary Scientist
IDT Instrument Development Team
IEC ISIM Electronics Compartment
IFS integral field spectroscopy (or spectrograph)
IFU integral field unit
IMF initial mass function
IPAC Infrared Processing and Analysis Center
IPC Inter-pixel capacitance
IPR internal phase retrieval
IPS Intra-pixel Sensitivity
IRAC Infrared Array Camera (Spitzer)
IRC Infrared Camera
IRS Infrared Spectrograph
IRS2 improved reference sampling and subtraction
IS Instrument Scientist
ISIM Integrated Science Instrument Module
ISM Interstellar Medium
IWA inner working angle
JADES JWST Advanced Extragalactic Survey
JBT JWST Background Tool
JDox JWST user documentation (shorthand)
JIST JWST Interactive Sensitivity Tool
22
JPL Jet Propulsion Laboratory
JWST James Webb Space Telescope
KLIP Karhunen-Lo`eve image projection
L2 Lagrange point #2, specifically Sun-Earth L2, about which JWST orbits
LAE Lyman Alpha Emitter
LAP Limited Access Parameters
LED light emitting diode
LOCI locally optimized combination of images
LOS Line of Sight
LRP Long Range Plan
LRS low resolution spectroscopy (or spectrograph)
LSF Line Spread Function
LT Light Traps
LW long wavelength
LWC long wavelength channel
LyC Lyot coronagraph
MAST Mikulski Archive for Space Telescopes
MCAO multi-conjugate adaptive optics
MCE Micro shutter Control Electronics
MGA Medium Gain Antenna
MIMF Multi-Instrument Multi-Field
MIPS Multiband Imaging Photometer for Spitzer
MIR MIRI
23
MIRI Mid-Infrared Instrument
MIRIM MIRI imager
MOCD Mission Operations Concept Document
MOS multi-object spectroscopy (or spectrograph)
MOSViz Multiobject Spectrometer Visualization Tool
MPC Minor Planet Center
MPPT NIRSpec MOS pre-image planning tool
MPT NIRSpec MSA Planning Tool
MRDP Minimum Recommended Data Products
MRE mono-propellant rocket engine
MRP Minimum Recommended Products
MRS medium resolution spectroscopy (or spectrograph)
MSA micro-shutter assembly
MTVT Moving Target Visibility Tool
MU Momentum Unload
NASA National Aeronautics and Space Administration
NAVO NASA Astronomical Virtual Observatory
NCP North Celestial Pole
ND neutral density
NEA noise equivalent angle/Near Earth Asteroid
NEATM Near Earth Asteroid Thermal Model
NED NASA/IPAC Extragalactic Database
NEO near-Earth object
NEP North Ecliptic Pole
NGST Next Generation Space Telescope
24
Northrop Grumman Space Technologies
NIRCam Near Infrared Camera
NIRISS Near Infrared Imager and Slitless Spectrograph
NIRSpec Near Infrared Spectrograph
NIS NIRISS
NLR Narrow Line Region
NOI Notice of Intent
NOVT NIRSpec Observation Visualization Tool
NRC NIRCam
NRM non-redundant mask
NRS NIRSpec
NSF National Science Foundation
OPD Optical Path Difference
OPE Observation Plan Executive
OSF Observatory Status File
OSS Onboard Script Subsystem
OTE Optical Telescope Element
OTIS Optical Telescope element/Integrated Science instrument module
PA position angle (also APA)
PAPPA pupil alignment pinhole projector assembly
PAR pupil alignment reference
PC Program Coordinator
PCA Principal Component Analysis
PCE photon conversion efficiency
25
PCG Proposal Constraint Generator
PCR Proposal Change Request
PCS pointing control system
PDF portable document format
PI principal investigator
PIL pupil imaging lens
PMS Pre-main sequence
PN Planetary Nebula
POM pick-off mirror
POSS Palomar Observatory Sky Survey
PPC Post Pixel Coupling
PPS Proposal Planning Subsystem
PRD Project Reference Database
PSF point-spread function
PTC Photon Transfer Curve
PW pupil wheel
PV Pointing Verification
QE quantum efficiency
QY quantum yield
RA right ascension
RAL Rutherford Appleton Laboratory
RDI Referenced Differential Imaging
RMA refocus mechanism assembly
RMS root mean square
26
ROI region of interest
RPS Ram pressure stripping
RQE relative quantum efficiency
RSS reference-star strategy
RVS Raytheon Vision Systems
s apparent separation
SAM small-angle maneuver
SCA sensor chip assembly
SCP South Celestial Pole
SCAT Secondary Combustion Augmented Thruster
SCS simple cone search
SD Slew Duration
SDP Science Data Processing
SDSS Sloan Digital Sky Survey
SED Spectral Energy Distribution
SGD small grid dither (or dithering)
SGDS small grid dither strategy
Si:Ar arsenic-doped silicon
SIAF Science Instrument Aperture File
SIAP Simple Image Access Protocol
SIDECAR ASIC System for Image Digitization, Enhancement, Control, and Retrieval Application-Specific
Integrated Circuit
SIMBAD Set of Identifications, Measurements and Bibliography for Astronomical Data
SMD NASA Science Mission Directorate
SMO Spectrometer Main Optics
SNR signal-to-noise ratio (also S/N)
27
SPO Spectrometer Pre-optics
SODRM Science Operations Design Reference Mission
SOSS single object slitless spectroscopy
SPO Spectrometer pre-optics
SR special requirement
SSAP Simple Spectral Access Protocol
SSR Solid State Recorder
SSS Same Scheduling Set
STM Standard Thermal Model
STScI Space Telescope Science Institute
SW short wavelength
SWC short wavelength channel
SWG Science Working Group
TA target acquisition
TAC time allocation committee
TAP Table Access Protocol
TDF time domain field
TFI Tunable Filter Imager
TMA three mirror assembly
ToO/TOO target of opportunity
TPS Target Pointing Specification
TSO time-series observation
TSV Tab separated variable
TTRB Telescope Time Review Board
TVT target visibility tool(s)
28
UDF Uktra Deep Field
UT Universal Time
V3PA position angle of the JWST Observatory V3 reference axis
VAS variable aperture system
VO Virtual Observatory
VOT Virtual Observatory Table
VP visit planner
WATA Wide Aperture Target Acquisition
WCS world coordinate system
WFC Wide Field Channel
WFC3 Wide Field Camera 3 (HST)
WFE wave front error
WFS&C wave front sensing & control (also WS&C)
WFSS wide field slitless spectroscopy
WISE Wide-field Infrared Survey Explorer mission
WL weak lens
WOPR Webb Operations Problem Report
WS&C wavefront sensing & control (also WFS&C)
YSO Young Stellar Object
29
Latest updates
06 Jul 2020
Updated Link to U Az acronyms site.
11 Dec 2019
Updated for 2020 Cycle 1.
Originally published 12 May 2017
30
JWST Near Infrared Camera
The JWST Near Infrared Camera (NIRCam) offers imaging, coronagraphy, and grism slitless spectroscopy from
0.6 to 5.0 μm, as well as wavefront sensing measurements for JWST mirror alignment.
31
On this page
Observational capabilities
Field of view
Modules
Channels
Optical elements
Filters
Detectors
Sensitivity
Saturation
Data calibration and analysis
External NIRCam links and documents
Lectures
Acknowledgements
References
The JWST Near Infrared Camera (NIRCam) observes from 0.6 to 5.0 μm and offers imaging, coronagraphy, and
grism slitless spectroscopy. NIRCam has 2 modules pointing to adjacent fields of view. Each module uses a
dichroic to observe simultaneously in a short wavelength channel (0.6–2.3 μm) and a long wavelength channel
(2.4–5.0 μm).
NIRCam has 5 observing modes for science:
Imaging of two 2.2' × 2.2' fields separated by 44" covering 9.7 arcmin² in total
Coronagraphic imaging at multiple wavelengths
Wide field slitless spectroscopy (2.4–5.0 µm) using grisms with resolving power
R = λ/Δλ ~ 1,600 at 4 µm
Time-series imaging (photometric monitoring)

Grism time series (spectroscopic monitoring)
32
NIRCam will also obtain wavefront sensing measurements used to align and phase JWST's primary mirror.
33
Figure 1. NIRCam field of view in the JWST focal plane
Observational capabilities
Each observing mode offers distinct capabilities and uses a subset of the optical elements available in the pupil
and filter wheels.
Table 1. NIRCam observing mode parameters
34
Observing mode Wavelength Field of view§ Pixel Notes
coverage scale
(µm) (arcsec/pix)
Imaging 0.6–2.3 2 × 132" × 132" 0.031 FWHM 2 pix

(44" and 5" gaps) at 2.0 µm
2.4–5.0 2 × 129" × 129" 0.063 FWHM 2 pix

(48" gap) at 4.0 µm
Coronagraphic 1.8–2.2 20" × 20" 0.031

imaging 2.8–5.0 0.063
Wide field 2.4–5.0 2 × 129" × 129" 0.063 R ~ 1,600 at 4 µm

slitless spectroscopy
Time-series imaging 0.6–2.3 129" × 129" 0.031

2.4–5.0 132" × 132" 0.063
Grism time series 2.4–5.0 129" × 129" 0.063 R ~ 1,600 at 4 µm
§
Smaller fields of view are available using subarrays in the imaging, time series imaging, and grism time-series
modes.
Field of view
35
Figure 2. NIRCam modules field of view
The 2 NIRCam modules image a 5.1' × 2.2' field of view with a central gap of 44"—the 2 adjacent 2.2' × 2.2' fields cover 9.7 arcmin² in
total. The coronagraphs obtain images in regions of the sky outside the imaging/grism field of view. These are projected onto the detectors
by optical wedges located on the pupil plane Lyot stops. Currently, NIRCam coronagraphy is limited to Module A only.
Modules
NIRCam consists of 2 redundant modules—A and B—with identical optical elements and nearly identical
throughput. The NIRCam observing modes include options to use either a single module or both simultaneously
with identical integration times, readout patterns, and filters.
Channels
Each module includes a short (0.6–2.3 µm) and long (2.4–5.0 µm) wavelength channel. NIRCam uses a dichroic
to observe at both wavelengths simultaneously in roughly the same field of view.
Table 2. Properties of short and long wavelength channels
36
Short wavelength channels Long wavelength channels
Wavelength range 0.6–2.3 μm 2.4–5.0 μm
Fields of view 2 × 2.2' × 2.2' (with 4"–5” gaps) 2 × 2.2' × 2.2'
Pixels† 8 × 2040 × 2040 pixels 2 × 2040 × 2040 pixels
Pixel scale 0.031"/pixel 0.063″/pixel
PSF FWHM‡ 0.064" @ 2μm (Nyquist) 0.13" @ 4 μm (Nyquist)
Grism slitless spectroscopy N/A R ~ 1600 at 4 μm
Coronagraphic occulting masks round: 2.1 μm round: 3.35, 4.3 μm
bar: 1.8–2.2 μm bar: 2.5–5.0 μm
†
Not including reference pixels insensitive to light that are 4 pixels along each outer edge.
‡
PSF undersampled at lower wavelengths; slightly broader for coronagraphy.
Optical elements
Each channel includes a pupil wheel and a filter wheel, each with 12 optical elements, which may be used in
various combinations. These elements include:
Filters with extra-wide, wide, medium and narrow passbands;

Coronagraphic Lyot stops to suppress light that passes the occulting masks;
Grism elements for slitless spectroscopy in the long wavelength channel;
Weak lenses to defocus light from bright sources to avoid detector saturation, also used for the telescope
alignment.
Within each module, light may (optionally) be passed through a coronagraphic occulting mask (in the focal
plane) before being divided by the dichroic beam splitter to the short and long wavelength channels.
37
Figure 3. NIRCam pupil and filter wheels
The NIRCam pupil and filter wheels contain a total of 48 optical elements. Filters are color-coded by wavelength. Wider filters in the
figure appear more transparent than narrower filters.
Filters
The 29 NIRCam filters have names "Fnnnx" where "nnn" refers to the central wavelength (e.g., 220 for 2.20 µm)
and "x" refers to the filter width: "W2" for extra-wide (R ~ 1), "W" for wide (R ~ 4), "M" for medium (R ~ 10) and
"N" for narrowband (R ~ 100).
38
Figure 4. NIRCam and JWST optical telescope element (OTE) filter throughputs
NIRCam and JWST Optical Telescope Element (OTE) filter throughputs (version 4.0: April 22, 2016). The vertical gray bar marks the
approximate dichroic cutoff between the short and long wavelength channels. Filters marked "P" are located in the pupil wheel,
requiring transmission through a second filter in the filter wheel, either F150W2, F322W2, or F444W. In those cases, the combined
transmissions are plotted.
Detectors
NIRCam has 10 Teledyne HgCdTe H2RG detectors, or sensor chip assemblies (SCAs), each with 2040 × 2040
pixels sensitive to light. Eight short wavelength detectors cover roughly the same area on the sky as the 2 long-
wavelength detectors. In full frame imaging mode, all 10 detectors are read out non-destructively every 10.74 s.
The smallest supported science subarray (64 × 64 pixels) can be read out in 49 ms (the shortest exposure time).
Sensitivity
39
In a 10 ks image, NIRCam will obtain S/N = 10 detections of point sources as faint as ~10 nJy (AB mag 28.9) in
some filters, and S/N = 5 detections of 5 nJy (AB mag 29.65) point sources. See NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity and
NIRCam Sensitivity.
Please use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) for the most up-to-date sensitivity estimates for specific proposed
observations. See the NIRCam Sensitivity page for more information.
40
Figure 5. NIRCam sensitivity for imaging
Sensitivity is shown as S/N = 10 detection limits for point sources in a 10 ks image (comprised of 10 exposures, 1 ks each). The sources are
assumed to have flat spectra in nJy (and AB magnitudes). Zodiacal light is assumed to be 1.2 times the minimum. Filter widths are shown
as horizontal bars. Extra-wide/wide, medium, and narrow filters are labeled in normal, bold, and italic text, respectively each with
progressively thicker bars. Please use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to calculate sensitivity estimates for your specific proposed
observations.
Saturation
NIRCam's brightest saturation limits are achieved in the time-series observing modes. Weak lenses (at short
wavelengths) and grisms (at long wavelengths) spread the bright light over more detector pixels. Subarrays
allow for shorter readout times. Stars observable without saturation (80% full well) include those visible to the
unaided eye: ~5th magnitude or brighter, depending on the observing mode, wavelength, and configuration.
Approximate saturation limits are given in the time-series imaging and grism time-series pages. Please use
the ETC to calculate saturation estimates for your proposed observations.
Data calibration and analysis

Information about calibration is available in the JWST Data Calibration Considerations article. This article and its
links point to content about absolute astrometric, flux, and wavelength calibration, as well as information on
calibration reference files.
41
Details about the data can be found in the Understanding JWST Data Files article. The JWST calibration pipeline is
described in both the JWST Science Calibration Pipeline Overview article and the official software documentation.
More information about post-pipeline processing can be found in the JWST Post-Pipeline Data Analysis article.
External NIRCam links and documents

STScI NIRCam website
University of Arizona NIRCam website
NASA NIRCam site
Lectures
JWST Community Lecture Series - NIRCam: Your Next Near-Infrared Camera (M. Rieke)
Acknowledgements
NIRCam was built by a team at the University of Arizona (UofA) and Lockheed Martin's Advanced Technology
Center, led by Prof. Marcia Rieke at UoA.
References
Rieke, M. et al. 2005, SPIE, 5904, 1
Overview of James Webb Space Telescope and NIRCam's Role
Rieke, M. et al. 2003, SPIE, 4850, 478

NGST NIRCam Scientific Program and Design Concept
Beichman, C. et al. 2012, SPIE, 8442, 2

Science opportunities with the near-IR camera (NIRCam) on the James Webb Space Telescope (JWST)
NIRCam Papers from the August 2005 SPIE meeting
NIRCam Technical Documents
42
Latest updates
17 Dec 2019
Merged this page with NIRCam Overview
16 Jan 2017
Updated grism resolution
13 Jul 2017
Updated pixel scale values.
43
NIRCam Observing Modes
JWST Near Infrared Camera (NIRCam) has 5 observing modes: imaging, coronagraphy, grism wide field slitless
spectroscopy, time-series imaging, and grism time series.
NIRCam's 5 observing modes for science, from 0.6 to 5.0 µm, have corresponding templates in the Astronomer's
Proposal Tool (APT):
Imaging of two 2.2' × 2.2' fields separated by 44" covering 9.7 arcmin² in total
Coronagraphic imaging using focal plane occulting masks and pupil plane Lyot stops

Wide field slitless spectroscopy (2.4–5.0 µm) using R = λ/Δλ ~ 1,600 (at 4 µm) grisms

Simultaneous observations of the same field of view are available in the short wavelength channel (0.6–2.3 µm)
and long wavelength channel (2.4–5.0 µm).
Table 1. Properties of NIRCam observing modes
Observing mode Wavelength Field of view§ Pixel Notes

coverage scale
(µm) (arcsec/pix)
Imaging 0.6–2.3 2 × 132" × 132" 0.031 FWHM 2 pix

(44" and 5" gaps) at 2.0 µm
2.4–5.0 2 × 129" × 129" 0.063 FWHM 2 pix

(48" gap) at 4.0 µm
Coronagraphic 1.8–2.2 20" × 20" 0.031

imaging 2.8–5.0 0.063
Wide field 2.4–5.0 2 × 129" × 129" 0.063 R ~ 1,600 at 4 µm

slitless spectroscopy
Time-series imaging 0.6–2.3 129" × 129" 0.031

2.4–5.0 132" × 132" 0.063
Grism time series 2.4–5.0 129" × 129" 0.063 R ~ 1,600 at 4 µm
§
Smaller fields of view are available using subarrays in the imaging, time series imaging, and grism time-series
modes.
44
Latest updates
16 Jan 2018
13 Jul 2017
Updated pixel scale values
45
NIRCam Imaging
JWST NIRCam imaging is obtained at 0.6–2.3 μm (0.031 "/pix) and 2.4–5.0 μm (0.063 "/pix) simultaneously over a
9.7 arcmin² field of view.
On this page
Field of view
Filters
Dithering and mosaics
Subarrays
Exposure time
Sensitivity
Saturation
References
See also: NIRCam Imaging APT Template
Imaging is one of NIRCam's observing modes, which also include time-series imaging (rapid monitoring of bright
variable sources) and coronagraphy (high-contrast imaging).
For standard imaging discussed here, NIRCam observes a 9.7 arcmin² field of view simultaneously in a short
wavelength channel (0.6–2.3 µm) and long wavelength channel (2.4–5.0 µm) via a beam splitting dichroic. Extra-
wide, wide, medium, and narrow filters are available.
When creating a NIRCam imaging observation with the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT), the primary options are
the filter, dither pattern, subarray, and exposure time (via the detector readout patterns). One filter is selected
for each wavelength channel.
The Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) allows users to determine the observing parameters required for their
science goals.
Table 1. Properties of NIRCam short and long wavelength channels
46
Short wavelength channel Long wavelength channel
Wavelength range 0.6–2.3 μm 2.4–5.0 μm
Nyquist wavelength† 2.0 μm 4.0 μm
Fields of view 2 × 2.2′ × 2.2′ (with 4"–5” gaps) 2 × 2.2′ × 2.2′
Imaging pixels 8 × 2040 × 2040 pixels 2 × 2040 × 2040 pixels
Pixel scale 0.031 ″/pixel 0.063 ″/pixel
†
PSF FWHM ~ 2 pixels; undersampled at shorter wavelengths
Field of view
NIRCam's 2 modules operate in parallel to observe a 9.7 arcmin² field of view consisting of two 2.2' × 2.2' fields
separated by a ~44" gap. Gaps of ~5" also separate the 4 detectors in each short wavelength module. If full field
imaging is not required, individual modules or smaller subarrays may be used to increase readout speeds and
reduce data volumes. To cover larger areas, mosaics are best obtained in combination with primary dithers.
47
Figure 1. NIRCam imaging fields of view overlaid to scale on an HST mosaic section from CANDELS (via 3DHST)
NIRCam images are, by default, obtained simultaneously with both modules using all 10 detectors at short and long wavelengths.
Filters
Twenty-nine NIRCam filters are available for imaging. They are classified as extra-wide (R ~ 1), wide (R ~ 4),
medium (R ~ 10), and narrow (R ~ 100). One filter is selected for each wavelength channel (one short
wavelength & one long wavelength filter), and both channels are observed simultaneously.
48
Dithering and mosaics
Words in bold italics are also buttons
or parameters in GUI tools. Bold
style represents GUI menus/
panels & data software packages.
Dithering—required for all NIRCam imaging observations except time-series monitoring—obtains multiple
exposures that are slightly offset from one another on the sky. Primary dithers serve to fill image
gaps, compensate for bad pixels, and mitigate flat field uncertainties. Smaller secondary dithers provide subpixel
sampling to improve the resolution of reduced images.
Mosaics are used to image regions of sky larger than the NIRCam field of view. A mosaic consists of a grid of N
× M telescope pointings. Large NIRCam mosaics are best combined with a FULL primary dither pattern.
Subarrays
49
If the full NIRCam field of view is not required for science, smaller subarrays may be read out from the detectors.
Faster readout times for subarrays allow brighter objects to be observed in shorter exposures, avoiding
saturation. Subarrays also deliver lower data volumes than full detector readouts. Users interested in rapid
cadence monitoring of bright, time-variable sources should refer to the time-series imaging observing mode.
Exposure time
NIRCam's exposure time is governed by detector readout patterns.
Note that due to gaps between the detectors, dithered images will have uneven total exposure times (with depth
varying across the image).
The Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) allows users to determine the exposure time required to achieve their
science goals.
Sensitivity
The following sensitivity and saturation estimates are provided as a rough guide. Please use the Exposure Time
Calculator (ETC) for your proposed observations.
NIRCam is capable of detecting very faint sources in imaging mode. Typical 10 ks images in F200W and F322W2
may yield S/N = 10 detections of AB mag 29 (~9 nJy) point sources (and S/N = 5 detections of AB mag 29.75
[4.5 nJy] sources).
50
Figure 3. Approximate sensitivity of all NIRCam filters
Sensitivity is shown as S/N = 10 detection limits for point sources in a 10 ks image (comprised of 10 exposures, 1 ks each). The sources are
assumed to have flat spectra in nJy (and AB magnitudes). Zodiacal light is assumed to be 1.2 times the minimum. Filter widths are shown
as horizontal bars. Extra-wide/wide, medium, and narrow filters are labeled in normal, bold, and italic text, respectively each with
progressively thicker bars. Please use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to calculate sensitivity estimates for your specific proposed
observations.
Saturation
Moderately bright sources (solar type, K-band Vega mag 14–17) will saturate the NIRCam detectors in full field
broadband imaging. Narrower filters enable brighter saturation limits, as shown below. The smallest available
subarray (64 × 64 pixels) brightens these limits by 6 magnitudes. The brightest objects are best studied using
the NIRCam time-series observing modes, which allow the use of weak lenses (at short wavelengths) and grisms
(at long wavelengths) to spread the light over more pixels.
51
Figure 4. Approximate saturation magnitudes in FULL frame imaging mode
Saturation, in magnitudes (Vega K-band), for a solar type G2V star in 21.4 s (based on 2 readouts of the full detector), filling pixel wells to
95% capacity. Brighter saturation limits may be achieved by using subarrays to reduce the exposure time, and/or using time-series
observations with the weak lenses or grism. Filter widths are shown as horizontal bars. Extra-wide/wide, medium, and narrow filters are
labeled in normal, bold, and italic text, respectively each with progressively thicker bars. Please use the ETC to calculate saturation
estimates for your specific proposed observations.
References
Latest updates
04 Dec 2019
Saturation values updated to 95% well depth (ETC v1.5)
13 Jul 2017
Pixel scale values updated
52
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging
JWST's NIRCam offers Lyot coronagraphy with round and bar-shaped occulting masks, yielding high contrasts at
subarcsecond inner working angles in the wavelength range 2–5 µm. Currently, NIRCam coronagraphy is limited
to Module A only.
On this page
Coronagraphic masks
Filters for NIRCam coronagraphic imaging
Field of view
Expected performance
References
See also: NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging APT Template
NIRCam coronagraphy enables high-contrast imaging (HCI), in which the diffracted light of a bright object is
suppressed to reveal much fainter objects nearby. Please refer to JWST High-Contrast Imaging and its child
pages for detailed JWST HCI information.
NIRCam offers 5 coronagraphic masks (occulting masks) in the focal plane and two Lyot stops (apodizing masks)
in the pupil plane. One Lyot stop is used with the round coronagraphic masks, and the other Lyot stop is used
with the bar-shaped coronagraphic masks. The HCI Optics article provides a general summary of JWST's HCI
optics.
Neutral density (ND) squares share the focal plane with the coronagraphic masks, and provide ~7.5 magnitudes
of attenuation (optical density ~3) for target acquisition of bright objects. Fainter objects (K > 12) can be
acquired without using the ND squares.
Coronagraphic masks
NIRCam has 3 round- and two bar-shaped coronagraphic masks for occulting a bright object.
The inner working angle (IWA) is roughly the radial distance from the center of the occulting mask at which the
transmission of the mask rises to 50% of its asymptotic value at the largest apparent separations. IWA is
commonly taken to mean the smallest apparent separation between a bright and a faint object at which the faint
object could be detected.
NIRCam's 3 round coronagraphic masks have IWAs of 0.40″, 0.63″, and 0.81″ (radius), respectively corresponding
to 6λ/D at 2.1, 3.35 and 4.1 μm, where λ is the observed wavelength and D is 6.5 m, the nominal diameter of the
JWST aperture.
53
NIRCam's 2 bar coronagraphic masks are tapered, with IWA varying by a factor of 3 along their lengths.
Compared to the round masks, the bar masks sacrifice some field of view in the direction along the bar as a
function of azimuth around the bright object. During an observation, the bright object is positioned behind the
bar at the location where IWA ~ 4λ/D.
Table 1. NIRCam coronagraphic (occulting) masks
Coronagraphic mask Shape IWA Wavelength range
MASK210R round 0.40″ 1.82–2.12 μm
MASK335R round 0.63″ 3.0–3.56 μm
MASK430R round 0.81″ 4.10–4.60 μm
MASKSWB bar 0.13″–0.40″ 1.7–2.2 μm
MASKLWB bar 0.29″–0.88″ 2.4–5.0 μm
54
Figure 1. NIRCam coronagraphic occulting masks and neutral density squares for target acquisition
The NIRCam module A coronagraphic substrate, which includes bar and round masks for occulting bright objects and 5" × 5" neutral
density squares for target acquisition. The 4 lines of information at the top are (1) nominal wavelength range, (2) nominal wavelength at
which IWA = 4 or 6 /D, (3) mask name, and (4) inner working angle (IWA) HWHM (half width at half maximum). For acquisition of
targets fainter than K = 12, clear squares (ND = 0) are utilized. The clear squares are located between the ND ~ 3 squares. Adapted from
Krist et al. 2010, Figure 2.
Filters for NIRCam coronagraphic imaging

Only a subset of all NIRCam filters is available for NIRCam coronagraphic imaging. The available subset of filters
depends on the selection of the coronagraphic mask, as described in NIRCam Filters for Coronagraphy.
Table 2. NIRCam filters permitted for coronagraphic imaging
55
Coronagraphic mask MASK210R MASK335R MASK430R MASKSWB MASKLWB
Description Small round Medium round Large round Narrow bar Wide bar
Nominal wavelength 2.10 µm 3.35 µm 4.30 µm 2.1 µm 4.6 µm

(s) (center) (center)
1.7–2.2 µm 2.4–5.0 µm
IWA 6 λ/D 6 λ/D 6 λ/D 4 λ/D 4 λ/D

0.40″ (2.1 0.57″ (3.35 0.87″ (4.30 0.23″ (1.82 0.32″ (2.5 µm)
µm) µm) µm) µm) 0.46″ (3.6 µm)
0.25″ (2.00 0.61″ (4.8 µm)
µm)
0.27″ (2.12
µm)
Permitted filters F182M F250M F250M F182M F250M

F187N F300M F300M F187N F277W
F200W F322W2 F322W2 F200W F300M
F210M F335M F335M F210M F335M
F212N F356W F356W F212N F356W
F360M F360M F360M
F410M F410M F410M
F430M F430M F430M
F444W F444W F444W
F460M F460M F460M
F480M F480M F480M
Table note:
For filters in orange, the transmission of the coronagraph optical mount (COM) can have a substantial impact on
the effective wavelength of the observations. For example, the COM transmission increases from 48% at 1.8 µm
to 88% at 1.9 µm.
Throughputs of all filters are available at NIRCam Filters. The coronagraphic optical mount (COM) transmission is
available at NIRCam Filters for Coronagraphy.
56
Figure 2. NIRCam filters available for coronagraphy
Field of view
For each choice of coronagraphic mask, the field of view at the detector is a 20″ × 20″ square centered on the
image of the coronagraphic mask.
57
Figure 3. NIRCam module A coronagraph in the field of view
The NIRCam coronagraph field of view is projected onto the detectors by optical wedges located on the pupil plane Lyot stops. The
imaging region of each coronagraph mask is 20" × 20".
Expected performance
The NIRCam Lyot coronagraphs are expected to detect sufficiently warm Jupiter-type exoplanets, as well as
protostellar, protoplanetary, and debris disks around bright stars. Detectability depends primarily on the contrast
(flux ratio) and apparent separation between the bright host and faint companion (more information is available
at HCI Contrast Considerations). Higher contrast sources are detectable at larger apparent separations.
Detections are improved by observing strategies, such as obtaining multiple observations at different roll angles,
and by data analysis techniques.
Figure 4 shows the estimated limiting contrast performance of the 5 NIRCam coronagraphs, under the technical
and procedural assumptions of Beichman et al. (2010). Companions with contrasts above the curves would be
detectable . (That paper notes the NIRCam coronagraphic performance is limited not by diffraction but rather by
telescope scattering or mirror wavefront errors.)
58
Figure 4. Approximate limiting contrast ratios expected
Approximate limiting contrast ratio, required for 5- detection of a faint companion versus apparent separation from the nearby bright
host. Expectations are shown for each round and bar occulter given subtraction of 2 images obtained at different roll angles (+5° and -5°)
for speckle suppression. A position uncertainty of 10 mas and wavefront error of 10 nm between rolls were assumed. NIRCam should
achieve almost 12 (18) magnitudes of suppression 1" (4") from the central bright object. Adapted from Beichman et al. 2010, Figure 6.
More precise estimates may be obtained using the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC).
References
Beichman, C. et al. 2010, PASP, 122, 888
Imaging Young Giant Planets From Ground and Space
Green, J. et al. 2005, Proc. SPIE 5905, 0L

High contrast imaging with the JWST NIRCAM coronagraph
Krist, J. et al. 2010, Proc. SPIE 7731, 3J

The JWST/NIRCam coronagraph flight occulters
Krist, J. et al. 2009, Proc. SPIE 7440, 0W

The JWST/NIRCam coronagraph: mask design and fabrication
Krist, J. et al. 2007, Proc. SPIE 6693, 0H

Hunting Planets and Observing Disks with the JWST NIRCam Coronagraph
59
Latest updates
25 May 2017
New Figure 2
60
NIRCam Time-Series Observations
JWST NIRCam offers 2 observing modes for precision monitoring of time-variable sources: time-series imaging
and grism time series.
See also: JWST Time-Series Observations, NIRCam Time-Series APT Template, NIRCam Grism Time-Series

APT Template
The NIRCam time-series modes provide stable, repeatable observations of time-variable sources, including stars
that host transiting exoplanets and brown dwarfs. These observations enable high precision, rapid cadence, long
duration measurements of photometric and/or spectroscopic variations over time. The modes are also designed
to accommodate bright sources.
The 2 NIRCam time-series observing modes are:
NIRCam time-series imaging

NIRCam grism time series including slitless spectroscopy at long wavelengths
These modes differ from other NIRCam observing modes in the following ways:
Dithering and mosaics are not allowed (no telescope movements)

Very long exposures (>50 hours in full frame mode, with some interrupts and limitations) consisting of
many integrations (up to 65,535) are possible
Weak lenses to defocus light (in the short wavelength images) are available
In each mode, observations are obtained simultaneously at short and long wavelengths (via the dichroic).
Depending on the mode, a variety of filters (broad-, medium-, and narrowband), weak lenses (at short
wavelengths), and a grism (at long wavelengths) are available.
Table 1. Filters, weak lenses, and a grism available for time-series observations
61
Observing mode Short wavelengths Long wavelengths
(0.6–2.3 µm) (2.4–5.0 µm)
NIRCam time-series imaging Broad-, medium- or narrowband Broad-, medium-, or narrowband filter
filter with or without the weak lens:
WLP8 (+8 waves of defocus†)
NIRCam grism time series Medium- or narrowband Grism R (slitless spectroscopy)

filter always with a weak lens: with a wide filter

-or-
†
Waves of defocus are defined at 2.12 μm. For 8 waves, the PSF width is ~80 times larger.
The simultaneous observations at both wavelengths have identical integration times, exposure times, and
readout patterns. Therefore, elements yielding similar sensitivity and saturation limits should be used for both
wavelengths. For example, imaging may be obtained simultaneously in 2 wide filters (e.g., F150W and F356W) or
2 narrow filters (e.g., F212N and F323N). Weak lens observations at short wavelengths may be paired with
narrowband imaging or grism observations at long wavelengths. Some of these combinations are enforced by
the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT).
Spatial scanning is not available for JWST observations, as it was for HST, to improve saturation limits and
photometric precision. The reason is that JWST slews too slowly (0.03"/s) to compete with the short readout
times of NIRCam's subarrays, which enable bright objects to be observed without saturation. However, weak
lenses and a grism are available to spread light over many pixels to improve photometric precision.
References
Observations of Transiting Exoplanets with the James Webb Space Telescope (JWST)
Greene, T., Chu, L., Hodapp, K. W., et al. 2016, SPIE 99040E
Slitless Spectroscopy with the James Webb Space Telescope Near-Infrared Camera (JWST NIRCam)
62
Latest updates
Originally 29 Dec 2016

published
63
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging
JWST NIRCam's time-series imaging observing mode performs rapid photometric monitoring of bright, time-
variable sources. Weak lenses and subarrays may be used to improve saturation limits.
On this page
Weak lens
Saturation limits
References
See also: NIRCam Time-Series APT Template
The NIRCam time-series imaging mode was designed to enable precise measurements of photometric variations
in relatively bright sources. It is one of 2 modes available for NIRCam time-series observations, the other being
grism time series. These modes provide maximum stability in the observations and electronics. They are
designed to accommodate bright sources. They also allow for very long uninterrupted observations, consisting of
many integrations executed at high cadence and observing efficiency.
Dithers and mosaics are not allowed in this mode. (In standard imaging mode, dithers are required.)
Simultaneous imaging is obtained via a dichroic at short (0.6–2.3 µm) and long (2.4–5.0 µm) wavelengths in
various extra-wide, wide, medium, and narrow NIRCam filters. Exposure times and readout patterns will be
identical at both wavelengths. Therefore, filters with similar sensitivities and saturation limits should be used for
both wavelengths. For example, imaging may be obtained simultaneously in 2 wide filters (e.g., F150W and
F356W) or 2 narrow filters (e.g., F212N and F323N).
Weak lens
The weak lens WLP8 is available in the short wavelength channel to defocus the image of a bright source,
improving the saturation limit by several magnitudes. To improve this limit further, the weak lens may be used in
conjunction with subarrays, which should be 160 × 160 pixels or larger to encompass most of the defocused
image and attain a proper background subtraction.
The weak lens may be paired with select filters between 1.3–2.2 µm. While the weak lens is being used in the
short wavelength channel, long wavelength imaging is restricted to narrowband filters to avoid saturation. (The
long wavelength grism may also be used in the NIRCam grism time-series observing mode.)
Saturation limits
64
Saturation limits
Use of the weak lens (at short wavelengths) in conjunction with the 160 × 160 pixel subarray increases
saturation limits by ~11 magnitudes compared to standard full field imaging. The smallest NIRCam subarray
(64 × 64 pixels; without the weak lens) enables saturation limits ~6 magnitudes brighter than full field imaging
at both short and long wavelengths.
65
Figure 1. Saturation magnitudes for NIRCam filters in a 64 × 64 pixel subarray
Approximate saturation magnitudes (Vega K-band for a solar type G2V star) in the 64 × 64 pixel subarray for a ~0.1 s exposure (2
readouts of the subarray). For time-series imaging, saturation is defined as 70% of the pixel well capacity. Filters are color-coded, with
widths shown as horizontal bars. More precise saturation estimates may be obtained from the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC). Limits ~5
magnitudes brighter than those shown here may be achieved at 1.3–2.2 µm by using the +8-wave weak lens (WLP8) with the 160 × 160
pixel subarray (see Figure 2).
66
Figure 2. Saturation magnitudes for short wavelength NIRCam filters using the WLP8 weak lens with a 160 × 160 pixel subarray
Approximate saturation magnitudes (Vega K-band for a solar type G2V star), using the WLP8 weak lens, with a 160 × 160 pixel subarray
for a ~0.55 s exposure (2 readouts of the subarray). Saturation is defined here as 70% of the pixel well capacity. Filters are color-coded,
with widths shown as horizontal bars. More precise saturation estimates may be obtained from the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC).
References

Observations of Transiting Exoplanets with the James Webb Space Telescope (JWST)
Latest updates
18 Dec 2019
Updated saturation limits to 70% well capacity (ETC v1.5)
67
NIRCam Grism Time Series
JWST NIRCam's grism time-series observing mode performs rapid spectroscopic (R ~ 1,600 at 4µm) monitoring
of bright, time-variable sources at 2.4–5.0 µm.
On this page
Filters
Subarrays and readout times
Dispersion
Saturation limits
References
Filters
Dispersion
Saturation limits
References
See also: NIRCam Grism Time-Series APT Template
The NIRCam grism time-series observing mode is designed to monitor bright, isolated, time-varying
sources at 2.4–5.0 µm with spectroscopic resolving power R ~ 1,600 at 4µm. It is one of 2 modes available for
NIRCam time-series observations (TSO), the other being time-series imaging. Both of these modes allow very
long exposures (>50 hours with some interruptions and limitations) and disallow dithering and mosaics. (A
separate non-TSO grism mode is available for wide field grism observations.)
In grism time-series mode, the module A "grism R" is used to disperse the target's spectrum along (parallel to)
detector rows. The grism is used in conjunction with one of 4 wide filters in the long wavelength channel (2.4–5.0
µm): F277W, F322W2, F356W, and F444W.
Simultaneous short wavelength imaging is obtained with a weak lens to defocus the image. This choice offers
saturation limits similar to the long wavelength grism for a given integration time (which must be identical for
both wavelengths).
Integration times may be shortened for rapid cadence monitoring by using detector subarrays and/or multiple
detector outputs. The shortest integration times enable observations without saturation of some stars visible to
the unaided eye (~5th magnitude).
68
Figure 1. Sample NIRCam Grism R + F444W data
Sample NIRCam Grism R + F444W data, obtained during Integrated Science Instrument Module (ISIM) testing at Goddard. The bright
test source included a CO2 absorption feature at ~4.25 µm. Wavelength increases left to right.
Filters
Table 1. Available combinations of filters, weak lenses, and grism
Short wavelength channel (0.6–2.3 µm) Long wavelength channel (2.4–5.0 µm)
Weak lens offering +8 or +4 waves defocus Grism R plus a wide filter:

combined with a filter among these allowed combinations:
F277W
WLP8 + F070W F322W2
WLP8 + F140M F356W
WLP8 + F182M F444W
WLP8 + F187N
WLP8 + F210M
WLP8 + F212N
WLP4+F212N2†
†
The WLP4 weak lens is joined with a F212N2 narrowband filter with a 2.3% bandpass, to form a single optical
element. (Note that this F212N2 filter is wider than the 1% bandpass F212N filter in the filter wheel that can be
paired with WLP8.)
69
Figure 2. Throughput response for NIRCam grism and long wavelength filters (1st order)
First order throughputs of the module A and B grism and the 4 wide filters (module A is shown, module B is similar) for grism time series,
including all JWST and NIRCam optics and detector quantum efficiencies. The grism throughput must be multiplied with that of a
selected filter (not shown). The module B grisms are AR coated on only one side and therefore have throughputs 33% lower than the
module A grisms.
70
Figure 3. Throughput response for NIRCam grism and long wavelength filters (2nd order)
Second order throughputs of the module A and B grism and the 4 wide filters (module A is shown, module B is similar) for grism time
series, including all JWST and NIRCam optics and detector quantum efficiencies. The grism throughput must be multiplied with that of a
selected filter (not shown).
Grism throughput tables for both modules and for both 1st and 2nd orders can be downloaded here. Note that
these are grism-only throughputs. Filter-only throughputs, can be dowloaded here. To obtain the full system
throughputs, the grism-only throughputs need to be interpolated at the same wavelengths as the filter-only
throughputs and multiplied by the filter-only throughputs.

Bright science targets require short integration times to avoid saturation. To shorten detector readout times, a
subset of the detector rows may be read out (and the rest discarded). These subarrays will contain the entire
spectrum for isolated compact science targets. Module A available subarrays for this mode contain 64, 128, or
256 pixel rows. Each of the subarrays include all 2048 pixel columns (2040 sensitive to light + 8 reference). The
full 2048 × 2048 pixel array may be read out instead if desired.
71
The detector may be read out either through 4 outputs simultaneously (to speed readout and minimize
saturation) or a single output (to reduce the data volume rate). This is the only NIRCam observing mode to offer
this option; other modes always use 4 outputs to read the full detector (and a single output for subarrays). When
4 outputs are chosen, the detector output is split into 4 columns, or "stripes," each 512 pixels wide that are read
simultaneously.
Table 2. Detector read out times for available subarrays and numbers of outputs
Rows Columns Readout time (s) Readout time (s)

(pixels) (pixels) 1 output 4 outputs
2048 2048 42.23000 10.73677
256 2048 5.31480 1.34669
128 2048 2.67800 0.67597
64 2048 1.35960 0.34061
Dispersion
Each spectrum is dispersed by 1 nm/pix. The undeviated wavelength is 3.95 µm.
As shown in Figure 4, for wavelengths below 4 µm (F277W, F322W2, F356W), sources are positioned near the
right of the detector (x = 1581), and the spectra disperse to the left (towards shorter wavelengths). Above 4 µm
(F444W), a different reference position is used (x = 952) because the source disperses to the right (towards
longer wavelengths).
Vertically, the sources are positioned at y = 35 on the long wavelength detectors when using the 64, 128, and
256 subarrays, and at y = 280 when using the full array. At short wavelengths, the defocused images land in the
vertical center of the corresponding subarrays, which traverse two short wave detectors (with a 4″–5″ gap).
72
Figure 4. Grism dispersions within a grism detector subarray
Footprint of the spectra in grism time-series mode. Red boxes indicate the 256 pixels subarray for this mode (to scale). The footprints for
the different filters are spaced vertically for clarity (the actual subarray on the detector is the same for the 4 filters). The reference position
is marked with an X symbol and a vertical dotted line. The reference position corresponds to the location of the undeflected wavelength of
3.95 m, or alternatively would correspond to the direct image position if the grism was not in the beam. Filters F277W, F322W2 and
F356W share the same reference position, while the F444W reference position is shifted to smaller x values in the science reference
frame. The thick portion of the footprint corresponds to wavelengths for which the total throughput is larger than 50% of the maximum
throughput for that setting. The thinner part of the footprint corresponds to wavelengths for which the total throughput is larger than 1%
of the maximum throughput for that setting.
73
Note
The reddest part of the F444W footprint (above 5.03 μm, where the throughput drops below 20% of the
maximum) extends beyond the detector. The loss of data in this low-throughput region is balanced by 2
factors. First, the high throughput portion of the spectrum has more overlap with the corresponding
portions for the other 3 filters. This allows a better characterization of systematics at the subpixel level in
the region in common. Second, this choice of the reference position would allow a larger fraction of the
short wavelength DHS (Dispersed Hartmann Sensor) spectra to land on the SW detector [see Schlawin et
al. 2017]. SW DHS spectroscopy in parallel with LW grism time series is not enabled for cycle 1 but may
be a future upscope of NIRCam capabilities. Maintaining the same reference positions for the LW grism
time series with and without parallel DHS spectroscopy is advantageous as it would provide better
overall LW F444W grism time-series characterization.
Saturation limits
See also: NIRCam Bright Source Limits
Based on preliminary estimates, A-type main sequence stars as bright as K ~ 4.5 (Vega mag) may be observed
with the NIRCam grism without saturating the module A detectors at any wavelength when using the smallest
subarray (2048 × 64 pixels), stripe mode (4 outputs), and a short integration time of 0.68 s (2 reads). Still
brighter stars may be observed at the longest wavelengths, as shown in Figure 5.
74
Figure 5. Grism saturation limits in the 2048 × 64 pixel subarray
Approximate grism saturation limits in K-band Vega magnitudes for 3 stellar types (A0V, G2V, M2V) in the module A 2048 × 64 pixel
subarray with stripe mode readout (4 outputs), assuming a detector reset and 2 reads (0.68 s integration). Results are from the Exposure
Time Calculator (ETC) v1.5. Please use the ETC to obtain saturation limits for your proposed observations.
For larger subarrays and/or a single detector output, the minimum integration times increase, and a K ~ 4.5
Vega mag star would saturate the detector. Table 3 shows approximate saturation limits for the various
subarrays, again assuming 2 detector reads between resets. These limits are given for 2.7 µm, the wavelength
most prone to saturation. F277W and F322W2 observations will experience such saturation. Longer wavelength
observations may observe somewhat brighter stars without saturating. Please consult the Exposure Time
Calculator (ETC).
Table 3. Subarray saturation limits
Rows Columns Approx. saturation limit Approx. saturation limit

(pixels) (pixels) (K Vega mag) (K Vega mag)
1 output 4 outputs
2048 2048 9.8 8.3
256 2048 7.5 6.0
128 2048 6.8 5.3
64 2048 6.0 4.5
References
75
References
Greene, T. et al. 2017, JATIS, 035001
λ = 2.4 to 5 μm spectroscopy with the James Webb Space Telescope Near-Infrared Camera
Schlawin et al. 2017, PASP, 129, 971

Two NIRCam Channels are Better than One: How JWST Can Do More Science with NIRCam’s Short-wavelength
Dispersed Hartmann Sensor
Latest updates
19 Dec 2019
Updated grism saturation limits (ETC v1.5); Table 3 corrected
15 Nov 2019
Corrected frame times for Grism time series Noutputs = 1
25 Sep 2017
Edited information to match recent paper (Greene et al. 2017)
JWST NIRCam's grism time-series observing mode performs rapid spectroscopic (R ~ 1,600 at 4µm) monitoring
of bright, time-variable sources at 2.4–5.0 µm.
On this page
Filters
Dispersion
Saturation limits
References
Filters
Dispersion
Saturation limits
References
76
See also: NIRCam Grism Time-Series APT Template
The NIRCam grism time-series observing mode is designed to monitor bright, isolated, time-varying
sources at 2.4–5.0 µm with spectroscopic resolving power R ~ 1,600 at 4µm. It is one of 2 modes available for
NIRCam time-series observations (TSO), the other being time-series imaging. Both of these modes allow very
long exposures (>50 hours with some interruptions and limitations) and disallow dithering and mosaics. (A
separate non-TSO grism mode is available for wide field grism observations.)
In grism time-series mode, the module A "grism R" is used to disperse the target's spectrum along (parallel to)
detector rows. The grism is used in conjunction with one of 4 wide filters in the long wavelength channel (2.4–5.0
µm): F277W, F322W2, F356W, and F444W.
Simultaneous short wavelength imaging is obtained with a weak lens to defocus the image. This choice offers
saturation limits similar to the long wavelength grism for a given integration time (which must be identical for
both wavelengths).
Integration times may be shortened for rapid cadence monitoring by using detector subarrays and/or multiple
detector outputs. The shortest integration times enable observations without saturation of some stars visible to
the unaided eye (~5th magnitude).
77
Figure 1. Sample NIRCam Grism R + F444W data
Sample NIRCam Grism R + F444W data, obtained during Integrated Science Instrument Module (ISIM) testing at Goddard. The bright
test source included a CO2 absorption feature at ~4.25 µm. Wavelength increases left to right.
Filters
Table 1. Available combinations of filters, weak lenses, and grism
Short wavelength channel (0.6–2.3 µm) Long wavelength channel (2.4–5.0 µm)
Weak lens offering +8 or +4 waves defocus Grism R plus a wide filter:

combined with a filter among these allowed combinations:
F277W
WLP8 + F070W F322W2
WLP8 + F140M F356W
WLP8 + F182M F444W
WLP8 + F187N
WLP8 + F210M
WLP8 + F212N
WLP4+F212N2†
†
The WLP4 weak lens is joined with a F212N2 narrowband filter with a 2.3% bandpass, to form a single optical
element. (Note that this F212N2 filter is wider than the 1% bandpass F212N filter in the filter wheel that can be
paired with WLP8.)
78
Figure 2. Throughput response for NIRCam grism and long wavelength filters (1st order)
First order throughputs of the module A and B grism and the 4 wide filters (module A is shown, module B is similar) for grism time series,
including all JWST and NIRCam optics and detector quantum efficiencies. The grism throughput must be multiplied with that of a
selected filter (not shown). The module B grisms are AR coated on only one side and therefore have throughputs 33% lower than the
module A grisms.
79
Figure 3. Throughput response for NIRCam grism and long wavelength filters (2nd order)
Second order throughputs of the module A and B grism and the 4 wide filters (module A is shown, module B is similar) for grism time
series, including all JWST and NIRCam optics and detector quantum efficiencies. The grism throughput must be multiplied with that of a
selected filter (not shown).

Bright science targets require short integration times to avoid saturation. To shorten detector readout times, a
subset of the detector rows may be read out (and the rest discarded). These subarrays will contain the entire
spectrum for isolated compact science targets. Module A available subarrays for this mode contain 64, 128, or
256 pixel rows. Each of the subarrays include all 2048 pixel columns (2040 sensitive to light + 8 reference). The
full 2048 × 2048 pixel array may be read out instead if desired.
80
The detector may be read out either through 4 outputs simultaneously (to speed readout and minimize
saturation) or a single output (to reduce the data volume rate). This is the only NIRCam observing mode to offer
this option; other modes always use 4 outputs to read the full detector (and a single output for subarrays). When
4 outputs are chosen, the detector output is split into 4 columns, or "stripes," each 512 pixels wide that are read
simultaneously.
Table 2. Detector read out times for available subarrays and numbers of outputs
Rows Columns Readout time (s) Readout time (s)

(pixels) (pixels) 1 output 4 outputs
2048 2048 42.23000 10.73677
256 2048 5.31480 1.34669
128 2048 2.67800 0.67597
64 2048 1.35960 0.34061
Dispersion
Each spectrum is dispersed by 1 nm/pix. The undeviated wavelength is 3.95 µm.
As shown in Figure 4, for wavelengths below 4 µm (F277W, F322W2, F356W), sources are positioned near the
right of the detector (x = 1581), and the spectra disperse to the left (towards shorter wavelengths). Above 4 µm
(F444W), a different reference position is used (x = 952) because the source disperses to the right (towards
longer wavelengths).
Vertically, the sources are positioned at y = 35 on the long wavelength detectors when using the 64, 128, and
256 subarrays, and at y = 280 when using the full array. At short wavelengths, the defocused images land in the
vertical center of the corresponding subarrays, which traverse two short wave detectors (with a 4″–5″ gap).
81
Figure 4. Grism dispersions within a grism detector subarray
Footprint of the spectra in grism time-series mode. Red boxes indicate the 256 pixels subarray for this mode (to scale). The footprints for
the different filters are spaced vertically for clarity (the actual subarray on the detector is the same for the 4 filters). The reference position
is marked with an X symbol and a vertical dotted line. The reference position corresponds to the location of the undeflected wavelength of
3.95 m, or alternatively would correspond to the direct image position if the grism was not in the beam. Filters F277W, F322W2 and
F356W share the same reference position, while the F444W reference position is shifted to smaller x values in the science reference
frame. The thick portion of the footprint corresponds to wavelengths for which the total throughput is larger than 50% of the maximum
throughput for that setting. The thinner part of the footprint corresponds to wavelengths for which the total throughput is larger than 1%
of the maximum throughput for that setting.
82
Note
The reddest part of the F444W footprint (above 5.03 μm, where the throughput drops below 20% of the
maximum) extends beyond the detector. The loss of data in this low-throughput region is balanced by 2
factors. First, the high throughput portion of the spectrum has more overlap with the corresponding
portions for the other 3 filters. This allows a better characterization of systematics at the subpixel level in
the region in common. Second, this choice of the reference position would allow a larger fraction of the
short wavelength DHS (Dispersed Hartmann Sensor) spectra to land on the SW detector [see Schlawin et
al. 2017]. SW DHS spectroscopy in parallel with LW grism time series is not enabled for cycle 1 but may
be a future upscope of NIRCam capabilities. Maintaining the same reference positions for the LW grism
time series with and without parallel DHS spectroscopy is advantageous as it would provide better
overall LW F444W grism time-series characterization.
Saturation limits
Based on preliminary estimates, A-type main sequence stars as bright as K ~ 4.5 (Vega mag) may be observed
with the NIRCam grism without saturating the module A detectors at any wavelength when using the smallest
subarray (2048 × 64 pixels), stripe mode (4 outputs), and a short integration time of 0.68 s (2 reads). Still
brighter stars may be observed at the longest wavelengths, as shown in Figure 5.
83
For larger subarrays and/or a single detector output, the minimum integration times increase, and a K ~ 4.5
Vega mag star would saturate the detector. Table 3 shows approximate saturation limits for the various
subarrays, again assuming 2 detector reads between resets. These limits are given for 2.7 µm, the wavelength
most prone to saturation. F277W and F322W2 observations will experience such saturation. Longer wavelength
observations may observe somewhat brighter stars without saturating. Please consult the Exposure Time
Calculator (ETC).
Table 3. Subarray saturation limits
Rows Columns Approx. saturation limit Approx. saturation limit

(pixels) (pixels) (K Vega mag) (K Vega mag)
1 output 4 outputs
2048 2048 9.8 8.3
256 2048 7.5 6.0
128 2048 6.8 5.3
64 2048 6.0 4.5
References
84
References
Schlawin et al. 2017, PASP, 129, 971

Two NIRCam Channels are Better than One: How JWST Can Do More Science with NIRCam’s Short-wavelength
Dispersed Hartmann Sensor
Latest updates
19 Dec 2019
Updated grism saturation limits (ETC v1.5); Table 3 corrected
15 Nov 2019
25 Sep 2017
Edited information to match recent paper (Greene et al. 2017)
85
NIRCam Wide Field Slitless
Spectroscopy
JWST NIRCam's wide field slitless spectroscopy observing mode uses grisms and filters spanning 2.4–5.0 µm to
obtain R ~ 1,600 at 4 µm spectra of objects in a field of view of up to 9 arcmin².
On this page
Direct imaging
Out-of-field sources
Sensitivity
Background levels
References
See also: NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy APT Template
NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) observations will produce R ~ 1,600 at 4 µm spectra of all
objects within (or just outside) the field of view in the long wavelength channel. Two grisms with perpendicular
dispersion directions are available; use of both can mitigate overlapping spectra. Each grism must be used in
combination with a wide or medium filter (2.4–5.0 µm) and observations with both modules will be obtained with
identical optical elements. Dithers and mosaics will be defined and supported. Short wavelength (SW) imaging
data occurs simultaneously with the long wavelength (LW) grism observations. Saturation in the SW imaging
data is a concern, but can be mitigated by selecting narrower filters or by using a sequence of short integrations.
86
Figure 1a. Simulation of dispersed grism data
Simulated single module NIRCam observations of a section of the GOODS-S ERS field (RA 214.967560°, Dec. 52.932961°). Left:
Simulated 2-hour F356W image based on deep HST mosaics of this field. Right: 2-hour grism R + F356W module B simulation with all
known emission lines in the fields. All spectra were simulated using the information from multiple broadband imaging to determine the
spectral energy distribution of each object individually. Known [OIII] 3729 Å, H 4861 Å, [OIII] 4959 Å, [OIII] 5007 Å, and H 6564 Å
lines of z > 3 sources were added. Wavelength of the dispersed spectra increases from left to right with grism R in module A. The F356W
background has been subtracted from this simulated grism data.
87
Figure 1b. Simulation of dispersed grism data with different cross filters
Simulated single module NIRCam observations of a section of the GOODS-S ERS field. Top panel: full simulations that include estimated
dispersed grism backgrounds. Bottom panel: same as top panel but the backgrounds have been subtracted.
88
Figure 2. Grism dispersion layout
Grism spectra will be dispersed across detector rows (R) or columns (C) as indicated by the large arrows pointing in the direction of
increasing wavelength. Ideal coordinate axes (Xideal, Yideal) are shown in each NIRCam module (A and B). Adapted from Figure 4 of
Greene et al. (2017).
Direct imaging
Direct imaging with the long wavelength channel is necessary to identify the sources that are responsible for the
spectra. LW direct images may optionally be requested for each grism-filter combination specified, and will
immediately follow completion of the grism exposures (including dithers). The direct image will be taken at the
final dither position used for the grism exposures. When direct images are requested, they include 2 additional
exposures, dithered parallel to the dispersion direction, at offsets designed to image any out-of-field sources that
may produce spectral streaks in the grism data. Direct LW images are required for at least the last grism-filter
combination requested in the observation.
Simultaneous direct imaging with the SW channel is obtained simultaneously with the LW grism exposures. The
SW imaging field of view remains unchanged when the grisms are in use. The SW images enable precise
determination of dither offsets, and provide extended wavelength coverage as well as supporting production of
the source catalog needed for calibration of the LW grism spectra.
Out-of-field sources
89
The grisms deflect the light parallel to the dispersion direction for all wavelengths except 3.95 μm. The size of
the deflection is 1 nm/pixel, and the LW pixel scale is 0.063". Consequently, some sources that fall outside of the
imaging field of view produce spectral streaks on the detector. The extent of the out-of-field coverage is limited
by the size and location of the pickoff mirrors, and is illustrated in Figure 3. When using grism C, the coronagraph
mount also block some out-of-field sources. The coronagraph substrates themselves are transparent, but are
populated by neutral density squares and coronagraphic occulting masks that will complicate the interpretation
of grism spectra for sources that are located behind the substrate. Dithers parallel to the dispersion axes provide
direct images of the out-of-field sources. SW direct images of the out-of-field sources will also be obtained
simultaneously with the LW images.
90
Figure 3. Grism out-of-field sources
NIRCam WFSS boundaries for out-of-field sources. The gray shaded areas are the imaging fields of view, the blue boxes mark the grism
R boundaries, and the red boxes mark the grism C boundaries. The coronagraph substrates are transparent, but contain occulting masks
and neutral density squares. Additional dithers allow for direct images at V2 = ±12 for grism R and V3 = 12, +35 for grism C to cover out-
of field sources.
Sensitivity
Approximate continuum and line sensitivities are shown in Figure 4 for a 10 ks integration using a 2 × 5 pixel
extraction aperture (2 pixels in the spectral direction by 5 pixels in the spatial direction). Please consult the
Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) for the proposed observations.
91
Figure 4. Grism sensitivities in module A and module B
92
Grism module A and module B sensitivities. © Greene 2017.
Background levels
Slitless observations disperse the zodiacal and thermal background light just like they do any source in the field.
This results in a higher level of background than in imaging observations. Different grism and imaging filter
combination result in both a different background level as well as a different structure of the dispersed
background.
93
Figure 5. NIRCAM module A dispersed backgrounds for GRISMR+F356W and GRISMR+F410M
The background of NIRCAM slitless observations are expected to have significant structure caused by the final shape of the pick-up
mirror illuminating the grism. This figure shows 2 simulated backgrounds when combining the GRISMR+F356W (left) or
GRISMR+F410M (right) filters.
Estimates for every combination of grism and filter can be found on the NIRCam Slitless Background page.
References
Latest updates
25 Sep 2017
Edited information to match recent paper (Greene, T. et al. 2017, JATIS, 035001)
21 Mar 2017
New sections on out-of-field sources and direct imaging
94
95
NIRCam Instrumentation
JWST Near Infrared Camera (NIRCam) instrumentation includes optics, filters, detectors, and other hardware
receiving light from the field of view to support its 4 observing modes.
The NIRCam science observing modes at 0.6–5.0 μm include imaging, coronagraphy, and grism wide field slitless
spectroscopy, as well as specialized time-series monitoring modes. To support these modes, as well as wavefront
sensing for mirror alignment, information on the NIRCam instrument hardware is available in these articles:
NIRCam Optics describes the mirrors and other elements.

NIRCam Coronagraphic Occulting Masks and Lyot Stops describes the bar and round occulting masks.
NIRCam Pupil and Filter Wheels describes the Lyot stops, filters, and other elements.
NIRCam Filters describes the broad-, medium-, and narrowband filters.
NIRCam Grisms describes slitless spectroscopy with R = λ/Δλ ~ 1,600 at 4.0 µm, dispersing light along
detector rows or columns.
NIRCam Weak Lenses describes weak lenses used to defocus light, enabling imaging of brighter targets
without saturation.
NIRCam Detector Overview describes the 8 short wavelength (0.6–2.3 µm) and 2 long wavelength (2.4–5.0
µm) detectors covering the same field of view for both modules.
For wavefront sensing and mirror alignment, additional optical elements are available in the pupil and filter
wheels.
The 2 NIRCam modules contain nearly identical sets of all of these elements.
The full list of NIRCam instrumentation articles:
NIRCam Instrumentation
• NIRCam Field of View
• NIRCam Modules
• NIRCam Optics
• NIRCam Dichroics
• NIRCam Pupil and Filter Wheels
• NIRCam Filters
• NIRCam Coronagraphic Occulting Masks and Lyot Stops
• NIRCam Filters for Coronagraphy
• NIRCam Grisms
• NIRCam Weak Lenses
NIRCam Detector Overview
• NIRCam Detector Subarrays
• NIRCam Detector Readout
• NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns
• NIRCam Detector Performance
96
Latest updates
16 Jan 2017
97
NIRCam Field of View
JWST's NIRCam observes a 9.7 arcmin² field with a ~44" gap separating two 2.2' × 2.2' areas. The short
wavelength images also have 4"–5" gaps between detectors.
The 2 NIRCam modules each observe a 2.2’ × 2.2’ area that are separated by ~44" and cover 9.7 arcmin²
total. The full field of view may be imaged at short and long wavelengths simultaneously using dichroics. Short
wavelength (0.6–2.3 µm) and long wavelength (2.4–5.0 µm) fields overlap well, but not perfectly, with more
pronounced offsets (a few arcseconds) in module B.
Each module has 4 short wavelength detectors arranged in a 2 × 2 array and one long wavelength detector. The
resulting short wavelength images have gaps of 4"–5" between detectors.
The gap between modules is 42"–44" for the short wavelength detectors and 45"–48" for the long wavelength
detectors. These gaps may change by up to several arcseconds after launch. NIRCam primary dithers and
mosaics may be used to cover all of these chip gaps.
Smaller subsections of the field of view may be observed by using NIRCam detector subarrays. Apertures define
the pointing and extent of each observation in the field of view.
Field-of-view figures
98
Figure 1. NIRCam modules field of view
The NIRCam field of view in observatory coordinates (V3 up, V2 left). Observations may be obtained simultaneously with both modules
using all 10 detectors at short (0.6–2.3 µm) and long (2.4–5.0 µm) wavelengths. The coronagraphs are used to image regions of the sky
outside the imaging/grism field of view. When in use, these regions are projected onto the detectors by optical wedges located on Lyot stops
in the pupil plane.
99
Figure 2. NIRCam in the JWST field of view
The JWST focal plane with highlighted NIRCam field of view, closest to the V1 optical axis of incoming light. Shown within each module
are HST images (to scale) of GOODS-S from CANDELS and 3D-HST. The pink dashed regions show the 2 detectors for the long
wavelength imaging/grism field of view. The 8 short wavelength detectors are outlined in blue. Above, in green, are the coronagraph
subarrays with the occulting masks shown inside it. Those masks are physically located on the coronagraphic optical mount (COM), and
images of the masks are moved onto the detector by an optical wedge co-located on the pupil wheel with the pupil-plane Lyot stops.
Latest updates
100
NIRCam Modules
JWST NIRCam consists of 2 modules with nearly identical optics and detectors. When both are used in tandem,
they represent NIRCam's full field of view.
On this page
Notable differences between modules

Throughput
Grism performance
Coronagraph performance
Field of view
Views of the NIRCam modules
References
NIRCam's 2 modules—A and B—provide redundancy and together comprise the maximum field of view in the
imaging and wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) observing modes. For observing modes covering smaller
fields of view, a single module, A or B, may be used, based on optimal performance. The 2 modules have nearly
identical optical elements and detectors with a few notable differences.
Notable differences between modules
Throughput
Module B has better throughput at the longest wavelengths (see comparisons at NIRCam filters page). This is
most pronounced for the F480M filter, which has ~33% and ~42% throughput in modules A and B, respectively
(this includes all telescope throughputs, filter transmissions, and detector efficiencies).
Grism performance
Module A grisms have anti-reflection coating on both sides. Module B grisms are only coated on their flat (non-
grooved) sides, reducing their efficiency by ~26% and introducing some ghosts of bright spectra (Greene et al.,
2016).
Coronagraph performance
101
The module A coronagraph optical substrate has a significantly better anti-reflection coating than the module B
substrate. The module A coronagraph mask neutral density squares are also superior. Coronagraph mask
occulters are arranged in different orders in each module (both sets are equally good). Currently, NIRCam
coronagraphy is limited to Module A only.
Field of view
In both modules, the fields of view of the short wavelength (SW) and long wavelengh (LW) channels are almost,
but not entirely, identical. However, module A provides slightly better overlap. The slight difference in overlap
will not affect most observations, but may impact observations that use the smallest subarrays.
Views of the NIRCam modules
102
Figure 1. NIRCam modules
103
The 2 NIRCam modules, A (bottom) and B (top), are nearly identical mirror images of one another.
104
Figure 2. NIRCam module optical path
105
Module A (top) and a diagram of the optical path through its components (bottom), shown with the same orientation. The optical path
illustration © Greenhouse et al. 2011.
106
Figure 3. NIRCam modules mounted together
The 2 NIRCam modules are mounted back-to-back on the Integrated Science Instrument Module (ISIM). Here, module B is shown on
top, and module A is barely visible below it.
References
Greene, T., Chu, L., Hodapp, K. W., et al. 2016, SPIE 99040E
Slitless Spectroscopy with the James Webb Space Telescope Near-Infrared Camera (JWST NIRCam)
Greenhouse, M. et al. 2011, SPIE 814606G

Status of the James Webb Space Telescope integrated science instrument module system
Latest updates
107
108
NIRCam Optics
The JWST NIRCam optical elements include dichroics, filters, weak lenses, grisms, as well as coronagraph
occulting masks and Lyot stops.
On this page
Optical path
References
NIRCam's 2 modules (A and B) receive light relatively close to on-axis from the JWST Optical Telescope Element
(OTE), as shown in the field of view in Figure 1.
109
Figure 1. NIRCam modules footprint in the JWST field of view
NIRCam's 10 detectors are labeled. Each module has 5 detectors: 4 for the short wavelength channel and one for the long wavelength
channel. Coronagraph images are projected onto the detectors by an optical wedge (when needed).
Optical path
From the NIRCam pickoff mirror, within each module, light passes through these components in the following
order:
(Optionally) The coronagraph occulting masks, located at the OTE focal surface

Collimator optics
Dichroic, reflecting short wavelength light (0.6–2.3 µm) and transmitting long wavelength light (2.4–5.0
µm)
Pupil wheel (including coronagraph Lyot stops each with an optical wedge; weak lenses for short
wavelengths; grisms for long wavelengths)
Filter wheel (including filters and a short wavelength weak lens)
Camera optics
(Optionally in short wavelength channel) Pupil imaging lens (PIL) for wavefront sensing and alignment
measurements
Detectors (in the focal plane)
110
Figure 2. NIRCam optical train
Upper half of figure: NIRCam optical train

Lower half of figure: The detector view, at the focal plane assembly (FPA), of incoming light with and without a coronagraph wedge in
the optical path. The coronagraph wedges are included on Lyot stop elements on each pupil wheel. © Somerstein & Truong 2005.
111
Figure 3. NIRCam optical train in one module
© Greenhouse et al. 2011.
References
Greenhouse, M. et al. 2011, SPIE 814606G
Status of the James Webb Space Telescope integrated science instrument module system
Somerstein, S. F., Truong, G.D. 2005, SPIE 590407

NIRCam optical calibration sources
Latest updates
112
NIRCam Dichroics
The JWST NIRCam dichroics split light in the optical path by reflecting short wavelengths (0.6–2.3 µm) and
transmitting long wavelengths (2.4–5.0 µm). This splitting enables simultaneous observations in the short and
long wavelength channels.
There is one dichroic in each module, positioned in the optical path after the coronagraphic occulting masks and
before the pupil and filter wheels and detectors.
113
Figure 1. NIRCam dichroic transmission
Dichroic transmission in the short and long wavelength channels in module B (SWB and LWB, respectively). (From filters version 4.0:
April 2016)
Latest updates
114
NIRCam Pupil and Filter Wheels
The JWST NIRCam pupil and filter wheels include the filters, weak lenses, grisms, and coronagraph Lyot stops
that may be used in combination.
On this page
Pupil and filter wheels characteristics

Allowed combinations between pupil and filter wheel elements
Each NIRCam module has short wavelength (0.6–2.3 μm) and long wavelength (2.4–5.0 μm) channels, each with
a pupil wheel and filter wheel of 12 elements each. Many combinations of pupil and filter wheel elements are
allowed as described below. These elements include:
extra-wide-, wide-, medium-, and narrowband filters with R = λ/Δλ ~ 1, 4, 10, and 100, respectively;
coronagraph Lyot stops to suppress diffracted light that passes the occulting masks on the focal plane;
grism elements in the long wavelength channel—2 elements are available, dispersing light along detector
rows and columns, respectively;
weak lenses to defocus light from bright sources to avoid detector saturation, and also used for telescope
alignment;
clear positions (empty holes) in the pupil wheel to be used in combination with filter wheel elements;
dark elements used for calibration;
other elements used only for wavefront sensing and telescope alignment, including the PAPPA (pupil
alignment pinhole projector assembly), DHS (dispersed Hartman sensing), and IPR Wedge (internal phase
retrieval).
Pupil and filter wheels characteristics
115
Figure 1. NIRCam pupil and filter wheels
Each NIRCam module contains the optical elements depicted above, including pupil and filter wheels that hold a total of 48 optical
elements. Filters are color-coded by wavelength. Wider filters are shown in the figure as more transparent than narrower filters.
Table 1. NIRCam pupil and filter wheel elements
116
Short wavelength channel Long wavelength channel
(0.6–2.3 μm) (2.4–5.0 μm)
Pupil wheel Filter wheel Pupil wheel Filter wheel
CLEAR F070W CLEAR F277W
Dark F090W Dark F356W
PAPPA F115W IPR Wedge F444W
WL +8 F150W PAPPA F300M
DHS 0° F200W F405N Br-α F480M
WL -8 F212N H2 F323N H2 F410M
Lyot round WL+4 +F212N2 Lyot round F360M
F162M CO F187N Pa-α Grism R V2 F430M
DHS 60° F210M F466N CO F460M
Lyot bar F182M Grism C V3 F250M
F164N [Fe II] F140M F470N H2 F335M
IPR Wedge F150W2 F322W2

Lyot bar
Table notes:
Black: bandpass filters named W2, W, M, N have R = λ/Δλ ~ 1, 4, 10, 100, respectively

Orange: coronagraphic Lyot stops in the pupil wheels used in conjunction with filters and focal plane
occulting masks
Green: grism elements disperse spectra along detector rows (R) or columns (C), used in conjunction with
filters
Magenta: WL, weak lens, used to defocus for mirror alignment or bright star imaging without saturation
Gray: CLEAR positions, empty holes in the pupil wheel
Wavefront sensing/calibration (not available for science)
DHS, dispersed Hartman sensing (sub-aperture grisms): coarse phasing alignment of JWST's mirrors
PAPPA, pupil alignment pinhole projector assembly: align NIRCam with the JWST Optical Telescope
Element (OTE)
IPR, internal phase retrieval, wedge: measure NIRCam wavefront errors using LEDs mounted on
coronagraphs
Dark: blocks incoming light for dark current measurements
117
Allowed combinations between pupil and filter
wheel elements
118
Figure 2. Allowed combinations of optical elements in the NIRCam short wavelength channel
Filter wheel elements (left column) may be paired with pupil wheel elements (top row) as listed below. Pupil wheel elements in gray on the
right are only available for wavefront sensing and calibration, not science.
Pair availability
- Green: available for science
- Yellow: restricted use for wavefront sensing, calibration, or engineering
- Red: disallowed; not useful
Names of wide, medium, and narrow filters are formatted as bold, regular, and italic, respectively.
119
Figure 3. Allowed combinations of optical elements in the NIRCam long wavelength channel
Available pupil and filter wheel pairings for the long wavelength channel. Same color codes as Figure 2.
- Green: available for science
- Yellow: restricted use for wavefront sensing, calibration, or engineering
- Red: disallowed; not useful
Names of wide, medium, and narrow filters are formatted as bold, regular, and italic, respectively.
335, 430: the filters allowed in combination with a round coronagraph Lyot stop depend on the occulting mask used: MASK335R or
MASK430R.
Latest updates
120
NIRCam Filters
JWST NIRCam offers 29 bandpass filters in the short wavelength (0.6–2.3 μm) and long wavelength (2.4–5.0 μm)
channels.
On this page
Filter transmissions
Filter lists
References
Each of the 2 NIRCam modules carries a nearly identical set of 29 filters. Most filters are located in the filter
wheel and are used in combination with pupil wheel elements including CLEAR, grisms, coronagraph Lyot stops,
and weak lenses.
The 6 filters located in the pupil wheels (F162M, F164N, F323N, F405N, F466N, and F470N) include their
individual pupil aperture stops and are used in combination with a second filter in the filter wheel (F150W2,
F322W2, or F444W) because the filter wheels contain no CLEAR elements.
Filter transmissions
Filter transmissions (including all system throughputs) are plotted in Figures 1 and 2; ASCII tables are also
provided.
Throughputs vary somewhat between the 2 modules, especially at long wavelengths due to differences in
detector quantum efficiencies. Total throughputs are shown in Figures 1 and 2. Figure 1 shows the throughput
averaged over both modules, while Figure 2 shows the throughputs for each module separately, as well as
averaged between modules.
Table 1. Numbers of extra-wide, wide, medium, and narrow filters in each wavelength channel
121
Filters R = λ/Δλ Short wavelength Long wavelength channel
channel (2.4–5.0 μm)
(0.6–2.3 μm) Number of filters
Number of filters
All ~1–92 13 16
Extra-wide ~1–2 1 1
Wide ~4–5 5 3
Medium ~8–20 4 8
Narrow ~78–92 3 4
122
Figure 1. NIRCam + JWST Optical Telescope Element (OTE) filter throughputs
Preliminary total system throughput for each NIRCam filter, including contributions from the JWST Optical Telescope Element (OTE),
NIRCam optical train, dichroics, filters, and detector quantum efficiency (QE). Throughput refers to photon-to-electron conversion
efficiency. Averages of NIRCam modules A and B transmissions are plotted. The vertical gray bar marks the approximate dichroic cutoff
between the short and long wavelength channels. Filters marked "P" are located in the pupil wheel, requiring transmission through a
second filter in the filter wheel, either F150W2, F322W2, or F444W. In these cases, the combined transmissions are plotted. (Figure
version 4.0: April 22, 2016)
123
Figure 2. NIRCam filter throughputs in both modules
System throughput for each of the NIRCam filters shown in Figure 1 (with the same colors). Plots with a black outline correspond to
module A, while the gray outline shows module B. The most significant differences between modules are at the longest wavelengths where
module B offers higher throughput. (Version 4.0 data)
Filter lists
Download all filter transmission curves (version 4.0: April 2016): (tar.gz) (zip)
The filter transmission curves archive file contains:
Both data (ASCII) and plots (PDF);

Data for each individual module as well as averages of both modules;
Filter only, NIRCam only (i.e. NIRCam optics + filter), and the total system throughput data;
Measured/expected transmissions for the filters, dichroic, optics, and the JWST OTE;
Detector quantum efficiencies (QE).
Module-averaged total system transmission curves for all filters are available via the links in column 1 of Tables
2 and 3.
124
Tables 2 and 3. Characteristics of filters in the short and long wavelength channels
Short wavelength channel (0.6–2.3 µm)
Filter Pivot* BW† Effective‡ Blue§ Red¶ Use

(module- λ (µm) Δλ (µm) response λ+
λ-
average)
(µm) (µm)
F070W 0.704 0.132 0.200 0.621 0.781 General purpose
F140M 1.405 0.142 0.397 1.331 1.479 Cool stars, H2O, CH4
F162M 1.627 0.168 0.416 1.542 1.713 Cool Stars, off-band for H2O
F164N 1.645 0.020 0.355 1.635 1.653 [FeII]
F150W2 1.659 1.175 0.415 1.008 2.334 Blocking filter for F162M, F164N, and DHS
F182M 1.845 0.237 0.454 1.722 1.968 Cool stars, H2O, CH4
F187N 1.874 0.024 0.374 1.863 1.884 Pa-alpha
F210M 2.095 0.206 0.461 1.992 2.201 H2O, CH4
F212N 2.121 0.027 0.394 2.109 2.134 H2
Long wavelength channel (2.4–5.0 µm)
125
Filter Pivot BW† Effective Blue Red Use
(module- * Δλ ‡ § ¶
average) (µm) response
λ λ- λ+
(µm) (µm) (µm)
F250M 2.503 0.180 0.383 2.412 2.595 CH4, continuum
F300M 2.989 0.315 0.363 2.829 3.155 Water ice
F322W2 3.232 1.356 0.443 2.430 4.013 Background min. Primarily used w/ grisms. Blocking
filter for F323N.
F323N 3.237 0.038 0.285 3.217 3.255 H2
F335M 3.362 0.352 0.417 3.177 3.538 PAH, CH4
F360M 3.624 0.370 0.458 3.427 3.814 Brown dwarfs, planets, continuum
F405N 4.052 0.045 0.372 4.028 4.074 Br-alpha
F410M 4.082 0.438 0.469 3.864 4.301 Brown dwarfs, planets, H2O, CH4
F430M 4.281 0.228 0.469 4.167 4.398 CO2, N2
F444W 4.408 1.029 0.474 3.880 4.986 General purpose. Blocking filter for F405N, F466N,
F470N.
F460M 4.630 0.229 0.392 4.515 4.747 CO
F466N 4.654 0.054 0.293 4.629 4.681 CO
F470N 4.708 0.051 0.274 4.683 4.733 H2
F480M 4.874 0.300 0.317 4.662 4.977 Brown dwarfs, planets, continuum
Table notes:
*
Linked throughput tables include the effects of the JWST OTE as well as all NIRCam optics and detector QE.
†
The pivot wavelength satisfies the equation , relating the flux measured in wavelength versus frequency
units ( ). It is calculated as , where is the transmission. See Tokunaga & Vacca 2005.
126
‡
Bandwidth is the integral of the normalized transmission curve: . See equation 1 in appendix E of Rieke, G.
H. et al. 2008.
§
Effective response is the mean transmission value over the wavelength range of .
¶
The half power wavelengths of a passband are the wavelengths at which the transmission falls to 50% of its
peak value.
References
Rieke, G. H., Blaylock, M., Decin, L., et al. 2008, AJ, 135, 2245
Absolute Physical Calibration in the Infrared
Tokunaga, A. T., & Vacca, W. D., 2005, PASP, 117, 421

The Mauna Kea Observatories Near-Infrared Filter Set. III. Isophotal Wavelengths and Absolute Calibration
Latest updates
Originally published 29 Nov 2017
127
NIRCam Coronagraphic Occulting
Masks and Lyot Stops
JWST NIRCam coronagraphy offers round and bar occulting masks paired with pupil plane Lyot stops, yielding
inner working angles ranging from 0.13" to 0.89" HWHM (Half-Width at Half-Maximum).
On this page
Occulting masks
Lyot stops
Additional throughput losses: other absorbing materials
References
Each NIRCam module includes a coronagraphic optical mount (COM) that carries 3 round and 2 bar-shaped
coronagraphic occulting masks in the focal plane.
When centered on a bright point source, an occulting mask blocks the core of the point spread function (PSF).
Diffracted light remaining in the PSF wings is blocked by a corresponding Lyot stop in the pupil plane. The pairing
of the occulting mask and Lyot stop constitutes a "Lyot coronagraph," which enables high-contrast imaging of
faint features near bright point sources.
Occulting masks
Three round occulting masks are available in the pupil plane with sizes optimized for observations at different
wavelengths. Table 1 gives their radii (in arcseconds) and the wavelengths at which those radii correspond to 6
resolution elements, or 6 λ/D, where D is the 6.5 m diameter of the JWST primary mirror. (Resolution at the
diffraction limit is measured in units of λ/D.)
Table 1. 6λ/D wavelengths for the round occulting masks
128
Round coronagraphic mask Radius λ for 6λ/D
MASK210R 0.40" 2.1 μm
MASK335R 0.63" 3.35 μm
MASK430R 0.81" 4.3 μm
The 2 bar coronagraphic occulting masks are tapered, with radii varying by a factor of 3 along their lengths.
Table 2 gives the half widths at half maximum (HWHM) at the bar end points and centers. Note these
wavelengths extend beyond the observable range (see NIRCam Filters for Coronagraphy).
Table 2. 4λ/D wavelengths for the end points and center (in HWHM) of each bar coronagraphic mask
Bar coronagraphic mask HWHM λ for 4λ/D
0.13" 1.03 μm
MASKSWB 0.26" 2.1 μm
0.39" 3.1 μm
0.29" 2.5 μm
MASKLWB 0.59" 4.6 μm
0.87" 6.9 μm
Nominal inner working angles (IWAs) reported in Tables 1 & 2 correspond to the half-width at half-maximum
(HWHM), the angular distance at which the coronagraph throughput is half. For the round masks it was designed
to be at ~6λ/D and for the bar masks it was designed to be ~4λ/D for each given filter's central wavelength to
which a special "fiducial" pointing is assigned as shown in Figure 1.
When a bar mask is used with a given filter, the source is placed behind the occulter at a position (shown in
Figure 1) that provides HWHM = 4λ/D for the central wavelength λ of the filter.
129
Figure 1. NIRCam bar occulting masks and their corresponding nominal pointing positions for each filter
The NIRCam module A coronagraphic substrate is shown with marked nominal pointing positions for each filter. The large back
rectangles correspond to the neutral density filters used for coronagraphic target acquisition on bright sources.
130
Figure 2. NIRCam coronagraphic occulting masks
The NIRCam module A coronagraphic substrate, which includes bar and round masks for occulting bright objects and 5" × 5" neutral
density squares for acquisition of bright targets (K < 7). The three lines of information at the top are the nominal wavelength range, mask
name, and inner working angle for each occulting mask. The etched metal patterns deliver the desired radial profiles within tolerances.
Adapted from Krist et al. 2010, Figure 3.
The filter transmission changes with radius and is different for each occulting mask (Figure 3).
131
Figure 3. Filter transmission as a function of distance for round and bar masks
Transmission changes with distance and with the occulter. The plots for the bar masks show the allowed filter range. Vertical lines mark
132
Transmission changes with distance and with the occulter. The plots for the bar masks show the allowed filter range. Vertical lines mark
the 50% transmission point. The files used to create these plots are available here: transmissions.tar.
Lyot stops
In each module, NIRCam has 2 Lyot stops: one designed to suppress diffracted light from the round occulters,
and the other to suppress diffracted light from the bar occulters. The final PSF is the Fourier transform of the
Lyot stop. The geometrical transmission (Figure 4, c and d) of the Lyot stops is ~20%.
133
Figure 4. NIRCam coronagraph diffraction and Lyot stops
Diffraction from the NIRCam occulting masks (top row) and Lyot stops designed to suppress diffracted light (bottom row) from the round
134
Diffraction from the NIRCam occulting masks (top row) and Lyot stops designed to suppress diffracted light (bottom row) from the round
occulters (left) and bar occulters (right). In all images, white indicates light transmission. © Mao et al. 2011.
Additional throughput losses: other absorbing

materials
The focal plane masks or occulters are physically made with aluminum dots on a 66 mm by 22 mm by 2 mm
sapphire substrate whose transmission also slightly depends on wavelength.
Each of the 4 Lyot stops (one for the round occulter, one for the bar occulter, 2 modules) are mounted on
a substrate whose wedge shifts the field of view by several tens of arcseconds (with respect to plain imaging)
and images the occulters onto the detectors. The wedges' transmission is more chromatic for the SW as the
substrate is BaF2 (~95% at 1 µm and around ~75% at 2.5 µm, around ~80% for most of the coronagraphic filters
). For the LW wedges, the substrate material is Si and with > 95%–98% transmission between 3 µm and 5 µm.
Overall the NIRCam coronagraphic optics introduce a pure loss in throughput (> 1" away from the center of each
occulter) of the order of a factor ~7 to ~10. In the JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC), a "total system
throughput" plot is displayed for each given instrument setup.
References
Krist, J., et al., 2010, SPIE, 77313J
Mao, Y., et al., 2011, SPIE, 81500E

NIRCam coronagraphic Lyot stop: design, fabrication, and testing
Latest updates
09 Feb 2018
Added figure: nominal pointing positions
02 Jun 2017
Added figures: transmission vs. radius
135
136
NIRCam Filters for Coronagraphy
For JWST NIRCam coronagraphy, the choice of filters is restricted to those best paired with the chosen
coronagraphic occulting mask.
The sizes of the 3 round occulting masks are optimized for coronagraphic observations at λ ~ 2.1, 3.35, and 4.3
µm. At these wavelengths, the inner working angle IWA ~ 6 λ/D, where D is 6.5 m, the effective diameter of the
JWST entrance aperture. IWA is the minimum-detectable apparent separation between the (occulted) bright
source and the nearby faint source of scientific interest, assuming photometric criteria for detection are satisfied.
The 2 bar-shaped coronagraphic masks have tapered widths to accommodate ranges of short or long
wavelengths with IWA ~ 4 λ/D.
Coronagraph characteristics
When using each mask, a user may choose from multiple filters. For the round masks, the chosen filter may
deviate from the optimal wavelength with some restrictions.
The NIRCam coronagraphs were not designed for optimal performance below 2 µm. Chromatic aberrations are
induced in NIRCam's short wavelength channel by the optical wedges included in the Lyot stop elements used to
project the occulting masks onto the detectors. These aberrations increase the PSF size along one axis,
especially for wide filters, complicating PSF subtraction of the reference star. Furthermore, the coronagraph
substrate antireflective coating has poor transmission below 1.9 µm (Figure 1).

Ground-based coronagraphs typically offer better performance (lower chromatic aberrations, wavefront errors,
and IWAs) below 2 µm, except near 1.8 µm where the atmosphere is opaque. Therefore, NIRCam coronagraphy
is not available below 1.7 µm.
The transmission of the occulting mask changes as a function of radius and differs for each occulting mask.
Table 1. Permitted filters for use with each coronagraphic occulting mask
137
Coronagraphic mask MASK210R MASK335R MASK430R MASKSWB MASKLWB
Description Small round Medium round Large round Narrow bar Wide bar
Nominal wavelength 2.10 µm 3.35 µm 4.30 µm 2.1 µm 4.6 µm

(s) (center) (center)
1.7–2.2 µm 2.4–5.0 µm
IWA 6 λ/D 6 λ/D 6 λ/D 4 λ/D 4 λ/D

0.40″ (2.1 0.57″ (3.35 0.87″ (4.30 0.23″ (1.82 0.32″ (2.5 µm)
µm) µm) µm) µm) 0.46″ (3.6 µm)
0.25″ (2.00 0.61″ (4.8 µm)
µm)
0.27″ (2.12
µm)
Permitted filters F182M F250M F250M F182M F250M

F187N F300M F300M F187N F277W
F200W F322W2 F322W2 F200W F300M
F210M F335M F335M F210M F335M
F212N F356W F356W F212N F356W
F360M F360M F360M
F410M F410M F410M
F430M F430M F430M
F444W F444W F444W
F460M F460M F460M
F480M F480M F480M
Table note:
For filters in orange, the transmission of the coronagraph optical mount (COM) can have a substantial impact on
the effective wavelength of the observations. For example, the COM transmission increases from 48% at 1.8 µm
to 88% at 1.9 µm.
Throughputs for all filters are available at NIRCam Filters.
138
Figure 1. Coronagraph antireflection coating transmission
Transmission measured at 39 K on a witness sample (test piece) of the coronagraph sapphire substrate with antireflection coating on both
sides. The substrate carries the occulting masks and is also known as the coronagraph optical mount (COM). Adapted from Krist et al.
2010, Figure 1. (Download the COM transmissions file to get the COM transmissions.)
References
Krist, J,. et al. 2010, SPIE, 7313J
Latest updates
139
NIRCam Grisms
The JWST NIRCam grisms obtain R ~ 1,600 slitless spectroscopy at 2.4–5.0 µm in 2 science observing modes:
wide field and single-object time series. The grisms may also help align JWST's mirrors.
On this page
Observing modes
Resolving power
Dispersion
Sensitivity
Throughput
Hardware
References
NIRCam has grisms available for R = λ/Δλ ~ 1,600 slitless spectroscopy at long wavelengths (2.4–5.0 µm). These
may be used during commissioning to help align JWST's mirrors (Shi et al. 2008) and afterward for science
observations. Table 1 lists the properties of the grisms.
Each NIRCam module has 2 grisms installed on the long wavelength (LW) channel, which disperse spectra in
orthogonal directions, along detector rows (grism R) and columns (grism C). For each observation, a grism in the
LW pupil wheel is used in combination with a filter in the LW filter wheel. Broader filters yield wider spectral
range and longer spectra (in detector pixels) at the expense of higher background and source confusion.
Table 1. NIRCam grism properties
Parameter Value
Dispersion 1 nm/pixel
Resolving power, R = λ/Δλ ~1,600 at 4 µm
Undeviated wavelength (measured) 3.95 µm (3.92–3.98)
Observing modes
140
Two observing modes listed in Table 2 make use of the grisms: wide field slitless spectroscopy and grism time
series. In most cases, only first order spectra are visible. Fainter second order spectra of some sources may be
visible when F250M, F300M, F277W, or F322W2 filters are used in combination with the grism, though only the
wide filters can be used for the grism time-series mode.
Table 2. NIRCam grism observing modes
Mode Available filters Usage
Wide field slitless Medium: F250M, F300M, F335M, F360M, For a wide field with a multitude of
spectroscopy F410M, F430M, F460M, F480M (possibly overlapping) spectra
Wide: F277W, F322W2, F356W, F444W
Grism time series Wide: F277W, F322W2, F356W, F444W To monitor bright, isolated, time-
varying objects
Resolving power
The grism spectral resolving power, R = λ/Δλ, is ~1,600 at 3.95 µm (the undeviated, zero-order wavelength),
and decreases to R ~ 1,150 at 2.5 µm. It can be approximated by the function (shown in Figure 1) given in
Section 3.2 of Greene et al. (2017):
R ~ 3.35(λ/µm)4 − 41.9(λ/µm)3 + 95.5(λ/µm)2 + 536(λ/µm) + 240,
which is the result of a spline curve fit to the optical model prediction of the grism FWHM spectral resolving
power R versus wavelength for point sources.
141
Figure 1. NIRCam grism spectral resolution versus wavelength
The FWHM spectral resolving power R = / ~ 1,600 at 3.95 m, limited somewhat by the circular beam factor and diffraction. At shorter
wavelengths, the resolving power is limited further by pixel sampling of the PSF, but this may be improved by dithering multiple
observations. The resolving power can be approximated by R3.35 (m)4-41.9(m)3+95.5 (m)2 +536(m)240 to within a few percent. © Greene
et al. (2017).
Dispersion
In each NIRCam module, the 2 grisms, grism R and grism C, disperse spectra along detector rows and columns,
respectively. This dispersion does not change measurably with wavelength, and changes are small with field
position (2% or less). Dispersion directions (increasing wavelength) are given for NIRCam ideal coordinates (Xideal
, Yideal) in Table 3 and Figure 2. Table 4 shows the dispersion lengths measured in pixels for the available filters,
with the dispersions spanning roughly 1,000 pixels per micron of wavelength (Figure 3). Dispersion lengths in
pixels are determined between the 5% power limits at wavelengths λ1 and λ2 and converted to pixels (1 nm
/pixel).
Table 3. NIRCam grism dispersion directions
142
Element Dispersion Dispersion Dispersion Measured
within: direction in direction in dispersion
module A module B (nm/pixel)
Grism R Rows +Xideal → -Xideal ← 1.004
Grism C Columns +Yideal ↑ +Yideal ↑ 1.006
143
Figure 2. NIRCam grism dispersion directions
Dispersion directions (increasing wavelength) for the row (R) and column (C) grisms along the ideal coordinate axes (Xideal, Yideal) in
each module. Adapted from Figure 4 in Greene et al. (2017).
Table 4. NIRCam grism dispersion lengths in filters for the 2 modes
Filter λ1 λ2 Dispersion Length Observing mode

(pixels)
F277W 2.395 3.179 784 Wide Field + Grism Time Series
F322W2 2.413 4.083 1670 Wide Field + Grism Time Series
F250M 2.401 2.609 208 Wide Field
F300M 2.800 3.205 404 Wide Field
F335M 3.142 3.606 464 Wide Field
F360M 3.386 3.869 483 Wide Field
F410M 3.810 4.366 556 Wide Field
F430M 4.140 4.426 286 Wide Field
F460M 4.486 4.788 302 Wide Field
F480M 4.614 5.048 434 Wide Field
144
Table note:
Example dispersion lengths of grism spectra in various filters, measured in pixels between the 5% power limits
at wavelengths λ1 and λ2. The filters available for the grism time-series and wide field slitless spectroscopy
modes are shown in Table 2.
145
Figure 3. NIRCam grism dispersion lengths for module A
The 4 wide filters available for both observing modes are shown, along with all the medium filters for WFSS. Broader filters produce
longer spectra and only first order spectra are visible in most cases. Fainter second order spectra of some sources (shown in grey) may be
visible when using F250M, F300M, F277W, or F322W2. The red boxes show the full detector width (2,040 photo-sensitive pixels) along
the x-axis, while the y-axis extent of the box and the y-placement of each spectrum is arbitrary (note that WFSS is offered only with
SUBARRAY = FULL). In this example, the source is placed at the center of the x-axis (x=1024, marked by an X symbol and the dotted
line). This corresponds to the location of the undeflected wavelength of 3.95 µm, or alternatively would correspond to the direct image
position if the grism was not in the beam. The thick portions of the spectra footprints correspond to wavelengths for which the total
throughput is larger than 50% of the maximum throughput for that setting. The thinner part corresponds to wavelengths for which the
total throughput is larger than 1% of the maximum throughput for that setting. In this figure, it is possible to appreciate the displacement
of the NIRCam grism spectra with respect to the direct image, as well as the relative position of spectra obtained using different filters.
Note that sources that are not at the center of the field of view will produce spectra that are translated with respect to those shown in the
figure. It is recommended to review the NIRCam WFSS field-of-view page to learn how to optimize the source placement within the field
of view according to the science needs.
Sensitivity
146
Figures 4 and 5 show NIRCam module A first and second order sensitivities that include contributions from the
JWST and NIRCam optics, filters, detector quantum efficiency (QE), and grism. The module B grism is less
sensitive by ~30%, and is not shown.
147
Figure 4. NIRCam grism + filter sensitivities (1st order)
NIRCam module A first order sensitivities including JWST and NIRCam optics, filters, detector quantum efficiency (QE), and grism. The
module B grism is less sensitive by ~30% (not shown).
148
Figure 5. NIRCam grism + filter sensitivities (2nd order)
NIRCam module A second order sensitivities including JWST and NIRCam optics, filters, detector quantum efficiency (QE), and grism. T
he module B grism is less sensitive by ~30% (not shown).
Throughput
The module A grisms have higher throughput efficiency due to anti-reflection coating on both sides. Module B
grisms are only coated on the smooth (non-grooved) side, resulting in 30% lower transmission as well as ghosts
(faint reflections) of some bright spectra.
149
Figure 6. NIRCam grism throughputs (1st order)
First order throughputs of the module A and B grism and available filters (module A filters shown, module B is similar), including all
JWST and NIRCam optics and detector quantum efficiencies. The grism throughput must be multiplied with that of a selected filter. The
module B grisms are AR coated on only one side and therefore have throughputs 30% lower than the module A grisms.
150
Figure 7. NIRCam grism throughputs (2nd order)
Second order throughputs of the module A and B grism and available filters (module A filters shown, module B is similar), including all
JWST and NIRCam optics and detector quantum efficiencies. The grism throughput must be multiplied with that of a selected filter.
Hardware
Fabrication of the NIRCam silicon grisms is described by Jaffe et al. (2008) and Gully-Santiago et al. (2010). The
grism diameter is 48 mm, with 42 mm optically usable. The spacing between grooves is 15.36 µm. The blaze
angle is offset slightly from the prism angle, as it was chosen to maximize efficiency near the mean wavelength
of the LW modules (3.7 µm), which is offset from the undeviated wavelength (3.95 µm). Table 5 lists the basic
manufacturing specifications of the grisms.
Table 5. NIRCam grism hardware properties
151
Parameter Value
Prism angle 6.16°
Blaze angle 5.75°
Blaze wavelength 3.7 µm
Groove frequency 65 grooves/mm
Maximum thickness 8.0 mm
Diameter 48.0 mm, circular with side flats
Clear aperture 42.0 mm, circular
AR coating 2.4 to 5.0 µm
Peak transmission 70.5% at 3.7 µm (module A)

52% at 3.7 µm (module B)
152
Figure 8. NIRCam grism photograph
© Greene et al. (2010).
References
Greene, T., Beichman, C., Gully-Santiago, M. et al. 2010, SPIE 7731
NIRCam: development and testing of the JWST near-infrared camera

Gully-Santiago, M., Wang, W., Deen, C. et al. 2010, SPIE 77393S

High-performance silicon grisms for 1.2-8.0 μm: detailed results from the JWST-NIRCam devices
Jaffe, D. T., Wang, W., Marsh, J. P. et al. 2008, SPIE 70103L

Fabrication and test of silicon grisms for JWST-NIRCam
Shi, F., King, B. M., Sigrist, N. et al. 2008, SPIE 70102E

NIRCam Long Wavelength Channel grisms as the Dispersed Fringe Sensor for JWST segment mirror coarse
phasing
153
Latest updates
25 Sep 2017
Edited information to match recent paper (Greene, T. et al. 2017, JATIS, 035001)
154
NIRCam Weak Lenses
NIRCam's weak lenses defocus incoming light. They will be used for wavefront sensing in aligning JWST's
mirrors, and for science in time-series observations.
On this page
Combining weak lenses with other filter elements

Spatial extent and saturation limits
Transmission
References
The NIRCam weak lenses defocus incoming light, spreading it over a larger number of detector pixels. They will
be used during commissioning to complete the fine phasing alignment of the JWST primary mirror. After
commissioning, they will be used for routine monitoring and adjustment of the mirror phasing.
The weak lenses may also be used for science in NIRCam time-series observations to:
avoid saturation of bright sources,

mitigate flat field uncertainties.
There are 3 weak lens elements available in the short wavelength channel (0.6–2.3 µm) on the pupil and filter
wheels in each NIRCam module.
Table 1. NIRCam weak lenses
Weak lens Waves of defocus Location

(at 2.12 µm)
WLP8 +8 Pupil wheel
WLM8 -8 Pupil wheel
WLP4+F212N2 +4 Filter wheel
WLP8 and WLM8 provide very similar performance. WLP4 is coupled to narrowband filter F212N2 with a 2.3%
bandpass (wider than the 1% bandpass F212N filter in the filter wheel).
All 3 weak lenses will be used for wavefront sensing, but only WLP8 and WLP4 will be available for science in
NIRCam time-series observations.
155
Combining weak lenses with other filter elements
In engineering mode for mirror alignment, the 8-wave weak lenses in the pupil wheel (WLP8 or WLM8) may be
combined with various filter wheel elements: short wavelength filters and the weak lens WLP4+F212N2. Various
combinations enable images with 5 levels of defocus: -8, -4, +4, +8, and +12 waves.
For science observations, the weak lenses may not be combined with one another. For NIRCam time-series
imaging, only WLP8 is available; it may be combined with one of several short wavelength filters. In NIRCam
grism time-series mode, both WLP4+F212N2 and WLP8 are available for use in the short wavelength channel
while grism observations are obtained at long wavelengths (2.4–5.0 µm).
Table 2. NIRCam weak lens combinations
Pupil wheel Filter wheel Waves of defocus Availability for science
WLM8 -8 Not available for science
WLM8 WLP4+F212N2 -4 Not available for science
WLP4+F212N2 +4 NIRCam grism time series
WLP8 +8 NIRCam time-series imaging

NIRCam grism time series
WLP8 WLP4+F212N2 +12 Not available for science
156
Figure 1. NIRCam weak lens images
Images formed in the NIRCam short wavelength channel for the various defocus values achievable using the weak lenses. Ghost image
artifacts to the left of center and below were caused by reflections in ground testing and should not appear in flight. Adapted from Greene
et al. 2010, Figure 3.
Spatial extent and saturation limits

The defocused image diameters are roughly 66, 132, and 198 pixels for 4, 8, and 12 waves of defocus,
respectively. The peak intensity is about 4 times the average flux within these diameters. Thus, brighter sources
may be imaged without saturation. Expected saturation limits for WLP8 images with the 160 × 160 pixel subarray
are given in NIRCam time-series imaging. Table 3 shows the saturation improvements (in magnitudes) gained by
using weak lenses versus not using them.
Table 3. Weak lens defocusing and saturation limit improvements
Waves of defocus Image Saturation limit

diameter change
(pixels; approx.) (magnitudes)
4 66 5.0
8 132 6.5
12 198 8.0
157
Figure 2. Weak lens +8 image
The WLP8 defocused image of a point source fits well within a 160 × 160 pixel subarray (white box). A 132-pixel diameter aperture (red
circle) contains >97% of the total flux.
Transmission
The weak lenses deliver their highest transmission (90%–96%) between 1.6–2.2 µm and lowest transmissions
(~50%) near ~0.6 and ~1.1 µm.
158
Figure 3. Weak lens throughputs
Transmissions of the WLP8 and WLP4+F212N2 weak lens anti-reflective coatings alone (excluding other NIRCam or JWST
throughputs) based on laboratory measurements of witness samples (test pieces) (from filters version 4.0: April 2016). WLP8 is in the
pupil wheel and must be used in conjunction with a filter in the filter wheel. WLP4+F212N2 includes a narrowband filter
with 2.3% bandpass (wider than the 1% bandpass filter F212N). WLP4+F212N2 is in the filter wheel and is used in conjunction with the
CLEAR pupil element for science. Engineering modes may use WLP4+F212N2 in combination with other pupil wheel elements, including
WLP8, yielding a total of +12 waves of defocus at 2.12 µm.
References
Greene, T., Beichman, C., Gully-Santiago, M., et al., 2010, SPIE, 7731
NIRCam: development and testing of the JWST near-infrared camera
Latest updates
159
160
NIRCam Detector Overview
JWST NIRCam has ten 2K × 2K HgCdTe detectors: eight for 0.6–2.3 µm observations (0.031"/pixel) and two for
2.4–5.0 µm (0.063"/pixel).
See also: NIRCam Detector Subarrays, NIRCam Detector Readout, NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns,

NIRCam Detector Performance
NIRCam employs 10 Teledyne HgCdTe H2RG detectors, each controlled by a separate SIDECAR™ ASIC1.
Each detector contains 2048 × 2048 pixels; the interior 2040 × 2040 pixels are light-sensitive photodiodes, and
the outer 4-pixel wide border consists of reference pixels used to measure temperature and bias voltage drifts
during exposures. These drifts are removed by the image reduction pipeline.
Eight of the detectors, manufactured with a 2.5 µm cutoff, are used in the short wavelength channel (0.6–2.3
µm). Two detectors with ~5 µm cutoffs are used in the long wavelength channel (2.4–5.0 µm). The short
wavelength detectors have lower dark current (see NIRCam Detector Performance).
Each detector is referred to as a sensor chip assembly (SCA). In each NIRCam module, the 4 short wavelength
detectors are arranged in a 2 × 2 focal plane array (FPA). When imaging the sky, the short wavelength pixels
have twice the spatial resolution (0.031″) as the long wavelength pixels (0.063"). The field of view of each short
wavelength FPA overlaps with that of the single long wavelength SCA in each module. Both wavelength channels
cover approximately the same 2.2' × 2.2' area on the sky with each module, for a total 9.7 arcmin² field of view
when observing with both modules.
During an integration, the detectors accumulate charge while being read out multiple times non-destructively
according to readout patterns. Users may opt to either read out the full detector or smaller subarrays for faster
readout times. When the integration is complete, the detectors are reset, releasing the charge.
Accumulated analog charges are converted to 16-bit digital signals with up to 65,535 data counts (analog-to-
digital units, or ADU) in each pixel. The gain values are roughly 2 electrons per data count (2 e–/ADU) on
average, varying among the detectors as well as among pixels within each detector (see the Detector
Performance article).
161
Figure 1. Field of view received by the 10 NIRCam detectors
The short wavelength detectors are numbered 1–4 in each module (A and B), as shown in blue. The long wavelength detectors are
numbered "5" in each module, as shown in red. Orientation is shown relative to the JWST field of view with the V3 axis up and V2 axis
left.
Table 1. Detector properties
Detector properties Short wavelength channel Long wavelength channel

(0.6–2.3 µm) (2.4–5.0 µm)
Wavelength response † 0.4–2.5 µm 0.4–5.1 µm
Number of detectors 8 2
Pixels (including reference) 2048 × 2048 pixels 2048 × 2048 pixels
Pixels (light sensitive) 2040 × 2040 pixels 2040 × 2040 pixels
Pixel pitch (physical size) ‡ 18 µm 18 µm
Pixel scale (on sky) 0.031″/pixel 0.063″/pixel
Nyquist wavelength * 2.0 μm 4.0 μm
Field of view (each detector) 64" × 64" 129" × 129"
Field of view (all detectors) 2 × 2.2′ × 2.2′ (with 4–5” gaps) 2 × 2.2′ × 2.2′
† Filters and dichroics limit these wavelength ranges.
162
† Filters and dichroics limit these wavelength ranges.
‡
Distance between centers of adjacent pixels.
* PSF FWHM ~2 pixels at this wavelength; undersampled at lower wavelengths. For coronagraphy, the Nyquist
wavelength is shorter.
163
Figure 2. NIRCam 2K × 2K HgCdTe detector from Teledyne imaging sensors
164
Figure 3. Focal plane array (2 × 2) of NIRCam short wavelength detectors
Four NIRCam H2RG detectors mounted into a focal plane module (FPA), including the black optical baffle that blocks light from hitting
the reflective edges of the detector.
1
System for Image Digitization, Enhancement, Control, and Retrieval Application-Specific Integrated Circuit
References
Rieke, G. H., 2007, ARA&R, 45, 77
Infrared Detector Arrays for Astronomy
165
Latest updates
13 Jul 2017
Updated pixel scale values
166
NIRCam Detector Subarrays
The JWST NIRCam detector subarrays reduce data volumes and readout times, enabling rapid observations of
bright objects without saturation.
On this page
Imaging
Coronagraphic imaging
Time-series imaging
Grism time series
Wide field slitless spectroscopy
References
NIRCam users may either observe the full field of view (for a given observing mode) or read out smaller portions
of the detectors, called subarrays.
Subarrays are read out more quickly than the full detector, allowing for shorter integration times. Shorter
integration times can allow brighter objects to be observed without saturating the detector. See the bright
source limits for more information.
Each pixel is read out in 10.00 µsec. For most subarrays, pixels are read out one at a time (Noutputs = 1). For
subarrays spanning the full width of the detector (2,048 pixels), 4 parallel output channels can be utilized for
faster read out times (Noutputs = 4).
Thus, the total time to read out each frame of Nrows × Ncolumns pixels through Noutputs output channels
(including small overhead delays due to telemetry) is:
for Noutputs = 4,
tframe = ((Ncolumns / Noutputs + 12) × (Nrows + 1) + 1) × 10.00 µsec
for Noutputs = 1,
tframe = (Ncolumns / Noutputs + 12) × (Nrows + 2) × 10.00 µsec
The smallest subarray available for science (64 × 64 pixels) can be read out in tframe = 49.4 ms (the shortest
integration time, though multiple groups of readouts are recommended: Ngroups > 1). The full 2048 × 2048 array
is read out through 4 output channels in 10.737 s.
167
When observations are obtained simultaneously at short and long wavelengths, subarrays with identical
numbers of pixels are used in both wavelength channels. Each long wavelength pixel covers 4× more area on
the sky than each short wavelength pixel. So in some cases (e.g., SUB400P ), the long wavelength subarray
covers 4× more area on the sky than the short wavelength subarray. In other cases (e.g., FULL or SUB640 ), 4
short wavelength detectors combine to roughly cover the same area observed by one long wavelength detector.
Subarrays ending with a "P" are designed for point source imaging (or for compact object imaging), and
therefore have uneven coverage between the short wavelength and the long wavelength channel.
Each detector has 2048 × 2048 pixels consisting of a central block of 2040 × 2040 pixels sensitive to light and a
4-pixel wide border of reference pixels along all edges used for calibration. All subarrays positioned along edges
include reference pixels, subtracting slightly from their total area available for science.
After each subarray integration, the subarray pixels are reset pixel-by-pixel, then the remaining detector rows
outside the subarray region are quickly reset, one row at a time. While less effective at clearing out charge than
standard individual pixel resets, this scheme should effectively mitigate latent images that might otherwise build
up and leave persistence on portions of the detector outside the subarray region. The row resets contribute
slightly to the overheads, generally less than a percent of the total integration time. When using the FULL and
FULLP subarrays, all detector pixels are reset individually, thus no additional row resets are required.
The exposure times reported by APT and ETC include time for resets. Subarrays require both pre-exposure pixel
resets (for all pixels in the subarray) and post-integration row resets (for additional numbers of rows specified
below). The full detector requires neither reset for the first integration of an exposure; the pixels are reset
between integrations.
Figure 1 and the tables below summarize the supported subarray sizes, frame times, and fields of view for the
NIRCam observing modes. Subarrays are defined on one NIRCam module or the other (A or B), chosen for
optimal performance for each observing mode.
168
Figure 1. NIRCam subarray locations (subject to change)
Subarrays currently defined in the NIRCam field of view. Subarrays for wide field slitless spectroscopy are still under development. Blue
and red correspond to the short and long wavelength channels, respectively. The 10 NIRCam detectors (A1–5 and B1–5) are labeled
within each module. The coronagraphy field of view, located above the detectors on this plot, is projected onto the detectors when in use.
ND and FS refer to target acquisition with attenuation by the neutral density squares and without, respectively (the latter used for faint
sources that do not require attenuation).
169
Figure 2. Visualizations of imaging subarrays
Demonstrations of the SUB640 and SUB400P subarrays for imaging extended sources and point sources, respectively. When using
SUB640 in imaging mode, subarrays are read out from all 5 module B detectors. When using SUB400P in either imaging or time-series
imaging mode, a subarray is read out from one detector in each wavelength channel. Center: Jupiter 5µm image obtained by VLT/VISIR
(Credit: ESO/L. Fletcher) shown to scale with an angular diameter of 39". This diameter assumes (as in Norwood et al. 2016) that Jupiter
is at a solar elongation of 90° and therefore in JWST's field of regard for observability. In the top right, the NIRCam point spread
function in F200W, simulated by WebbPSF, is also shown to scale. Note the sizes in this figure may be outdated; refer to Table 1 for the
most recent values.
Imaging
All imaging subarrays are on module B.
Table 1. Imaging subarrays
170
Imaging Size in pixels Short wavelength Long Frame Noutputs Reset
subarray Nrows × Ncolumns † wavelength time (s) rows
FOV (each side)
FOV (each side)
FULL 2048 × 2048 2 × 64" + 4"–5" gap 129" 10.73677 4 –
SUB640 640 × 640 2 × 19.9" + 4"–5" gap 40.4" 4.18584 1 2048
SUB320 320 × 320 2 × 9.9" + 4"–5" gap 20.2" 1.06904 1 2048
SUB160 160 × 160 2 × 5.0" + 4"–5" gap 10.1" 0.27864 1 512
FULLP 2048 × 2048 64" 129" 10.73677 4 –
SUB400P 400 × 400 12.4" 25.0" 1.65624 1 2048
SUB160P 160 × 160 5.0" 10.0" 0.27864 1 512
SUB64P 64 × 64 2.0" 4.0" 0.05016 1 256
†
Subarrays ending in "P" are intended for point source imaging. They use only a single detector B1 in the short
wavelength channel, in addition to the long wavelength detector B5. FULLP, added in APT 2021.2, exploits the
full area of a single SW detector (B1) and the whole LW detector (B5), with the target placed in the upper right
region where image quality and detector response are expected to be optimal.
The other non-"P" subarrays are intended for extended sources and use all 4 short wavelength detectors; the
resulting images include 4"–5" gaps along the center of both axes.
The overlapping area between the short wavelength SUB64P subarray and the long wavelength SUB64P
subarray is smaller than JWST's 2-σ pointing accuracy. Set the Primary Dither Type parameter to
SUBARRAY DITHER to increase the spatial coverage and ensure the target is observed in both channels.
All coronagraphic imaging subarrays are on module A. The first 3 rows in the table are for occulted images at
short and long wavelengths. The last 2 rows are for target acquisition.
When observing with the FULL subarray, short wavelength coronagraphy returns data from all 4
detectors. Smaller subarrays return data in just 1 detector.
171
Table 2. Subarrays for coronagraphy and target acquisition
Coronagraphy Size in pixels Nrows × N Short Long Frame N Reset

subarray wavelength wavelength time (s) outputs
rows
columns
FOV (each FOV (each
side) side)
FULL 2048 × 2048 2 × 64" + 4"–5" 129" 10.73677 4 –

gap
SUB640 640 × 640 20" 4.18584 1 2048
SUB320 320 × 320 20" 1.06904 1 2048
SUB128† 128 × 128 4.0" 0.18200 1 512
SUB64† 64 × 64 4.0" 0.05016 1 256
†
For use with target acquisition only
Time-series imaging
Time-series imaging subarrays are on module B. Each observation obtains data on one short wavelength
detector and one long wavelength detector.
Table 3. Time-series imaging subarrays
Time-series Size in pixels Short wavelength Long Frame Noutputs Reset

subarray Nrows × Ncolumns FOV (each side) wavelength time (s) rows
FOV (each side)
FULLP 2048 × 2048 64" 129" 10.73677 4 –
SUB400P 400 × 400 12.4" 25.0" 1.65624 1 2048
SUB160P 160 × 160 5.0" 10.0" 0.27864 1 512
SUB64P 64 × 64 2.0" 4.0" 0.05016 1 256
SUB32TATS † 32 × 32 – 2.0" 0.01496 1 256
172
†
Grism time series

Grism time-series subarrays are on module A. In this mode, the user is offered a choice between one and 4
detector outputs. Each observation obtains data on one long wavelength detector and 2 short wavelength
detectors.
Table 4. Subarrays for grism time series
Grism Size in pixels Short wavelength Long Frame N Reset

subarray Nrows × N FOV wavelength time (s) outputs
rows
FOV
columns
FULL 2048 × 2048 64" × (2 × 64" + 4"–5" 129" × 129" 42.23000 1 –
gaps) 10.73677 4
SUBGRISM256 256 × 2048 8.1" × (2 × 64" + 4"–5" 16.6" × 129" 5.31480 1 2048
gaps) 1.34669 4
SUBGRISM128 128 × 2048 4.1" × (2 × 64" + 4"–5" 8.1" × 129" 2.67800 1 512
gaps) 0.67597 4
SUBGRISM64 64 × 2048 2.0" × (2 × 64" + 4"–5" 4.0" × 129" 1.35960 1 512

gaps) 0.34061 4
SUB32TATSGRISM 32 × 32 – 2.0" × 2.0" 0.01496 1 256

†
†
Wide field slitless spectroscopy

Subarrays are not offered for grism wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS). Note grism spectroscopy is obtained
in the long wavelength channel only, while imaging is obtained in the short wavelength channel. Additional
supporting images are also obtained at long wavelengths.
Table 5. WFSS subarrays
173
WFSS Size in pixels Short wavelength Long Frame Noutputs Reset
subarray Nrows × Ncolumns imaging FOV (each side) wavelength time (s) rows
WFSS & imaging
FOV (each side)
FULL 2048 × 2048 2 × 64" + 4"–5" gap 129" 10.73677 4 –
References
Norwood, J., Hammel, H., Milam, S. et al. 2016, PASP, 128, 025004
Solar System Observations with the James Webb Space Telescope
Latest updates
07 Dec 2021
Added FULLP subarray and reset rows
10 Dec 2019
Added some clarification text to the subarray description
15 Nov 2019
22 Mar 2019
Updated imaging section to match current APT terminology
08 Oct 2018
Missing spaces before hyperlinks added
13 Mar 2018
Corrected, updated, and clarified subarray sizes
18 Nov 2017
Frame times updated for APT 25
174
175
NIRCam Detector Readout
The JWST NIRCam detectors are read out non-destructively multiple times per integration either through one or 4
outputs simultaneously.
NIRCam detectors use MULTIACCUM readout mode

NIRCam detectors operate in MULTIACCUM mode; this means that the charge in each pixel may be read out
multiple times as it accumulates during each integration. The readout process is non-destructive, leaving charge
unaffected and in place—charge is not transferred between pixels as in CCDs. After each integration, the pixels
are read out a final time and then reset, releasing their charge.
NIRCam repeatedly cycles through all pixels in the full frame or a selected subarray, either reading their charge
or resetting them as commanded. Reading and resetting take the same amount of time: 10 µsec per pixel plus
small overheads at the end of each row and frame.
Each detector readout delivers a frame of data. By selecting one of the NIRCam readout patterns, users may
either save all individual frames or averages of groups of frames calculated onboard to reduce data volumes and
enable longer integrations. Fitting "up the ramp" to multiple frames in an integration decreases the effective
read noise, increases the dynamic range, and allows cosmic rays to be identified and rejected.
Readout of the full NIRCam detector (2048 × 2048 pixels) is performed with 4 outputs simultaneously (Noutputs =
4), each delivering a stripe of data (2048 pixel rows × 512 pixel columns), and taking 10.73677 s altogether.
Smaller subarrays are read out more quickly, even though most are read out through a single output (Noutputs =
1). Noutputs is pre-defined for most subarrays, but users are given a choice between Noutputs = 1 or 4 in the
grism time-series observing mode.
176
Figure 1. Readout of a NIRCam detector
NIRCam detectors may be read out through 4 outputs simultaneously. Each row is read out in turn, one pixel at a time, beginning with the
pixels along the bottom marked with small, open, black squares. The orange border represents reference pixels, 4 pixels across (not to
scale), that are insensitive to light. Arrows show the default scan directions; the opposite directions are also possible (though not generally
permitted). Charge is read in place, non-destructively (it is not transferred between pixels as with CCDs).
177
Figure 2. Readout of a NIRCam subarray
Subarrays with fewer than 2,048 columns are read out through a single output. Reference pixels are included on all 4 sides of the full
array and are included in subarrays that are located along the detector edges.
178
Figure 3. Readout of all 8 NIRCam short wavelength detectors
Orientations of all 8 short wavelength detectors in the field of view. Modules A and B are shown with all detectors labeled (A1–4 and B1–
4). The 4 readout quadrants are shaded and readout directions labeled as in Figure 1. "First" marks the first pixel read out for the case of
a single output for each detector. Coronagraphic occulting masks are shown as projected onto the detectors when in use.
179
Figure 4. Readout of both NIRCam long wavelength detectors
Orientations of the 2 long wavelength detectors with readout directions labeled as in Figure 3.
Latest updates
17 Nov 2017
Updated frame time from 10.73676 s to 10.73677 s
180
NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns
JWST NIRCam integrations are defined as groups of detector readouts, some of which are averaged and others
skipped, according to MULTIACCUM patterns.
On this page
Available readout patterns

Frame 0
Integration times
References
As charge accumulates during a NIRCam integration, the detectors are read out multiple times, non-

destructively, sampling the data while conserving the charge in each pixel. This MULTIACCUM technique
enables “up-the-ramp” fitting to determine the count rate from multiple data samples obtained over time. Up-
the-ramp fitting facilitates cosmic ray rejection, reduces the effective readout noise (approximately by the
square root of the number of samples), and increases the dynamic range of the final image (sampling bright
sources before they saturate).
The voltage of each pixel is sampled and converted to a 16-bit (2 Bytes) integer in 10 µs. This data rate could
originate 540 GB/day (accounting for overheads) when using all 10 detectors with 4 simultaneous outputs each.
Such a data volume would overfill the onboard solid state recorder, which can store about 57 GB of data for
science, downloaded twice daily.
To reduce the data rate and enable longer exposures, integrations must adopt predetermined readout patterns
(see Figure 1). Each readout pattern produces a ramp containing up to 20 data points for up-the-ramp fitting. A
data point is obtained by averaging as many as 8 individual samples, or frames (Nframes), followed by other
samples that are discarded (Nskip). The combination of averaged and skipped samples, Nsamples=Nframes+Nskip,
is a group. A readout pattern is thus made by up to 20 groups, or Ngroup=20.
Groups containing a larger number of averaged frames yield lower readout noise but also allow more time for a
potential cosmic ray impact, in which case the entire group, and possibly all those who follow, must be
discarded. Choosing the best readout pattern thus involves a tradeoff. Initial estimates suggest that averaging
more frames generally yields a slightly higher signal-to noise-ratio, for a given group size and Nsamples (Robberto
2009, 2010).
Integrations are terminated by a reset, which clears accumulated charge from the pixels. Multiple integrations
can be sequentially executed without interruption to produce an exposure. The exposure time can therefore be
regarded as the photon collection duration at each dither position.
181
Figure 1. Charge accumulation within a pixel in a NIRCam exposure
This example shows an exposure consisting of 2 integration ramps, each with 3 groups using the SHALLOW4 readout pattern. Each
groups contains 5 samples, with 4 frames averaged and one skipped frame. All group averages are saved along with the first frame of each
integration. Note that skipped reads are not executed in the final group of each integration.
Available readout patterns

NIRCam has 9 readout patterns (see Table 1 and Figure 2). Their names encode their group size (Nsamples)
followed by the number of averaged samples (Nframes).
There are 5 available group sizes (Nsamples = 1, 2, 5, 10, and 20) named according to their potential applications
(RAPID, BRIGHT, SHALLOW, MEDIUM,and DEEP, respectively). For example, a RAPID group consists of a single
sample whereas a DEEP8 group contains 20 samples (Nsamples = 20), 8 of which are averaged (Nframes = 8) and
12 of which are skipped (Nskip = 12). With the exception of RAPID, the name of the readout patterns end with a
number signifying Nframes, the number of averaged frames in each group. SHALLOW2 and SHALLOW4 both have
groups of 5 samples, but Nframes = 2 and Nframes = 4, respectively.
Each readout pattern may contain up to 10 groups (Ngroups = 10) or up to Ngroups = 20 for the DEEP2 and DEEP8
patterns, in most observing modes. Also, in most cases up to 10 integrations are allowed per exposure, as long
as the total exposure time remains within allowed limits. Tighter restrictions are placed on the faster RAPID
pattern, which is designed to save all frames: when all 10 full detectors are being read, exposures are limited to
Ngroups = 1 or 2.
182
Each detector readout takes 10.737 s for the full frame (2048 × 2048 pixels using 4 outputs) or as little as 49.4
ms for the smallest supported science subarray (64 × 64 pixels). Since pixels are read out sequentially, the
integration start and end time varies slightly from one pixel to the next. The total integration time, however, is
identical for all pixels.
The tables and diagrams below illustrate the 9 readout patterns available for NIRCam observations. Tables 2 and
3 give total integration times achievable with multiple groups.
Table 1. Available NIRCam MULTIACCUM readout patterns
Readout pattern Samples per Frames

group averaged
(Nsamples = in each group
Nframes + Nskip) (Nframes)
RAPID 1 1
BRIGHT1 2 1
BRIGHT2 2 2
SHALLOW2 5 2
SHALLOW4 5 4
MEDIUM2 10 2
MEDIUM8 10 8
DEEP2 20 2
DEEP8 20 8
183
Figure 2. Charge accumulation schematic diagrams for all available NIRCam readout patterns
Diagrams of all readout patterns described in Table 1. Blue frames are co-added and saved as groups; red frames are skipped. Axes are
signal vs. time as in Figure 1.
Frame 0
For all readout patterns that involve averaging frames into groups (i.e., all patterns except RAPID or BRIGHT1),
the initial frame will always be saved and is termed “frame 0”. It is saved as a separate extension in the data file
, and its purpose is to increase the dynamic range of the data. If the first averaged group of an integration is
saturated, then the photon count rate cannot be determined; however, frame 0 may not have reached full well
and could therefore be used to estimate the count rate (see Figure 3). Similarly, if an integration has been
contaminated by a cosmic ray that hits within the first group (and after the first frame), frame 0 may still be
trusted even though the group has to be discarded.
Because the count rate in such cases would be determined by calculating the slope using frame 0 only, it is
important that the bias of the detectors is very well characterized. Any uncertainty on the signal level at the very
beginning of an integration (the “reset” or “bias” level) due to, for example, global electronic offsets or pixel-
dependent kTC (thermal) noise, would have a significant effect on slopes determined using only frame 0 (Rest
2018). If the count rate measured in frame 0 is very high, the associated Poisson noise can dominate the
uncertainty of the reset level, making the use of the single frame 0 data point entirely appropriate.
184
Figure 3. An example SHALLOW4 ramp that saturates in the first averaged group
In this example of a SHALLOW4 integration ramp, the first averaged group is "soft" saturated—the non-linearity in the ramp becomes
significant enough that it cannot be reliably corrected. The signal level in subsequent groups reaches full well depth, or "hard"
saturation. Saturated groups must be discarded and cannot be used to determine the count rate. Frame 0, saved separately, is not
saturated and can be used to determine the count rate. The reset point is offset slightly from a signal level of 0 to indicate the uncertainty
on the bias level.
Integration times
Tables 2 and 3 give integration times for groups of reads of the full frame detector (2048 × 2048 pixels) using
4 outputs.
Integration time = Tframe × [(Nframes + Nskip) × (Ngroups -1) + Nframes] = Tframe × (Ngroups × Nsamples – Nskip
)
having defined Nsamples = Nframes + Nskip .
Tframe = 10.73677 s for the full detector that's read out through 4 outputs. Note that skipped reads at the end of
an integration are not executed.
For example, 3 groups of SHALLOW4 consist of 2 groups of 5 reads plus a final group of 4 reads. The 14 total
reads of the full detector take 150.3 s. Each pixel collects photons for this amount of time.
Table 2. Pixel integration times (s) for groups of short readout patterns for the full detector
185
GROUP PATTERN RAPID BRIGHT1 BRIGHT2 SHALLOW2 SHALLOW4
GROUP Nsamples 1 2 2 5 5
PARAMETERS
Nframes 1 1 2 2 4
Nskip 0 1 0 3 1
Ngroups 1 10.7 10.7 21.5 21.5 42.9
2 21.5 32.2 42.9 75.2 96.6
3 32.2 53.7 64.4 128.8 150.3
4 42.9 75.2 85.9 182.5 204.0
5 53.7 96.6 107.4 236.2 257.7
6 64.4 118.1 128.8 289.9 311.4
7 75.2 139.6 150.3 343.6 365.0
8 85.9 161.1 171.8 397.3 418.7
9 96.6 182.5 193.3 450.9 472.4
10 107.4 204.0 214.7 504.6 526.1
Numbers of saved and skipped frames (Nframes and Nskip) are shown in blue and red, respectively, as in Figure 2.
The RAPID pattern is limited to 2 groups per integration when reading out the full detectors in both modules. This
limit increases to 10 groups (shown in gray in Table 2) when using a single module (both full detectors or
subarrays). A single group of BRIGHT2 (also in gray) is disallowed when reading out the full detectors in both
modules.
The limit is always 10 groups for BRIGHT1, SHALLOW2, and SHALLOW4 (see Table 2) as well as the MEDIUM2
and MEDIUM8 patterns listed in Table 3.
Table 3. Pixel integration times (s) for groups of long readout patterns for the full detector
186
GROUP PATTERN MEDIUM2 MEDIUM8 DEEP2 DEEP8
GROUP Nsamples 10 10 20 20
PARAMETERS
Nframes 2 8 2 8
Nskip 8 2 18 12
Ngroups 1 21.5 85.9 21.5 85.9
2 128.8 193.3 236.2 300.6
3 236.2 300.6 450.9 515.4
4 343.6 408.0 665.7 730.1
5 450.9 515.4 880.4 944.8
6 558.3 622.7 1095.1 1159.6
7 665.7 730.1 1309.9 1374.3
8 773.0 837.5 1524.6 1589.0
9 880.4 944.8 1739.4 1803.8
10 987.8 1052.2 1954.1 2018.5
11 2168.8 2233.2
12 2383.6 2448.0
13 2598.3 2662.7
14 2813.0 2877.5
15 3027.8 3092.2
16 3242.5 3306.9
17 3457.2 3521.7
18 3672.0 3736.4
19 3886.7 3951.1
20 4101.4 4165.9
187
MEDIUM and DEEP patterns are limited to 10 and 20 groups per integration, respectively, in imaging and time-
series imaging modes. In other modes, the maximum Ngroups varies for DEEP patterns.
References
Rest, A., 2018, JWST-STScI-006203
Frame 0 Analysis for NIRCam Integrations
Robberto, M., 2009, JWST-STScI-001721

NIRCAM Optimal Readout Modes

NIRCAM Optimal Readout II: General Case (Including Photon Noise)
Latest updates
21 May 2020
Corrected first equation in Integration times section.
Nsamples changed to Nframes:
(Nframes + Nskip) × (Ngroups -1) + Nframes
19 Dec 2019
Added Frame0 reference
17 Nov 2017
TFRAME updated from 10.73676 to 10.73677 s.
Noted APT "Science Time"
20 Jun 2017
Updated explanation of exposure times
188
NIRCam Detector Performance
JWST NIRCam detectors' performance were evaluated during ground testing using measurements of detector
characteristics such as read noise, dark current, saturation level, and persistence.
NIRCam detectors have been optimized to balance a variety of performance metrics such as read noise and dark
current. Unless otherwise specified, the following values were measured during ground testing in a flight-like
configuration. Because the instrument's operating temperature won't be known until on-orbit commissioning,
some of these values are subject to change.
Correlated double sampling (CDS) read noise was measured in pairs of frames differenced to subtract bias
structure and kTC (thermal) noise. The read noise measured in this difference of two images equals the read
noise of a single image multiplied by sqrt(2).
Dark current is generally negligible in the short wavelength detectors (~2 e–/ks) and more significant in the long
wavelength detectors (~35 e–/ks).
"Effective noise," including both read noise and dark current, was measured for 1,000 s integrations. The
combination of ASIC-commanded parameters and tuning yields gains in electrons per analog-to-digital units (e–
/ADU) near 2.
Tables 1 and 2 provide measurements obtained in cryogenic vacuum ground testing (CV3 in 2015/2016) followed
by more detailed descriptions of the various parameters and measurement methods.
Table 1. Average NIRCam detector properties measured in ground testing
189
Parameter Short Long
wavelength wavelength
channel channel
(0.6–2.3 µm) (2.4–5.0 µm)
CDS read noise 16.2 ± 1.3 e– 13.5 ± 0.2 e–

(correlated double sampling)
Dark current in 1,000 s 1.9 ± 1.1 e–/ks 27 ± 5 e–/ks
Effective noise in 1,000 s 5.9 ± 0.5 e– 8.6 ± 0.1 e–

(93 groups of full-frame RAPID)
Gain (e–/ADU) 2.05 ± 0.4 1.82 ± 0.4
Well capacity (saturation level 105,750 ± 2,264 e– 83,300 ± 1,200 e–

with superbias subtracted)
Quantum efficiency (QE) 70% @ 0.6 µm 80% @ 3 µm

80% @ 1.0 µm 90% @ 4 µm
90% @ 2.0 µm 60% @ 5 µm
Interpixel capacitance (IPC) 0.53% ± 0.04% 0.59% ± 0.04%
Post-pixel coupling (PPC) 0.08% ± 0.02% 0.19% ± 0.03%
Persistence (for same exposure time <0.01%

as previous nearly saturated image)
Values are averaged across all detectors in each channel. Uncertainties are either standard deviations or
uncertainties of individual measurements, whichever is larger. Gain uncertainties are estimated to be ~20%.
Quantum efficiency as a function of wavelength is shown in Figure 1.
Table 2. Individual NIRCam detector properties measured in CV3
190
Detector CDS read Dark current Effective noise Gain Saturation raw (ADU)
noise – in –
(e /ks) (e /ADU)
(e–) 1,000 s (e–)
A1 16.16 ± 0.15 0.3 ± 1.6 5.46 ± 0.07 2.08 60,300 ± 1,760
A2 14.88 ± 0.28 2.7 ± 1.9 6.56 ± 0.09 2.02 63,100 ± 600
A3 14.62 ± 0.15 2.8 ± 1.6 5.57 ± 0.06 2.17 59,300 ± 220
A4 14.99 ± 0.18 3.3 ± 1.8 5.46 ± 0.08 2.02 62,000 ± 1,330
B1 16.65 ± 0.08 2.2 ± 1.5 5.43 ± 0.04 2.01 62,300 ± 440
B2 18.06 ± 0.21 0.8 ± 1.5 6.18 ± 0.10 2.14 61,000 ± 360
B3 16.76 ± 0.13 1.7 ± 1.4 5.61 ± 0.08 1.94 62,500 ± 860
B4 17.70 ± 0.40 1.1 ± 1.8 6.54 ± 0.10 2.03 61,000 ± 520
A5 13.33 ± 0.20 33.5 ± 3.1 8.55 ± 0.08 1.84 59,200 ± 960
B5 13.61 ± 0.20 35.0 ± 2.5 8.57 ± 0.05 1.80 58,500 ± 470
Table note: the short wavelength detectors are numbered 1–4 in each module (A and B). The long wavelength
detectors, listed at the end (shaded in yellow), are number "5" in each module.
Gain
The gain values reported in Tables 1 and 2 are from per-pixel gain maps derived in the NIRCam detector
laboratory at the University of Arizona using the photon transfer curve (PTC) method. These gains should be
considered preliminary, with uncertainties on the order of 20%. Gains have not been corrected for interpixel
capacitance.
Readout noise
The noise of a given pixel readout is dominated by contributions from thermal kTC noise, pixel read noise, and 1
/f noise. Since kTC noise is simply a random pedestal offset that occurs during the pixel reset, this noise source
is effectively removed via correlated double sampling (CDS) or fitting a slope to an integration ramp. Integrations
with only a single group will be unable to remove this reset noise, incurring approximately 35 e– worth of kTC
noise.
191
The SIDECAR ASICs* generate significant 1/f noise during detector operations and signal digitization. The
magnitude of this noise is highly sensitive to the ASIC temperature. Luckily, the majority component of the 1/f
noise is common to all 4 detector amplifiers. Efficient use of the side reference pixels can effectively reduce the
measured CDS noise by 1–3 e– depending on the magnitude of 1/f noise. Subarray observations that exclude the
column reference pixels will be unable to track the 1/f contributions.
Pixel read noise occurs in the HgCdTe detector layer and is due to random thermal motion of electric charge in
the pixel interconnects (Johnson noise). CDS read noise values were measured for multiple pairs of frames that
were differenced to remove the array's static bias structure along with kTC contributions. The read noise for a
single frame will be lower by a factor of sqrt(2). Quoted values include reference pixel correction, which reduces
the 1/f noise component.
*
System for Image Digitization, Enhancement, Control, and Retrieval Application-Specific Integrated Circuit
Dark current
All infrared detectors exhibit some level of dark (leakage) current. By virtue of the relatively low operating
temperatures (~40 K) and light-tight environment, NIRCam's detectors show extremely low dark current values.
Short wavelength detectors are consistent with 0.001 e–/s, while long wavelength detectors show moderately
higher values (0.035 e–/s).
Effective noise
The "effective noise" values were measured using a number of 1,000 s dark integrations (full frame RAPID with
93 groups). Linear fits were simultaneously applied to each pixel in a given integration, and the standard
deviation of the slope parameter determines the effective noise. The results include contributions from both read
noise and dark current. In general, the effective noise should follow the MULTIACCUM noise equation (Robberto
2010, Equation 1); however, a consistent excess of ~10% above the expected value was found in the
measurements.
Quantum efficiency (QE)

192
Quantum efficiency (QE)
Polynomial fits to quantum efficiency versus wavelength are shown for the average short wavelength detector
and individually for each long wavelength detector (one in each module). (From filters version 4.0: April 2016.)
193
Figure 1. NIRCam detector quantum efficiencies
Quantum efficiency (QE) versus wavelength averaged among the short wavelength detectors (green) and plotted individually for each long
wavelength detector in module A (red) and module B (blue). (From filters version 4.0: April 2016.)
Interpixel capacitance (IPC)

Interpixel capacitance (IPC) is a type of capacitive coupling between neighboring pixels (Moore et al. 2006). This
phenomenon is commonly confused with charge diffusion, which involves migration of charge carriers to
adjacent pixel cells. Instead, IPC arises from the interaction of electric fields that alter the measured voltages.
In its simplest form, this effect can be parameterized as a convolution kernel described as a 3 × 3 matrix with
values totaling unity. Measurements for NIRCam detectors show values consistent with an assumption of
symmetric coupling: the kernel will have values of zero in the corners, some value α in the left, right, top, and
bottom positions, and the remaining 1−4α in the central pixel. NIRCam arrays show α ranges from 0.005 to
0.006. In other words, approximately 2%–2.5% of the flux measured from a given pixel gets equally redistributed
between the 4 adjacent neighbors.
Uncorrected IPC will attenuate the spatially measured Poisson noise, which results in overestimates of the
conversion gain and reported quantum efficiencies.
194
Post-pixel coupling (PPC)
As the detector clocking scheme addresses and reads each pixel, the analog output signal requires a settling
time to transition between the pixel values. If the settling time is longer than the time between analog-to-digital
conversion (ADC) pulses, then the measured signal for a given pixel will have a value that has not fully
transitioned to the real analog signal. This effect has been dubbed post-pixel coupling (PPC). PPC is measured to
be ~0.1% and ~0.2% or less in the short and long wavelength detectors, respectively.
Persistence
Near-IR detectors commonly exhibit latent images persisting between integration ramps. After array reset, pixels
previously subjected to illumination show an anomalous charge accumulation rate that is initially high but
decreases to dark current levels over time. The amount of accumulated persistence directly correlates with the
stimulating flux as well as the pixel dwell time. Persistence is a deterministic phenomenon that can be corrected
and removed from the science images. NIRCam detectors show the latent emission to be approximately 0.1% of
total illumination (Leisenring et al. 2016).
NIRCam persistence studies were performed under lab conditions that differ from the final flight configuration.
Due to optimized tuning runs, the final bias settings will be different compared to those used in the NIRCam
detector lab. This difference will have an effect on the size of the full depletion region, subjecting flight
observations to a slightly altered trap population than has been characterized.
References
Leisenring, J., Rieke, M., Misselt, K., et al., 2016, SPIE 99152N
Characterizing persistence in JWST NIRCam flight detectors
Moore, A.C., Ninkov, Z., Forrest, W.J., 2006, Optical Engineering, 45, 7
Quantum efficiency overestimation and deterministic cross talk resulting from interpixel capacitance
Robberto, M., 2010, JWST-STScI-002100, SM-12

195
Latest updates
20 Sep 2017
Updated LW dark current
16 Aug 2017
Clarified text in Gain section
196
NIRCam Operations
JWST NIRCam operations include telescope pointing maneuvers (dithers, mosaics, and target acquisitions) using
targetable areas called apertures.
NIRCam operations are observatory-level capabilities applied for instrument science observations. These
operations include pointing maneuvers such as dithers and mosaics. Dithers are performed between exposures
to improve sky coverage and image quality. Mosaics are similar but are generally used to tile areas larger than
the NIRCam field of view. All targeting is performed using apertures, which define each target's position and
extent in the field of view.
Detector operations are covered in NIRCam Detector Overview.
The full list of NIRCam operations articles:
NIRCam Operations
NIRCam Dithers and Mosaics
• NIRCam Primary Dithers
• NIRCam Subarray Primary Dithers
• NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy Dithers
NIRCam Subpixel Dithers
• NIRCam Standard Subpixel Dithers
• NIRCam Small Grid Dithers
• NIRCam Mosaics
• NIRCam Coronagraphic PSF Estimation
• NIRCam Coronagraph Astrometric Confirmation Images
• NIRCam Apertures
NIRCam Target Acquisition
• NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition
• NIRCam Grism Time-Series Target Acquisition
• NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target Acquisition
Latest updates
197
JWST NIRCam dithers and mosaics are pointing shifts performed between multiple exposures to improve sky
coverage and image quality.
Dithers and mosaics are used to improve data quality primarily for the NIRCam imaging and wide field slitless
spectroscopy observing modes. Detailed background information on principles of dithered observations with
JWST are described in Koekemoer & Lindsay (2005), Anderson (2009), Anderson (2011), Anderson (2014), and
Coe (2017).
In summary, the multiple offset exposures described below mitigate bad pixels and provide the following
additional benefits:
Primary dithers are telescope pointing maneuvers (4"–100") to fill gaps in sky coverage between detectors

and mitigate flat field uncertainties.
Subarray primary dithers are small telescope pointing maneuvers (<0.4") to improve the spatial coverage
of the small subarrays.
Standard subpixel dithers are small telescope pointing maneuvers (0.2"–2") to improve the spatial
resolution of stacked images.
Small grid dithers are very small pointing shifts (<0.06") performed quickly with the fine steering mirror
primarily to improve reference PSF subtraction in coronagraphy.
Mosaics are, typically, large pointing shifts (arcminutes) to tile over areas larger than the NIRCam field of
view (5.1' × 2.2').
None of these pointing maneuvers are allowed in either of the NIRCam time-series observing modes.
Dithers and mosaics are distinct in terms of operational ordering. All dither positions must be executed before
any filter changes may be executed, and all filter changes are executed before proceeding to the next tile in a
mosaic. The following ordered list summarizes this sequence of (mostly optional) operations, also shown
graphically in Figure 1:
Exposure
Subpixel dither (if any)
Primary dither (if any)
Filter change (if any)
Mosaic tile step (if any)
198
Figure 1. Operational ordering for dithers, filter changes, and mosaics
This example observing sequence includes 2 subpixel dither steps at each of 2 primary dither steps. (Two are shown for illustration; more
dither steps are preferred in practice.) This pattern repeats after changing filters, and these multi-filter observations repeat at each
pointing in the mosaic. Most of these operations (e.g., changing filters) are optional.
Additional articles about NIRCam dithers and mosaics:

• NIRCam Primary Dithers
• NIRCam Subarray Primary Dithers
• NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy Dithers
• NIRCam Standard Subpixel Dithers
• NIRCam Small Grid Dithers
• NIRCam Mosaics
References
Anderson, J. 2009, JWST-STScI-001738
Dither Patterns for NIRCam Imaging

NIRCam Dithering Strategies I: A Least Squares Approach to Image Combination
Anderson, J., 2014, JWST-STScI-002473

NIRCam Dithering Strategies II: Primaries, Secondaries, and Sampling
Coe, D. 2017, JWST-STScI-005798
More Efficient NIRCam Dither Patterns
Koekemoer, A. M. & Lindsay, K. 2005, JWST-STScI-000647

An Investigation of Optimal Dither Strategies for JWST
199
Latest updates
27 Jan 2018
Clarified dither sizes in parentheses
200
NIRCam Primary Dithers
JWST NIRCam primary dither patterns such as FULL, INTRAMODULE, and INTRASCA fill gaps in sky coverage
between detectors and mitigate flat field uncertainties.
On this page
FULL dithers and mosaics

FULLBOX dithers
INTRAMODULE dithers
INTRAMODULEX dithers
INTRAMODULEBOX dithers
INTRASCA dithers
Pattern sizes and visit splitting
References

The NIRCam primary dither patterns—FULL, FULLBOX, INTRAMODULE, INTRAMODULEX, INTRAMODULEBOX, and
INTRASCA—obtain multiple offset observations covering the ~5" gaps between the short wavelength detectors
and, in the case of FULL and FULLBOX dithers, the ~43" gap between modules A and B. Users can choose to
forgo primary dithers (choose NONE in the Astronomer's Proposal Tool Primary Dither Type parameter field),
while still using subpixel dithers.
Primary dithers are best used in conjunction with smaller secondary subpixel dithers, which provide subpixel
sampling to improve resolution of the final stacked images. Dithering also mitigates bad pixels and flat field
uncertainties by imaging each area of sky with multiple regions of the detectors. Detailed background
information on principles of dithered observations with JWST are described in Koekemoer & Lindsay (2005),
Anderson (2009), Anderson (2011), Anderson (2014), and Coe (2017).
Most of the FULL dither patterns are designed for use with mosaics to cover larger areas (tens of arcmin² or
more) as evenly as possible. The FULLBOX pattern covers all gaps more efficiently (lower slew overheads) but
with less even coverage. The "INTRAMODULE" variants and INTRASCA patterns are designed for smaller science
targets that fit within a single module or detector, respectively.
There are 3 types of NIRCam primary dither patterns that vary between FULL and INTRAMODULE cases—6
primary dither patterns in total. They are selectable from the Primary Dither Type parameter in APT, each
designed with a different goal:
FULL covers large fields (~10 arcmin²) with both modules, without gaps, and provides roughly even depth
of larger areas (>10 arcmin²) when used in conjunction with mosaics.
FULLBOX is more efficient than FULL, covering a rectangular region without gaps when performing 4 or
201
FULLBOX is more efficient than FULL, covering a rectangular region without gaps when performing 4 or
more dithers.
INTRAMODULE fills the 4"–5" gaps between short wavelength detectors within one module (~2' × 2' field)
or both without covering the gap between modules.
INTRAMODULEX is similar to INTRAMODULE but more efficient when performing 4 or more dithers.
INTRAMODULEBOX covers two square regions when performing 4 dithers. It is more compact than
INTRAMODULEX, yielding more area with maximal depth.
INTRASCA mitigates flat field uncertainties by observing small targets (<50" across) in various regions of
the detector.
All patterns are available for NIRCam imaging observations. For wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS), only the
"INTRAMODULE" variants are used.
Examples of these dither patterns are shown in Figures 2–7 as exposure maps, where darker colors indicate
greater exposure time. For reference, Figure 1 shows an exposure map without dithers for the short wavelength
channel. In Figure 8, the diagonal extents of all patterns are plotted versus visit splitting distances, which is the
maximum slew achievable before requiring a new guide star acquisition. (See APT Visit Splitting for more
information.)
The complete primary and secondary subpixel dither patterns are also given as ASCII tables in
arcseconds: NIRCamDitherPatterns.txt.
All pointing offsets are relative to the selected aperture's reference position in that aperture's ideal coordinate
frame (X, Y). All NIRCam apertures are nearly aligned (to ~1° of rotation) with both the JWST coordinate system
(V2, V3) and all detector rows and columns.
Larger pattern sizes may incur visit splitting and greater observing overheads as discussed below.
202
Figure 1. NIRCam exposure map without dithers
Top: field of view covered by the NIRCam detectors in the short wavelength channel (filled blue squares) and long wavelength channel
(red outlined squares). Bottom: exposure map of the short wavelength channel without dithers.
FULL dithers and mosaics
203
Most of the FULL dither patterns are designed for use with mosaics while observing with both modules. They
provide roughly even coverage of large areas. Patterns are defined with 3, 6, 9, 15, 21, 27, 36, and 45 pointings
(selected from the Primary Dithers parameter in APT). Increasing the number of pointings yields more uniform
coverage, approaching a constant depth of ~69% of the exposure time for each pointing. A more compact
pattern, 3TIGHT, is designed for use either on its own or in conjunction with a mosaic to provide roughly even
coverage of larger rectangular areas.
The large dither steps of these patterns require visit splitting (multiple guide star acquisitions), which increases
overheads on observing time. For example, the FULL 3 and FULL 3TIGHT patterns each include 2 horizontal shifts
of 58" (116" total).
204
Figure 2. Examples of FULL dither patterns and mosaics
Examples of the FULL dither pattern alone (left) and as part of a larger mosaic (right). Color represents depth (number of exposures) in
the short wavelength channel. In a mosaic, the average depth is ~69% of the total exposure time. The mosaic tile spacing used here is 5.8'
× 2.25'.
FULLBOX dithers
The FULLBOX dither patterns are significantly more efficient (lower slew times and overheads) than the FULL
patterns. When performing 4 or more dithers, they cover rectangular regions without gaps. The FULLBOX
patterns with only 2 or 3 dither positions have the lowest overheads, but they leave gaps. The 6TIGHT pattern
may be most efficient given its relatively small maneuvers from one position to the next. The FULLBOX "TIGHT"
patterns are generally more efficient and compact; wider patterns are available for 4, 6, and 8 dither positions.
The 8NIRSPEC pattern is designed to cover a 6' × 5' region large enough for NIRSpec pre-imaging.
205
Figure 3. FULLBOX dither patterns
FULLBOX dither patterns. Color represents depth (number of exposures) in the short wavelength channel.
INTRAMODULE dithers
206
The INTRAMODULE dither pattern is smaller, consisting of a 4 × 4 grid of 16 pointings that are 22.5" across. This
covers the short wavelength detector gaps, but not the ~43" gap between modules. Only one guide star is
required for most targets, reducing overheads. Users can select numbers of dither positions between 2 and 16
for this pattern. Figure 4 shows 2 examples. Note that small regions at the center of each module have
significantly lower integration times than their surroundings (1/3 and 9/16 of the totals in these examples).
207
Figure 4. INTRAMODULE dither pattern
The INTRAMODULE dither pattern with 3 pointings (top) and the full 16 pointings (bottom). Color represents depth (number of
exposures) in the short wavelength channel.
INTRAMODULEX dithers
The INTRAMODULEX pattern is very similar to the INTRAMODULE pattern but more efficient (lower slew times
and overheads) when performing 4 or more dither positions. It is slightly more compact, and the positions are
reordered for efficiency.
208
Figure 5. INTRAMODULEX dither pattern
209
The INTRAMODULEX dither pattern with 3, 4, 6, and all 16 pointings (top to bottom). Color represents depth (number of exposures) in
the short wavelength channel.
INTRAMODULEBOX dithers
The INTRAMODULEBOX pattern is more compact than INTRAMODULE or INTRAMODULEX. This yields more area
observed at full depth. It is designed primarily to cover 2 square regions (one for each module) without gaps
when performing 4 dither positions.
210
Figure 6. INTRAMODULEBOX dither pattern
The INTRAMODULEBOX dither pattern with 4 pointings (top) and the full 16 pointings (bottom). Color represents depth (number of
exposures) in the short wavelength channel.
INTRASCA dithers
TheINTRASCA dither patterns are designed for science targets smaller than the 64" × 64" field of view of a single
short wavelength detector, or SCA. The goal is to mitigate flat field uncertainties by moving the target's image to
all edges and corners of the detector.
211
The full pattern consists of a 5 × 5 grid of 25 pointings and comes in 3 sizes (selected in the Dither Size APT
parameter): 8" (SMALL), 16" (MEDIUM), and 24" (LARGE). The nominal dimensions give the approximate half
widths of each full pattern. The smallest patterns can observe larger science targets in all exposures, and vice
versa. For example, the 8" (SMALL) pattern is 16.38" across, allowing a target 47" across (or smaller) to fit within
a short wavelength detector (64" across) in all 25 exposures. The 24" (LARGE) pattern can do the same for
targets just 15" across (or smaller).
The INTRASCA dither pattern sizes are all smaller than the FULL pattern. The INTRAMODULE pattern size (22.5"
across) is between the INTRASCA 8" (SMALL) and INTRASCA 16" (MEDIUM) pattern sizes.
Table 1. INTRASCA dither pattern sizes
Dither size Full pattern width Science target width Pattern diagonal extent
8" (SMALL) 16.38" <47" 23"
16" (MEDIUM) 32.76" <31" 46"
24" (LARGE) 49.12" <15" 69"
Each pattern's name includes the approximate half-width of the full pattern. If the science target width is less
than 64" minus the pattern width, then it will fit within a short wavelength detector in all exposures. The
diagonal extent of the pattern (width × √2) determines whether multiple visits will be required, increasing
overheads.
212
Figure 7. INTRASCA dither patterns
The 8" (SMALL) (top), 16" (MEDIUM) (middle), and 24" (LARGE) (bottom) INTRASCA dither patterns are shown with 5 pointings
(left) and all 25 pointings (right). The patterns are designed for use with science targets that fit within one of the black squares (observed
in all short wavelength channel exposures).
Pattern sizes and visit splitting

Compact dither patterns may be executed in a single visit with a single guide star. Wider dither patterns may
require multiple visits with multiple guide stars, adding overhead time for guide star acquisitions. The maximum
distance allowed between pointings in a single visit is a function of Galactic latitude for fixed targets and 30" for
all moving targets. These distances were determined based on statistical analysis of guide star availability using
observing programs in the Science Operations Design Reference Mission (SODRM). Figure 8 shows this visit
splitting distance along with the diagonal extent of each NIRCam primary dither pattern.
The INTRAMODULEBOX, INTRAMODULEX, and INTRASCA8" (SMALL) patterns may always be executed within a

single visit. The same is usually true for the INTRAMODULE pattern. Larger INTRASCA patterns require visit
splitting for some targets. FULL patterns always require multiple visits. The FULLBOX patterns may be executed
within a single visit if the visit splitting distance is 50" (55") or greater for the "TIGHT" (wider) patterns.
213
Figure 8. Visit splitting for NIRCam primary dither patterns
Visit splitting distance as a function of Galactic latitude (thick black line) for fixed (stationary) targets compared with the diagonal extent
of each NIRCam primary dither pattern (dashed lines). FULL 3TIGHT is the smallest FULL pattern; larger FULL patterns are not
shown. Moving targets have a visit splitting distance of 30", not shown.
References



214
Latest
updates 22 Nov 2019
NIRCamDitherPatterns.txt file updated to include Coronagraphy Small Grid Dithers
(SGDs) available since APT 25.0.3
03 Nov 2017
Added new dither patterns available in APT 25.4
19 Mar 2020
NIRCamDitherPatterns.txt file updated to include additional WFSS subpixel dither
patterns added in APT 2020.2
Originally 28 Dec 2016

published
215
NIRCam Subarray Primary Dithers
The SUBARRAY_DITHER primary dither pattern can be used to increase the overlapping spatial coverage
between the long wavelength SUB64P subarray and the short wavelength SUB64P subarray, which are observed
simultaneously to ensure that the target is observed in both channels.
See also: NIRCam Dithers and Mosaics
Several subarrays are available for imaging with NIRCam. Since the long wavelength (LW) and short wavelength
(SW) detectors do not overlap perfectly, the SW and LW overlapping spatial coverage can be smaller than the
nominal subarray size. For the smallest subarrays, the overlapping area is small enough that targets may be
placed near the edge of the subarray, or may possibly be missed entirely.
The absolute fine pointing accuracy, without a science target acquisition, is expected to be 0.10" (1-σ
error, per axis). This uncertainty is dominated by guide star catalog position errors and pointing errors
due to roll control.

The smallest subarray (SUB64P) is 64 × 64 pixels. In the SW channel, that corresponds to about 2" ×
2". However, the area that overlaps with the LW channel is only about 2" × 1.1" (Figure 1). A primary dither
pattern (SUBARRAY_DITHER) is available for imaging with the subarray to provide larger spatial coverage. The
step size is approximately 0.3" and users can choose 2–4 dithers (Table 2, Figure 2). When all 4 dithers are used,
the area covered by both the SW and LW channel is approximately 2.6" × 1.9", which encompasses a 2-σ
pointing uncertainty. Alternatively, users can use a mosaic.
The SUBARRAY_DITHER option can be used with any of the subarrays. The step size remains the same for all
cases.
216
Figure 1. The SUB64P subarray
The overlap between the short wavelength channel (blue) subarray and the long wavelength channel (red) subarray is small (about 2" ×
1.1"). The yellow star marks the target position of the source and the yellow circle marks the 2- pointing uncertainty. The location of the
SUB64P subarray with respect to the full field of view can be found on the NIRCam Detector Subarrays article.
Table 1. SUBARRAY_DITHER positions
217
Position Offsets (arcsec)
# X Y
1 -0.335 -0.335
2 +0.335 +0.335
3 -0.295 +0.295
4 +0.295 -0.295
218
Figure 2. Subarray primary dithers
Screenshot from APT (v25.4.2) showing the Aladin view of SUB64P with 4 SUBARRAY_DITHERS. The background image is a Hubble
WFC3/IR image at 1.27 µm. These dithers increase the overlapping coverage of the long wavelength SUB64P subarray (large boxes) and
the short wavelength SUB64P subarray (small boxes), which are observed simultaneously. The black box outlines the resulting coverage
when all 4 dithers are used, approximately 2.6" × 1.9". The red crosshairs mark the position of the target.
Latest updates
219
Spectroscopy Dithers
JWST NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy dithers are telescope pointing maneuvers performed between
multiple exposures to improve sky coverage, image quality, and spectral resolution.
On this page
Subpixel dithers
Primary dithers
Dithers for out-of-field source identification
Both primary and subpixel dithers are recommended for NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS)
observations. Subpixel dithers are small offsets that improve the spatial resolution, and therefore the spectral
resolution in grism mode, by increasing the pixel sampling of the PSF. Primary dithers are larger offsets designed
to cover the gaps between detectors in the field of view.
Subpixel dithers
With NIRCam, WFSS observations are available only in the long wavelength (LW) channel (2.4–5.0 µm), which is
Nyquist sampled at 4 µm. The resolving power (R = λ/Δλ) is 1,525 at 4 µm, but decreases to R = 1,200 at 2.5 µm
. This can be improved with subpixel dithering. The subpixel dither patterns for WFSS mode are optimized both
for LW grism data and short wavelength (SW) imaging, which are obtained simultaneously. The SW imaging data
will serve to precisely measure the dither offsets, which are affected by JWST’s slew uncertainty (~5 mas, 1-
sigma/axis). Knowledge of the dither offsets is crucial for determining the wavelength calibration.

There are 3 available subpixel dither patterns: 2-point, 4-point, and 9-point. Another option is NONE. (NONE and
2-point were added in APT 2020.2.) The offsets are shown in Table 1 and Figure 1.
Table 1. Subpixel dither patterns for NIRCam WFSS observations
220
Position Offsets (SW pixels approx.) Offsets (arcsec)
# X pix Y pix V2 V3
2-point dither pattern
1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 19.500 19.500 0.618 0.618
1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 19.500 -4.000 0.618 -0.127
3 -4.000 19.500 -0.127 0.618
4 -19.500 -19.500 -0.618 -0.618
1 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
2 -15.667 -4.000 -0.497 -0.127
3 15.667 -8.000 0.497 -0.254
4 -4.000 -15.667 -0.127 -0.497
5 -17.667 -17.667 -0.560 -0.560
6 17.667 -11.667 0.560 -0.370
7 -8.000 15.667 -0.254 0.497
8 -11.667 17.667 -0.370 0.560
9 11.667 11.667 0.370 0.370
Table note: NIRCam's coordinates are very close to the JWST instrument ideal coordinate system (V2,V3).
221
Figure 1. WFSS subpixel dither patterns
Subpixel dither patterns for NIRCam WFSS observations (values shown in Table 1).
Primary dithers
INTRAMODULE primary dithers are also enabled for WFSS observations. These serve to cover the gaps between
SW detectors for the simultaneous SW imaging (there are no gaps in the WFSS spatial coverage itself because
that mode is available exclusively in the LW channel). At least 3 INTRAMODULE dithers are necessary to cover all
SW gaps.
Dithers for out-of-field source identification
222
Direct imaging with NIRCam is required for WFSS observations at the end of each dither sequence to identify
sources in the WFSS data. However, the grisms deflect the light from the target in a direction parallel to the
dispersion direction, so some sources that are outside of the imaging FOV will nonetheless produce spectra
dispersed onto the detector when the grism is in use. To image the affected areas, a third type of dither is
automatically implemented that images the area to each side of the detector along the dispersion direction.
These are called out-of-field dithers.
When observing with the grism that disperses along the V2 axis (GRISMR), the out-of-field dither offsets are ±12"
along the V2 axis. When observing with the grism that disperses along the V3 axis (GRISMC), the offsets are
larger because the pickoff mirrors are larger in the V3 direction to allow for the coronographic substrates. In that
case, the offsets are -12" and +35" along V3. Depending on the Galactic latitude of the target, the GRISMC
offsets may be larger than the visit splitting distance, which requires multiple visits (and increased overheads).
(See APT Visit Splitting for further information on visit splitting.)
Latest updates
17 Mar 2020
2-point subpixel dither option added in APT 2020.2
Originally published 11 Jul 2017
223
JWST NIRCam subpixel dithers are small pointing offsets between exposures that mitigate an undersampled PSF
and bad detector pixels.
NIRCam subpixel dithers are small pointing offsets performed between exposures in imaging, coronagraphy, and
wide field slitless spectroscopy observations. They include subpixel offsets designed to mitigate undersampled
PSFs. The available subpixel dither patterns serve different purposes for different observing modes:
NIRCam standard subpixel dithers, for imaging observations, are small telescope pointing maneuvers (0.2"
–2") designed to optimally sample the PSF and improve the spatial resolution of stacked images.
NIRCam small grid dithers, for imaging and coronagraphy, are very small pointing shifts (<0.06")
performed quickly and precisely with the fine steering mirror:
Imaging small grid dithers perform the same optimal pixel subsampling as standard subpixel
dithers, but with smaller shifts performed with more efficiency.
Coronagraphy small grid dithers are designed to optimize PSF subtraction of a reference star from
the science target.
NIRCam WFSS subpixel dithers (WFSS) are small telescope pointing maneuvers (~0.6") optimized to
improve long wavelength grism observations and short wavelength simultaneously-obtained images.
The complete primary and subpixel dither patterns are available as ASCII tables, in arcseconds:
NIRCamDitherPatterns.txt.
References



Lajoie, C-P et al., 2016, SPIE, 99045K

Small-grid dithers for the JWST coronagraphs
224
Latest updates
225
NIRCam Standard Subpixel Dithers
JWST NIRCam subpixel dithers are small pointing offsets between exposures that mitigate an undersampled PSF
and bad detector pixels.
On this page
Patterns for 2–9 positions

Pattern for 12–64 positions
References
NIRCam subpixel dithers are small pointing offsets performed between exposures in imaging or wide field slitless
spectroscopy (WFSS) observations. They include subpixel offsets to improve the spatial resolution of the final
combined (drizzled) image mosaic of all exposures.
This is especially important below 2 µm in the short wavelength channel (0.6–2.3 µm) and below 4 µm in the
long wavelength channel (2.4–5.0 µm). Below these Nyquist wavelengths, NIRCam's detectors undersample the
JWST PSF (the FWHM is less than 2 pixels). This undersampling can be most severe in the short wavelength
channel, up to a factor of ~2 with F070W. (Wavefront errors may broaden the PSF below 2 µm, but PSF features
will still scale as λ/D.) Therefore, subpixel dither patterns were designed to provide optimal benefits for the ~0.
031" pixels in the short wavelength channel (Anderson 2009). Detailed background information on principles of
dithered observations with JWST are also described in Koekemoer & Lindsay (2005), Anderson (2011), Anderson
(2014), and Coe (2017).

The STANDARD subpixel dither patterns available for NIRCam imaging are discussed below. Separate WFSS
subpixel dither patterns are available for WFSS observations.
Each STANDARD subpixel dither step includes shifts along both detector axes (x and y) to mitigate bad pixels.
Each shift is an integer plus a fractional pixel (subpixel) step (e.g., 2.5 pixels). The integer component mitigates
bad detector pixels and flat field uncertainties, while the fractional subpixel step improves PSF sampling and
achievable spatial resolution. These patterns are detailed below. Small patterns (up to 0.41" across) are
designed individually for up to 9 dither positions. Subsets of a single larger pattern (1.74" across) are used when
requesting 12–64 dither positions.
More compact subpixel SMALL-GRID-DITHER patterns are also available for imaging. They are performed more
quickly (lower overheads) using the fine steering mirror instead of slewing the telescope. They also includes
fewer integer pixel steps, reducing their ability to mitigate bad pixels or flat field uncertainties. The fractional
pixel steps are exactly preserved for up to 9 dither positions.
226
NIRCam subpixel dithers are smaller than the primary dithers used to cover detector gaps and mitigate flat field
uncertainties on larger scales. Primary dithers do offer some sub-optimal subpixel sampling.
Note when performing coordinated parallel observations, additional custom subpixel dither patterns are available
that achieve optimal pixel phase sampling for both the prime and parallel instruments. NIRCam's small grid
dithers are not available for use with parallels as they are not large enough for other instruments.
The complete primary and subpixel dither patterns are available as ASCII tables, in arcseconds:
Subpixel dither offsets may be modified slightly as measurements of the NIRCam detector pixel scales
are refined.
All pointing offsets are relative to the selected aperture's reference position in that aperture's ideal coordinate
frame (X, Y). All NIRCam apertures are nearly aligned (to ~1° of rotation) with both the JWST coordinate system
(V2, V3) and all detector rows and columns.
Patterns for 2–9 positions

Eight small (up to 0.41" across) STANDARD subpixel dither patterns were designed with 2–9 positions (Figure 1).
The 4-point pattern samples the pixel-phase space with twice the resolution of the NIRCam pixels. The 9-point
pattern samples 3 times the pixel resolution, which would be most useful for F070W observations.
All 8 patterns are kept small enough (within a 13 × 13 pixel box, 0.41" on a side) to ensure coherent subpixel
shifts for all pixels on the detector, given geometric distortion. Allowing for 2% deviations in pixel scale at the
detector edges, a 13-pixel shift at the detector center might differ by 0.26 pixel at the edges. This subpixel
deviation maintains coherent subpixel shifts across the detector.
APT provides options for N = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 Subpixel Positions (excluding 6 and 8 for simplicity). N = 1 means
no subpixel dithering.
227
Figure 1. NIRCam subpixel dither patterns for 2–9 positions
228
Each row shows a dither pattern defined for use with a different number of Subpixel Positions: N = 2–9. The two central columns show
the full dither patterns in units of short wavelength pixels (0.031") and long wavelength pixels (0.063"), respectively. The outer two
columns show the phase spacing, or fractional pixel offset, of each dither position. The open circles show the phase spacing pattern
repeated outside the central pixel. Reproduced from Anderson 2009, Figures 17 and 18.
Pattern for 12–64 positions

The 9-point pattern provides the finest spatial sampling required. Finer details would be blurred by the PSF, even
in F070W imaging. Additional subpixel dithers cannot improve image resolution, but they can be used in a larger
pattern to further mitigate bad pixels and flat-field uncertainties.
A larger 64-point pattern (Figure 2), designed within a 55 × 55 pixel box (1.74" on a side), consists of 16 sets of
4-point dither patterns, each fitting within a 10 × 10 pixel box (0.32" on a side) and doubling the native pixel
sampling. The full 16-set pattern spirals outward from the center to cover a larger area with each set of 4 dither
points. This strategy is similar to that used when imaging the Hubble Ultra Deep Field (HUDF).
229
APT provides options for N = 12, 16, 20, 24, 30, 36, 48, and 64 Subpixel Positions. Selecting 12, for example,
executes the first 12 points of the 64-point pattern below.
230
Figure 2. NIRCam standard subpixel dither patterns for 10 or more positions
The larger 64-point dither pattern designed for use with 12 or more Subpixel Positions. (The first N points of the pattern are executed.)
Top: pixel phase shifts. Bottom: full shifts. Left: short-wavelength channel in 0.031" pixel units. Right: long-wavelength channel in
0.063" pixel units. Reproduced from Anderson 2009, Figure 20.
References


231

Latest updates
18 Nov 2020
Fixed bad link in "custom subpixel dither patterns."
19 Mar 2020
Link added to WFSS subpixel dither patterns
03 Nov 2017
Mentioned new SGD pattern available in APT 25.4
13 Jul 2017
Updated pixel scale values.
232
NIRCam Small Grid Dithers
JWST NIRCam small grid dithers are quick sub-arcsecond pointing offsets used primarily to improve
coronagraphic PSF subtraction.
On this page
Imaging
References
Small grid dithers (SGD) are very small, fast, and precise pointing offsets of a target image. They
are implemented in NIRCam coronagraphic imaging to obtain multiple images of a reference star to optimize the
PSF subtraction (Lajoie et al. 2016). As of APT 25.4, new SGD patterns designed for NIRCam imaging are
available (Coe 2017).
Unlike other JWST dithers, which are executed by slewing the telescope, small grid dithers are executed using
the fine steering mirror while remaining under control of the JWST Fine Guidance Sensor (FGS). The range of
motion is restricted to ~1 FGS pixel (~69 mas on a side), but the pointings are performed very quickly (in a few
seconds) and accurately (~2 mas uncertainty per axis).
By comparison, JWST slews of 25" or less (small angle maneuvers, or SAMS) take over 48 s to execute (~20 s +
overheads) and have expected accuracies of ~5 mas per axis. Such slews are used in coronagraphic imaging to
position science targets and PSF reference stars behind the occulters.
Ideally the science and PSF targets would be positioned at exactly the same place behind the occulter. In
practice, the subpixel pointing differences of ~5 mas per axis significantly alter the scattered light speckle
pattern. Small grid dithers can be used to place one of those targets (usually the PSF reference) at multiple
positions behind the occulter (see Tables 1 and 2 and Figure 1), and that grid of PSF images can be used to
improve the PSF subtraction from the science image (Lajoie et al. 2016).
The limited range of motion for small grid dithers (~69 mas per axis) spans at most a few NIRCam pixels (32 and
65 mas across in the short and long wavelength channels, respectively). This restricts the utility of small grid
dithers for improving flat fielding and bad pixel replacement in standard imaging and wide field slitless
spectroscopy; these observing modes rely on somewhat larger subpixel dithers or SGD dithers in combination
with larger primary dithers.
233
Figure 1. shows the 5 offered SGD patterns for NIRCam coronagraphic imaging. Tables 1 and 2 lists all their
coordinates in milliarcseconds (mas). Observing a PSF reference star with more SGD positions ensures a better
PSF subtraction (improved diversity) but increases the overall observing time for a given program. It is a trade-
off. Certainly, the largest number of positions is recommended for the most challenging programs (e.g., when
the object to be imaged is in the close vicinity of the mask, typically from within the inner working angle to one
arcsecond).
234
Figure 1. Small grid dither patterns for NIRCam coronagraphic imaging
Illustration of the small grid dither patterns for round masks (left) and bar masks (right). Offsets are also listed in Tables 1 and 2.
Table 1. Small grid dither offsets for round masks
235
Position Offsets (mas) Position Offsets (mas)
# X Y # X Y
5-POINT-BOX 9-POINT-CIRCLE
1 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 0.0
2 +15.0 +15.0 2 0.0 +20.0
3 -15.0 +15.0 3 -15.0 +15.0
4 -15.0 -15.0 4 -20.0 0.0
5 +15.0 -15.0 5 -15.0 -15.0
5-POINT-DIAMOND 6 0.0 -20.0
1 0.0 0.0 7 +15.0 -15.0
2 0.0 +20.0 8 +20.0 0.0
3 0.0 -20.0 9 +15.0 +15.0
4 +20.0 0.0
5 -20.0 0.0
Table 2. Small grid dither offsets for bar masks
Position Offsets (mas) Position Offsets (mas)
# X Y # X Y
3-POINT-BAR 5-POINT-BAR
1 0.0 0.0 1 0.0 0.0
2 0.0 +15.0 2 0.0 +20.0
3 0.0 -15.0 3 0.0 +10.0
4 0.0 -10.0
5 0.0 -20.0
Imaging
236
Imaging
NIRCam imaging small grid dithers can be used in lieu of subpixel dithers. They perform the same optimal pixel
subsampling as subpixel dithers, but with smaller patterns. That is, the fractional pixel steps are preserved, but
fewer whole pixel steps are taken. Small grid dithers can still achieve some mitigation of bad pixels, especially in
the short wavelength channel. The overheads are reduced and pointings are more precise compared to standard
subpixel dithers. The 9 available patterns are shown below, and the complete list of pointing offsets in
arcseconds are given in the dither ASCII table:
237
Figure 2. Small grid dither patterns for NIRCam imaging
In these illustrations of the SMALL-GRID-DITHER patterns for NIRCam imaging, short and long wavelength pixels are shown in blue
and pale red, respectively. Dither points are black and numbered. The dither path is colored yellow – brown – black. Light gray points
mark the subpixel phasing covered by each pattern. Reproduced from Coe 2017.
References
Lajoie, C-P et al., 2016, SPIE, 99045K

Small-grid dithers for the JWST coronagraphs
Lajoie, C-P, Soummer, R., Pueyo, L., and The JWST Coronagraphs Working Group, 2016, STScI Newsletter, Vol 32,
Issue 02
Improving Webb Coronagraphic Performance with Small-Grid Dithers
238
Latest updates
03 Nov 2017
Added new pattern available for imaging in APT 25.4
06 Jun 2017
Added Figure 1
19 Apr 2017
Added Tables 1 and 2
239
NIRCam Mosaics
JWST NIRCam mosaics are used primarily to cover areas larger than the 5.1' × 2.2' NIRCam field of view.
See also: NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels

JWST mosaics may be used in NIRCam imaging and wide field slitless spectroscopy observations — its primary
purpose is to cover areas larger than the 5.1' × 2.2' NIRCam field of view. The spatial extent of each tile with
zero overlap is 5.115033' × 2.221150' (the horizontal and vertical extent of the NIRCam aperture ALL). This
spacing may be decreased (to make the pointings overlap, as is the default) or increased (to widen the gaps
between pointings). By default, spacing is defined along NIRCam's ALL aperture axis, which is roughly aligned
with the JWST (V2, V3) coordinate system and the NIRCam detector rows and columns.
Optionally, shifts may be added between rows and/or columns to skew the pattern; these "shifts" are specified
as rotation angles in the APT observation form's Mosaic Properties tab.
All dithers and filter changes are performed at each pointing (or tile) in the mosaic before proceeding to the next
tile.
To obtain a roughly even observing depth over large areas, consider using the NIRCam FULL primary dither
patterns in conjunction with mosaics with tile spacings of 5.8' × 2.25'.
240
Figure 1. Sky coverage of nominal NIRCam 2 × 2 mosaic with zero overlap
This figure shows a nominal 306.902" × 133.269" tile spacing of a NIRCam mosaic composed of 2 rows and 2 columns, with 0% overlap
and zero shifts between rows or columns. The mosaic may be adjusted to have smaller or larger spacing, as well as shifts between columns
or rows. Short and long wavelength detectors are shown as blue filled squares and red outlines, respectively. Each X marks the reference
target spot for one pointing when observing with both modules. Note that when observing with both modules, the target reference position
falls in the gap between modules.
Latest updates
241
NIRCam Coronagraphic PSF
Estimation
Estimating the coronagraphic point spread function (reference PSF) is essential to achieving the deepest possible
contrast and recovering faint astrophysical signals in the vicinity of a bright central object.
On this page
NIRCam PSF subtraction strategies

References
See also: NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging , JWST High-Contrast Imaging
The purpose of PSF subtraction is to achieve limiting contrast between a bright host (star, AGN, etc.) and reveal
the faintest detectable astrophysical signal or "companion" in its vicinity. For more information, please refer to
HCI NIRCam Limiting Contrast.
The companion may be an extended source, such as a circumstellar disk, a jet, or a point source, such as an
exoplanet. The PSF reference image may be a composite of multiple images obtained after pointing changes—
either a roll or an offset. To perform PSF subtraction, the reference image is scaled and subtracted from science
images.
The idea is to subtract the closest 3-dimensional PSF (X, Y and intensity) profile of an unresolved star to a given
scientific observation.
NIRCam PSF subtraction strategies

See also: HCI ETC Instructions
The most critical and consequential step in the post-processing of NIRCam coronagraphic images is subtracting
the estimated wing of the point spread function (PSF) of a target centered on a coronagraphic mask (occulter).
Currently, NIRCam supports 3 PSF subtraction strategies, each with its own pointing operations, which vary in
complexity and performance.
1. In the "reference star strategy" (RSS), coronagraphic images are obtained for both the host and reference
targets. The reference image is to be scaled and subtracted from the host image to reveal any companion
features, which are now as free as possible of residual light from the host.
2. The "angular differential imaging strategy" (ADIS) is self-referenced, involving only the host target. Two
242
2. The "angular differential imaging strategy" (ADIS) is self-referenced, involving only the host target. Two
coronagraphic images are obtained that differ only in a small (5°–10°) roll maneuver, which must be
sufficient to fully separate the 2 positions of the companion-feature image. Observatory roll is highly
restricted, to ±5°, and observation planning is supported by the JWST Coronagraphic Visibility Tool.
3. The "small grid dither strategy" (SGDS) involves a library of reference-target images, obtained in a pattern
of small, highly accurate, subpixel offsets (dithers). The library comprises samples of the slight variations
in the PSF wing as a function of position relative to the occulter. Because the range of the SGDS pattern is
larger than the expected error in TA, the optimal reference PSF for subtraction is a careful interpolation in
the SGDS library. A variety of algorithms are available to perform the optimal subtraction, such as LOCI or
KLIP.
References
Beichman, C. A. et al. 2010, PASP, 122:162
Imaging Young Giant Planets from Ground and Space
Perrin, M. et al. 2013, JWST-STScI-003472

Sample Target Acquisition Scenarios for JWST
Stark, C. et al. 2016, JWST-STScI-004707

How to Implement a JWST Coronagraphic Observation Sequence in APT
Latest updates
Originally published 14 Sep 2017
243
NIRCam Coronagraph Astrometric
Confirmation Images
The JWST NIRCam coronagraphic imaging template offers an astrometric confirmation image option to allow
users to infer the location of occulted objects in science exposures to a precision of about 1–5 mas.
On this page
Astrometric confirmation image procedure

An example use case
References
It is critical to know the position of a target behind the coronagraphic occulting mask with high precision
(typically a fraction of a pixel). The relative position or orientation of any detected surrounding structure or
potential companion can then be measured accurately. As one example, knowing the position of a putative
companion around a nearby, bright host star with high precision is critical for understanding whether the object
is bound or not, and if so, for measuring its orbital properties over time.
Furthermore, the expected contrast performance is dependent on how accurately a host target is placed behind
the center of an occulting spot or the middle of an occulting bar. The accuracy of small angle maneuvers in the
target acquisition process for NIRCam can have uncertainties of up to 20 mas since the NIRCam coronagraph
target acquisition subarrays are located at distances of 7.1"–14” from the centers of the occulting masks. For
these reasons and others, coronagraphic observations with NIRCam provide an optional way to obtain full frame
images before and after target acquisition, thus permitting an accurate reconstruction of where the target
acquisition process placed the target behind the chosen occulter.
Astrometric confirmation image procedure

The NIRCam coronagraphic imaging template provides an option to request that astrometric images be obtained
with a given science observation. Specifically, an observer can request (1) a first exposure with the host star or
galaxy visible in the target acquisition field (after the target acquisition subarray is read out but before the
object is placed behind the occulter) and (2) a second exposure after the host star or galaxy is placed behind the
occulter and the science exposures have been acquired, as shown in Figure 1.
244
The first exposure allows the observer to calculate precisely the location of the object of interest (not occulted at
first) relative to other objects visible in the field. The second exposure then allows the observer to infer the
position of the occulted object behind the coronagraph mask after completion of the target acquisition offset
preceding the science observation. While science observations can in certain cases be taken in full frame, taking
these astrometric confirmation images is the only way to accurately know (typically to a fraction of pixel) the
position of the target of interest (host star or galaxy) during the science exposures.
Astrometric confirmation images must be obtained using the target acquisition filters: either F210M in the short
wavelength channel or F335M in the long wavelength channel. Images are collected in only one detector: A2 for
MASK210R, A4 for MASKSWB, and A5 for the LW occulters. However, astrometric confirmation images can be
obtained with user-selected detector readout patterns, numbers of groups per integration, and numbers of
integrations per exposure. This information is specified in the appropriate section of the NIRCam coronagraphic
imaging observation template in APT, and appropriate exposure specifications can be obtained by performing
calculations in the JWST Exposure Time Calculator.
245
Figure 1. Examples of NIRCam Coronagraph Astrometric Confirmation Images
Upper panels: example of astrometric confirmation images for the SW channel using MASK210R. The first astrometric confirmation
image (left panel) is taken with the host star in a target acquisition field (the star of interest is indicated by the blue arrow). Simultaneous
imaging of the host star and background field (purple stars and galaxies) provides the opportunity to measure the absolute position of the
host star with respect to the background field at very high precision. The second astrometric confirmation image (right panel) is taken
with the host star behind the occulter and allows the observer to infer the position of the occulted object behind the coronagraph mask
after completion of the target acquisition and science observation. Images are collected using only one detector (in this specific example
A2. If MASKSWB is used, images are collected using detector A4).
Lower panels: same as upper panels, but the for the LW channel using MASK335R. The first astrometric confirmation image (left panel)
is taken with the host star in a target acquisition field (the star of interest is indicated by the red arrow). The second astrometric
confirmation image (right panel) is taken with the host star behind the occulter.
An example use case

246
An example use case
Among other things, the NIRCam coronagraphs may be used to search for sub-stellar companions around young
stars in Taurus, located at typical distances >150 pc with typical proper motions ~10 mas/yr. In order to
distinguish gravitationally bound companions from line-of-sight objects at the 5-sigma level during one year, the
position of an occulted host star must be measured with ~1.5 mas astrometric precision during a single epoch.
By obtaining astrometric images before and after the target acquisition for each observation, the position of the
target behind the occulter can be reconstructed, and the relative position of nearby structures can be
determined to the needed accuracy (in this case thanks to the presence of many background stars in a
crowded region).
References
Krist, J. et al. 2010 "Space Telescopes and Instrumentation 2010" ed. J. Oschmann et al., SPIE 77313J
Krist, J. et al. 2009 "Techniques and Instrumentation for Detection of Exoplanets IV" SPIE 74400W
The JWST/NIRCam coronagraph: mask design and fabrication
Krist, J. et al. 2007, "Techniques and Instrumentation for Detection of Exoplanets III", SPIE 66930H
Hunting Planets and Observing Disks with the JWST NIRCam Coronagraph
Green, J. et al. 2005 "Techniques and Instrumentation for Detection of Exoplanets II", SPIE 59050L
High contrast imaging with the JWST NIRCAM coronagraph
Latest 28 May 2020

updates Updated text and Figure 1 to specify that astrometric confirmation images are collected using
only 1 detector (A2 for MASK210R, A4 for MASKSWB, and A5 for LW occulters).
Originally 14 Sep 2017

published
247
NIRCam Apertures
JWST apertures define target reference positions on the detectors and the nominal extent of the field of view. For
NIRCam — for all observations and for target acquisition — they depend on the APT observing template in use,
module selected (e.g. A, B, or ALL), subarray selected, and in some cases, other APT template parameters.
Apertures define targetable areas and their extents in the JWST field of view. These definitions are stored in
the Science Instrument Aperture File (SIAF).
Each aperture has a reference position which will generally coincide with the observed target at the first dither
position, and coordinates defining the field of view for the given instrument configuration. Detector-specific
apertures define the reference position and subarray field of view for each detector. Compound apertures
represent, in a simplified way, the overall field of view when multiple detectors are collecting data. Nearly all
NIRCam science observations involve data collection on multiple detectors, and in those cases the reference
position on one detector is defined as the reference position for the entire observation. APT uses the relevant
apertures to support visualization of observations in the Aladin tool.
Representative entries are given below for the NIRCam apertures corresponding the the FULL subarrays on all 10
detectors and the subarrays used for coronagraphy on module A. (The coronagraphic field of view is projected
onto the detectors when in use.)

The ALL aperture is used for full frame observations with both modules. It defines the full extent displayed in APT
Aladin as well as the default size for each tile in a mosaic. Full frame observations with module B alone use the
"Bs" aperture. "Bs" spans the full extent of the short wavelength detectors in module B.
The aperture coordinates may change slightly based on calibration measurements obtained in flight.
All NIRCam apertures are nearly aligned (to ~1° of rotation) with both the JWST coordinate system (V2, V3) and
all detector rows and columns.
248
Figure 1. Prominent NIRCam apertures
Target reference positions ("X") and and aperture vertices (outlines) for the NIRCam detectors and subarrays assigned to the
coronagraphic masks in JWST (V2, V3) coordinates. Each detector is labeled (A1–B5). Blue and red correspond to the short and long
wavelength channels, respectively. The smaller squares at the top are coronagraphic apertures with mask names labeled below. The larger
ALL and Bs apertures are drawn in black dashed and gray dotted lines, respectively. Coordinates for all of these apertures are given in the
tables below.
Table 1. NIRCam apertures for all 10 detectors and FULL subarrays, and compound apertures for module=ALL
and module=B.
249
SCA* V2_Ref V3_Ref V2_1 V2_2 V2_3 V2_4 V3_1 V3_2 V3_3 V3_4
A1 120.67 -527.39 88.90 153.16 152.08 88.69 -559.88 -559.27 -495.15 -495.59
A2 120.11 -459.68 151.38 88.68 88.56 151.95 -427.95 -428.17 -491.49 -491.11
A3 51.93 -527.80 19.49 84.05 83.83 20.15 -560.22 -560.03 -495.73 -495.59
A4 52.28 -459.81 83.71 20.80 20.39 84.00 -428.20 -428.00 -491.59 -491.46
A5 86.10 -493.23 20.88 151.45 149.73 22.23 -558.60 -557.79 -428.63 -428.46
B1 -120.97 -457.75 -89.52 -152.07 -152.82 -89.59 -426.35 -426.00 -489.07 -489.58
B2 -121.14 -525.46 -153.74 -89.55 -89.05 -152.37 -557.14 -558.09 -493.86 -493.08
B3 -53.12 -457.78 -21.93 -84.75 -84.57 -21.05 -425.81 -426.40 -489.59 -489.32
B4 -52.82 -525.73 -84.82 -20.32 -21.16 -84.77 -557.99 -558.08 -493.47 -493.71
B5 -89.39 -491.44 -25.54 -153.25 -154.75 -23.98 -426.52 -426.75 -556.16 -556.87
ALL -0.32 -492.59 153.16 -153.74 -152.07 153.16 -559.27 -557.14 -426.00 -427.95
Bs -82.29 -496.21 -20.32 -153.74 -152.07 -21.93 -558.08 -557.14 -426.00 -425.81
Scroll right to view the full table.
*
Sensor chip assembly
Table 1 shows the target reference positions ("Ref") and aperture vertices (1–4) for the NIRCam detectors (SCAs)
in JWST (V2, V3) coordinates in arcseconds. The penultimate row marked "ALL" is invoked when observing with
both modules and defines the nominal tile spacing for mosaics. The final row "Bs" is used for full frame
observations with module B alone.
Table 2. NIRCam subarray apertures for coronagraphic occulting masks.
250
Mask V2_Ref V3_Ref V2_1 V2_2 V2_3 V2_4 V3_1 V3_2 V3_3 V3_4
A2_210R 127.23 -405.24 137.11 117.44 117.39 137.00 -415.05 -415.17 -395.46 -395.36
A5_335R 107.51 -405.52 117.56 97.59 97.55 117.47 -415.45 -415.55 -395.51 -395.43
A5_430R 87.25 -405.19 97.27 77.29 77.32 97.24 -415.17 -415.19 -395.13 -395.13
A4_SWB 67.61 -404.67 77.46 57.75 57.76 77.40 -414.53 -414.57 -394.82 -394.81
A5_LWB 47.21 -404.44 57.21 37.14 37.29 57.30 -414.52 -414.40 -394.27 -394.43
Scroll right to view the full table.
Table 2 shows the nominal target reference positions ("Ref") and aperture vertices (1–4) for the coronagraphic
occulting masks in JWST (V2, V3) coordinates in arcseconds. Bar occulters (with names ending in "B") have
multiple reference positions (not shown here), one for each allowed filter. Note that only module A will be used
for coronagraphy.
Latest updates
27 Feb 2017
corrected aperture B3 vertex coordinates V2_1, V2_2, V2_3, V2_4
251
NIRCam Target Acquisition
The JWST Near-Infrared Camera (NIRCam) provides target acquisition (TA) capabilities for the time-series imaging
, grism time series, and coronagraphic imaging modes.
On this page
JWST target location algorithm

References
Target acquisition (TA) is a procedure that centroids a source and precisely places it within an aperture or
subarray. TA is discussed in the context of the relevant NIRCam observing modes on the following articles:
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target Acquisition

NIRCam Grism Time-Series Target Acquisition
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition
A description of the setup of TA observations within the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) can be found on the
NIRCam APT template pages for time-series imaging, grism time series, and coronagraphic imaging. For a
description of how to estimate the exposure time required to achieve the necessary centroid accuracy, please
visit the JWST ETC NIRCam Target Acquisition article.
JWST target location algorithm

The following steps outline the general target acquisition procedure executed by the onboard software:
1. Two difference images are created from the individual groups in the TA exposure:
a. Each TA exposure consists of a single integration ramp with an odd number of groups.
b. Allowed values of the number of groups are 3, 5, 7, 9, 17, 33, or 65, and any NIRCam exposure
pattern is allowed.
c. Resulting integration times depend on the size of the TA subarray (users should refer to the
template-specific target acquisition articles listed above).
d. The difference images are computed from the middle and first group, and from the last and the
middle group.
2. These difference images are then combined via the minimum operator on a pixel-by-pixel basis to reject
cosmic rays.
3. The resulting image is corrected for the flat field.
4. Known bad pixels are flagged and replaced using a pixel mask and nearest-neighbor sampling.
5. The image is then smoothed with a 3 × 3 pixel checkbox, as illustrated in Figure 1.
6. Next, a 32 × 32 postage stamp subarray is extracted, centered on the brightest pixel in the smoothed
image.
7. The background is removed by subtracting the mean of the faintest 40% of pixels in the 32 × 32 postage
252
7. The background is removed by subtracting the mean of the faintest 40% of pixels in the 32 × 32 postage
stamp.
8. Final centroiding using at 1st-moment calculation with a 9 × 9 (4-pixel radius) centroid box (iterative).
9. The target acquisition software then executes a small slew to place the target at the reference position of
the target acquisition subarray.
10. A pre-defined slew then transfers the target to the reference positions of the science aperture (see
template-specific target acquisition articles listed above).
Much of this process is generic to all instruments, but the parameters do vary somewhat between them (e.g.,
checkbox size, centroid box size, fraction of pixels for background subtraction, TA subarray size).
The TA is usually performed on the science target, though it can also be performed on an object within the visit-
splitting distance of the science target's position. An offset <20″ is recommended to maximize the final pointing
precision.
The data from the TA exposure is downlinked and available to users, although the pipeline performs only
minimal calibration of the data due to the lack of dark calibration frames for NIRCam's TA subarrays.
253
Figure 1. Illustration of the general target location algorithm
Note that different instruments and modes use different size TA subarrays, checkboxes, and centroid regions.
References
254
Latest updates
28 Sep 2017
Added general TA procedure information
255
Target Acquisition
The JWST NIRCam coronagraphic target acquisition (TA) positions the bright "host" on the center of the
coronagraphic mask.
On this page
Coronagraphic target acquisition

References
See also: NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging, JWST High-Contrast Imaging
The goal of coronagraphic target acquisition (TA) with NIRCam is to accurately align an astronomical point
source—the "host"—on a coronagraphic mask (occulter). In cases where suppression of the light from the point
source is adequate to detect nearby sources (e.g., planets) or emission (e.g., circumstellar disks), a single
observation of the science target may be adequate. In order to achieve optimal limiting contrast between a
bright host and the faintest detectable "companion," an observation of one or more PSF reference targets is
necessary. Details about limiting contrast for NIRCam are available in this article: HCI NIRCam Limiting Contrast.
Coronagraphic target acquisition

In order for the coronagraph to achieve maximum suppression of unwanted host light, a small angle maneuver
(SAM) must place the target accurately on the center of the coronagraphic mask (occulter).
A "target" may be any of 4 types:
1. A "host," meaning a bright, point source that may harbor a "companion" feature of primary scientific
interest, such as an extrasolar planet, circumstellar disk, or quasar feeding zone;
2. A "PSF reference," meaning a generic, bright, point source, observed to characterize the PSF, particularly
in the wings and outside the inner working angle (IWA); or
3. The target may be a "reacquisition" of a host or reference target that must be reacquired to reduce
pointing errors. Re-acquisition is necessary after a roll maneuver, for example, but is not required after
changing filters.
4. An offset target may also be used for target acquisition for either host or reference targets.
256
Coronagraphic target acquisition (TA) involves an initial slew of the telescope to place the target on a 4" × 4"
subarray in the ~10″ vicinity of the selected coronagraphic mask. If the target is brighter than K ≈ 7, the
subarray is located behind a neutral density square (nominally ND = 3). If fainter than K ≈ 7, the target is
positioned behind a nearby, clear (ND = 0) region of the coronagraphic optical mount (COM). The first phase of
TA is complete when the detector obtains an exposure of the target on an appropriate region of the COM (ND =
0 or 3) near the specified coronagraphic mask.
Coronagraphic TA images are always be taken in either the F210M or F335M filter, for short- or long-wavelength
(SW, LW) coronagraphy, respectively.
Coronagraphic TA images are taken using 128² or 64² subarrays, for SW or LW, respectively. The subarrays are
completely behind either a clear region of the COM (for faint targets) or an "ND = 3" square, for bright targets.
Subsequently, target acquisition is performed autonomously onboard, as described in the NIRCam Target
Acquisition article, culminating with the host target being centered behind the selected coronagraph.
To eliminate the possibility of a latent image when the target is moved from the TA aperture to the science
pointing, the "opaque" or "dark" position on the pupil wheel is placed into the beam before executing the final TA
slew.
In cases where very precise measurement of the final host target position is needed, astrometric confirmation
images may also be specified. These are 2 full frame exposures, the first acquired just after the completion of the
on-board TA process, and the second after the slew that transfers the target to the coronagraph (at which point,
it is obscured). Such images can be used to more precisely measure the offset between the host and a
companion.
Once the target is positioned behind the coronagraphic mask, the specified science observations begin.
257
Figure 1. NIRCam coronagraphic occulting masks and neutral density squares for target acquisition
Features of the NIRCam module A coronagraphic optical mount (COM), including the neutral density squares (ND = 3) regions for
bright target acquisition (TA), and the bar and round coronagrapic masks. Acquisition of fainter targets uses subarrays placed at positions
between the ND squares. The 3 lines of information at the bottom are the mask name, the inner working angle (IWA)—the smallest
observable apparent separation—and the wavelength range. TA images are taken using subarrays matched to the regions of the COM
used for the first phase of TA. The ND square between the two bar occulters (with both a blue and a red arrow) is used for bright TA when
the first SW science filter is F200W or F212N, or when the first LW science filter is F460M or F480M; bright TA for the bar occulters in
other filters uses the ND squares nearer the narrow ends of the bars. Adapted from Krist et al. 2010, Figure 2.
The centroiding algorithm takes about 9 minutes for SW coronagraphy, and about 4 minutes for LW (due to the
difference in subarray sizes).
The TA exposures themselves are limited to be <250 s, using the maximum number of groups (65), the longest
readout pattern (DEEP8), and the SW subarray (128²).
It is very important to use the ETC to confirm SNR estimates for target aquisition, but the approximate limits for
bright and faint coronagraphic TA on a typical star are:
F210M (short wavelength TA)
Bright TA (ND square): K < 6.3

Faint TA (clear aperture): K > 6.3
Too faint: K > 19.0
F335M (long wavelength TA):
Bright TA (ND square): K < 4.7

Faint TA (clear aperture): K > 4.7
Too faint: K > 17.2
References
258
References
Beichman, C. A., et al. 2010, PASP, 122:162
Imaging Young Giant Planets from Ground and Space
Krist, J. et al. 2010, Proc. SPIE 7731, 3J


Stark, C., et al. 2016, JWST-STScI-004707

How to Implement a JWST Coronagraphic Observation Sequence in APT
Latest updates
259
NIRCam Grism Time-Series Target
Acquisition
JWST NIRCam target acquisition (TA) positions the source with subpixel accuracy on a specific part of the
detector. A TA is highly recommended for NIRCam grism time-series observations.
See also: NIRCam Target Acquisition, NIRCam Grism Time-Series
Observations in NIRCam’s grism time-series mode should normally include a target acquisition (TA) to precisely
place the target at specific points on the detector. Precise positioning is required in order to achieve the highest
possible calibration stability and enable enhanced flat field determination. For applications requiring precision at
the 1% level, and/or short observations where the TA would significantly increase the time to acquire the data,
TA may not be necessary.
The grisms are in the NIRCam long wavelength (LW) pupil wheels and are always paired with filters in the filter
wheel, either F277W, F322W2, F356W, or F444W for grism time-series observations. Module A is used for grism
time-series observations because of the higher throughput relative to module B. GRISMR is required for grism
time-series observations, so spectra will disperse in the row direction with longer wavelengths to the left
(decreasing pixel index in science data, Figure 1).
Depending on the selected filter, some portion of the spectrum from 2.4–5 μm is dispersed onto the detector. To
ensure that the spectrum falls completely on the detector, the target is placed at either of 2 locations in the
along-dispersion direction. When F277W, F322W2, or F356W are used, TA places the target towards the right of
the long wavelength detector (yellow stars on the right in Figure 1). When F444W is used, TA places the target at
one of at the yellow stars on the left of Figure 1. The positions of these field points are discussed in more detail
on the main grism time-series article. The field points near the bottom of the detector are used for all subarray
observations, while those higher up on the detector are used for full-frame observations. The single TA subarray
(yellow box in Figure 1) is used for all 4 science field points.
The generic aspects of NIRCam TA are described in the NIRCam Target Acquisition article.

The unique aspects of TA for grism time series are:
The TA subarray is 32 × 32 pixels in size and is on the long wavelength detector on module A.
Users may select either the F335M or F405N filter for TA.
Using F405N allows acquisition of targets approximately 3.0–3.5 magnitudes brighter than F335M,
depending on the spectrum of the target.
After the onboard TA process completes, a slew moves the target from the center of the TA subarray to
one of the 4 science field points indicated in Figure 1, as described above.
260
261
Figure 1. Target acquisition for grism time-series observations
Target acquisition is performed with a 32 × 32 pixel subarray (yellow square) near the bottom of the long wavelength detector A5. The
grism subarrays are shown in black for long wavelength channel. The corresponding short wavelength subarrays are not shown; they
span the short wavelength detectors horizontally and are centered vertically within the long wavelength subarrays. The target acquisition
pointing is centered on the TA subarray. If any of the 3 grism subarrays is chosen, a slew places the target on one of the lower two yellow
stars, depending on the science filter. If FULL array exposures are selected, the target is positioned at one of the upper two yellow stars,
depending on the selected filter.
Target acquisition saturation and sensitivity limits

The time-series TA subarray frame time is 0.015 s. It is recommended that users choose a TA exposure time that
achieves a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of >30, which enables a centroid accuracy of <0.15 pixel. Any readout
pattern is available for TA, with Ngroups = 3, 5, 9, 17, 33, or 65. Approximate F335M and F405N saturation and
sensitivity limits for NIRCam grism time series, and time-series TA, are summarized below. Limits are for a G2V
star and are given in Vega magnitudes. Users should use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to estimate
appropriate TA integration times for their targets.
Bright limit:
Readout pattern = RAPID, Ngroups = 3 (0.45 s integration)
mK = 7.1 (using F335M)
mK = 3.8 (using F405N)
Faint limit:
Readout pattern = DEEP8, Ngroups = 65 (19.3 s integration)
mK = 18.8 (using F335M)
mK = 15.9 (using F405N)
262
The bright limit for TA through the F405N filter is approximately 3.5–4.0 magnitudes brighter, depending on the
spectrum of the target. The figures and discussion below are intended to help observers determine whether to
accept some saturation in their TA images acquired using F335M, or to switch to the F405N filter in order to
achieve higher TA accuracy at the expense of longer TA integration time.
When the TA integration saturates the accuracy of the onboard centroiding algorithm is degraded. Modeling has
been performed to characterize the effects of saturation, and the results are summarized below. The immediate
effect of saturation is that the core of the observed PSF appears dark in the image used by the target location
algorithm, as seen in Figure 2. The modeling indicates that centroiding accuracy degrades gradually as
saturation increases, as summarized in Figure 3.
263
Figure 2. TA images
These TA images were produced from sources with K band magnitudes of 3.33 to 7.33. Pixels that saturate prior to or during the second
group used to create the TA image will contain no signal (modulo noise) and appear dark in the images. In this case, no more signal can
accumulate between the second and third groups, leading to a group 3 and group 2 difference close to zero. This value then propagates
into the final TA image. The blue box to the lower right shows the 9 × 9 pixel box used in the centroid calculations.
Figure 3 shows the centroiding accuracy of the target location algorithm versus the K band Vega Magnitude of a
G2V source. These calculations were performed using simulated point sources located on a grid of subpixel
locations and with several Poisson noise realizations at each location. The effect of slight offsets of the target
from the nominal science field point on data quality is unknown, but may matter in cases where multiple transit
observations must be combined to achieve the desired SNR.
264
Figure 3. Centroiding error versus source brightness
Accuracy of the target location algorithm results for NIRCam time-series and grism time-series observations versus the K band Vega
magnitude of a G2V source. The accuracy is calculated for a grid of subpixel locations and Poisson noise realizations. Individual results
are shown as gray points. Red points and error bars show the mean and standard deviation over all pixel phases and noise realizations at
each magnitude.
Figure 4 shows the centroiding accuracy versus the number of fully saturated pixels in the scene. These are
pixels that are saturated in all three of the groups used to create the TA image. The ETC also uses this definition
when reporting the number of pixels that have reached "full saturation."
265
Figure 4. Centroiding error versus the number of fully saturated pixels.
The number of pixels on the X axis is equivalent to the number of fully saturated pixels reported by the ETC. The red x's and error bars
show the mean and standard deviation of the centroiding error.
Figure 5 shows the centroiding accuracy plotted against the number of pixels that saturate in groups 2 or 3 of
the three groups used to produce the TA image. This is equivalent to the number of "partially saturated" pixels
reported by the ETC.
266
Figure 5. Centroiding error versus the number of partially saturated pixels.
The number of pixels on the X axis is equivalent to the number of partially saturated pixels reported by the ETC. The red x's and error
bars show the mean and standard deviation of the centroiding error. Note that fully saturated pixels begin to occur at limits described on
the ETC NIRCam Target Acquisition article.
Latest updates
267
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target
Acquisition
JWST NIRCam target acquisition (TA) positions the source with subpixel accuracy on a specific part of the
detector. A TA is required for all NIRCam time-series observations.
See also: NIRCam Target Acquisition, NIRCam Time-Series Imaging

Observations in NIRCam’s time-series imaging mode should normally include a target acquisition (TA) to
precisely place the target at specific points on the detector. Precise positioning is required in order to achieve
the highest possible calibration stability and enable enhanced flat field determination. For applications requiring
precision at the 1% level, and/or short observations where the TA would significantly increase the time to acquire
the data, TA may not be necessary. Observers using the SUB64P subarrays, necessary to avoid saturation on the
very brightest targets, should include a TA to guarantee that their target is positioned within the overlap region
of the short wavelength (SW) and long wavelength (LW) fields of view.
Time-series imaging uses one SW detector and the LW detector in module B. In addition to the FULL array, users
can select the point source subarrays located at the upper right of the module: SUB64P, SUB160P, or SUB400P
(Figure 1). These subarray locations were selected to minimize the number of bad pixels on the detectors and to
include reference pixels along 2 edges of the subarrays. (They are also available in the NIRCam imaging mode.)
The TA subarray is offset from the science subarrays to avoid saturating the pixels used for those exposures.
The generic aspects of NIRCam TA are described in the NIRCam Target Acquisition article.
The unique aspects of TA for NIRCam time series are:
The TA subarray is 32 × 32 pixels in size and is on the long wavelength detector on module B.
Users may select either the F335M or F405N filter for TA.
Using F405N allows acquisition of targets approximately 2.5 magnitudes brighter than F335M,
depending on the spectrum of the target.
After the onboard TA process completes, a slew moves the target from the center of the TA subarray to
one of the 4 science field points indicated in Figure 1, as described above.
268
Figure 1. Target acquisition for time-series imaging
Target acquisition is performed with a 32 × 32 pixel subarray (yellow square) on the LW module B detector, near the point source
subarrays. Target acquisition centers the target on the TA subarray, followed by a telescope slew to one of the yellow stars in the selected
subarray for the science exposures. For simplicity, only the SW subarrays are shown here, as is the boundary of the full LW detector. The
SW subarrays determine the effective FOV due to the ~2x smaller pixel scale in that channel. For information on the location of the LW
subarrays, see the NIRCam Detector Subarrays article.
Target acquisition saturation and sensitivity limits

269
The time-series TA subarray frame time is 0.015 s. It is recommended that users choose a TA exposure time that
achieves a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of >30, which enables a centroid accuracy of <0.15 pixel. Any readout
pattern is available for TA, with Ngroups = 3, 5, 9, 17, 33, or 65. Approximate F335M and F405N saturation and
sensitivity limits for NIRCam grism time series, and time-series TA, are summarized below. Limits are for a G2V
star and are given in Vega magnitudes. Users should use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to estimate
appropriate TA integration times for their targets.
Bright limit:
Readout pattern = RAPID, Ngroups = 3 (0.45 s integration)
mK = 7.1 (using F335M)
mK = 3.8 (using F405N)
Faint limit:
Readout pattern = DEEP8, Ngroups = 65 (19.3 s integration)
mK = 18.8 (using F335M)
mK = 15.9 (using F405N)
The bright limit for TA through the F405N filter is approximately 3.5–4.0 magnitudes brighter, depending on the
spectrum of the target. The figures and discussion below are intended to help observers determine whether to
accept some saturation in their TA images acquired using F335M, or to switch to the F405N filter in order to
achieve higher TA accuracy at the expense of longer TA integration time.
When the TA integration saturates the accuracy of the onboard centroiding algorithm is degraded. Modeling has
been performed to characterize the effects of saturation, and the results are summarized below. The immediate
effect of saturation is that the core of the observed PSF appears dark in the image used by the target location
algorithm, as seen in Figure 2. The modeling indicates that centroiding accuracy degrades gradually as
saturation increases, as summarized in Figure 3.
270
Figure 2. TA images
These TA images were produced from sources with K band magnitudes of 3.33 to 7.33. Pixels that saturate prior to or during the second
group used to create the TA image will contain no signal (modulo noise) and appear dark in the images. In this case, no more signal can
accumulate between the second and third groups, leading to a group 3 and group 2 difference close to zero. This value then propagates
into the final TA image. The blue box to the lower right shows the 9 × 9 pixel box used in the centroid calculations.
Figure 3 shows the centroiding accuracy of the target location algorithm versus the K band Vega Magnitude of a
G2V source. These calculations were performed using simulated point sources located on a grid of subpixel
locations and with several Poisson noise realizations at each location. The effect of slight offsets of the target
from the nominal science field point on data quality is unknown, but may matter in cases where multiple transit
observations must be combined to achieve the desired SNR.
271
Figure 3. Centroiding error versus source brightness
Accuracy of the target location algorithm results for NIRCam time-series and grism time-series observations versus the K band Vega
magnitude of a G2V source. The accuracy is calculated for a grid of subpixel locations and Poisson noise realizations. Individual results
are shown as gray points. Red points and error bars show the mean and standard deviation over all pixel phases and noise realizations at
each magnitude.
Figure 4 shows the centroiding accuracy versus the number of fully saturated pixels in the scene. These are
pixels that are saturated in all three of the groups used to create the TA image. The ETC also uses this definition
when reporting the number of pixels that have reached "full saturation."
272
Figure 4. Centroiding error versus the number of fully saturated pixels.
The number of pixels on the X axis is equivalent to the number of fully saturated pixels reported by the ETC. The red x's and error bars
show the mean and standard deviation of the centroiding error.
Figure 5 shows the centroiding accuracy plotted against the number of pixels that saturate in groups 2 or 3 of
the three groups used to produce the TA image. This is equivalent to the number of "partially saturated" pixels
reported by the ETC.
273
Figure 5. Centroiding error versus the number of partially saturated pixels.
The number of pixels on the X axis is equivalent to the number of partially saturated pixels reported by the ETC. The red x's and error
bars show the mean and standard deviation of the centroiding error. Note that fully saturated pixels begin to occur at limits described on
the ETC NIRCam Target Acquisition article.
Latest updates
274
NIRCam Predicted Performance
JWST NIRCam performance is estimated based on simulations and laboratory measurements. These estimates
will improve based on data obtained in flight.
NIRCam performance predictions are available from various articles and webpages:
NIRCam Point Spread Functions has information on PSFs simulated by WebbPSF;

NIRCam Detector Performance provides details about read noise, dark current, etc.
NIRCam Dragon's Breath provides information on how the scattered light from bright sources off the edge
of NIRCam field of view impact the observations;
NIRCam Persistence provides information on how persistency affects NIRCam observations;
NIRCam Flat Fields provides information on how the effects of pixel-to-pixel sensitivity changes across a
given NIRCam detector are corrected using a flat field image;
NIRCam WFSS Field of View and NIRCam WFSS Background provides additional information on the
NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy observing mode;
JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) provides the most precise signal-to-noise, sensitivity, and saturation
estimates.
Articles on each observing mode also contain additional information:
NIRCam Imaging, for sensitivity and saturation limits

NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging, for contrast ratios
NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, spectroscopic line sensitivities
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging, saturation limits
NIRCam Grism Time Series, saturation limits
Latest updates
275
NIRCam Point Spread Functions
Simulated JWST NIRCam point spread functions (PSFs) in each filter have predicted FWHM between 0.03" and
0.16" assuming nominal mirror wavefront errors.
On this page
Simulated NIRCam PSFs

PSF FWHM
Radial profiles
Encircled and ensquared energy
References
At wavelengths λ > 2 μm, JWST obtains diffraction-limited imaging with a Strehl ratio = 0.8 and point spread
function (PSF) FWHM of ~λ/D radians (JWST's D = 6.5 m mirror). The NIRCam detectors achieve Nyquist sampling
or better (FWHM > 2 pixels) above 2 µm in the short wavelength (SW) channel (0.6–2.3 µm) and above 4 µm in
the long wavelength (LW) channel (2.4–5.0 µm). Below these wavelengths, the PSF is undersampled. PSF
sampling may be improved by performing subpixel dithers between exposures.
Simulated NIRCam PSFs

Expected JWST PSFs may be simulated with WebbPSF. Given a wavefront error budget for the mirror alignment,
WebbPSF can create multiple realizations of the PSF in a given NIRCam filter. Each of these realizations assumes
various contributions to the wavefront error from several optical components, which cause the PSF shape and
orientation to vary slightly.
WebbPSF allows the user to select between a "predicted" optical path difference (OPD) map and a
"requirements" OPD map. The figures below show one realization for NIRCam imaging in each filter assuming the
(slightly more conservative) "requirements" OPD map.
276
FITS images of simulated PSFs in each filter for LW and SW channels may be downloaded: PSFs_SW_filters
and PSFs_LW_filters
These are a single realization of NIRCam PSF FITS images for all filters simulated by WebbPSF using the
"requirements" OPD map. SW PSFs are centered in the A1 detector, while LW PSFs are centered in the A5
detector. Each PSF is assumed to be centered within a pixel. Each FITS file contains both an oversampled
PSF (oversample = 4) and a version rebinned down onto the detector pixel scale (0.031" and 0.063" in
the short and long wavelength channels, respectively). The source spectrum is a G5V star spectrum from
the PHOENIX model library.
Note: Diffraction spikes are oriented relative to the telescope (V3 position angle), not NIRCam (see
Figure 2 in the NIRCam Field of View page).
Figures 1 and 2 show the PSF in each filter on a log scale. Figures 3 and 4 zoom in to the PSF cores.
277
Figure 1. One realization of simulated NIRCam PSFs predicted in the SW channel (0.6–2.3 µm)
NIRCam PSFs in each SW channel filter were simulated by WebbPSF. Each PSF image is 299 × 299 detector pixels (9.27" on a side). All
are displayed with the same log scale. PSFs are shown in the detector pixel scale (0.031").
278
Figure 2. One realization of simulated NIRCam PSFs predicted in the LW channel (2.4–5.0 µm)
NIRCam PSF in each LW channel filter were simulated by WebbPSF. Each PSF image is 299 × 299 detector pixels (18.84" on a side),
displayed with the same log scaling as Figure 1. PSFs are shown in the detector pixel scale (0.063").
279
Figure 3. One realization of simulated NIRCam PSF cores predicted in the SW channel (0.6–2.3 µm)
These are zooms into the central 32 × 32 pixels (~1" on a side) of each simulated PSF shown in Figure 1. Each PSF is centered within a
pixel, displayed with the same log scaling as Figure 1.
280
Figure 4. One realization of simulated NIRCam PSF cores predicted in the LW channel (2.4–5.0 µm)
These are zooms into the central 32 × 32 pixels (~2" on a side) of each simulated PSF shown in Figure 2. Each PSF is centered within a
pixel, displayed with the same log scaling as Figure 1.
PSF FWHM
Figure 5 shows the FWHM as a function of the filter pivot wavelength for each simulated PSF. Numerical values
for each FWHM, in units of arcsec and pixel, are reported in Table 1. Note: due to severe undersampling below 2
µm in the SW channel and 4 µm in the LW channel, the oversampled PSFs were used to calculate the FWHM.
281
Figure 5. PSF FWHM in each filter, as measured in one realization of simulated PSFs
This figure shows the FWHM measured for each of the PSFs simulated by WebbPSF, shown in Figures 1–4. Each point, color-coded by
wavelength, corresponds to one of the 29 filters in Table 1. The PSF is undersampled below 2 µm in the SW channel and below 4 µm in
the LW channel. Note: for the extra-wide W2 filters (F150W2 and F322W2), the FWHM appears to be smaller then expected due to the
choice of the star spectrum.
Table 1. FWHM values for each PSF, from Figure 5
Filter Wavelength PSF PSF FWHM (pixel)

(µm) FWHM
(arcsec)
F070W 0.704 0.030 0.987
F090W 0.902 0.034 1.103
F115W 1.154 0.040 1.298
F140M 1.405 0.048 1.553
F150W 1.501 0.050 1.628
F162M 1.627 0.055 1.770
282
F164N 1.645 0.056 1.801
F150W2 1.659 0.046 1.494
F182M 1.845 0.062 1.990
F187N 1.874 0.064 2.060
F200W 1.989 0.066 2.141
F210M 2.095 0.071 2.304
F212N 2.121 0.072 2.341
F250M 2.503 0.084 1.340
F277W 2.762 0.091 1.444
F300M 2.989 0.100 1.585
F322W2 3.232 0.097 1.547
F323N 3.237 0.108 1.711
F335M 3.362 0.111 1.760
F356W 3.568 0.115 1.830
F360M 3.624 0.120 1.901
F405N 4.052 0.136 2.165
F410M 4.082 0.137 2.179
F430M 4.281 0.145 2.300
F444W 4.408 0.145 2.302
F460M 4.630 0.155 2.459
F466N 4.654 0.158 2.507
F470N 4.708 0.160 2.535
F480M 4.874 0.162 2.574
Radial profiles
Figures 6 and 7 show the radial profiles for each simulated PSF. The radial profiles have been normalized to the
value of the peak pixels.
283
Figure 6. SW PSF radial profiles
In these plots of the radial profiles for each SW simulated PSF, the pixel size (0.031") is reported in each panel as a dotted line.
284
Figure 7. LW PSF radial profiles
In these plots of the radial profiles for each simulated LW PSF, the pixel size (0.063") is reported in each panel as a dotted line.
Encircled and ensquared energy

Figures 8 and 9 show the encircled energy curves for each simulated PSF. Numerical values for the encircled
energy (the fraction of light contained in a circular aperture) and ensquared energy (the fraction of energy falling
within a certain number of pixels) for each simulated PSF are provided inn these ACII tables:
Encircled_Energy_SW.txt
Encircled_Energy_LW.txt
Ensquared_Energy_SW.txt
Ensquared_Energy_LW.txt
285
FIgure 8. SW PSF encircled energy curves
In these encircled energy curves for each SW PSF, the radius (in arcsec) at which the encircled energy is 50% and 80% is reported in the
figure and in Table 2.
286
Figure 9. LW PSF encircled energy curves
In these encircled energy curves for each LW PSF, the radius (in arcsec) at which the encircled energy is 50% and 80% is reported in the
figure and in Table 2.
Table 2. Radius (in arcsec) at which the encircled energy (EE) is 50% and 80%
Filter radius (EE = 50%) radius (EE = 80%)
(arcsec) (arcsec)
F070W 0.068 0.266
F090W 0.060 0.232
F115W 0.055 0.213
F140M 0.043 0.187
F150W 0.043 0.189
F162M 0.044 0.191
287
F164N 0.044 0.192
F150W2 0.047 0.197
F182M 0.046 0.178
F187N 0.047 0.175
F200W 0.049 0.176
F210M 0.051 0.177
F212N 0.051 0.177
F250M 0.057 0.181
F277W 0.061 0.195
F300M 0.066 0.205
F322W2 0.067 0.218
F323N 0.071 0.220
F335M 0.073 0.225
F356W 0.076 0.235
F360M 0.077 0.238
F405N 0.086 0.263
F410M 0.086 0.266
F430M 0.090 0.277
F444W 0.092 0.283
F460M 0.096 0.295
F466N 0.098 0.299
F470N 0.099 0.302
F480M 0.101 0.308
References
288
WebbPSF
Perrin, M., et al. 2014, Proc SPIE 9143

Updated point spread function simulations for JWST with WebbPSF
Latest updates
289
NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity
The exposure times vs. flux estimates at signal-to-noise ratio = 10 in NIRCam images presented here have been
obtained using the Pandeia JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) Python engine.
On this page
Depth vs. exposure time

Background
Exposure time
The Pandeia Exposure Time Calculator should be used for all observation planning. This article provides ETC
results determined using the Python engine to loop through many calculations of signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for
various readout patterns and exposure times, given the assumptions detailed below. These calculations are then
interpolated to determine depth (SNR = 10) vs. exposure time. The script is available on Github.
Depth vs. exposure time

The NIRCam Imaging and NIRCam Sensitivity articles show SNR = 10 sensitivity estimates for imaging in all
NIRCam filters given a total exposure time of 10 ks (166.7 minutes = 2.78 hours). Figure 1 shows
similar estimates for a range of exposure times in 7 wide filters and one medium filter.
Sensitivity estimates can vary significantly depending on the background and the assumed photometric
aperture sizes as discussed below. Please use the Pandeia Exposure Time Calculator to plan your
observations.
290
Figure 1. Depth vs. exposure time
Depth (10-sigma) vs. total exposure time for 4 exposures of NIRCam imaging in 7 wide filters and one medium-band filter, assuming the
"1.2 × MinZodi" background defined below. Values are for point sources: short wavelength channel photometric aperture of 0.08" radius
with 0.6"–0.99" background sky annulus; long wavelength channel photometric aperture of 0.16" radius with 1.2"–1.98" background
sky annulus. Depths are interpolated from results obtained with the Pandeia JWST ETC Python engine. Dashed line extrapolations
assume depth in units of flux goes as sqrt(t), or in magnitudes: depth = depth0 + 1.25 * log(t / t0). Note 5-sigma depth estimates are 0.75
mag fainter than the 10-sigma estimates shown here.
Background
JWST's background model varies with the target coordinates (RA, Dec) and time of year. These calculations
assume the fiducial "1.2 × MinZodi" (1.2 times the minimum zodiacal light) background at RA = 17:26:44, Dec =
-73:19:56 on June 19, 2019, as used in the NIRCam Imaging article. The background model for these
observations must be generated using the online ETC GUI and then imported into the Python ETC engine.
291
Figure 2. Background vs. wavelength
Background vs. wavelength assumed in these calculations, as generated by the online ETC GUI for "1.2 × MinZodi" at (RA = 17:26:44,
Dec = -73:19:56) on June 19, 2019.
Exposure time
Recommended readout patterns and exposure times used for the calculations on this page are described below.
They are based on ETC calculations that show these to yield optimal signal-to-noise ratios for a given exposure
time. RAPID, BRIGHT2, SHALLOW4, MEDIUM8, and DEEP8 yield high signal-to-noise ratios most efficiently and
are preferred to maximize depth. The other readout patterns (BRIGHT1, SHALLOW2, MEDIUM2, DEEP2) may be
preferred in some cases, for example, to provide a greater dynamic range (with a shorter first group) to sample
bright stars before saturation.
292
Figure 3. Signal-to-noise ratio vs. exposure time for various readout patterns
Comparison of signal-to-noise ratio for various readout specifications for F200W imaging of an AB mag 29 point source. Each point
shows the estimate given 4 exposures, each comprising a single integration that consists of multiple groups (between 2 and 10) of a given
readout pattern. This analysis shows that RAPID, BRIGHT2, SHALLOW4, MEDIUM8, and DEEP8 yield higher signal-to-noise ratios
than other patterns for a given exposure time. These are plotted as filled circles; the other patterns are plotted as stars. Note BRIGHT2 is
restricted to a maximum of 4 groups when reading out the full detectors in both modules.
When reading out the full detectors in both modules, RAPID is limited to 2 groups, and most other patterns are
limited to 10 groups (except for DEEP2 and DEEP8, which is limited to 20). The table below gives the full range of
recommended readout specifications for exposure times between 21.5 and 1052.2 s. The final two columns
assume 4 such exposures.
Note we do not generally recommend integration times greater than 1,000 s. After 1,000 s, the majority of pixels
would likely be affected by cosmic rays. See discussion in MIRI Cross-Mode Recommended Strategies.
Table 1. Recommended readout specifications for maximal depth in a given exposure time
293
Readout pattern NGROUPS NINT Exposure time (s) NEXP Total exposure time (s)
RAPID 2 1 21.5 4 86.0
BRIGHT2 2 1 42.9 4 171.8
BRIGHT2 3 1 64.4 4 257.6
BRIGHT2 4 1 85.9 4 343.6
BRIGHT1 5 1 96.6 4 386.4
BRIGHT1 6 1 118.1 4 472.4
BRIGHT1 7 1 139.6 4 558.4
BRIGHT1 8 1 161.1 4 644.4
BRIGHT1 9 1 182.5 4 730.0
BRIGHT1 10 1 204.0 4 816.0
SHALLOW4 5 1 257.7 4 1030.8
SHALLOW4 6 1 311.4 4 1245.6
SHALLOW4 7 1 365.1 4 1460.4
SHALLOW4 8 1 418.7 4 1674.8
SHALLOW4 9 1 472.4 4 1889.6
SHALLOW4 10 1 526.1 4 2104.4
MEDIUM8 6 1 622.7 4 2490.8
MEDIUM8 7 1 730.1 4 2920.4
MEDIUM8 8 1 837.5 4 3350.0
MEDIUM8 9 1 944.8 4 3779.2
MEDIUM8 10 1 1052.2 4 4208.8
294
Latest updates
06 Dec 2019
Updated exposure times in Table 1
21 Nov 2017
Corrected RAPID exposure times in Table 1
Originally published 14 Aug 2017
295
NIRCam Sensitivity
The sensitivity estimates for JWST NIRCam presented here have been derived using the Exposure Time
Calculator (ETC). They are intended to provide reference values for a few representative cases.
For initial exploration and quick feasibility check, users can use the JWST Interactive Sensitivity Tool (JIST).
However, for detailed calculations tailored to their specific science cases users should ultimately use the
Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) .
On this page
Calculation
Imaging
Coronagraphy
Grism
References
The Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) determines the efficiency with which photons striking the JWST primary
mirror will be converted into measured signal at the NIRCam detectors. It uses a model that accounts for the
measured transmission/reflection values for all optical elements and quantum efficiency of the detectors. Noise
is estimated based on characterization data for the detectors, including read noise, dark current, and 1/f
components, and includes the usual photon statistics for light from sources and predicted background levels. The
expected point spread function is computed using WebbPSF.
Calculation
Users should ultimately use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) for all sensitivity calculations.
Imaging
Table 1 and Figure 1 show the signal-to-noise ratio achieved by NIRCam in imaging mode for a 10 ks integration
using a circular photometric aperture 2.5 pixels in radius. NIRCam imaging is capable of studying very faint
sources. Typical 10 ks images in F200W and F322W2 yield S/N = 10 detections of AB mag 29 (~9 nJy) point
sources (S/N = 5 at AB mag 29.75 [4.5 nJy]).
296
Table 1. S/N = 10 in 104 s for the NIRCam imaging filters
Filter Flux density* (nJy)
F070W 22.5
F090W 15.3
F115W 13.2
F150W 10.6
F200W 9.1
F277W 14.3
F322W2 9.1
F356W 12.1
F444W 23.6
F140M 19.4
F162M 21.4
F182M 16.1
F210M 14.9
F250M 32.1
F300M 25.8
F335M 21.8
F360M 20.7
F410M 24.7
F430M 50.9
F460M 46.5
F480M 67.9
F164N 145
F187N 133
F212N 129
297
F323N 194
F405N 158
F466N 274
F470N 302
*
Sensitivites given assume a zodiacal light background at the position RA = 17:26:44, Dec = -73:19:56 on June
19, 2019. This value is equal to 1.2 × the minimum zodiacal light background. Additional information on the
NIRCam imaging sensitivity can be found in this article: NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity.
298
Figure 1. Expected NIRCam imaging point source sensitivity
This assumes circular photometric apertures 2.5 pixels in radius and 1.2 × minimum zodiacal light background.
Coronagraphy
The NIRCam coronagraphic occulting masks will occult light from point sources, enabling deep searches for
nearby companions and extended sources. The sensitivity to nearby companions is given by a combination of
reduced throughput, due to the insertion of the Lyot stop to mitigate diffraction effects, and limiting contrast.
The Lyot stop transmit ~20% of the light, corresponding to a loss of about 2 magnitudes. In the vicinity of the
occulted star the sensitivity loss increases due to a combination of photon and residual speckle noise, so the
sensitivity also depends on the brightness of the primary as described by the limiting contrast curve. Users
should use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to evaluate NIRCam coronagraphic performance.
Grism
The NIRCam grisms disperse light for the NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy and NIRCam grism time-series
modes. Approximate continuum and line sensitivities are shown in Figure 2 for a 10 ks integration using a 2 × 5
pixel extraction aperture (2 pixels in the spectral direction by 5 pixels in the spatial direction). Tables 2 and 3
show the sensitivity values for modules A and B, respectively. Users should consult the Exposure Time Calculator
(ETC) to assess NIRCam slitless spectroscopy performance.
299
Table 2. S/N = 10 in 104 s for the NIRCam grism module A
λ (micron) Fcont(microJy) Fline(erg s-1 cm-2) Filter
2.5 9.1 9.7E-18 F322W2
2.7 6.8 6.3E-18 F322W2
2.9 6.1 5.0E-18 F322W2
3.1 6.6 4.8E-18 F322W2
3.3 5.3 3.5E-18 F322W2
3.5 5.2 3.2E-18 F322W2
3.7 5.1 2.9E-18 F322W2
3.9 5.6 3.0E-18 F322W2
4.1 7.8 4.0E-18 F444W
4.3 8.7 4.3E-18 F444W
4.5 10 4.8E-18 F444W
4.7 13 5.9E-18 F444W
4.9 17 7.5E-18 F444W
Table 3. S/N = 10 in 104 s for the NIRCam grism module B
300
λ (micron) Fcont(microJy) Fline(erg s-1 cm-2) Filter
2.5 11 1.2E-17 F322W2
2.7 8.6 7.9E-18 F322W2
2.9 7.7 6.2E-18 F322W2
3.1 8.2 5.9E-18 F322W2
3.3 6.5 4.3E-18 F322W2
3.5 6.2 3.8E-18 F322W2
3.7 6 3.4E-18 F322W2
3.9 6.3 3.3E-18 F322W2
4.1 9.5 4.8E-18 F444W
4.3 10 5.0E-18 F444W
4.5 12 5.4E-18 F444W
4.7 14 6.3E-18 F444W
4.9 17 7.4E-18 F444W
301
Figure 2. Expected NIRCam grism line and continuum sensitivities in modules A and B
302
Grism module A and module B sensitivities from Greene et al. (2017)—tables 2 and 3. This assumes a 2 × 5 pixel extraction aperture (2
pixels in the spectral direction by 5 pixels in the spatial direction). Module B's sensitivity is ~75% that of module A because module B's
grism has a less effective AR coating. © Greene et al. (2017).
References
NIRCam Design Features and Performance website (U. Arizona)
303
Latest updates
304
NIRCam Bright Source Limits
The bright source limits of JWST's Near Infrared Camera (NIRCam) are predicted by a saturation model that uses
measurements obtained during ground testing.
On this page
Imaging saturation limits

Time-series imaging saturation limits
Grism saturation limits
References
The bright source limits for various modes and subarrays of JWST's NIRCam are predicted by a saturation model
that uses measurements obtained during ground testing. The efficiency with which photons striking the JWST
primary mirror will be converted into measured signal at the NIRCam detectors has been predicted using
measured transmission/reflection values for all NIRCam optical elements and the quantum efficiency of the
detectors. Noise is estimated based on characterization data for the detectors, including read noise, dark
current, and 1/f components, and includes the usual photon statistics for light from sources and predicted
background levels. The expected point spread function is computed using WebbPSF.
Users should ultimately use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) for all saturation/sensitivity calculations.
Imaging saturation limits

The NIRCam imager is the prime near-infrared imager for JWST. It offers 7 subarrays: (1) FULL, SUB640, SUB320,
and SUB160 that are located in the center of module B and (2) SUB400P, SUB160P, and SUB64P that are located
in the top-right corner of module B. The subarrays are designed to accommodate observations of bright sources.
Table 1 lists the bright limits (95% full well) for the largest (FULL) and smallest (SUB64P) NIRCam imaging
subarrays, assuming the RAPID readout pattern with Ngroups = 2 (reset-read-read). Figures 1 and 2 illustrate
these limits.
Table 1. NIRCam imager bright source limits
305
Filter Bright source limit (Vega mags) Bright source limit (Vega mags)
Ksat (G2V) Ksat (G2V)
FULL (21.4 s) SUB64P (~0.1 s)
F070W 14.43 8.63
F090W 15.24 9.44
F115W 15.44 9.64
F140M 14.62 8.82
F150W 15.37 9.57
F150W2 16.60 10.80
F162M 14.40 8.60
F164N 11.99 6.19
F182M 14.36 8.56
F187N 11.68 5.88
F200W 14.80 9.00
F210M 13.66 7.86
F212N 11.38 5.58
F250M 14.14 8.34
F277W 15.23 9.43
F300M 13.93 8.13
F322W2 15.66 9.86
F323N 11.02 5.22
F335M 13.65 7.85
F356W 14.42 8.62
F360M 13.45 7.65
F405N 10.44 4.64
F410M 13.06 7.26
F430M 12.09 6.29
306
F444W 13.68 7.88
F460M 11.52 5.72
F466N 9.64 3.84
F470N 9.45 3.65
F480M 11.55 5.75
307
Figure 1. Approximate saturation magnitudes in full frame imaging mode
The figure shows saturation, in magnitudes (Vega K-band), for a solar type G2V star in 21.4 s (based on 2 readouts of the full
detector), filling pixel wells to 95% capacity. Brighter saturation limits may be achieved by using subarrays to reduce the exposure
time, and/or using time-series observations with the weak lenses or grism. Filter widths are shown as horizontal bars. Extra-wide, wide,
medium, and narrow filters are labeled in normal, bold, and italic text, respectively, each with progressively thicker bars. Please use
the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to calculate saturation estimates for your specific proposed observations.
308
Figure 2. Saturation magnitudes for NIRCam filters in a 64 × 64 pixel subarray
The figure shows approximate saturation magnitudes (Vega K-band for a solar type G2V star) in the 64 × 64 pixel subarray for a ~0.1 s
exposure (2 readouts of the subarray). Saturation is defined here as 95% of the pixel well capacity. Filters are color-coded, with widths
shown as horizontal bars. More precise saturation estimates may be obtained from the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC). Limits ~5
magnitudes brighter than those shown here may be achieved at 1.3–2.2 µm by using the +8-wave weak lens (WLP8) with the 160 × 160
pixel subarray.
Time-series imaging saturation limits

The NIRCam time-series mode was designed to enable precise measurements of photometric variations in
relatively bright sources. For the short wavelength channel, the WLP8 weak lens may be used to defocus the
light, raising the saturation limit by ~5 magnitudes. The NIRCam time-series mode offers 3 subarrays: SUB400P,
SUB160P, and SUB64P (all located in the top-right corner of module B). Table 2 lists the bright limits (70% full
well) for the SUB160P subarray, assuming the RAPID readout pattern with Ngroups = 2 (reset-read-read).
Table 2. NIRCam Time-series imaging WLP8 bright source limits
309
Filter Bright source limit (Vega mags)
Ksat (G2V)
SUB160P (~0.55 s)
F150W 4.63
F200W 4.37
F140M 3.69
F182M 3.93
F210M 3.43
F187N 1.34
F212N 1.22
310
Figure 3. Saturation magnitudes for short wavelength NIRCam filters using the WLP8 weak lens with a 160 × 160 pixel subarray
The figure shows approximate saturation magnitudes (Vega K-band for a solar type G2V star), using the WLP8 weak lens, with a 160 ×
160 pixel subarray for a ~0.55 s exposure (2 readouts of the subarray). Saturation is defined here as 70% of the pixel well capacity. Filters
are color-coded, with widths shown as horizontal bars. More precise saturation estimates may be obtained from the Exposure Time
Calculator (ETC).
Grism saturation limits

The NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy and NIRCam grism time-series modes provide R ~ 1,600 spectra of
all objects within (or just outside) the field of view in the long wavelength channel. The wide field mode offers
one subarray: FULL. The grism time series offers 3 subarrays, each along the bottom of module A: SUBGRISM256
(2048 × 256), SUBGRISM128 (2048 × 128), and SUBGRISM64 (2048 × 64). Table 3 lists the bright limits for the
2048 × 64 subarray calculated using the ETC v1.5, assuming that the source reaches 70% full well using 2
groups of the RAPID readout pattern (reset-read-read).
Table 3. NIRCam grism brightness limits in module A 2048 × 64 pixel subarray SUBGRISM64
311
lambda (μm) Bright source limit Bright source limit Bright source limit Filter
(K-band Vega mags) (K-band Vega mags) (K-band Vega mags)
A0V star G2V star M2V star
2.5 4.4 4.4 4.0 F322W2
2.7 4.5 4.5 4.4 F322W2
2.9 4.5 4.5 4.4 F322W2
3.1 4.2 4.3 4.2 F322W2
3.3 4.2 4.3 4.4 F322W2
3.5 4.2 4.2 4.3 F322W2
3.7 4.0 4.1 4.2 F322W2
3.9 3.8 3.9 4.1 F322W2
4.1 3.6 3.7 3.8 F444W
4.3 3.4 3.4 3.5 F444W
4.5 3.1 3.1 3.2 F444W
4.7 2.7 2.8 2.8 F444W
4.9 2.4 2.4 2.6 F444W
312
References
313
Latest updates
09 Nov 2020
Fixed broken link in Figure 2.
19 Dec 2019
Updated bright source saturation limits (ETC v1.5) to 95% (imaging) and 70% (time-
series) well capacity

published
314
NIRCam Persistence
Image persistence of JWST NIRCam detectors has been initially characterized using ground testing data. From
this analysis, estimates of the spurious signal due to persistence can be calculated.
On this page
Modeling persistence
Persistence diagrams
Estimating persistence
Persistence maps
References
Image persistence, or latency, represents one of the main anomalies of near-IR detectors. Pixels subjected to
strong illumination produce a faint residual image in the following integrations. Even if the effect is more visible
for pixels exposed to bright sources, any amount of illumination can cause latent images. Persistence may
last for several minutes after the end of an exposure and is not restricted to pixels that have reached saturation;
nor does it disappear with detector reset.
Persistence is generally low for typical NIRCam exposures and dithers, but it can be high depending on target
brightness and exposure setup. Removing or mitigating persistence during data post-processing is among the
objectives of the JWST calibration pipeline. This article provides information to estimate the amount of
persistence one may expect in an exposure before attempting a software correction.
Modeling persistence
Smith et al. (2008) have proposed a model explaining the origin of persistence. The detector lattice contains
impurities that act as charge traps. When the detector is initially reset, a strong electric field creates a charge-
free region within the material; under its influence any photo-generated free charge is immediately swept away
and collected, thus no trap capture can occur. As the signal accumulates, the electric field decreases and the
charge-free region shrinks, leaving behind an increasingly wider neutral region. Photo-generated free charges
will slowly diffuse across the increasingly thicker neutral region to reach the residual charge-free region and be
collected. In the process some of them may be captured by the traps, with probability and timescales that
depend on the properties of the trap impurities. Eventually, the captured charges will be released back and
collected, generating a spurious time-delayed signal (persistence).
The capture and release process can be characterized by a combination of exponential functions with timescales
associated to the different trap populations. Leisenring et al. (2016) have analyzed the persistence of NIRCam's
flight detectors (or sensor chip assemblies, SCAs) with respect to source flux, rate of discharge of the charge-free
region, and over-fill levels, crafting a semi-empirical model of NIRCam persistence.
315
The data indicate that the average rate of charge releases are consistent within a factor of 2 for the 8 short
wavelength (SW) detectors. For the 2 long wavelength (LW) detectors, the average rate of charge release are
strongly similar (see Figure 1). The average results for the 2 types of detectors are presented below. Certain
detectors show some significant spatial variation; therefore, individual maps to illustrate the regions more
affected are also provided. These maps may allow observers to place the brightest offending sources in the less
affected areas of the focal plane.
316
Figure 1. Median persistence of NIRCam detectors
Median persistence behavior for all of NIRcam's SCAs after fully saturating the detectors for approximately 7 minutes. The left image
shows the time-dependent latent accumulation, while the right image plots the binned persistence rate. The dashed lines indicate
NIRCam's typical quiescent dark current rates as measured during ISIM testing, while the dotted lines show representative zodiacal light
estimates for filters F200W and F356W. © Leisenring et al. (2016).
Persistence diagrams
Figures 2 and 3 present the results obtained using the Leisenring et al. (2016) model for the NIRCam short and
long wavelength channels, respectively. Each plot shows the accumulated persistence (total released charge, in
electrons) after a bright illumination as a function of the fill level of the saturation level ("well fill fraction,"
vertical axis) and integration time (horizontal axis). The well fill fraction ranges from 0.1 to 5 times the saturation
level (about 120,000 e–) whereas the integration times ranges from 0 s to 1,400 s. The results are color-coded
according to the color bar at the bottom of each plot. The plots are relative to the following cases:

1. Left plot: integration starting immediately after the illumination exposure, without a break between them.
This case is representative of the persistence measured in coronagraphic or in time-series observations,
and in general, for all cases of exposures containing multiple integrations. The maximum latent signal,
about 200 e– at 5× saturation (light blue at the top-right corner), is much smaller than the shot noise of
the source, i.e., SQRT(5*120,000) = 774 e–. However, this effect is systematically raising the measured
signal in a ramp, so it must be taken into account, for example, to correct for absolute photometry.

2. Middle plot: in this case the integration starts 45 s after the previous offending integration. This is about
the minimum time needed to restart an exposure after a dither move, excluding overheads (detector
setup, wait for next readout cycle, reset all pixels, cleanup after the exposure) that may add about 70 s.
The time delay allows trapped charges to be released and swept away by the strong electric field set by
the interim reset frames. Since a ~50% fraction of the traps has a short decay timescale, the time delay
required by a dither move cuts down significantly the total amount of released charge. Still, the
systematic effect may become visible over the sky background (TBD).

3. Right plot: in this case, the integration starts after 1,800 s, which is the nominal time (including
overheads) charged to slew to a new target. In this case, the release of charges is in practice negligible,
reaching 21 e– at the end of a 1,400 s integration following a 5× illumination.
317
Figure 2. Short wavelength channel persistence
Map of the persistence level accumulated at the end of a dark exposure (total latent emission, in electrons) as a function of the
illumination level in a previous exposure, in units of the saturation threshold (well fill fractions) for the NIRCam SW SCAs. The 3 figures,
left to right, illustrate the case of a dark exposure starting immediately after, 45 s after, and 1,800 s after the bright exposure, respectively.
318
Figure 3. Long wavelength channel persistence
Same as Figure 2, for the NIRCam LW SCAs.
Estimating persistence
Using the Exposure Time Calculator (v1.5), along with Figures 2 and 3 above, it is possible to have an idea of the
amount of persistence one may encounter in a NIRCam imaging observation.

In this example, consider a star of magnitude K = 16, with a flat continuum spectrum and medium background,
is observed in the F200W filter, Subarray = FULL, Readout Pattern = SHALLOW2, Groups/Int (groups per
integrations) = 5, Integrations/Exp (integrations per exposure) = 1. The Total Exposure Time (calculated by APT)
is 236.12 s.
The primarily concern is the brightest pixel at the center of the point spread function. To estimate the counts, an
extraction aperture, corresponding to the area of a pixel, needs to be set up. Since observations are being done
with the F200W filter, the short wavelength channel with a pixel size of 31 mas is being used, an area of about 1
/1000 of a square arcsec. The radius of the circular aperture with the same area is 17.5 mas.
In the Strategy tab of the ETC, with Aperture radius = 0.0175" and selection of the noiseless sky background
button, a flux of 1,238 e–/s is obtained, having added the small contribution from the background. The total flux
is therefore 1,238 e–/s × 236.12 s = 292,317 e–, which is a well fill fraction of about 2.4 (saturation occurs at
about 120,000 e–). Using the central panel of Figure 2, the next dithered exposure of the same length and in the
same filter will show about 75 e– of persistence at the peak position of the source. A check with the ETC shows
that this is comparable to the signal produced, with the same instrument configuration, by a K ~ 25 magnitude
source that would be detected with SNR = 4.7.
Persistence maps
319
Persistence maps
Figures 4 to 7 show the persistence distribution across each SCA. Figures 4 and 5 refer to the SW and LW
channels of module A, while Figures 6 and 7 are relative to module B. These maps were derived from extremely
super-saturated data held at saturation for a long time, and therefore, they are representative of the total trap
populations. The SW maps tend to show considerable structure, apparently correlated with the dark current
distribution. The LW detectors, however, are pretty flat. A value of 1.0 corresponds to the median persistence of
all SW or LW detectors. Therefore, one can use this information to tie back to the average contour plots
presented in Figures 2 and 3, getting estimates at specific locations. This information may be useful if one has
bright sources in the target field, as a guide to avoid certain areas. In particular, grism time-series observations
use A5, A1, and A3, and this last SCA is affected by non-uniform persistence. Time-series imaging observations
(using primarily B1 and B5) and NIRCam coronagraphy (using A2, A4, and A5) are marginally affected by field
dependence of persistence.
320
Figure 4. Maximum persistence module A (SW)
Spatial map of the persistence level accumulated after a very bright light exposure, for the 4 SW SCAs of NIRCam module A. In Figures
4–7, the red squares indicate the first pixels to be read out from each detector.
321
Figure 5. Maximum persistence module A (LW)
Same as Figure 4 for the LW SCA A5 (ALONG) of NIRCam module A.
322
Figure 6. Maximum persistence module B (SW)
Same as Figure 4 for the 4 SW SCAs of NIRCam module B.
323
Figure 7. Maximum persistence module B (LW)
Same as Figure 4 for the LW SCA B5 (BLONG) of NIRCam module B.
References
Leisenring, J. M., et al. 2016, Proc. SPIE 9915
Characterizing persistence in JWST NIRCam flight detectors
Smith, R. M., et al. 2008, Proc. SPIE 7021

A theory for image persistence in HgCdTephotodiodes
324
Latest updates
19 Dec 2019
updated ETC calculation in the 'Estimating Persistence' section & removed old text.
325
NIRCam Flat Fields
JWST NIRCam flat field images are used to remove pixel-to-pixel sensitivity variations from science data. They
also reveal small areas of bad pixels on some detectors.
The effects of pixel-to-pixel sensitivity changes across a given NIRCam detector are corrected using a flat field
image. The flat field images for all NIRCam detectors were created using data collected during ground testing,
where the illumination was provided by external lamps. The flat fields for all detectors are shown in Figure 1.
Areas marked in green (on detectors A1, B2, A3, and B1) contain bad pixels, the effects of which can be
mitigated through dithering. The two larger areas of bad pixels, both of which are more than 1.5" in diameter (on
A1 and B2), as well as the smaller areas of bad pixels, both roughly 0.6" in diameter (on A3 and B1), are
described below. In order to reduce the effects of bad pixels, observers are encouraged to avoid placing
scientifically important targets on those areas and to dither their observations.
326
Figure 1. NIRCam flat fields
327
These flat field images show relative pixel sensitivities within all 10 NIRCam detectors in both modules (A and B). Short wavelength
detectors are shown in the top and middle images. The long wavelength detectors, A5 and B5, are in the bottom images. Bad pixels on
detector A1, B2, A3, and B1 are highlighted in green and shown in more detail below. Each detector is 2040 × 2040 pixels.
Specific features
328
Specific features
Low epoxy regions

The flat field images for detectors A1, A3, A4, B1, B3, and B4 contain localized regions where the flat field can be
noticeably different from that in the surrounding pixels. These regions correspond to areas containing a thinner
than average layer of epoxy between the multiplexer and indium bump bonds. See Hilbert & Rest (2016) for
details. While these low epoxy regions can affect the flat field value, these pixels are still able to be accurately
calibrated in the calibration pipeline and produce good scientific data. The most visible example, for detector B4,
is shown in Figure 2. Here the low epoxy region is toward the bottom of the detector, in the center. It is roughly
circular, with a diameter of about 540 pixels (16.75"). The flat field value within the low epoxy region is several
percent higher than that immediately outside.
329
Figure 2. Low epoxy region in lower section of detector B4
A zoomed-in view of the low epoxy region on detector B4. While the flat field values within the region are different from those outside, the
pixels are still good.
Bad pixels on detector A1

In the center of the low epoxy region in detector A1, there is a small (~50 pixels or 1.5" across) roughly circular
region of bad pixels, shown in detail in Figure 3 below. This area should ideally be avoided during data
calibration and analysis. The flat field values in this area have all been set to 1.0 and the pixels are flagged in
the bad pixel mask reference file as "DO_NOT_USE." This flag will propagate into the data quality extension of an
observation when the stage 1 calibration pipeline is run on the data. Observers can mitigate the effects of this
area of bad pixels by using a dither pattern with pointing offsets of more than 1.5".
Several other areas with distinctive flat field features are visible along the right edge of the lower half of the
detector. Despite having flat field values that are different from the surrounding areas, these pixels do not
exhibit any other anomalous behavior, and are not flagged as bad.
330
Figure 3. Bad pixels on lower section of detector A1
A zoomed-in view of the bad pixels (highlighted in green) on a portion of detector A1 (near the bottom). The pixels within the features
along the right edge of the detector exhibit nominal behavior are are not flagged as bad.
Bad pixels on detector B2

There are 2 small but extended areas on detector B2 that show anomalous flat field values, as seen in Figure 4.
The feature along the right edge (marked in green) contains bad pixels with anomalously high flat field values.
This feature measures roughly 1.7" × 1.7". These pixels exhibit non-nominal behavior and are flagged as
"DO_NOT_USE" in the data quality array.
In addition, a roughly circular area of pixels with low flat field values (0.85–0.89) is visible on the right side of the
detector, roughly halfway between the top and bottom. This area is visible as a dark spot with a diameter of 44
pixels (1.36"). While the flat field values within this region are lower than in the surrounding area, the pixels in
the region otherwise show no anomalous behavior and are still considered good.
331
Figure 4. Bad pixels on right-hand section of detector B2
A zoomed-in view of the flat field features on a portion of detector B2 (along the right-hand side). Pixels in the dark spot have flat field
values between 0.85–0.89 and are considered good pixels. The collection of green colored pixels in the upper right exhibit anomalous
behavior and are flagged as bad.
Bad pixels on detectors A3 and B1

Detectors A3 and B1 also contain small areas of bad pixels. These areas are both roughly 0.6" in diameter. On
detector A3, the bad pixels are located towards the upper left corner of the detector. Note that this is close to
the center of the module A field of view. On detector B1, the bad pixels are located just to the left and below the
center of the detector. As with the larger collections of bad pixels described above, the effects of these areas can
be mitigated through dithering.
332
Figure 5. Bad pixels on detector A3
The full detector A3 with a bad pixel area roughly 0.6" in diameter shown in green in the upper left.
333
Figure 6. Bad pixels on detector B1
The full detector B1 with a bad pixel area roughly 0.6" in diameter shown in green just left and below the detector center.
References
Hilbert, B. and Rest, A. 2016) JWST-STScI-004622
NIRCam Detector Gain Values in CV2
Latest updates
334
335
NIRCam WFSS Field of View
JWST NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy observations yield spectra from sources within a field of view that
varies with the selected filter and grism.
On this page
Full spectrum field of view tables

Grism R
Grism C
Effective and full spectrum field of view figures
F250M
F277W
F300M
F322W2
F335M
F356W
F360M
F410M
F430M
F444W
F460M
F480M
Optimal fields
References
The effective field of view of the NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) mode varies with the cross filter
used in combination with the grism. At 3.95 µm, light is undeviated by the grisms, appearing in the same
location on the detector as it would for imaging observations. At other wavelengths, the grisms disperse light by
1 nm/pixel along detector rows for Grism R and columns for Grism C. Thus, depending on the location of the
source and the grism used, some (or all) of the spectrum may fall on the detector pixels, while the rest (or all)
may be lost.
The following areas on the sky are defined for a WFSS observation with a given filter and grism:
effective field of view—sources yield either partial or complete spectra on a detector;

full spectrum field of view—sources yield complete spectra on a detector;
optimal field of view—sources yield complete spectra on a detector when using either Grism R or Grism C.
The extents of all of these areas are provided below for all filters available for WFSS observations: the 12
medium and wide filters in the long wavelength (LW) channel (2.4–5.0 µm).
336
Note that Grism C observations may be affected by the coronagraph masks and substrate. This is not an issue
for F444W, F460M, or F480M. For all other filters, the sky background and any sources present in the
coronagraph area will complicate estimates of the background and contamination.
These fields of view are shown in APT Aladin. By default, Aladin shows the full spectrum field of view. The larger
effective field of view may be shown by selecting the option to show partial spectra region. Note these regions
are most easily viewed before adding the direct image and out-of-field images to the observations in APT.
Full spectrum field of view tables
Grism R
Table 1 contains the extent of the full spectrum field of view when Grism R is paired with each available filter for
module A and B. The coordinates are given in pixels in each detector's ideal coordinate system.
Table 1. Full spectrum field of view for NIRCam WFSS Grism R observations in each available filter
GRISMR + FILTER Module A xλmin Module A xλmax Module B xλmin Module B xλmax
F250M 1530 2164 509 -130
F277W 1560 2164 479 -130
F300M 1172 2164 877 -130
F322W2 1550 1827 499 202
F335M 833 2164 1216 -130
F356W 883 1867 1166 162
F360M 634 2046 1415 -17
F410M 186 1548 1863 481
F430M -130 1519 2164 510
F444W 166 841 1883 1188
F460M -130 1150 2164 878
F480M -130 881 2164 1148
Grism C
337
Grism C
Table 2 contains the extent of the full spectrum field of view when Grism C is paired with each available filter for
module A and B. The coordinates are given in pixels in each detector's ideal coordinate system.
Table 2. Full spectrum field of view for NIRCam WFSS Grism C observations in each available filter
GRISMC + FILTER Module A yλmin Module A yλmax Module B yλmin Module B yλmax
F250M 1530 2698 1530 2698
F277W 1560 2698 1560 2698
F300M 1172 2698 1162 2698
F322W2 1550 1827 1540 1837
F335M 833 2295 823 2305
F356W 883 1867 873 1877
F360M 634 2046 624 2057
F410M 186 1548 176 1558
F430M -172 1519 -182 1529
F444W 166 841 156 851
F460M -194 1150 -198 1161
F480M -194 881 -198 891
Effective and full spectrum field of view figures

The following plots illustrate the effective and full spectrum field of view for every available combination of grism
and filters. Examples are shown of sources yielding spectra that fall outside, partially within, and fully within the
LW detectors. Note the wider filters (e.g., F322W2) yield longer spectra and thus smaller full spectrum fields of
view.
F250M
338
Figure 1. NIRCam WFSS effective field of view with F250M filter
Effective field of view when the F250M filter is combined with Grism R (top) and Grism C (bottom). Each star represents a source
yielding a spectrum illustrated by a corresponding arrow. The spectrum is dispersed along the length of the arrow with wavelength
increasing toward the arrow head. Sources are within the full spectrum field of view if their spectra fall completely within a detector's field
of view (black square outlines). The full spectrum field of view is shaded blue for module A (left) and orange for module B (right).
However, note that for Grism C, the coronagraph masks (illustrated at top) may impact some spectra. Sources within the regions with
diagonal stripes yield partially truncated spectra. The effective field of view includes both the striped and shaded regions. The outer black
rectangles indicate the full regions that receive incoming light from NIRCam's pick off mirrors. Sources outside those regions do not yield
spectra.
F277W
339
Figure 2. NIRCam WFSS effective field of view with the F277W filter
Effective field of view when the F277W filter is combined with Grism R (top) and Grism C (bottom), as described in Figure 1.
F300M
340
Figure 3. NIRCam WFSS effective field of view with the F300M filter
Effective field of view when the F300M filter is combined with Grism R (top) and Grism C (bottom), as described in Figure 1.
F322W2
341
Figure 4. NIRCam WFSS effective field of view with the F322W2 filter
Effective field of view when the F322W2 filter is combined with Grism R (top) and Grism C (bottom), as described in Figure 1.
F335M
342
F356W
343
F360M
344
F410M
345
F430M
346
F444W
347
F460M
348
Effective field of view when the F460M filter is combined with Grism R (top) and Grism C (bottom), as described in figure 1.
F480M
349
Optimal fields
Observations with both grisms are useful to mitigate confusion from overlapping spectra. Complete spectra from
both grisms are only obtained for sources within the optimal fields.
350
Table 3 and Figure 13 report the optimal fields in modules A and B for the 12 NIRCam filters supported for WFSS.
Each optimal field is a square with center coordinates and side length given in pixels. The area of each optimal
field is expressed both as a fraction of the full detector area and in arcmin2. The wavelength range of each filter
is given by λmin to λmax.
Table 3. Optimal fields for NIRCam WFSS observations
Filter λmin λmax X center X center Y center Length on Fraction of Area
(µm) (µm) Module A Module B (pixels) each side detector area (arcmin2)
(pixels) (pixels) (pixels)
F250M 2.412 2.595 1790 2962 1789 502 0.0606 0.278
F277W 2.416 3.127 1787 2965 1787 506 0.0615 0.282
F300M 2.829 3.155 1579 3173 1580 919 0.203 0.931
F322W2 2.430 4.013 1749 3003 1749 457 0.050 0.23
F335M 3.177 3.538 1407 3345 1407 1267 0.386 1.77
F356W 3.140 3.980 1409 3343 1410 1200 0.346 1.59
F360M 3.427 3.814 1280 3472 1281 1517 0.553 2.54
F410M 3.864 4.301 887 3865 887 1603 0.617 2.83
F430M 4.167 4.398 796 3956 797 1592 0.609 2.80
F444W 3.880 4.986 537 4215 538 934 0.210 0.962
F460M 4.515 4.747 622 4130 622 1243 0.371 1.70
F480M 4.662 4.977 507 4245 507 1013 0.247 1.13
351
Figure 13. NIRCam WFSS optimal fields
Optimal fields for NIRCam WFSS observations in each filter (color-coded). Module A is on the left, and module B is on the right. Sources
within these areas will yield complete spectra on the NIRCam detectors for both Grism R and Grism C observations.
References
Robberto, M. 2017, JWST-STScI-005995,

An Analysis of the Sky Areas Mapped by NIRCam LW Grisms
Latest updates
28 Feb 2022
Aladin visualizations of FOVs added in APT 2021.2
352
NIRCam WFSS Backgrounds
Estimated backgrounds are available for JWST NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) observations with
each filter, grism, and module.
On this page
Estimated maximum dispersed background levels

Estimated background along the dispersion axis
Estimated background in each filter
F250W
F277W
F300M
F322W2
F335M
F356W
F360M
F410M
F430M
F444W
F460M
F480M
The effective field of view in the NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) observing mode varies with
the cross filter used in combination with each grism. The shape and background (which is dominated by the z
odiacal light component) levels can be expected to be different for different pairing of the NIRCam grisms and
cross filter. The following plots show these backgrounds for every possible combination of grism and filter
available for WFSS observations. For simplicity, the default background level and components as predicted by
the JWST ETC for the coordinates of 0:00:00, 0:00:00 are adopted. The background is expected to vary as a
function of time and position and this is not included in these examples. An increase in the zodiacal background
level of a factor of up to 2 can be expected, as discussed in JWST Background Variability. Note that in some
cases, with very blue or very red filters, there are areas in the detector that receive no light, and hence the
background drops smoothly to zero.
Estimated maximum dispersed background levels
353
Table 1 lists the expected background levels (based on current Exposure Time Calculator background spectra
and pre-launch grism dispersion relations) for all of the possible combinations of filters and grisms in each
module. This is also plotted in the following figures. Module B numbers are expected to be ~20% lower than
module A due to the lower throughput of the module B grisms. The background is expected to be slighly higher
for some filter choices with Grism C as some extra background light makes it past the coronagraph that is
located above the detectors in both modules.
Table 1. Estimated maximum dispersed background level in each filter, grism, and module combination
Filter Module A Module A Module B Module B

GRISM R GRISM C GRISM R GRISM C
(e–/s) (e–/s) (e–/s) (e–/s)
F250M 0.07 0.13 0.05 0.10
F277W 0.30 0.37 0.22 0.27
F300M 0.14 0.14 0.10 0.10
F322W2 0.73 0.81 0.54 0.60
F335M 0.16 0.16 0.12 0.12
F356W 0.41 0.41 0.31 0.31
F360M 0.19 0.19 0.14 0.14
F410M 0.25 0.25 0.19 0.19
F430M 0.14 0.14 0.11 0.11
F444W 0.78 0.78 0.58 0.58
F460M 0.16 0.16 0.12 0.12
F480M 0.23 0.23 0.17 0.17
Estimated background along the dispersion axis
354
Figure 1. Estimated NIRCam WFSS background levels versus position along dispersion axis
Estimated background levels (e–/s) in WFSS observations for each available filter along the dispersion direction for Grism R (left) and
Grism C (right).
Estimated background in each filter
F250W
355
Figure 2. Estimated NIRCam WFSS backgrounds with the F250M filter
Estimated WFSS background levels (e–/s) as a function of position within each long wavelength detector when using the F250M filter
with each module and grism as labeled.
F277W
356
Figure 3. Estimated NIRCam WFSS backgrounds with the F277W filter
Estimated WFSS background levels (e–/s) as a function of position within each long wavelength detector when using the F277W filter
F300M
357
F322W2
358
Figure 5. Estimated NIRCam WFSS backgrounds with the F322W2 filter
Estimated WFSS background levels (e–/s) as a function of position within each long wavelength detector when using the F322W2 filter
F335M
359
F356W
360
F360M
361
F410M
362
F430M
363
F444W
364
F460M
365
F480M
366
Latest updates
22 Oct 2020
Updated estimates of backgrounds to include effect of the pick-off mirror (POM) and
coronagraph assembly.
Originally 10 Feb 2018

published
367
NIRCam Dragon's Breath
Bright sources off the edge of the JWST NIRCam field of view scatter light onto the NIRCam detectors. This effect
is called dragon's breath.
Dragon's breath is caused by light scattering from the inner wall of the mask immediately in front of the focal
plane array. Users can minimize dragon's breath by avoiding the placement of bright objects near the edges of
NIRCam detectors.
In the long wavelength (LW) channel, the integrated intensity of the scattered light is up to ~1.5% of the total
intensity from an equivalent in-field source, with the peak pixel including up to ~0.75% of the source intensity.
The total intensity of the scattered light depends on the distance of the source from the edge of the detector,
with the strongest effect occurring near ~1.9" from the detector edge in the LW channel. The light scatters about
200–250 pixels into the field, with the peak intensity occurring within ~50 pixels (1 LW pixel = 0.063″).
The effect is significantly smaller in the short wavelength (SW) channel, where the integrated intensity of the
scattered light is only up to ~0.4% of the total intensity of the equivalent in-field source, with the peak pixel
including ~0.01%.
368
Figure 1. Dragon's breath
This is an example of dragon's breath, including the diffraction spikes. Left: a short wavelength channel dragon's breath, for a source
placed 2.1 from the frame edge. Right: a long wavelength channel dragon's breath, for a star placed ~1.7 from the frame edge. Both
images are 512 × 506 pixels; since the pixels are twice as large in the LW channel, the angular extent of the LW scattered light is larger
than it is in the SW channel.
Avoidance zones
The dragon's breath avoidance zones are around the perimeters of all 10 NIRCam detectors. In the LW channel,
dragon's breath is strongest for sources positioned ~1.9″ from the detector edge and for those within ±0.8″ from
that point, forming an avoidance annulus around the detector. In the SW channel, the avoidance zone is
centered at ~2.1″ from the frame edge and has a width of ±0.5″, including the region between SW detectors in
each module.
369
Figure 2. Avoidance zones
A zoomed-in view of the upper part of the module A detectors, showing the avoidance zones for the SW channel (blue) and the LW
channel (red). The avoidance zones are the hatched regions, with ±0.5 (±0.8) width for the SW (LW) detectors.
Latest updates
Originally published 11 Jul 2017
370
NIRCam APT Templates
A JWST observing program that uses the NIRCam instrument is designed by using the one of the NIRCam
templates in the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT).
On this page
Step-by-step in APT
NIRCam templates and observing capabilities
Creating an APT observation
NIRCam offers 5 observing modes: imaging, coronagraphic imaging, time-series imaging, grism time series, and
wide field slitless spectroscopy. Each mode has its own APT template.
Step-by-step in APT
The step-by-step instructions for using the NIRCam observing templates in the APT are provided in the following
articles:
NIRCam Imaging APT Template

NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging APT Template
NIRCam Time-Series APT Template
NIRCam Grism Time-Series APT Template
NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy APT Template
Additional information on all available options and restrictions for NIRCam templates are available in NIRCam
Templates articles at the Proposal Parameters Documentation outside JDox.
NIRCam templates and observing capabilities
Table 1. Summary of NIRCam APT templates and observing capabilities
371
Available Features Imaging Coronagraphic Time- Grism Wide field slitless
imaging series time spectroscopy
imaging series
Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview
Dithering Highly Optional Highly

Recommended Recommended
Mosaics Available Available
Coronagraphs available occulting masks

and Lyot stops
Weak lens available WLP8 WLP4,

(0.6–2.3 µm) WLP8
Grisms available (2.4– Grism R Grism C, R

5.0 µm)
Exposures longer than Allowed* Allowed*

10,000 seconds
* Warning: the high gain antenna may move during exposures longer than 10,000 seconds.
Creating an APT observation

To create a new NIRCam observation, create or choose an Observation Folder in the tree editor and click Add in
the active GUI window. This will add a generic observation to the folder and open an observation form. The
observation can be assigned a unique number and a text label (which does not need to be unique). Select
NIRCam from the Instrument drop-down parameter field. This populates the Template drop-down field with the
NIRCam templates; select one of them to continue working on the specifics of the observation.
372
Latest updates
373
NIRCam Imaging APT Template
Instructions for designing JWST NIRCam imaging observations using APT, the Astronomer's Proposal Tool, are
provided in this article.
On this page
Generic parameters
Coordinated Parallel observations
NIRCam Imaging tab
Module
Subarray
Dither Parameters
Primary dithers
Subpixel Dither Type
Filters and exposures
Readout patterns
Other tabs
Mosaic Properties
Special Requirements
Comments
References
See also: NIRCam Imaging, Imaging Roadmap, NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies, NIRCam Deep

Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels, NIRCam Parallel Imaging and NIRISS WFSS of Galaxies in Lensing
Clusters
Imaging is one of the 5 NIRCam observing modes. Each mode has a corresponding template in the Astronomers
Proposal Tool, APT, for users to design their observing programs. Instructions for NIRCam imaging are given
below. Complete listings of allowed values are documented in the NIRCam Imaging Template parameters page.
Step-by-step APT instructions are provided below.
Generic parameters
The following parameters are generic to all templates, and are not discussed in this article: observation Number,
374
observation Label, observations Comments, Target name, ETC Wkbk. Calc ID (in the Filters dialog box), Mosaic
Properties, and Special Requirements.

See also: JWST Parallel Observations
NIRCam imaging supports coordinated parallel observations with MIRI or NIRISS. When the Coordinated Parallel
box (visible when the Template parameter is set to NIRCam Imaging) is checked, one of these 3 parameter
values can be selected:
1. NIRCam-MIRI Imaging
2. NIRCam-NIRISS Imaging
3. NIRCam Imaging-NIRISS WFSS
Note that the default option is None Selected.
NIRCam Imaging tab
Module
See also: NIRCam Modules
Under the NIRCam Imaging tab, set Module to ALL to observe with both NIRCam modules, returning data from
the full field of view using all 10 detectors. To obtain data from only a single module or smaller detector
subarrays, select Module B.
Subarray
See also: NIRCam Detector Subarrays
When using module B, users may opt to either read out all 5 detectors completely (FULL) or the smaller detector
subarrays. Subarrays are read out more quickly than the full detector, providing brighter saturation limits for a
given number of reads (see below). The available subarrays are shown in Figure 1 and listed in Table 1.
The central subarrays were designed for bright extended sources (e.g., Jupiter or large star-formation regions).
They return data from 4 short wavelength detectors and one long wavelength detector, with similar combined
areas on the sky in each wavelength channel. Note that there is a gap in the coverage in the short wavelength
channel; these gaps can be covered with dithering or mosaics (see below). The corner subarrays are designed
375
channel; these gaps can be covered with dithering or mosaics (see below). The corner subarrays are designed
for small objects (subarray names are postfixed with "P" for point source) and return data from just 2 detectors,
one from each wavelength channel.
376
Figure 1. NIRCam detectors and imaging subarrays
Layout in the NIRCam field of view of the 10 detectors and module B subarrays. The short and long wavelength channels are shown in
blue and red, respectively. Note each long wavelength subarray covers 4 times the area as the corresponding short wavelength subarray
with the same number of pixels, because the short wavelength pixels deliver twice the spatial resolution along each axis.
Table 1. Imaging subarrays
Imaging Size in pixels Short wavelength Long Frame Noutputs Reset

subarray Nrows × Ncolumns † wavelength time (s) rows
FOV (each side)
FOV (each side)
FULL 2048 × 2048 2 × 64" + 4"–5" gap 129" 10.73677 4 –
SUB640 640 × 640 2 × 19.9" + 4"–5" gap 40.4" 4.18584 1 2048
SUB320 320 × 320 2 × 9.9" + 4"–5" gap 20.2" 1.06904 1 2048
SUB160 160 × 160 2 × 5.0" + 4"–5" gap 10.1" 0.27864 1 512
FULLP 2048 × 2048 64" 129" 10.73677 4 –
SUB400P 400 × 400 12.4" 25.0" 1.65624 1 2048
SUB160P 160 × 160 5.0" 10.0" 0.27864 1 512
SUB64P 64 × 64 2.0" 4.0" 0.05016 1 256
†
Subarrays ending in "P" are intended for point source imaging. They use only a single detector B1 in the short
wavelength channel, in addition to the long wavelength detector B5. FULLP, added in APT 2021.2, exploits the
full area of a single SW detector (B1) and the whole LW detector (B5), with the target placed in the upper right
region where image quality and detector response are expected to be optimal.
377
resulting images include 4"–5" gaps along the center of both axes.
The overlapping area between the short wavelength SUB64P subarray and the long wavelength SUB64P
subarray is smaller than JWST's 2-σ pointing accuracy. Set the Primary Dither Type parameter to
SUBARRAY DITHER to increase the spatial coverage and ensure the target is observed in both channels.
Dither Parameters
Dithering (multiple exposures with shifted overlapping pointings) is required for NIRCam imaging.
Dithering mitigates bad detector pixels, and it improves flat fielding and PSF sampling by imaging each portion
of sky with multiple regions of the detector. Larger primary dithers and smaller subpixel dithers also serve
additional purposes described below.
Primary dithers
See also: NIRCam Primary Dithers, NIRCam Subarray Primary Dithers, NIRCam Imaging Recommended
Strategies: Dither pattern
Primary dithers serve to fill gaps in sky coverage in the field of view between the detectors and to mitigate flat
field uncertainties. The primary dither patterns were designed for different purposes (and the choice is restricted
depending on the module selected). These are the available primary dithers for the Primary Dither Type
parameter (note that some are module-dependent):
FULL (for Module = ALL)

large fields, covering all gaps between detectors and the ~45" gap between modules
designed for use with mosaics (tiled pointings) of larger areas, but inefficient, requiring visit splitting
and large overheads (see below)
FULLBOX (for Module = ALL)

more efficient than FULL
covers a rectangular field of view without gaps when performing 4 or more dithers
INTRAMODULE (for Module = ALLor B)

targets smaller than the field of view of a single module (<110" across)
covers the 5" gaps between the short-wavelength detectors, but not the 44" gap between modules
INTRAMODULEX (for Module = ALLor B)
similar to INTRAMODULE, but more efficient when performing 4 or more dithers
INTRAMODULEBOX (for Module = ALL or B)
covers two square regions without gaps when performing 4 dithers
more compact than INTRAMODULE(X), yielding more area with maximal depth
378
more compact than INTRAMODULE(X), yielding more area with maximal depth
INTRASCA (for Module = B)
compact targets that can be imaged at the 4 corners of the detector (and in between) to mitigate
flat field uncertainties
the object size should be smaller than the the field covered by an individual detector (<50" or
<100" across for short or long-wavelength observations, respectively)
SUBARRAY_DITHER (for Module = B; designed primarily for SUB64P)

NIRCam subarray primary dithers, spanning about ±0.6" in each axis (x and y), were designed to
ensure that sources are observed in both wavelength channels when using SUB64P
NONE (for Module = ALLor B)

only recommended if used only in conjunction with an appropriate mosaic or subpixel dithering (see
below).
When subarrays (smaller than the full detectors) are used, then fewer primary dither options are available:
INTRASCA (for SUB640, SUB320, SUB160)—as described above, available for extended-source subarrays

only
INTRAMODULEBOX—as described above, available for all subarrays
SUBARRAY_DITHER (designed primarily for SUB64P)—NIRCam Subarray Primary Dithers, spanning about

±0.6" in each axis (x and y), were designed to ensure that sources are observed in both wavelength
channels when using SUB64P
NONE—only recommended in conjunction with subpixel dithering (see below)
When dithering, consider the JWST slew times and overheads. Note that the FULL dithers always require visit
splitting (new guide star acquisitions), increasing overheads significantly.
Dithering results in uneven depth (exposure time) across the final combined image. Only the INTRASCA dither
patterns are designed to provide uniform depth (full coverage in every exposure) across the small area
containing the science target.
379
Figure 2. Example NIRCam primary dither patterns
380
Exposure map for dithered observations in the short wavelength channel. Corresponding long wavelength observations are not shown.
1) Top left: FULL with 3TIGHT primary dithers

2) Top right: FULL with 9 primary dithers and a mosaic of 3 rows × 3 columns (or greater)
3) Middle left: FULLBOX with 6TIGHT primary dithers
4) Middle right: INTRAMODULEX with 4 primary dithers
5) Bottom left: INTRAMODULEBOX with 4 primary dithers
6) Bottom right: INTRASCA with 5 primary dithers. The science target should fit within one of the larger black regions.
Subpixel Dither Type
See also: NIRCam Subpixel Dithers
381
See also: NIRCam Subpixel Dithers
Smaller subpixel dither patterns include subpixel shifts designed to optimally improve image sampling and
resolution. This is especially useful for images with undersampled PSFs below the Nyquist wavelengths: 0.6–2 µm
in the short wavelength channel and 2.4–4 µm in the long wavelength channel. Subpixel dithering is not
implemented by default but may be added to an observing program by selecting more than one subpixel
position.
In addition to the standard subpixel dither patterns, more compact small grid dither (SGD) patterns are also
offered. SGD patterns are executed more quickly and precisely using the fine steering mirror (FSM) without
slewing the telescope. They are limited in size to 0.06" or less, and are expected to be 2 times more precise than
regular subpixel dithers. New SGD patterns were introduced in APT 25.4. They preserve the optimal subpixel
sampling of the original pattern, while reducing overheads but offering less mitigation of bad pixels. Prior to APT
25.4.1, the SGD patterns designed for coronagraphy were available for imaging as well.
When NIRCam imaging is used as prime mode in a coordinated parallel combination, additional customized
subpixel dither patterns become available which work well for both NIRCam imaging and the parallel instrument
mode. The NIRCam-specific subpixel dither patterns can still be selected in that case by specifying NIRCam Only,
which results in an additional pull-down selector NIRCam Positions that can be used to specify the number of
subpixel positions.

See also: NIRCam Filters, Understanding JWST Exposure Times
NIRCam uses a dichroic to observe simultaneously in the short wavelength channel (0.6–2.3 µm) and long
wavelength channel (2.4–5.0 µm). For each exposure, users select 2 NIRCam filters (one in each channel) as well
as parameters which control the exposure time (identically for both channels) via readout patterns, which serve
to reduce data volume. The exposure hierarchy is:
Exposure—with chosen filter pair; all instruments stationary and telescope locked on target
Integrations—each ends in a detector reset
Groups—saved data: average of one or more reads
Reads—non-destructive; charge continues to accumulate
382
Figure 3. NIRCam filters
Page not found for multiexcerpt macro.
The page: .NIRCam Filters v1.0 was not found. Please check/update the page name used in the 'multiexcerpt-
include' macro.
Preliminary total system throughput for each NIRCam filter. Filters marked "P" are located in the pupil wheel, requiring transmission
through a second filter in the filter wheel, either F150W2, F322W2, or F444W. In these cases, the combined transmissions are plotted.
Use of F150W2 on its own (with a CLEAR pupil wheel filter) is discouraged. High photometric precision will not be supported in F150W2
due to the transmission dips and the variable PSF across the wide wavelength range.
Readout patterns
See also: NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns, NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies: Readout pattern
Use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to determine which readout pattern, number of groups, and
number of integrations will avoid saturation and/or achieve the signal to noise required for your science.
Multiple integrations may be most useful for brighter sources to avoid saturation. However for fainter sources,
multiple dithers are generally preferable, with one integration per exposure per dither position.
Multiple groups are desirable to enable "up-the-ramp" fitting to observed count rates. This facilitates cosmic ray
rejection, reduces the effective read noise for the integration, and increases the dynamic range of the final
image (sampling count rates of bright sources before they saturate).
The 9 readout patterns are detailed below, including integration times for full detectors, which are read out in
10.73677 s. Subarray integration times are shorter. Five group sizes are designed for short to long integrations:
RAPID, BRIGHT, SHALLOW, MEDIUM, and DEEP. Based on current assumptions, RAPID, BRIGHT2, SHALLOW4,
MEDIUM8, and DEEP8 are recommended as yielding higher signal to noise for faint sources (Robberto 2009,
2010; and more recent tests with the ETC).
Table 2. NIRCam readout patterns and rounded integration times for full detectors
Readout Reads Frames co- Time of Time of each Groups per Integration
pattern per added in each first group subsequent group integration time (s)
group group (s) (s)
RAPID 1 1 10.7 10.7 1–2 (Module 10.7–21.5

= ALL) 10.7–107
1–10 (Module
= B)
BRIGHT1 2 1 10.7 21.5 1–10 10.7–204
BRIGHT2 2 2 21.5 21.5 2–10 (Module 42.9–215
383
BRIGHT2 2 2 21.5 21.5 2–10 (Module 42.9–215
= ALL) 21.5–215
1–10 (Module
= B)
SHALLOW2 5 2 21.5 53.7 1–10 21.5–505
SHALLOW4 5 4 42.9 53.7 1–10 42.9–526
MEDIUM2 10 2 21.5 107.4 1–10 21.5–988
MEDIUM8 10 8 85.9 107.4 1–10 85.9–1052
DEEP2 20 2 21.5 214.7 1–20 21.5–4101
DEEP8 20 8 85.9 214.7 1–20 85.9–4166
The RAPID pattern is limited to 2 groups per integration (to limit the data rate) when reading out the full
detectors in both modules. This limit increases to 10 groups when using a single module. DEEP2 and DEEP8 allow
up to 20 groups. Scroll right to view full table, if needed.
Other tabs
Mosaic Properties
See also: NIRCam Mosaics
See also:
Specifying Mosaics in APT
Mosaics are used primarily to cover areas larger than the 5.1' × 2.2' NIRCam field of view (including the ~45"
gap between modules). For NIRCam mosaics, the spatial extent of each tile is defined as 5.115033' × 2.221150'
in APT. Tile overlaps as well as shifts (pattern rotation angle) may be adjusted for each axis. Primary dithers
should be used in conjunction with mosaics to fill the gaps between detectors.
FULLBOX primary dithers are recommended for this purpose. If these patterns would split visits, then
INTRAMODULEBOX should be considered as well.
A less efficient option is the original FULL pattern, which was designed specifically to yield roughly even
observing depth over large areas with mosaics. Use FULL with mosaic tile spacings of 5.8' × 2.25', input as −13.
4% column overlap and −1.3% row overlap in APT. The negative overlap leaves a gap between each tile; these
gaps are filled by the FULL dither pattern. This strategy was designed by Anderson (2009) before the observing
overheads were known. More efficient mosaics are possible using other dither patterns, though these provide
384
overheads were known. More efficient mosaics are possible using other dither patterns, though these provide
less even depth across the field. Additional background information on principles of dithered observations with
JWST are also described in Koekemoer & Lindsay (2005), Anderson (2011), Anderson (2014), and Coe (2017).
385
Figure 4. NIRCam mosaic examples
Examples of 3 × 3 NIRCam mosaics combined with primary dither patterns. Top: FULLBOX 6TIGHT with 0% overlap in rows and
columns. Bottom: FULL 3TIGHT with –1.3% and –13.4% overlap in rows and columns, respectively. This yields relatively uniform depth
across the field, at the expense of significantly higher overheads.
A variety of observatory level Special Requirements may be chosen under the Special Requirements tab.
Comments
The Comments field (under the Comments tab) should be used for observing notes.
References
386





Latest updates
09 Feb 2018
Added Subarray Primary Dithers
03 Nov 2017
Added new dither patterns available in APT 25.4.
20 Jun 2017
Clarified that Primary Dithers NONE may be recommended in some cases.
387
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging APT
Template
Instructions for designing JWST NIRCam coronagraphic imaging observations using the Astronomer's Proposal
Tool (APT) are provided in this article.
On this page
Generic parameters
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging tab
Module
Coronagraphic Mask
Target Acquisition Parameters
Target ACQ
Acq Exposure Time
Astrometric Confirmation Image Parameters
Obtain astrometric confirmation images?
Conf. Exposure Time
Science Exposures
Subarray
Dither Pattern
PSF reference observations
This is a PSF Reference Observation
PSF Reference Observations
Additional Justification
Other tabs
Comments
See also: NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging, HCI Roadmap, HCI APT Instructions, NIRCam Coronagraphic

Imaging Recommended Strategies, NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b, NIRCam and MIRI
Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk
Coronagraphic imaging is one of 5 observing modes available with the Near Infrared Camera (NIRCam). NIRCam
offers 5 coronagraphic occulting masks in the focal plane and 2 Lyot stops in the pupil plane. One Lyot stop is
used with the round coronagraphic masks, and the other Lyot stop is used with the bar-shaped coronagraphic
masks.
NIRCam's 3 round coronagraphic masks, MASK210R, MASK335R, and MASK430R, have inner working angles IWA
= 0.40", 0.63", and 0.81" (radius), corresponding to 6λ/D at 2.1, 3.35 and 4.1 μm.
388
The 2 bar-shaped coronagraphic masks, MASKSWB and MASKLWB, are tapered, with IWA varying by a factor of 3
along their lengths. The half widths at half maximum (HWHM) at the bar end points for the short wavelength
(SW) occulter MASKSWB are 0.13" and 0.39", whereas for the long wavelength (LW) occulter MASKLWB are 0.29"
and 0.87".
The observer will have control over 3 primary parameters for NIRCam coronagraphic imaging:
1. coronagraphic mask + filter combination

2. small grid dithering type
3. detector read out pattern and exposure time (via the number of groups and integrations).
Performing multiple coronagraphic observations enables PSF subtraction as described below in the PSF

Reference Observations section.
Allowed values are documented in the NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Template parameters page.
Generic parameters
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging tab

Mosaics are not available for NIRCam coronagraphic imaging.
Module
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging is only available using module A (with module B as a back-up). This parameter is
not user changeable.
389
Coronagraphic Mask
See also: NIRCam Coronagraphic Occulting Masks and Lyot Stops
The user specifies the coronagraphic mask, depending on the target-host separation, necessary contrast, and
desired filter. Selection of the Coronagraphic Mask also determines the Acq Filter parameter and the target
acquisition subarray. The available coronagraphic masks are: MASK210R, MASKSWB, MASK335R, MASK430R,
MASKLWB.

See also: NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition, JWST ETC NIRCam Target Acquisition
Target acquisition is required for coronagraphic imaging. This section specifies the Target ACQ and Acq Exposure
Time.
Target ACQ
The user specifies the Acq Target and the Acq Target Brightness.
The Acq Filter is determined by the choice of the coronagraphic mask and it is not user changeable (F210M for
the SW occulters MASK210R and MASKSWB, and F335M for the LW occulters MASK335R, MASK430R, and
MASKLWB).
Acq Target
The selected Acq Target may be either the same as the science target or any other target defined in the APT file.
Acq Target Brightness

1. FAINT
2. BRIGHT
The user selects the Acq Target Brightness parameter as a function of the target magnitude in the Acq Filter. If
BRIGHT is chosen, the target will be imaged through a neutral density (ND) square. BRIGHT should be used for
targets with magnitudes brighter than approximately 8.2 mag (F210M) and 6.8 mag (F335M).
Acq Exposure Time
See also: Understanding JWST Exposure Times
390
The Acq Exposure Time fields specify the MULTIACCUM exposure configuration. Each exposure is specified by
readout pattern and characteristic parameters: Acq Readout Pattern and Acq Groups/Int.
Please consult the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC). We recommend a signal-to-noise ratio of 30 or higher
to obtain a centroid accuracy of 0.1 pixel for the TA source. We also recommend not saturating any
pixels.
Acq Readout Pattern

All 9 NIRCam readout patterns are available for target acquistion: RAPID, BRIGHT1, BRIGHT2, SHALLOW2,
SHALLOW4, MEDIUM2, MEDIUM8, DEEP2, and DEEP8.
Acq Groups/Int
This parameter defines the number of groups during an integration. The user can select one of the following
options: 3, 5, 9, 17, 33, 65.
Note that target acquisition images are taken using the 1282 (SW) or 642 (LW) subarray. For this reason, the
number of groups per integration is not limited to 10 as in the astrometric confirmation image and science
exposure.
Acq Integrations/Exp, Acq Total Integrations, and Acq Total Exposure Time are not user changeable. For target
acquisition, Acq Integrations/Exp is always 1.
Astrometric Confirmation Image Parameters
Obtain astrometric confirmation images?

If Yes is selected, confirmation images are taken. These are 2 identical exposures returning data from either all 4
SW detectors or the single LW detector. Images are taken before and after the science exposures. The first one
is taken before and the second taken after the pointing adjustment that moves the target from the target
acquisition position to the location behind the selected coronagraphic mask. The filter for confirmation images is
the same as the target acquistion filter in Acq Filter (F210M for SW and F335M for LW).
Conf. Exposure Time
391
The user configures the astrometric confirmation image exposure time by setting the following parameters: Conf.
Readout Pattern, Conf. Groups/Int, and Conf. Integrations/Exp. The maximum number of groups per integration is
10. The resulting exposure time (not user changeable) is displayed in Conf. Total Exposure Time. Note that Conf.
Total Dithers and Conf. Total Integration are not user changeable. For the astrometric confirmation image Conf.
Total Dithers is always 1.
Science Exposures
Subarray
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging supports observations using the full frame or a smaller subarray. Subarrays
reduce data volumes and readout times, enabling rapid observations of bright objects without saturation. If one
of the SW masks is being used, data will be collected with all 4 SW detectors if SUBARRAY FULL is used, or with a
single appropriate SW detector when using a smaller subarray (A2 for the occulter MASK210R, A4 for the
occulter MASKSWB). If one of the LW masks is being used, data will be collected on the LW detector. Choices for
the SUBARRAY parameter are: FULL, SUB640 (for the SW channel), and SUB320 (for the LW channel).
Table 1. NIRCam coronagraphic imaging array and subarray properties
Coronagraphy Size in pixels Nrows × N Short Long Frame N Reset

subarray wavelength wavelength time (s) outputs
rows
columns
FOV (each FOV (each
side) side)
FULL 2048 × 2048 2 × 64" + 4"–5" 129" 10.73677 4 –

gap
SUB640 640 × 640 20" 4.18584 1 2048
SUB320 320 × 320 20" 1.06904 1 2048
SUB128† 128 × 128 4.0" 0.18200 1 512
SUB64† 64 × 64 4.0" 0.05016 1 256
†
Dither Pattern
392
Dither Pattern
See also: NIRCam Small Grid Dithers, HCI Small Grid Dithers
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging supports various small grid dithers. Dither Pattern values available for the round-
shaped coronagraphic masks (MASK210R, MASK335R, and MASK430R) are:
Table 2. Dither patterns for round-shaped coronagraphic masks (MASK210R, MASK335R, and MASK430R)
Dither type Number of dithers
NONE 0
5-POINT-BOX 5
5-POINT-DIAMOND 5
9-POINT-CIRCLE 9
DITHER PATTERN values available for the bar-shaped coronagraphic masks (MASKSWB and MASKLWB) are:
Table 3. Dither patterns for bar-shaped coronagraphic masks (MASKSWB and MASKLWB)
Dither Type Number of dithers
NONE 0
3-POINT-BAR 3
5-POINT-BAR 5

See also: NIRCam Filters for Coronagraphy, Understanding JWST Exposure Times, HCI Coronagraphic
Sequences, HCI APT Coronagraphic Sequence Examples
The user specifies the Filter for the scientific observations. Available filters are a function of the chosen
coronagraphic mask. The scientific exposure is configured by setting the readout patterns and characteristic
parameters: Readout Pattern, Groups/Int, and Integrations/Exp. The Groups/Int parameter is limited to 10 for all
readout patterns except DEEP2 and DEEP8, which allow up to 20.
Total Dithers and Total Integrations are not user changeable and they reflect the values selected in the Dither
Pattern and Integrations/Exp fields.
393
The resulting exposure time for each filter is displayed in Total Exposure Time.
Users should use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to determine the best exposure configuration to
optimize the signal to noise.
PSF reference observations

In most cases, 3 or more coronagraphic observations should be defined to support PSF subtraction:
Science observation #1

Science observation #2 with the telescope rotated by a specified offset
PSF reference star
For a detailed description of the observational strategies, see the HCI Coronagraphic Sequences article.
This is a PSF Reference Observation

Checking this box designates the observation as a PSF reference star used for PSF subtraction. (A detailed
discussion on the choice of a good PSF reference star can be found in the high-contrast imaging pages.) The
observation for a PSF reference star should mirror the observation for the user's science target. Note that
reference star observations have no proprietary period.

For a science target, uncheck the box mentioned above. This shows the PSF Reference Observations field that
lists PSF reference observations that were previously specified in the same proposal; click on one of them to
associate it with the science observation.
Additional Justification
In case the user does not need any PSF Reference Observations (e.g., for a survey of many targets where some
of the science targets may serve as PSF references for others), they must check this box and explain with
additional text in the science justification section of a submitted proposal the absence of PSF Reference
Observations in APT.
Other tabs
394
As is often the case with coronagraphic observations, the user may specify, in the, Special Requirements panes,
that the observations be in sequence and non-interruptible. To add these special requirements, select Add... in
the Special Requirements field, then select Timing followed by Group/Sequence Observations Link. In the pop-up
window, select observations from the Observation List and check the Sequence and Non-interruptible boxes.
Additionally, the Special Requirements parameter is where the user could specify a roll dither for their science
target. To do this, click on Add... under the Special Requirements parameters field, then select Position Angle
followed by PA Offset Link. From there, the user select the 2 observations to offset in position angle, and specify
the Min PA offset and Max PA offset (in degrees).
Comments
Latest
updates 24 Feb 2022
Clarified that all 4 SW detectors return science data when using SUBARRAY FULL. Astrometric
confirmation images always use SUBARRAY FULL and return data in 4 SW detectors or 1 LW
detector, superseding the update below.
28 May 2020
Updated text in the astrometric confirmation image parameters section to specify that
images are collected using only 1 detector (A2 for MASK210R, A4 for MASKSWB, and A5 for
LW occulters).
Originally 13 May 2017

published
395
NIRCam Time-Series APT Template
Instructions for designing JWST NIRCam time-series imaging observations using the Astronomer's Proposal Tool
(APT) are provided in this article.
On this page
Generic parameters
NIRCam Time Series tab
Acq Exposure Time
Time series parameters
Module
Subarray
Number of exposures
Short Wavelength
Long Wavelength
Exposure Time
Other tabs
Comments
See also: NIRCam Time-Series Observations, JWST Time-Series Observations Roadmap, NIRCam Time-Series

Observation Recommended Strategies, NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b
Time-series imaging is one of the 5 NIRCam observing modes and one of 2 NIRCam time-series observing modes.
Each mode has a corresponding template in APT for users to design their observing programs.
No telescope moves (dithering nor mosaics) are allowed during NIRCam time-series observations.
Lists of allowed values for each input parameter are documented and maintained in the NIRCam Time Series
Imaging Template Parameters article.
Generic parameters
396
NIRCam Time Series tab

Mosaics are not available for NIRCam time-series imaging.

Target ACQ
See also: NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target Acquisition, JWST ETC NIRCam Target Acquisition
Target acquisition may be performed either on the science target (Acq Target = Same Target as Observation) or
any other target nearby (within 55"). Target acquisition occurs with a 32 × 32 pixel subarray on the long
wavelength channel of Module B located near the point source subarrays. The available filters for target
acquisition are F335M and F405N. The F405N filter is used to perform target acquisition on bright science targets
that would saturate if observed with the F335M filter.
397
Figure 1. Target acquisition location
Target acquisition is performed with a 32 × 32 pixel subarray (yellow square) on the long wavelength detector B5. The target acquisition
pointing is centered in the TA subarray, followed by a telescope slew to one of the yellow stars for the science exposures, collecting data
within the subarrays shown or the FULL array. For simplicity, only the SW subarrays are shown here. Locations of the LW subarrays are
shown below in Figure 2.
Acq Exposure Time

See also: Understanding JWST Exposure Times, NIRCam Readout Patterns
pixels.
398
Acq Readout Pattern: The NIRCam detectors are read out continuously using readout patterns. Patterns with
longer exposure times typically average more frames to reduce data volume (less of a concern for subarrays).
Acq Groups/Int: This value is the number of groups to include during an integration. Each group results in a
saved image, perhaps averaged from multiple frames (reads).
Only one integration per exposure is permitted. Thus the exposure time and integration time are equal.
Time series parameters
Module
Module B is used for this observing mode.
Subarray
Users may opt to either read out 2 detectors completely or more quickly read out 2 detector subarrays, one in
each wavelength channel. Smaller subarrays allow for brighter saturation limits in each integration. NIRCam's
point source subarrays are available in this observing mode. The subarrays are read out through a single
detector output; the full detector is read out through 4 outputs simultaneously.
Time series Size in pixels Short wavelength Long Frame Number

subarray Nrows × Ncolumns FOV (each side) wavelength time (s) of
FOV (each side) outputs
FULL 2048 × 2048 2 x 64" + 4"–5" gaps 129" 10.73677 4
SUB400P 400 × 400 12.4" 25.0" 1.65624 1
SUB160P 160 × 160 5.0" 10.0" 0.27864 1
SUB64P 64 × 64 2.0" 4.0" 0.05016 1
399
Figure 2. NIRCam point source subarrays
Subarrays available for NIRCam time-series imaging, plotted in the NIRCam field of view, zooming in on the corners of detectors B1 and
B5. Blue and red correspond to the short and long wavelength channels, respectively. By selecting a subarray size, the user is choosing 2
subarrays, one in each wavelength channel. The science target is always centered within the short wavelength subarray.
Number of exposures
See also: NIRCam Filters, Understanding JWST Exposure Times, NIRCam Pupil and Filter Wheels
Multiple exposures may be performed in sequence to increase the total exposure time. Each exposure is
executed as defined in the remaining sections below.
In APT, this section is named Exposures/Dith (exposures per dither) for consistency with other observing
modes, even though no dithering is allowed in this mode.
Short Wavelength
In this APT template, users select both pupil and filter wheel elements. Light passes through both elements in
series in each wavelength channel. Only certain combinations of these elements are allowed in APT.
400
In addition to broad-, medium-, and narrowband filters, the NIRCam weak lens WLP8 is available in this observing
mode in the short wavelength channel. The weak lens defocuses incoming light, mitigating uncertainties (jitter
and flat fields) and allowing for observations of brighter objects before saturation in a given integration time.
Long Wavelength
The pupil and filter wheel elements allowed in the long wavelength channel are restricted based on those
selected in the short wavelength channel. For example, if the weak lens is selected in the short wavelength
channel, then the long wavelength observations must include a narrowband filter as well. These restrictions
guide users to select elements with similar saturation limits in both wavelength channels, since exposures are
obtained simultaneously in both.
Exposure Time
Each exposure is defined as a Readout Pattern, number of groups per integration (Groups/Int), and number of
integrations per exposure (Integrations/Exp). The resulting total exposure time is reported. This readout
configuration applies to both wavelength channels (short and long).
Users should consult the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to achieve a sufficient signal-to-noise ratio for their
science without saturating during each integration. Approximate saturation limits may be found at NIRCam Time-
Series Imaging.
Each group yields saved data. Each integration accumulates charge for its duration, preceded and followed by
detector resets. Shorter integrations may prevent saturation. Saturated sources may be recovered (unsaturated)
in earlier groups during the integration.
Each exposure is performed without moving the telescope nor any mechanisms, with one exception. Exposures
of more than 10,000 s are permitted in this observing mode, but users are warned that the High Gain Antenna
may need to move during a longer exposure. That movement may introduce jitter and affect data quality.
Other tabs
When NIRCam is used in the time-series mode, 2 special requirements are automatically included and required:
Time Series Observation and No Parallel.
401
Comments
Latest updates
01 Nov 2018
Corrected frame times to values updated back in APT 25.4
28 Sep 2017
Updated location of the TA subarray
Originally published 01 Jun 2017
402
NIRCam Grism Time-Series APT
Template
Instructions for designing JWST NIRCam grism time-series observations using APT, the Astronomer's Proposal
Tool, are provided in this article.
On this page
Generic parameters
NIRCam Grism Time Series tab
Target ACQ
Acq Exposure Time
Grism Time Series Parameters
Subarray
Number of output channels
Number of exposures
Short pupil + filter
Long pupil + filter
Exposure time
Other tabs
Comments
See also: NIRCam Grism Time Series, JWST Time-Series Observations Roadmap, NIRCam Time-Series

Observation Recommended Strategies, NIRCam Grism Time-Series Observations of GJ 436b
Grism time series is one of the 5 NIRCam observing modes and one of 2 NIRCam time-series observing modes.
Each mode has a corresponding template in APT for users to design their observing programs.
This mode uses the NIRCam grisms for long wavelength observations (2.4–5.0 µm) and weak lenses for short
wavelength observations (0.6–2.3 µm) obtained simultaneously.
No telescope moves (dithering nor mosaics) are allowed during NIRCam time-series observations.
Lists of allowed values for each input parameter are documented and maintained in the NIRCam Grism Time-
Series Imaging Template Parameters article.
Generic parameters
403
Generic parameters
NIRCam Grism Time Series tab

Mosaics are not available for NIRCam time-series imaging.
Target ACQ
See also: NIRCam Grism Time-Series Target Acquisition, JWST ETC NIRCam Target Acquisition
Users can opt to do target acquisition on the science target or a nearby object. Target acquisition occurs with a
32 × 32 pixel subarray on the long wavelength channel of module A located near the grism field positions.
A target acquisition object other than the science target should be defined in the Targets form in order for it to
appear in the Target Acq pulldown menu. If the science target is used for target acquisition, set the Target Acq
field to Same Target as Observation.
Available filters for target acquisition are F335M and F405N. The F405N filter is used to perform target
acquisition on bright science targets that would saturate if observed with the F335M filter.
404
Figure 1. Target acquisition location
Target acquisition is performed with a 32 × 32 pixel subarray (yellow square) near the bottom of the long wavelength detector A5. The
grism subarrays are shown in black for long wavelength channel. The corresponding short wavelength subarrays are not shown; they
span the short wavelength detectors horizontally and are centered vertically within the long wavelength subarrays. The target acquisition
pointing is centered on the TA subarray. If any of the 3 grism subarrays is chosen, a slew places the target on one of the lower two yellow
stars, depending on the science filter. If FULL array exposures are selected, the target is positioned at one of the upper two yellow stars,
depending on the selected filter.
Acq Exposure Time
pixels.
Acq Readout Pattern: The NIRCam detectors are read out continuously using readout patterns. Patterns with
longer exposure times typically average more frames to reduce data volume (which is less of a concern for
subarrays).
Acq Groups/Int: This value is the number of groups to include during an integration. Each group results in a
saved image, which may be averaged from multiple frames (reads), depending on the readout pattern.
Only one integration per exposure is permitted.
Thus the exposure time and integration time are equal.
Grism Time Series Parameters

Note: module A is used for this observing mode.
Subarray
405
Subarray
Users may opt to either read out 3 detectors completely or more quickly read out 3 smaller detector subarrays.
Smaller subarrays allow for brighter saturation limits in each integration.
The grism time-series subarrays span all detector columns and either some or all rows. The same numbers of
pixels are read out from all subarrays, so each short wavelength subarray covers a quarter the area on the sky
compared to the long wavelength subarray. When a subset of rows are selected, subarrays are defined in 2 short
wavelength detectors to overlap and be centered vertically within the long wavelength subarray's footprint on
the sky.
Note the weak lenses WLP4 and WLP8 produce defocused images roughly 66 and 132 pixels across, respectively.
Therefore, WLP8 images would be significantly truncated by the smallest subarray SUBGRISM64.
Table 1. Subarray characteristics for NIRCam grism time series
Grism Size in pixels Short-wavelength Long- Frame No. of output

subarray (each FOV wavelength time (s) channels
detector) FOV
Nrows × N
columns

FULL 2048 × 2048 64" × (2 x 64" with 4"–5" 129" × 129" 42.23000 1
gaps) 10.73677 4
SUBGRISM256 256 × 2048 8.1" × (2 x 64" with 4"–5" 16.6" × 129" 5.31480 1

gaps) 1.34669 4
SUBGRISM128 128 × 2048 4.1" × (2 x 64" with 4"–5" 8.1" × 129" 2.67800 1

gaps) 0.67597 4
SUBGRISM64 64 × 2048 2.0" × (2 x 64" with 4"–5" 4.0" × 129" 1.35960 1

gaps) 0.34061 4
Number of output channels

See also: NIRCam Detector Readout, JWST Data Volume and Data Excess
406
The detectors may be read out through a single output channel or more quickly through 4 output channels
simultaneously. The latter produces roughly 4 times as much data for a given exposure time. (Put another way,
for a given set of exposure parameters which produces a given data volume, the exposure time is roughly 4
times higher when using a single output channel instead of 4.) Data rates and data volumes are limited
somewhat by APT; tighter limitations may be required to facilitate scheduling (see Data Volume Limitations).
Number of exposures
Multiple exposures may be performed in sequence to increase the total exposure time. Each exposure is
executed as defined in the remaining sections below.
In APT, this section is named Exposures/Dith (exposures per dither) for consistency with other observing
modes, even though no dithering is allowed in this mode.
Short pupil + filter

Two weak lenses are available in this mode for short wavelength observations—one or the other must be used:
WLP8 (8 waves of defocus at 2.12 µm)

WLP4 + F212N2 (4 waves of defocus at 2.12 µm; coupled to a 2.12 µm narrowband filter with a 2.3%
bandpass)
The weak lenses defocus incoming light, mitigating uncertainties (jitter and flat fields) and allowing for
observations of brighter objects before saturation in a given integration time.
WLP8 is located in the pupil wheel and must be used in combination with a medium- or narrowband filter.
WLP4 is joined with a narrowband filter F212N2 in the filter wheel. F212N2 has a 2.3% bandpass, wider than the
1% bandpass F212N filter. WLP4 + F212N2 is used in combination with the CLEAR filter in the pupil wheel.
Short wavelength pupil wheel Short wavelength filter wheel
WLP8 F070W, F0140, F182M, F187N, F210M, or F212N
CLEAR WLP4 + F212N2
Long pupil + filter

The row dispersion grism GRISMR (in the pupil wheel) is used in combination with a wide long wavelength filter
(in the filter wheel): F277W, F322W2, F356W, or F444W. See NIRCam Grism Time Series for more details.
Exposure time
407
Each exposure is defined as a Readout Pattern, number of groups (Groups/Int), and number of integrations (
Integrations/Exp). The resulting Total Exposure Time is reported. This readout configuration applies to both
wavelength channels (short and long); the observations are obtained simultaneously using a dichroic.
Users should consult the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to achieve a sufficient signal-to-noise ratio for their
science without saturating during each integration. Approximate saturation limits may be found in the NIRCam
Grism Time Series article.
Each group yields saved data. Each integration accumulates charge for its duration, preceded and followed by
detector resets. Shorter integrations may prevent saturation. Saturated sources may be recovered
(unsaturated) in earlier groups during the integration.
Each exposure is performed without moving the telescope nor any mechanisms, with one exception; exposures
of more than 10,000 s are permitted in this observing mode, but users are warned that the high gain antenna
may need to move during a longer exposure. That movement may introduce jitter and affect data quality.
Other tabs
When NIRCam is used in the time-series mode, two special requirements are automatically included and
required: Time Series Observation and No Parallel.
Comments
408
Latest updates
15 Nov 2019
28 Sep 2017
Updated the TA figure to include the FULL array field points.
409
Spectroscopy APT Template
Instructions for designing JWST NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy observations using the Astronomer's
Proposal Tool (APT) are provided in this article.
On this page
Generic parameters
NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy tab
Module
Subarray
Grism (Long Wavelength)
Science (GRISM) Exposures
Dither Parameters
Science
Direct Image Exposures
Direct images
Exposure Sequence Display
Exposures
Other tabs
Mosaic Properties
Comments
References
See also: NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, JWST Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy Roadmap,
NIRCam WFSS Recommended Strategies, NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations
Wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) is one of 5 observing modes available for the Near-Infrared Camera
(NIRCam). The WFSS mode uses grisms to obtain multi-object spectroscopy from 2.4–5.0 μm with R ~ 1,500.
WFSS can be obtained in one module (2.2′ × 2.2′), or with both modules (note the module B grism throughputs
are 25% lower than module A). There are 2 grisms available on the pupil wheels that disperse in orthogonal
directions, along detector rows (GRISMR) and columns (GRISMC). Use of both grisms mitigates confusion from
overlapping spectra.
410
WFSS observations include simultaneous short wavelength (SW; 0.6–2.3 µm) imaging over roughly the same field
of view via a dichroic. These SW images aid in wavelength calibration by precisely tracking the position of each
dither. Direct imaging in the long wavelength (LW) channel is also supported, including coverage of out-of-field
sources, which disperse light onto the detector despite being outside the imaging field of view. LW direct images
and out-of-field dithers occur at the final dither position in a dither sequence.
The observer will have control over 5 primary parameters for NIRCam WFSS:
1. NIRCam module(s)
2. Dither pattern
3. Grism choice
4. Filter choice for direct and grism images
5. Exposure parameters (detector readout pattern, number of groups, and integrations).
Allowed values are documented and maintained in the NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy Template
parameters and described below.
Generic parameters

See also: JWST Parallel Observations
NIRCam WFSS supports coordinated parallel observations with MIRI or NIRISS. When the Coordinated Parallel box
(visible when the Template parameter is set to NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy) is checked, one of
these 2 parameter values can be selected:
1. NIRCam WFSS-MIRI Imaging

2. NIRCam WFSS-NIRISS Imaging
Note that the default option is None Selected.
411
NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy tab
Module
Observers can select A or ALL. Module A covers one 2.2′ × 2.2′ field of view, while ALL includes both modules A
and B to double the field of view. The Module B grism throughputs are 25% lower than those on Module A.
Subarray
See also: NIRCam Subarrays
The only available option is FULL. Subarrays are not currently available for NIRCam WFSS mode, but are
available in NIRCam grism time-series mode.
Grism (Long Wavelength)

See also: NIRCam Grisms
Specify GRISMR, GRISMC, or BOTH. GRISMR disperses along the detector rows, and GRISMC disperses along the
detector columns. Use BOTH to help disentangle overlapping spectra in the data. When using both grisms, a FULL
dither sequence is executed for GRISMR, then executed again for GRISMC.
Science (GRISM) Exposures
Dither Parameters
See also: NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy Dithers, NIRCam Dithers and Mosaics
Choose a NIRCam WFSS dither pattern. Larger primary dithers cover the 4″–5″ gaps between the short
wavelength detectors. Smaller subpixel dithers improve the spatial resolution of the final combined image, which
is especially important at wavelengths shorter than the Nyquist wavelengths: 2 μm in the SW channel, and 4 μm
in the LW channel.
There are 3 parameters to set:
Primary Dither Type may be one of the INTRAMODULE dithers (INTRAMODULE, INTRAMODULEBOX, and

INTRAMODULEX) or NONE.
Primary Dithers specifies the number of primary dither positions. Note that there are different allowed
412
Primary Dithers specifies the number of primary dither positions. Note that there are different allowed
values for INTRAMODULE, INTRAMODULEBOX, and INTRAMODULEX.
Subpixel Positions specifies the number of subpixel dithers; allowed values are 2-POINT, 4-POINT, 9-POINT,
and NONE.
When NIRCam WFSS is used as the prime mode in a coordinated parallel combination, additional customized
subpixel dither patterns become available which work well for both NIRCam WFSS and the parallel instrument
mode. The NIRCam-specific subpixel dither patterns can still be selected at the top of the list.
Science
See also: NIRCam Filters, NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns
Specify the grism exposure sequences. Multiple exposures may be defined here. The parameters are:
Direct Image: check the box to obtain "direct" LW and SW images after each LW grism + SW image
exposure (required for the final exposure).
Long Filter: for the long wavelength channel, choose a medium or wide filter to be used with the grism.
Short Filter: choose the short wavelength filter used for simultaneous imaging.
Readout Pattern: The NIRCam detectors are read out continuously, at 10.7 s per frame. Groups of frames
are averaged according to readout patterns to reduce data volume for long exposures. Of the 9 readout
patterns, RAPID, BRIGHT2, SHALLOW4, MEDIUM8, and DEEP8 are currently recommended as yielding a
higher signal-to-noise ratio for faint sources (Robberto 2009, 2010; and more recent tests with the ETC).
Groups/Int: the number of groups to save per integration. Multiple groups are desirable to enable "up-the-
ramp" fitting to observed count rates. The resulting integration time is relevant for saturation. Each
integration is preceded and followed by detector resets.
Integrations/Exp: the number of integrations per exposure. Multiple dithers are preferred over multiple
integrations to improve data quality, though dithers will increase overheads somewhat.
ETC Wkbk.Calc ID: The ETC workbook and calculation ID used to determine the exposure setup can be
entered here.
Users should consult the Exposure Time Calculator, ETC, to achieve a sufficient signal-to-noise ratio for their
science without saturating during each integration. Approximate sensitivity curves for 10,000 s exposures are
available at the NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy article.
Direct Image Exposures
Direct images
See also: NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns, NIRCam Filters,
Understanding JWST Exposure Times
For each direct imaging request, specify:
Long Filter: choose the long wavelength filter to be used for direct imaging.
413
Long Filter: choose the long wavelength filter to be used for direct imaging.
Short Filter: choose the short wavelength filter used for simultaneous imaging. This can be a different filter
than what was used simultaneously with the grism observations.
Readout Pattern
Groups/Int
Integrations/Exp
ETC Wkbk.Calc ID
The available options for these parameters are the same as those listed above for science (grism) exposures.
Exposure Sequence Display
Exposures
The Exposure Sequence Display dialog box shows the sequence of observations. The exposure sequence is:
(GRISM LW + IMAGE SW)1

(DIRECT LW + DIRECT SW)1 (optional)
(GRISM LW + IMAGE SW)2
(DIRECT LW + DIRECT SW)2 (optional)
...
(GRISM LW + IMAGE SW)n
(DIRECT LW + DIRECT SW)n
OUT-OF-FIELD DITHERS
Parameters cannot be edited in this display box, but they can be changed by editing parameters in the panels
above: Science (Grism) Exposures and Direct Image Exposures.
Other tabs
Mosaic Properties
See also: JWST Mosaic Overview, NIRCam Dithers and Mosaics, NIRCam Mosaics
See also:
Specifying Mosaics in APT
Data can be obtained for a region larger than the NIRCam FOV by creating a mosaic pattern under the Mosaic
414
Data can be obtained for a region larger than the NIRCam FOV by creating a mosaic pattern under the Mosaic
Properties tab.
Comments
References

Latest updates
28 Feb 2022
Updated to be consistent with APT 2022.1
17 Mar 2020
Updated to be consistent with APT 2020.2
24 Jan 2018
Updated to be consistent with APT 25.4.2
415
NIRCam Observing Strategies
Guidance and recommendations for astronomers preparing to use NIRCam's observing modes and how to
specify those observations in the Astronomers' Proposal Tool (APT), are provided in this article.
See also: NIRCam Example Science Programs, Methods and Roadmaps
Each article below covers a different NIRCam instrument mode:
Expand all Expand all Collapse all Collapse all

• NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies
• NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Recommended Strategies
• NIRCam Time-Series Observation Recommended Strategies
• NIRCam WFSS Recommended Strategies
These strategies complement the step-by-step instructions given in NIRCam APT Template guide articles.
Latest updates
416
NIRCam Imaging Recommended
Strategies
Guidance is provided for astronomers preparing JWST NIRCam imaging observations using the Astronomers'
Proposal Tool (APT).
On this page
Dither pattern
Primary dithers
Subpixel dithers
Mind the gaps
(a) Large scene
(b) Mid-size target
(c) Compact target
Mind the dragon
Integration times
Readout pattern
Data volume
Overheads
References
The guidance provided below for preparing NIRCam imaging observations in APT complements the step-by-step
instructions in the NIRCam Imaging APT Template article. It includes advice on handling the gaps between
detectors, selecting dither patterns and readout patterns, and reducing data volume and overheads.
Dither pattern
Dithering is required to mitigate bad pixels and improve overall image quality. Larger primary dithers are useful
to fill gaps in sky coverage. Smaller subpixel dithers are optimized to improve sampling in stacked images.
Programs can use both types of dithers. But programs covering very large areas, or targeting single compact
sources, may elect to implement only primary or secondary dithers, depending on their science goals and
the observing overheads for each dither and exposure. Primary dithers also offer some improvement in image
sampling, so these may be preferred unless optimal image sampling is the highest priority.
417
In principle, it is preferable to divide an exposure into as many dithered exposures as possible to improve image
quality. In practice, overheads can become prohibitive.
Primary dithers
Of the primary dither patterns, a few options recommended for general use are:
FULLBOX 6TIGHT fills all gaps between detectors and modules; requires greater overheads than the
INTRAMODULE dither types
INTRAMODULEBOX 4 fills the short wavelength gaps, leaving the gap between modules; maximizes the
deep area with full exposure time
INTRAMODULEX 3 or 4 fill the short wavelength gaps, leaving the gap between modules; larger but more
uneven areal coverage than INTRAMODULEBOX 4.
Notes:
Depth across the stacked image will be uneven, especially for FULLBOX or FULL dithers. This should be
considered when calculating your required exposure time with the JWST Exposure Time Calculator.
Any area covered by only one dither cannot be corrected for bad pixels. This may leave holes in the final
stacked image.
Subpixel dithers
Of the subpixel dither patterns, SMALL-GRID-DITHER has lower overheads and is recommended for use when
primary dithers are also being obtained. If no primary dithers are performed, then the larger STANDARD dithers
are recommended to better mitigate bad pixels.
Subpixel dithering is particularly relevant when the PSF is undersampled by the detector pixels, i.e., when the
pixels are too large to provide adequate Nyquist sampling of the PSF in a single exposure. In such cases, multiple
exposures obtained with a subpixel dither pattern provide additional information about the PSF structure,
enabling reconstruction of an improved PSF that is closer to the intrinsic one. For NIRCam, the PSF is well
sampled at wavelengths longer than about 2 µm and 4 µm in the short and long wavelength channels,
respectively, by design.
418
For shorter wavelengths, where undersampling can become significant, a good rule of thumb is that the number
N of subpixel dithers should scale approximately as the square of the wavelength ratio, relative to the well-
sampled regime. For example, images obtained in the short wavelength channel with F115W are undersampled
by a factor ~ 2 µm / 1.15 µm, i.e., a factor of ~1.73 (relative to the well-sampled 2 µm regime), so a minimum of
(1.73)2, i.e., 3 subpixel dithers, would be needed to recover the PSF information. In practice, observers may wish
to consider 4 subpixel dithers, which can provide somewhat more regular subsampling of the square detector
pixels on a 2 × 2 half-pixel grid. For more detailed background information on principles of dithered observations
with JWST, see Koekemoer & Lindsay (2005), Anderson (2011), and Anderson (2014).
Note that when performing coordinated parallel observations, additional custom subpixel dither patterns are
available that achieve optimal pixel phase sampling for both the prime and parallel instruments. However,
NIRCam's small grid dithers are not available for parallel observing, since they are not large enough for good
sampling of the PSF for other instruments.
Mind the gaps

We recommend using the APT Aladin Viewer to check the target placement and dither coverage. Keep in mind
that primary dithers fill the gaps between NIRCam detectors but result in uneven depth across the stacked
image. Consider this when calculating your required exposure time using the Exposure Time Calculator.
When observing with both (ALL) NIRCam modules, the science target is, by default, centered in the ~44” gap
between the modules in the field of view. Depending on the size of the target, the following strategies are
recommended to ensure your target does not fall between the gaps:
(a) Large scene

If the goal is to image a scene larger than 5' × 2' without gaps:
Use the FULLBOX primary dithers to fill the gaps. This will cover the full area while sacrificing depth in
some areas.
(b) Mid-size target

For a target that fits within one module (2.2' × 2.2'), well within the field of view of an HST camera, we
recommend centering the target within module B by either:
Adding a special requirement Offset of ~82” in X. Here, X is given in the “Ideal” (X, Y) coordinate system,
which is fixed relative to the NIRCam detectors. (Note with this offset, the center of the target will be in
the gap between the short wavelength detectors, so primary dithering should be used to fill these gaps.)
Observing with NIRCam module B only. (The center of the target will be near the center of module B, in
419
Observing with NIRCam module B only. (The center of the target will be near the center of module B, in
the corner of detector B4.)
In either case, we recommend primary dithering with INTRAMODULEBOX or INTRAMODULEX to fill the short
wavelength chip gaps. Most of the area imaged by the 2 modules will be at full depth. Observing overheads will
also be lower than when using FULLBOX dithers to cover the full scene.
(c) Compact target

For a target that fits within one short wavelength detector (64" × 64"), you may choose to center it within one of
those detectors using a different Offset. For example:
Add a special requirement Offset of ~55” in X and ~35" in Y to center the target within detector B3 while
observing with both modules. (To choose a different detector, or if observing with module B only, you may
calculate the offset using Table 1 in NIRCam Apertures, or simply use the Aladin viewer to move your
target manually.)
This strategy ensures the small target is observed at full depth by avoiding the gaps between the short
wavelength detectors. INTRAMODULEBOX, INTRAMODULEX, or SMALL INTRASCA primary dithers and/or subpixel
dithers are recommended in this case. Even point sources will benefit as dithering mitigates bad pixels and flat
field uncertainties.
Mind the dragon

Bright sources off the edge of the JWST NIRCam field of view scatter light onto the NIRCam detectors. This effect
is called dragon's breath. The light scatters approximately 200–250 pixels into the field, with an integrated
intensity ~1.5% of the total intensity of the scattering star in the long wavelength channel, and ~0.4% in the
short wavelength channel. To minimize scattered light, keep bright objects out of the avoidance zones, which are
approximately 2.5" from the detector edges. See the Dragon's Breath article for more details.
Integration times
We recommend integration times less than 1,000 s. For longer integrations, the majority of pixels would likely be
affected by cosmic rays. Total exposure times can be made longer by using dithers and by increasing the
number of integrations. See the discussion in MIRI Cross-Mode Recommended Strategies.
Readout pattern
420
Readout pattern
To achieve a desired exposure time and signal-to-noise ratio, users must choose one of the 9 available NIRCam
detector readout patterns, as well as numbers of groups (of each pattern) and integrations at each dither
position. We provide the following guidance:
The readout patterns RAPID, BRIGHT2, SHALLOW4, and MEDIUM8 maximize the signal-to-noise ratio for a
given integration time <1,000 s. See NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity for details.
Greater numbers of groups are preferred to mitigate cosmic rays for all pixels. The minimum number
should be 5 groups, except for the shortest exposures, according to the recommendations for maximum
sensitivity. For example, we recommend 8 groups of SHALLOW4 rather than 4 groups of MEDIUM8, as long
as the data volume is manageable.
A single integration at each dither position will be sufficient for most programs. Given the choice between
extra integrations or extra dithers, dithers are preferred as they improve data quality in multiple ways.
The one drawback is that dithers increase overheads.
DEEP8 and DEEP2 result in integrations >1000 s, which are expected to be substantially affected by
cosmic rays. These patterns are thus not recommended, but may be required in some cases to reduce
data volume.
Data volume
APT places some limits on data rates and volume. For each visit, the data volume may not exceed 58 GB,
roughly the memory capacity of the onboard solid state recorder. Exceeding this limit will generate an error in
APT. Exceeding half that limit (29 GB) will generate a warning.
Users should also check the ratio of Data Volume / Total Charged Time for each observation. If this ratio exceeds
0.654 MB/s for a total time of ~12 hours or more, then the program will likely be difficult or prohibitive to
schedule. APT does not issue a warning in this case.
To reduce the data volume, try the following (assuming a fixed total exposure time to achieve the required signal
to noise):
Use a longer readout pattern that generates less saved data, for example DEEP8 instead of MEDIUM8.
Observe with fewer detectors.

Observing with both (ALL) modules yields data from 10 detectors.
Observing with module B only and full subarrays yields data from 5 detectors.
Some NIRCam subarrays yield data from as few as 2 detectors.
Note that choosing a smaller subarray does not necessarily decrease the data volume / total
421
Note that choosing a smaller subarray does not necessarily decrease the data volume / total
charged time significantly, since smaller subarrays are read out more quickly.
If necessary, obtain fewer dithers, each with a longer exposure. This may sacrifice data quality somewhat.
One additional benefit is that observing overheads will decrease.
Overheads
Our advice to reduce observing overheads and improve efficiency can be summarized simply as this: sit and
stare. Minimize the numbers of filter changes, dithers, exposures, and (importantly) visits requiring new guide
stars after larger pointing shifts (see JWST Slew Times and Overheads). These operations may take several
minutes (see JWST Instrument Overheads). Of course, filter changes and dithers improve data quality and may
be required for your science.
Bear in mind your dither pattern(s) will be repeated for each filter pair (short and long wavelength). Larger
dithers with larger overheads should be avoided if possible, in part by using the dither patterns introduced in APT
25.4.1 (Coe 2017). Whenever possible, use a more compact dither pattern that does not split your observation
into multiple visits. This will depend on the visit splitting distance assigned to your observation. Targets at lower
Galactic latitude will have larger visit splitting distances and may be more efficient to observe, especially with
the FULLBOX dither pattern that fills all gaps between detectors and the modules.
References



422
Latest updates
01 Jun 2020
Included "Mind the dragon" section
09 Feb 2018
Noted BRIGHT1 is recommended when BRIGHT2 is limited to 4 groups
423
Recommended Strategies
Guidance is provided for astronomers preparing JWST NIRCam coronagraphic imaging observations using the
Astronomers' Proposal Tool (APT).
On this page
Choice of mask, overheads

Target acquisition
Signal-to-noise ratio
Astrometric confirmation images
Observing strategy: planning for coronagraphy
Which coronagraph (or no coronagraph)?
Coronagraphic Visibility Tool and aperture PA
Readout mode, window and saturation
PSF subtraction strategy
Selection of PSF reference star
ETC calculations
1" and above
Below 1" and down to the IWA
APT recommendations
TA
Time accounting and Smart Accounting
The NIRCam coronagraphic imaging mode offers high-contrast imaging (HCI) capabilities for a set of short and
long wavelength filters covering 1.8 to 5 µm. Three round occulting masks and 2 bar masks (with corresponding
Lyot stops) are available with inner-working angles (IWA) ranging from 0.13" to 0.88", depending on wavelength
and geometry.
NIRCam coronagraphy enables the highest achievable contrast with JWST (typically ~10-6 or better at 1" IWA and
beyond) to reveal faint spatially resolved structures or point sources in the vicinity of a target of interest (star,
AGN, etc.). Prior to requesting coronagraphy, one should evaluate the contrast regime achievable (or needed) at
a given working angle or separation from the central object.
Currently, NIRCam coronagraphy is limited to module A only, and short and long wavelength observations cannot
be carried out simultaneously.
This article provides guidance for preparing NIRCam coronagraphic observations in APT. It complements the step-
by-step instructions given in the NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging APT Template article. The advice below is
specific to coronagraphy: choice of mask, target acquisition, choice of the PSF reference star, etc.
424
Choice of mask, overheads
Each occulting mask has a corresponding wavelength range and associated IWA. Any change of mask requires a
new target acquisition (TA) with associated overheads (up to 15 minutes depending on the brightness of the star,
generally longer for fainter stars).
Note: Currently, simultaneous observations with the short wavelength (SW) and long wavelength (LW) channels
are not supported.
Target acquisition
See also: NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition
Signal-to-noise ratio
For coronagraphy, the TA can easily be a showstopper, directly influencing the quality of the data. A low signal-
to-noise ratio (SNR) on the initial TA image can result in a suboptimal centering of the target behind the
coronagraph with dramatic consequences. The recommendation for NIRCam is to adjust the TA readout pattern
and parameters to achieve at least a SNR of 30 regardless of the brightness of the target. Please plan your
observation using the Exposure Time Calculator.
Very bright targets with K < 7 (Bright (ND Square) in APT) must usually be acquired using a neutral density filter
as explained in NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition.
Astrometric confirmation images

TA gives users the opportunity to obtain 2 full frame images consecutively for astrometric purposes: one when
the science target is still away from the mask and a second after centering the star behind the coronagraph. This
allows for the retrieval of the precise position of the host when behind the mask with respect to all the
background sources in the full field of view. As this is done through the same filter as the TA (F210M for SW or
F335M for LW), it is not very time consuming and can prove to be crucial to assess the relative position of a
putative detected signal (companion or spatially extended structure) with respect to the host source.
425
Observing strategy: planning for coronagraphy
See also: JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap
Which coronagraph (or no coronagraph)?

NIRCam's coronagraphic masks and filters allow an inner-working angle (IWA) from 0.13" to 0.88" depending on
the wavelength (from 1.82 to 5 µm for this mode). The IWA is defined as the smallest angular separation at
which a detection is possible with a throughput of 50%. Detections at more modest contrasts are possible at the
IWA or even a bit closer in certain cases, provided there is a very high quality of PSF subtraction.
In certain cases, where a somewhat more modest contrast is to be achieved at very small separation (or semi-
major axis from a host), non-coronagraphic NIRCam imaging or NIRISS aperture masking interferometry can
provide better results and/or better efficiency since overheads associated with the baseline, standard
coronagraphic sequence are large.
Coronagraphic Visibility Tool and aperture PA

The choice of available coronagraphic setups (NIRCam and/or MIRI) can be quickly explored with the
Coronagraphic Visibility Tool (CVT). This GUI-based tool was primarily developed to provide the visibility and
allowed position angles (PAs) for a given target across the year.
The Aperture PA RANGE to maintain the spacecraft oriented with respect to the Sun corresponds to the roll angle
"stroke" that is available (between ~7º and ~14º in absolute values) depending on the date and object
coordinates. The right-hand plot of the CVT is very useful to also visualize the coronagraphic field of view and
physical limitations (size of the mask, neutral density filter positions, orientation of the bar coronagraphs with
respect to given companion or circumstellar disk PA and separation). Here are the questions one can seek
answer to with the CVT: is scheduling an issue for my target? Is my preferred mask problematic?
Readout mode, window and saturation

As with other NIRCam modes, coronagraphy can make use of any of the numerous readout patterns. Since
coronagraphy only makes use of NIRCam module A with a reduced detector region of interest, the readout
options are not limited by data volume/rate considerations.
In addition to reading the full frame of the module A detector, the coronagraphy mode can be operated with
faster readout speed using a 20" × 20" field (640-pixel subarray for the SW detector, 320-pixel subarray for the
LW detector).
426
While it is acceptable to saturate many pixels in the vicinity of the coronagraph, the JWST data reduction pipeline
in its early versions will only be able to recover slopes of the partially saturated pixels (pixels that saturate prior
to the second group in the ramp). The photometric accuracy will be suboptimal in the saturated regions, and the
contrast will most likely be affected at or close to the IWA. In HCI, it is a matter of trade-offs: pushing the
sensitivity by using a slower readout pattern (SHALLOW, MEDIUM, or DEEP) will allow one to detect very shallow
structures in the outer, background-limited surroundings (typically >1") of the central source while losing the
capability to recover optimally the innermost regions (IWA to ~1").
Moreover, if one's strategy is to use an advanced post-processing technique such as principal component
analysis (PCA) to optimize the detection limits at the smallest possible separations to the host, then it is
necessary to have a rather high number (several tens) of frames. Using a slow mode and saving fewer frames
and groups can result in a limitation to such a strategy, in addition to increasing the probability of having cosmic
rays events polluting the region of interest.
PSF subtraction strategy

Following the standard coronagraphic sequence, we recommend observing the science target at 2 different roll
angles, then slewing to observe the PSF reference star, ideally with several small grid dither pointings (5-point or
9-point). These 3 observations should be gathered in a non-interruptible sequence in APT (using the Group
/Sequence Observations Link special requirement). This strategy is recommended to guarantee 2 different
optimal PSF subtractions despite thermal drift of the observatory and associated wavefront and PSF variations.
Given JWST's roll flexibility of ±5º, coronagraphic observations at 2 roll angles provide optimal results at large
separations (typically 1" and further).
The reference differential imaging (RDI) approach provided by the subsequent observation of a bright (as bright
or brighter than the science target) PSF reference star with similar spectral properties should, in principle, allow
one to reach the IWA of any given coronagraph and the lowest level of self-subtraction of the astrophysical signal
of interest in the speckle limited regime (typically within 1").
Selection of PSF reference star

There are extensive guidelines on selecting a suitable PSF reference star as well as how to evaluate and mitigate
the effect of spectral mismatch between the PSF reference and the target of scientific interest.
Slew times and overheads can be large (~400 s for 1,000", ~1,000s for 3°, etc.) and therefore it is sometimes
better to relax constraints on the spectral type of the PSF reference star.
427
While small grid dithers (SGD) provide the best subtraction strategy for small IWA, they can significantly increase
the required total time. To save time (as well as minimize the noise in the subtraction product), it is a good idea
to use a brighter PSF reference star and possibly a different readout pattern than that used for the science
target. More dithered positions guarantee a higher diversity and a better PSF subtraction at small angular
separations (e.g. <1"), accounting for a somewhat imperfect centering of either the science target or the
reference star. The choice of the SGD pattern (from 3 to 9 points) therefore depends on how challenging a
program is.
ETC calculations
See also: JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC), HCI ETC Instructions
1" and above

The ETC allows coronagraphic calculations using an optimal PSF subtraction scenario. The science
target and the PSF reference stars are assumed to be centered at the exact same position
behind the coronagraphic mask. Also, while their spectral type can be specified to differ, the ETC
only accounts for the total flux difference through the filter bandpass and not for the possible loss of
contrast due to the spectral mismatch between the 2 sources.
The ETC is thus perfectly adapted and trustable for the SNR calculation occurring in the background limited
regime, typically at 1" separation and beyond, computing the SNR of an off-axis source under the ideal contrast
assumption. At shorter separations and towards the edge of the masks, the ETC will return increasingly
optimistic results.
Below 1" and down to the IWA

Below 1", ETC will approximate the results to the closest available PSF in its library. For more realistic contrast
and detection limits calculations at any separation within 1" and down to the IWA of a given coronagraph,
accounting for eventual pointing errors, one can use the Pandeia engine in command-line and call WebbPSF "on
the fly" generate more realistic simulations than the ones provided by the ETC and its pre-computed library of
PSFs at discrete angular distances: (1) introducing an initial shift corresponding to a target acquisition error; (2)
implementing the small grid dithers.
APT recommendations
TA
428
TA
In the comments section of the targets, it is good practice to indicate their K-band magnitudes and spectral type
(as well as the distance to the science target from the PSF reference star) to facilitate the technical review of the
proposal. Please always report all targets' proper motions even if they are small, when available. It will minimize
the probability of unsuccessful target acquisition.
Time accounting and Smart Accounting

Coronagraphy with several observations bundled in a non-interruptible sequence can benefit from accounting
options in APT. Smart Accounting will reduce the total slew times charged for such sequences.
Latest updates
429
NIRCam Time-Series Observation
Best practices for developing time-series observations (TSOs) with JWST's Near Infrared Camera (NIRCam),
relevant for both time-series imaging and grism time-series observations (exceptions are noted), are provided in
this article.
On this page
Balancing LW and SW exposure times

SW subarrays and weak lens PSF size
Target acquisition and proper motion
Grism time-series observations
Filter choices
Spectroscopic and image overlap
Saturation limits
Time-series imaging observations
Filter choices
Image overlap
Saturation limits
Data volume
Scheduling
Observation duration
Constraining the observation start time
The following "best practices" for NIRCam time-series observations (TSOs) are procedures recommended as
being correct or most effective in addressing key issues in observation planning for most science cases. Such
issues include (1) balancing long wavelength (LW) and short wavelength (SW) exposure times and filter choices,
(2) avoiding saturation, and (3) dealing with target acquisition requirements and limitations. In addition, data
volume may be an issue for long NIRCam TSO observations, and may require adjusting readout pattern and
number of groups to avoid over-filling the solid state recorder (SSR).
JWST NIRCam offers 2 observing modes for precision NIRCam TSO observations: time-series imaging and grism
time series. The unique features of all TSOs are long observing times, lack of dithering, and target acquisition to
improve calibration stability. Observations using these modes can be specified using APT templates for time-
series imaging and grism time series. In the former, both the short wavelength (SW) and long wavelength (LW)
channels are configured for photometry, while for grism time series, the SW channel is configured
for photometry and the LW channel is configured with the slitless grism. In both modes, the SW channel may be
configured for normal imaging or with one of NIRCam's weak lenses (only the TSO templates offer this option). In
both templates SW and LW detectors will be configured using the same readout pattern and exposure time
parameters (e.g., Ngroups, Nints), as well as subarray dimensions.
430
Example Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) workbooks for TSOs and detailed planning templates for NIRCam TSO
observations are accessible from these articles (and their child pages): NIRCam Grism Time-Series Observations
of GJ 436b and NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b.
Observers may also wish to use the PandExo tool, which uses the ETC Pandeia engine but provides built-in
functionality relevant for planning exoplanet transit observations with JWST.
The JWST ETC includes 3 calculation types for estimating SNR and saturation for NIRCam TSO observations:
SW time series: for the SW channel for either the time-series or grism time-series APT templates
includes the NIRCam weak lenses, which are only available in the TSO observation templates
requires observers to choose whether the calculation is part of a time-series or grism time-series
observation in order to present appropriate filter/weak lens choices
LW time series: For the LW part of the time-series APT template
LW grism time series: For the LW part of the grism time-series APT template
When using the ETC, users must use the same exposure parameters, including subarray size, for both the SW
and LW calculations. APT imposes this limit on exposures taken in the 2 channels, but the ETC treats the
calculations independently, as if there is no such constraint. Users should also follow the ETC note directing them
on how to estimate SNR: the relevant calculation is for the light curve sampling time they wish to achieve. For
example, if a 2-hour-long transit is to be observed and a measurement is needed every 1,000 s, the user should
configure the exposure parameters in the ETC to give a 1,000 s exposure time.
Balancing LW and SW exposure times

Because integration times in both the SW and LW channels of NIRCam are the same for a given observation,
filters with similar sensitivities and saturation limits should typically be used in the 2 channels. The ETC should
be used to optimize exposures in a SW and a LW filter while using the same exposure parameters in the 2
calculations.
In time-series imaging, it might be appropriate to choose either a pair of wide filters (e.g., F150W and F356W) or
2 narrow filters (e.g., F212N and F323N), although for stellar sources the lower flux in the LW channel could allow
for combining a medium with a wide, or a narrow with a medium, SW and LW filter. This template also allows
users to select the WLP8 element (a weak lens) in the SW channel, allowing very bright sources to be observed
without saturation. The weak lens also spreads the light out on the detector, and may provide higher precision
by mitigating flat field uncertainties. When WLP8 is selected, the LW channel is limited to one of the narrow
filters to help avoid saturating the in-focus images in that channel.
In grism time series, the LW channel is configured with the slitless grism, which can be paired with one of 4 wide
filters: F277W, F322W2, F356W, or F444W. Because the resolving power of the grism is approximately 1,600,
exposures that significantly fill the well of pixels on the LW detector would normally strongly saturate the SW
channel. To mitigate saturation in the SW channel, observers must select a weak lens (which spreads the light
out over many pixels), paired with one of the SW filters.
431
Observers should avoid saturation of any part of their data that occurs in less than 4 groups of their integrations.
This will provide 3 groups for determining the flux while avoiding undue reliance on the linearity correction.
While the APT templates for both the time-series and the grism time-series modes provide some guidance
intended to prevent heavily saturating one NIRCam channel when the other channel is exposed to nearly the full-
well limit, observers must refer to the ETC to make sure that neither channel is saturating. Users must use the
same exposure parameters, including subarray size, for both the SW and LW calculations.
SW subarrays and weak lens PSF size

NIRCam TSO mode observations allow the use of the WLP4 or WLP8 weak lenses in the SW channel. These
produce images 66 pixels (2") or 132 pixels (4") across. Depending on the subarray selected, significant portions
of the weak lens PSF may fall outside the subarray, or fill enough of it that measuring sky background will be
difficult. For comparison, the NIRCam TSO subarray sizes which may result in these problems are:
Grism time series
2048 × 128 – width is smaller than the WLP8 image

2048 × 64 – width is smaller than the WLP8 image, comparable to the WLP4 image
Time series
160 × 160 – comparable in size to the WLP8 image, probably OK for determining background
64 × 64 – smaller than the WLP8 image, comparable to the WLP4 image. Source is not centered in the
subaray.
Target acquisition and proper motion

Target acquisition (TA) should normally be specified for NIRCam time-series imaging and grism time-series
observations. TA will guarantee that all TSO observations utilize the same detector pixels, and over the long
term it will be possible to combine many observations to provide very high-precision calibration for those regions
of the detectors. TA will also guarantee that science and calibration observations are taken in exactly the same
way, providing better removal of instrumental signatures early in the mission, and maximizing reproducibility
when coadding multiple transits to improve SNR, and when comparing transits of different exoplanets.
To ensure that target acquisition is successful, the observer should take care to provide accurate coordinates
and proper motion for the target. The NIRCam TSO target acquisition subarrays have a 2" × 2" field of view, so
the target location at the epoch of observation should ideally be specified with a 1-sigma radial accuracy no
worse than about 0.25". When combined with the nominal 0.14" 1-sigma radial pointing accuracy of JWST, that
should be enough to guarantee success of the TA. It is highly recommended that observers provide target
coordinates and proper motion from the Gaia (DR2) catalog, or other catalogs or observations with high accuracy.
432
The bright limit using the F405N filter for TA in the NIRCam TSO modes is approximately mK(Vega) = 3.5 – 4.0,
depending on spectral type of the target. This should be adequate to allow direct TA on currently known
exoplanet host stars, but may not be for newer discoveries, e.g., from TESS. For host stars too bright for direct
TA, an offset star can be used. If an offset target is used for TA, the same (if not higher) accuracy as discussed
above is needed for both the TA and science targets.
Grism time-series observations
Filter choices
The LW grism must be used with one of NIRCam's LW channel wide filters; the 2 most functional filters for time-
series spectroscopy are the F322W2 (2.4–4.0 μm) and F444W (3.9–5.0 μm) filters. The F277W and F356W filters
are also available for time-series observations, but their wavelength coverage is fully included within the range
covered by the F322W2 filter. The F277W and F356W filters could potentially be used to block the 2nd order
spectrum from nearby targets from overlapping the spectrum of the science target, or to reduce background
noise for targets in regions with high background emission. Because the filter choice is specified at the
observation level for the NIRCam TSO APT templates, if coverage of the entire 2.4–5 μm region is desired for a
target, multiple observations, covering separate transit events, must be specified.
In the SW channel, users must select either the WLP4 or WLP8 weak lenses. These lenses defocus the image,
resulting in PSFs approximately 66 pixels (2") and 132 pixels (4") across, respectively. The WLP4 element has an
integrated narrowband filter at 2.12 μm; the WLP8 element may be paired with most of the SW filters.
Spectroscopic and image overlap

The NIRCam LW grisms are slitless, so there is the potential for spectra from sources near the science target to
overlap with its spectrum. Observers should determine valid orientations for observations of their target using
the General Target Visibility Tool (GTVT), and then visualize their observation using APT/Aladin while specifying a
position angle range special requirement that is consistent with the output of the GTVT. The dispersion
orientation of the grism can be verified by specifying one of the subarrays for the observation: dispersion is
parallel to the long axis of any of the subarrays. Sources within about 10" of either end of the subarray are likely
to result in spectral overlap, either with the spectrum of the science target or contaminating the area that would
normally be used for the sky measurement. That said, for a given LW filter, only one sources near one end of the
subarray can cause contamination, as illustrated in the NIRCam WFSS Field of View article. Careful tuning of the
position angle of the observation may be necessary to avoid such contamination, particularly for targets in
regions with a high density of stars of comparable brightness to the science target.
In the SW channel the weak lenses also disperse the light (spatially) over far more pixels than for in-focus
images. See the time-series imaging section below for guidance on assessing overlap of the PSF of the science
target with those of nearby sources.
433
Saturation limits
Saturation for the LW grism begins to set in near a Vega magnitude of mK ~ 4.5, and is likely to affect
wavelengths <3.0 μm first, depending on the spectrum of the target. Users should use the JWST ETC LW grism
time-series calculation to check for saturation as a function of wavelength for their chosen integration times.
Alternatively, the PandExo package referenced earlier can be used, but is not directly maintained by STScI. The
ETC SW time-series calculation includes the ability to calculate SNR and saturation for SW imaging through the
weak lenses. Users must use the same exposure parameters, including subarray size, for both the SW and
LW ETC calculations.
Time-series imaging observations
Filter choices
Filter choices for NIRCam time-series mode include all of the SW filters in addition to the WLP8 weak lens
element, which produces an image approximately 132 pixels (4") across. It may be challenging to perform
photometry on such a large image, but in principal photometric precision could be significantly enhanced by
spreading the light out over so many pixels. Because the WLP8 element is in the SW pupil (not filter) wheel, it
cannot be paired with the F162M or F164N. filters; most other SW filters are available. When the SW WLP8
element is chosen only the 4 narrow filters are available in the LW channel because images there will be in-
focus, and any well-exposed WLP8 SW image would be highly saturated in the LW channel if a medium or wide
LW filter were used.
Image overlap
As with the slitless LW grism case above, the spatially dispersed images from the WLP8 element create
difficulties with overlap between signal from the science target and other nearby targets. Observers should
carefully consider the potential impact of nearby sources that could overlap with their science target or
contaminate sky background regions. Visualization of the region around the target (e.g., using APT/Aladin) is
recommended in order to assess possible impacts of image overlap related to use of the weak lens.
Saturation limits
The JWST ETC includes the ability to calculate TSO saturation limits using the SW WLP8 element in the NIRCam
SW time-series calculation, as well as for LW TSO observations using the LW time-series calculation. Users must
use the same exposure parameters, including subarray size, for both the SW and LW calculations.
434
Data volume
For NIRCam grism TSO mode, data is saved from 3 detecors (2 SW + one LW). This can generate substantial
amounts of data for long observations, and may result in a data volume warning or error in APT. The data
volume warning can be addressed during the planning phase of the observations, but observers should include a
justification stating why the data volume can't be reduced without impacting science return. If APT generates a
data volume error, the observer must address the issue directly as the observation would generate more data
than can be stored on the solid state recorder.
Strategies that can be used, singly or combined, for reducing data volume for a given grism TSO observation are:
1. Choose a readout pattern with a longer readout time, e.g., switch to SHALLOW2 if you encounter a
warning for BRIGHT2.
2. Select No. of Output Channels = 1. This option is only available in the NIRCam TSO templates, and has the
effect of cutting the data rate (and therefor data volume for a fixed-duration observation) by a factor of 4.
3. Switch from the grism TSO mode to the imaging TSO mode.
For the NIRCam imaging TSO mode data is saved from one SW and one LW detector, so data volume issues are
somewhat less likely to crop up. If data volume is an issue in the imaging TSO template, it can be reduced by:
1. Choosing a readout pattern with a longer readout time, e.g. switch to BRIGHT1 if you encounter a warning
for RAPID.
2. If the warning is for an observation using the FULL subarray, selecting one of the smaller subarrays (this
effectively switches from No. of Output Channels = 4 for FULL, to 1 for the subarray.)
For the brightest targets options 1 and 2 above may not be practical because increasing the group time, or the
frame readout time, worsens the saturation limits.
Scheduling
Observation duration
435
At the beginning of TSO observations the detector response will stabilize after a "settling time." Measurements of
the settling time on the ground are difficult to make at the precision relevant for exoplanet transit studies, but it
is expected to be around 0.5 hr for NIRCam's H2RG detectors. Separate from this settling time, it is necessary to
observe an exoplanet transit/eclipse event for the duration of the event, plus the event duration both before and
after, for a total of 3 times the event duration. This provides enough baseline pre- and post-event such that the
in-event SNR isn't significantly degraded by uncertainties in determining the baseline, provides the ability to
trend any slow variations in response, and to characterize shorter-term variations if they are present.
Based on these considerations, and allowing for some conservatism regarding the settling time of the detectors,
it is recommended that high-precision TSO observations be specified with a duration 3 times the duration of the
event (transit, eclipse) plus 1 hr. Once on-orbit observations have been obtained early in the JWST mission this
guideline will be re-evaulated.
JWST TSO observations automatically get a time-series observation special requirement in APT that allows the
observation to exceed 10,000 s in duration. For other types of observations visits are not allowed to exceed that
duration because the observatory must autonomously re-point the high gain antenna (HGA) on approximately
that cadence. As a result, TSO observations exceeding 10,000 s duration should expect that the HGA will be re-
pointed during their observation, with an impact on pointing stability lasting approximately 60 s. Such pointing
excursions are not expected to cause loss of fine guidance, but will probably result in slightly degraded precision
in the science data during the time of the disturbance. The timing of HGA re-points is not known ahead of time,
but will be reported in the engineering telemetry associated with the science data.
Constraining the observation start time

TSO observers will typically use a phase timing special requirement (SR) to constrain the start time of their
observation. The parameters for the Phase SR are an ephemeris reference time, period, and a range for the
starting phase. The phase is defined as spanning the range 0–1 of the specified period, with zero phase
corresponding to the ephemeris reference time.
As an example consider a system with a transit every 100 hours, an event duration of 2 hours, and a user-
specified reference time (phase = 0) corresponding to the center of an event. The starting phase of the events is
then 0.99, and the duration of the event in phase units is 0.02. From the above guidance, the starting phase of
the observation should be 1.0 − (1.5 × 0.02 + 1hr/100hr) = 0.96. Similarly the end of the observation should
occur at a phase of 1.0 + (1.5 × 0.02) = 1.03, for a total phase duration of 1.03 − 0.96 = 0.07, or 7 hours given
the 100 hour period between transits. Note that values for the starting phase can only be specified in the range
0–1, so it isn't possible to specify a phase constraint starting at -0.04 as might be convenient for this example.
Because APT imposes a one hour direct scheduling overheads for constraints that restrict observation start times
to less than one hour, TSO observers may wish to specify their phase constraints with wider windows that
guarantee starting their observations no later than discussed above, but with the possibility of getting a
somewhat longer baseline measurement prior to the event they wish to study.
436
Latest updates
437
NIRCam WFSS Recommended
Strategies
Guidance is provided for astronomers preparing JWST NIRCam WFSS observations using the Astronomers'
On this page
Similarity with NIRCam imaging

Cross filter
Grism
Imaging filter
Mosaic
In this page we provide guidance for preparing NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) observations in
APT. This complements the step-by-step instructions given in the NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy APT
Template.
In particular, we give advice on how to choose amongst the available grisms, cross filters (for use with the
grisms), imaging filters (for the mandatory accompanying imaging of the field), and mosaicking strategies.
Similarity with NIRCam imaging

Several NIRCam imaging recommended strategies are relevant and applicable to NIRCam WFSS observations. In
particular, one should follow the same practices described in the NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies
article for the dither pattern, readout pattern, data volume, and overheads.
Additional WFSS-specific recommended strategies are provided below.
Cross filter
The choice of cross filter affects the effective field of view (FOV). Any filter that is not close to 4 μm will result in
a reduction of the effective field of view (FOV). Also, objects that are slightly out of the detector FOV but are
within the larger FOV of the pick-off mirror will produce a spectrum.
438
Figure 1 shows an example for the F250M filter combined with the GrismR (spectra dispersed along the row
direction) and GrismC (spectra dispersed along the column direction). The NIRCam WFSS Field of View article
shows all the possible cases.
439
Figure 1. NIRCam WFSS effective field of view with F250M filter
Effective field of view when the F250M filter is combined with Grism R (top) and Grism C (bottom). Each star represents a source
yielding a spectrum illustrated by a corresponding arrow. The spectrum is dispersed along the length of the arrow with wavelength
increasing toward the arrow head. Sources are within the full spectrum field of view if their spectra fall completely within a detector's field
of view (black square outlines). The full spectrum field of view is shaded blue for module A (left) and orange for module B (right).
However, note that for Grism C, the coronagraph masks (illustrated at top) may impact some spectra. Sources within the regions with
diagonal stripes yield partially truncated spectra. The effective field of view includes both the striped and shaded regions. The outer black
rectangles indicate the full regions that receive incoming light from NIRCam's pick off mirrors. Sources outside those regions do not yield
spectra.
The choice of a very wide filter will result in many truncated spectra. For example, using F322W2 only provides
full wavelength coverage for a narrow region near the center of the bandpass.
440

Grism
Observations with both GrismsR and GrismC are useful to mitigate confusion from overlapping spectra.
Observations obtained using multiple orientations may also be needed to unambiguously identify emission lines.
However, complete spectra from both grisms are only obtained for sources within the optimal fields (see NIRCam
WFSS Field of View).
When using GrismC, the coronagraph substrate will affect the observations in 2 ways: (1) objects occulted by the
neutral density filter or coronagraph features will not produce a spectrum. (2) Other objects within the
coronagraph will be affected by the reduced transparency of the coronagraph substrate. This will make modeling
and extracting these spectra more complicated. Note however that the redder filters (F444W, F460M, and
F480M) are not affected by the coronagraph when used with the GrismC. This can be see in the NIRCam WFSS
Field of View article.
The GrismC mode will, in general, result in a higher background level than the GrismR mode. This is due to
additional sky area that is picked up by the pick-off mirror around the coronagraph. Using medium band filters
can result in a significantly lower dispersed background, which may be essential to reach faint emission lines or
continuum light. The NIRCam WFSS Backgrounds article shows the structure of the background when GrismR
and GrismC are used with different filters and lists the expected level of dispersed background in each case.
Imaging filter
In principle, APT allows to choose, for the mandatory pre-imaging, a filter that is different from the one chosen
for the following grism observation(s). It is generally preferable to use the same filter, e.g., F356W coupled with
F356W/GrismR. There are 2 reasons for this: The first is that modeling of the field (to compute contamination)
will be more accurate if the broadband photometry matches the bandpass of the grism observations. The second
is that there might be "wedge offsets" between different filters. As of now, this is believed to be a small effect,
but the use of a different filter for imaging might result in a small offset between the grism observations and the
broadband observations. This will affect the assumed location of the trace and for small unresolved objects can
be important even if these offsets are small (<0.1 pixel). These offsets would also affect the wavelength
calibration of the spectra.
Mosaic
441
Designing a mosaic using WFSS is not a very efficient process. It necessarily involves choosing between
continuity of the field of view and possible overlap of grism observations taken using diffent grisms and/or
orientation of the sky. Several mosaic examples are shown in the NIRcam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations
article.
Latest updates
442
NIRCam Example Science Programs
NIRCam example programs are available to walk users through all elements of a JWST observing program, from
posing a question to identifying an instrument-specific mode optimized to answer that question.
See also: NIRCam Observing Strategies, Methods and Roadmaps
These examples use Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) simulations to estimate reasonable exposure times, and
illustrate how to specify the observations in the Astronomers Proposal Tool (APT).
Here is a list of all NIRCam-related example programs:
Expand all Expand all Collapse all Collapse all
NIRCam Example Science Programs

NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels
• Step-by-Step ETC Guide
• Step-by-Step APT Guide
NIRCam Parallel Imaging and NIRISS WFSS of Galaxies in Lensing Clusters
NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations
NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b
NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b
NIRCam Grism Time-Series Observations of GJ 436b
JWST proposals require significantly more preparation compared to HST proposals. As part of the single stream
process, JWST proposals will require a detailed technical justification and, in most cases, a complete Astronomers
Proposal Tool (APT) program.
While APT provides templates for some of the most common observing modes, some observing scenarios are
more complicated. The science use cases listed above provide a guide to crafting the technical aspects to your
proposal, including how to use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) and APT.
443
Accessing ETC workbooks and APT files for the
example science programs
Each example science program has an attendant ETC workbook and APT file that can be used for reference as
you work through each example. The relevant ETC workbooks are available within the ETC itself. A tab in the ETC
GUI allows access to a drop-down menu that shows the example science program workbooks with the same titles
and reference numbers shown in Table 1. Select the example workbook of interest and add it to your personal
list of ETC workbooks to access the contents as shown in Figure 1.
444
Figure 1. Accessing ETC workbooks for example science programs
In the ETC GUI, select the Example Science Program Workbooks tab (arrow 1) and then select an example workbook of interest (in this
example, #22). That workbook then becomes available for your use, but is assigned a unique new ID number (arrow 2). Once you load
this notebook, you can read it to follow along with the example program description, or edit it further as you like.
Likewise, the filled-out APT files for each example science program are available to users within APT and can be
loaded as follows: from the top File menu, select the tab for JWST Example Science Programs and choose the APT
file with the same title and reference number as the program you are interested in. (See Figure 2.)
445
Figure 2. Accessing APT example science program files in APT
From APT, you can retrieve the APT files for any example science program by accessing the top File pull-down menu and selecting JWST
Example Science Programs. Then, slide right to select a category and a particular program of interest. Note that, unlike the ETC case,
APT treats these example programs as if they are previously accepted programs. While you can edit them to experiment, you should use
the Copy and Paste functions in the Edit menu to transfer any work you want to keep to a new proposal file.
Latest updates
446
NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with
MIRI Imaging Parallels
This example science program demonstrates how to write a proposal for deep field imaging with JWST NIRCam
Imaging and MIRI Imaging in parallel.
Example Science Program #22
On this page
Science motivation
Step-by-step guide
Choose instruments
Check feasibility
Select filters
Mosaic strategy
Dithering strategy
Calculate required exposure times
Design the observing program
References
Science motivation
See also:
JWST Parallel Observations, Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels,
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels
This example, from a part of the joint NIRCam and NIRSpec GTO program, JADES (JWST Advanced Deep
Extragalactic Survey) includes deep field imaging of the GOODS-S field (Figure 1). The goal is to study galaxy
evolution from the first steps (z > 10) through the end of the dark ages (7 < z < 9) and through the epoch of
galaxy assembly (2 < z < 6). Specific objectives include:
Construct luminosity functions at the highest redshifts to test galaxy formation models
Test ΛCDM by finding the highest redshift galaxies and estimating their masses
Determine the halo masses of these galaxies
Measure morphological parameters and assembly of stellar mass as a function of redshift
Measure metallicity as a function of redshift
Measure star formation histories
Look for surprises!
447
This example science program describes what data are required to achieve the program's objectives, including
discussion of the required wavelengths, spatial resolution, sensitivity, and spatial coverage.
Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels describes how to estimate
the necessary imaging depth, and Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging
Parallels describes how to design the observation parameters. This program was presented as part of the JWST
Proposal Planning Workshop at STScI in May 2017. Note that the program presented here is slightly different
from the one presented at the workshop.
Step-by-step guide
Below we follow steps from the JWST Imaging Roadmap to design an observing program. See also the Getting
Started with JWST Proposing.
Choose instruments
See also: NIRCam Imaging, MIRI Imaging, NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies, MIRI Imaging
NIRCam Imaging (0.6–5.0 μm) is the primary observing mode for this program, with MIRI imaging (5.6–25.5 μm)
in parallel. The NIRCam observations will be deeper than the existing Hubble observations of GOODS-S and have
superior spatial resolution at λ > 1 μm. The MIRI sensitivity limits will be 10 times those achieved with Spitzer
and will have much better spatial resolution.
Check feasibility
See also: NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity, MIRI Sensitivity
For general guidance on depth vs. exposure time, we refer to NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity, and MIRI Sensitivity.
For this program, we refer to calculations by Crowley et al. (2018). Their simulations yielded expected number
densities of galaxies at high redshifts, along with their detectability with NIRCam and MIRI imaging. They
determined that 167 square arcmin of NIRCam imaging with a depth of 100 ksec would yield 10 galaxies at z =
12. A smaller NIRCam survey of 33 square arcmin at 10 ksec depth would yield 100 galaxies at z = 7. Here, we
choose to cover 25 square arcmin with NIRCam at 30–50 ksec depth.
Select filters
See also: NIRCam Filters, MIRI Filters and Dispersers
448
To achieve maximum sensitivity, this program will use a combination of wide and medium NIRCam filters.
Specifically, this program uses F090W, F115W, F150W, F200W, F277W, F356W, and F444W. F070W is not used
because of its lower transmission. The medium filters used are F335M and F410M, which both overlap with a
wide filter (F356W and F444W), helping to guard against emission lines in this wavelength region and providing
additional redshift discrimination (Figure 2). The F410M filter is almost as sensitive as F444W, despite its
narrower width, because the JWST background increases sharply at long wavelengths.
For the parallel images, this program uses only a single MIRI filter, F770W, to achieve sufficient depth.
Mosaic strategy
See also: JWST Mosaic Overview
The desired area (25 square arcmin) is larger than the NIRCam field of view (~10 square arcmin). We will use a
2 × 2 mosaic, as discussed in the accompanying APT Guide.
Dithering strategy
See also: NIRCam Primary Dithers, NIRCam Subpixel Dithers
Dithers are highly recommended for NIRCam imaging to protect against cosmic rays, improve the
angular resolution, cover detector gaps, compensate for detector artifacts, and improve image
quality. NIRCam is Nyquist sampled at 2 and 4 μm, so subpixel dithers are required for good
spatial sampling for most of the wavelength coverage. Larger NIRCam dithers are also required
to cover the detector gaps in the field of view (see below). MIRI is oversampled over most of its
wavelength range and Nyquist sampled at F770W, so MIRI subpixel sampling is not
required. Dither patterns for this program are discussed in the APT Guide.
Calculate required exposure times

The step-by-step ETC guide shows how to use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to determine
exposure parameters appropriate for the science goals for this program.
Design the observing program

The step-by-step APT guide demonstrates how to specify these observations in a JWST proposal
using the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT).
449
Figure 1. The GOODS-S field
The GOODS-S field, with the coverage of the CANDELS footprint and ACS ultra-deep field (UDF) marked. The GTO program includes
NIRCam, MIRI, and NIRSpec observations. This example science program describes the NIRCam and MIRI observations marked in red
and pink, respectively. Note that this example program is similar to, but not exactly the same as, the GTO program.
450
Figure 2. Example galaxy spectrum
Example spectrum for a galaxy at redshift 8 and the estimated flux in several NIRCam filters. The red spectrum and red points exclude
emission lines. Circles mark the expected sensitivities of the observations described here, while the diamonds mark the shallow survey,
which is not included in this example.
References
Rieke, M. et al. 2019
Astro2020 Science White Paper: JWST GTO/ERS Deep Surveys
The JWST Advanced Extragalactic Survey (JADES)
Crowley, W, Baugh, C., Cole, S., Frenk, C., & Lacey, C., 2018, MNRAS, 474, 2352
Predictions for deep galaxy surveys with JWST from ΛCDM
CANDELS website
ACS Ultra Deep Field website
JWST Proposal Planning Workshop (May 2017) (See the "Agenda" tables for accompanying documents)
451
Latest updates
29 Apr 2019
Revisions include splitting ETC and APT guides into separate articles
452
Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam
Deep Field Imaging with MIRI
Imaging Parallels
This walk-through of the JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) demonstrates how to select exposure parameters
for example science program #22: NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels.
Example Science Program #22 ETC Guide
On this page
Define Scene and Sources

Define exposure calculations
Backgrounds
Instrument setup
Detector setup
Strategy
Discussion of the results
Continue the Tutorial
References
See also: NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels, JWST ETC Exposure Time Calculator
Overview, Video Tutorials
To achieve the goals of this example science program, we will use the ETC to compute signal-to-noise ratios (S
/N) for a z = 8 galaxy and a z = 1.5 galaxy in all of the desired filters. Exposure times are determined by working
iteratively with both the ETC and APT to define the observations. See the companion APT article for this science
program: Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels.
The ETC workbook associated with this example science program is called #22: NIRCam Deep Field
Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels and can be selected from the Example Science Program Workbooks
dropdown tab on the ETC Workbooks page. The nomenclature and reported SNR values in this article
are based on ETC v. 1.5.1. There may be subtle differences if using a different version of ETC.
Define Scene and Sources
453
See also: JWST ETC Scenes and Sources Page Overview, JWST ETC Defining a New Source, JWST
ETC Source Spectral Energy Distribution

In the Scene and Sources tab, you can edit the sources within your scene. In the Source Editor pane, there are
tabs for setting the source continuum, shape, and flux renormalization. Below are the specifications. The
resulting spectra are shown in Figure 1.
Table 1. Input source parameters
Source Continuum Redshift Normalization Shape
1 Galaxy Spectra from Brown et al. (2014): 8 10 nJy at 2 µm Extended 2D Gaussian

UGCA 219 (Blue Compact Dwarf) σx = 0.1"
σy = 0.05"
2 Galaxy Spectra from Brown et al. (2014): 1.5 250 nJy at 2µm Sersic (Scale Radius)
NGC 4552 (E w/ UV upturn) Semi-Major Axis: 0.5"
Semi-Minor Axis: 0.2"
Sersic index: 1.3
After creating the sources, add Source #1 to the Scene. All calculations (defined below) will be performed on
that source. To perform calculations on Source #2, add that source to the scene and remove Source #1. All
calculations will then automatically recalculate for Source #2.
Alternatively, you may wish to add both sources to a single scene, including spatial offsets so they don't
overlap. For an example of this setup, see Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRISS WFSS and Parallel NIRCam
Imaging of Galaxies in Lensing Clusters.
454
Figure 1. Source Spectrum
The spectra of the z = 8 galaxy (blue, fainter source) and the z = 1.5 galaxy (green, brighter source). The galaxy spectra come from Brown
et al. (2014), in this case using the UGCA 219 (blue compact dwarf) template for redshift 8 and the NGC 4552 (E w/ UV upturn) template
for redshift 1.5. This figure was generated by the ETC.
Define exposure calculations

See also: JWST ETC Calculations Page Overview
The signal-to-noise estimates are carried out under the "Calculations" tab. This program requires NIRCam short
wavelength (SW) imaging, NIRCam long wavelength (LW) imaging, and MIRI imaging calculations. For each
calculation, we must specify, in the calculations editor panel, the Scene (which we defined above), Background,
Instrument Setup, Detector Setup, and Strategy. The aim will be to detect both galaxies with NIRCam exposure
times from about 30 to 65 ks, where these approximate depths were pre-determined based on the numbers of
high-z galaxies expected (see NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels).
The following table summarizes the input parameters to be used with multiple filters. Below, we justify these
selections and provide additional input parameters for the individual filters.
455
Table 2. Input Calculation parameters
Tab Parameter Instrument Value
Background Position (Ra Dec) 03:32:28 -27:48:30
Background Background configuration Medium
Detector Setup Readout pattern NIRCam DEEP8
Detector Setup Readout pattern MIRI SLOW
Strategy Aperture radius NIRCam SW 0.13"
Strategy Aperture radius NIRCam LW 0.16"
Strategy Aperture radius MIRI 0.3"
Strategy Perform Background noiseless sky background

Subtraction Using
Backgrounds
See also: JWST ETC Backgrounds
The backgrounds will vary significantly depending on the location of the sky and time of year. In the
Backgrounds tab, we can specify the position Ra Dec as 03:32:28 -27:48:30, which is in the center of GOODS-S.
Not knowing when the observations will be scheduled, we select Medium as the Background configuration (50th
percentile for all dates with visibility).
Instrument setup
See also: JWST ETC Batch Expansions
Under the Instrument Setup tab, specify the filter used in each calculation. This program uses 10 filters: 4
NIRCam SW, 5 NIRCam LW, and one MIRI filter—one calculation is needed for each. See Table 1 for the filter
specifications.
These can either be set up individually, or users can set up one and then choose to Expand over filters from the
Expand menu at the top of the ETC window. This option copies the selected calculation once for every available
filter (more filters than needed here). See JWST ETC Batch Expansion.
Detector setup
456
See also:
NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies,MIRI Recommended Strategies, NIRCam Detector Readout
Patterns,
MIRI Detector Readout Overview
Under the Detector Setup tab, exposure times and specifications are defined. Shorter exposure times are needed
at 2–3 µm where NIRCam imaging sensitivity is best. Longer exposure times are required at λ > 4 μm (due
to lower filter throughputs and higher backgrounds) and at λ < 1 μm to significantly detect the Lyman break,
distinguishing blue z ~ 8 galaxies from red z ~ 1.5 galaxies.
Here, we will estimate the expected S/N for the galaxies in our scene for ~30–60 ks of total exposure times with
NIRCam. The F770W MIRI filter will be observed in parallel with all observations for a total of about 200 ks (see
APT section), so we compute the S/N for that exposure time as well.
To set up these exposure times in ETC, we need to choose readout patterns as well as the numbers of groups,
integrations, and exposures. We use the NIRCam DEEP8Readout pattern and MIRI's SLOW Readout pattern, both
of which are required to reduce data volume for this long observing program.
We also limit integration times to less than 1,000 s. In longer integrations, the majority of pixels would be
affected by cosmic rays.See discussions in NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies and MIRI Recommended
Strategies.
When setting up the observations in APT, we have to adjust the final exposure times for various reasons. See
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam Deep Field Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels. In practice, we work
iteratively with both the ETC and APT.
Ultimately, we arrive at the exposure times and specifications shown in Table 3. Exposures refer to the number
of dithers in the ETC (one exposure is executed at each dither position). The total exposure times are ~184 ks
for NIRCam SW, NIRCam LW, and MIRI.
Each MIRI integration time must be less than the NIRCam integration time obtained in parallel, as explained in
the APT Guide.
Table 3. Input exposure specifications and resulting output S/N
457
Calculation Mode Filter Groups Integrations Exposures Total z= z=
time 8 1.5
(s) S/N S/N
1 nircam_sw_imaging F090W 5 1 72 68028 5.51 0.83
5 nircam_lw_imaging F277W 5 1 36 34014 12.26 31.73
6 nircam_lw_imaging F335M 5 1 36 34014 9.35 23.07
8 nircam_lw_imaging F410M 5 1 72 68028 11.82 33.55
10 miri_imaging F770W 39 1 252 234791 2.42 5.85
Strategy
See also: JWST ETC Strategies, JWST ETC Imaging Aperture Photometry Strategy
The Strategy tab specifies the aperture information used to measure the source photometry and compute the S
/N. The Aperture radius should be large enough to encompass the source, yet not too small as to yield an overly
optimistic S/N estimate. For point sources, we recommend apertures with radii of 2.5 pixels, where the pixel
sizes are 0.031" (NIRCam SW), 0.063" (NIRCam LW), and 0.11" (MIRI). For the extended source at z = 8
considered here, we require a larger aperture size for the NIRCam short wavelength imaging (r = 0.13" instead
of 0.08"). For the z = 1.5 source, still larger apertures should be used.
Extended sources require larger photometric apertures than point sources. The ETC default apertures
will significantly underestimate signal to noise if the source size is larger than the aperture size. For faint
Gaussian sources of width σ, optimal signal to noise is obtained with an aperture of radius ~1.6σ.
We allow the ETC to subtract the known (noiseless) sky background, as recommended for aperture photometry,
in a range of filters (see JWST ETC Imaging Aperture Photometry Strategy). Note the sky noise is still factored
into the SNR calculation, just not the subtraction of the flux. Similar results (with slightly lower SNR) are achieved
by using large annuli to measure the sky background.
458
Figure 2. S/N estimates
459
S/N for the z = 8 galaxy (top) and z = 1.5 galaxy (bottom) vs. wavelength in each filter with the exposure specifications listed in Table 3.
These plots were generated by the ETC.
Discussion of the results

For the z = 8 galaxy, S/N > 4 at all NIRCam wavelengths, and S/N = 2 in the MIRI image. MIRI is
therefore better suited to detect slightly lower redshift galaxies in this deep field. The S/N is
better than about 9 for 1.5 μm < λ < 4 μm, ensuring that galaxies at z = 8 will be detected. The z
= 1.5 galaxy is well detected at all wavelengths except F090W and F115W, owing to a sharp
downturn in the spectral energy distribution at λ < 1 μm for the adopted galaxy template (NGC
4552).
To check how well these observations will detect a fainter galaxy at higher redshift, the z = 8 galaxy can be
changed to have a redshift of 10 and normalized flux of 5 nJy. In that case, the galaxy is still detected with S/N >
3 in all filters except F090W and F770W.
Keep in mind that the depth will not be uniform across the observed field. Significant areas will have more or less
exposure time than assumed here, as shown in the APT Guide.
460
Also note that the NIRCam and MIRI observations defined in this program do not overlap with one another. The
JWST GTO JADES program will make use of shallower NIRCam imaging of a wider field to accompany their deep
MIRI imaging, as shown on the main page for this example science program.
Continue the Tutorial

With the exposure parameters now determined for this program, we can populate the observation
template in the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT). See the step-by-step APT guide to complete the
proposal preparation for example science program #22.
References
Brown, M. J. I. et al. 2014, ApJS, 212, 18
An Atlas of Galaxy Spectral Energy Distributions from the Ultraviolet to the Mid-Infrared
Pontoppidan, K. M., Pickering, T. E., Laidler, V. G. et al., 2016, Proc. SPIE 9910, Observatory Operations:
Strategies, Processes, and Systems VI, 991016 ,
Pandeia: a multi-mission exposure time calculator for JWST and WFIRST
JWST Proposal Planning Workshop (May 2017)
Presentations from the May 2017 JWST Proposal Planning Workshop
Latest
updates 16 Dec 2019
Integration times reduced < 1000 s. Reduced data volumes with MIRI SLOW. Simplified and
synced with APT. Aperture sizes increased for extended sources.
29 Apr 2019
Revisions include matching exposures to those in the APT Guide.

published
461
462
Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam
Deep Field Imaging with MIRI
Imaging Parallels
This walk-through of the JWST Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) demonstrates how to specify the observations
determined in the ETC step-by-step example for example science program #22: NIRCam Deep Field Imaging
with MIRI Imaging Parallels.
Example Science Program #22 APT Guide
On this page
APT file
Fill Out Proposal Information
Specify the target
Observations
Define imaging observations
Data volume
Mosaic parameters
NIRCam dithers
NIRCam filters
NIRCam readout patterns
MIRI parallels
Define special requirements
Run Visit Planner
Run Smart Accounting
References
APT file
See also:
NIRCam Imaging APT Template, NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies, JWST APT Help,
JWST APT Training Examples and Video Tutorials
A filled out APT file can be accessed via the menu options File → JWST Example Science Proposals →
NIRCam →22 NIRCam DeepField Imaging with MIRI Imaging Parallels in APT. The APT file was created
with version 27.3. There may be inconsistencies, warnings, or errors with other versions of APT.
463
See also: JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool overview

After opening APT, we selected New JWST Proposal under the New Document pull-down menu. On the Proposal
Information page, we entered Title, Abstract, and Category of proposal and kept Cycle number at its default
value.
Specify the target

See also: APT Targets
This program is targeting the GOODS-S field with a 2 × 2 NIRCam mosaic. There are a few options for entering a
target in APT; we will specify an individual fixed target. To start, create a new fixed target at RA = 03h 32m 42.7
s, Dec = -27d 47m 59.7s. By setting this specific position (instead of the center of the GOODS-S field), the
NIRCam and MIRI observations will fall completely within the CANDELS coverage (ETC Figure 1), given a specific
position angle (see Special Requirements).
Observations
See also: APT Observations
To get started, create a new observation inside an Observation Folder. From there, select NIRCam as the Prime
Instrument and NIRCamImaging as the Template. Check the Coordinated Parallel box and select NIRCam-MIRI
Imaging. Finally, choose the target defined above from the pull-down menu. When editing the "Observation", the
tabs on the lower half of the GUI screen contain the detector specifications.
Define imaging observations
464
See also: NIRCam Imaging APT Template, NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies
To set up the NIRCam imaging, click to the NIRCam Imaging tab (leftmost tab on the lower half of the APT
screen). Since this program will be imaging a large area, set the Module to ALL and Subarray to FULL, which
together encompass all pixels in all 10 NIRCam detectors, providing the largest possible spatial coverage. See
the NIRCam Field of View article for details.
Data volume
See also: JWST Data Volume and Data Excess
For deep imaging that uses all 10 NIRCam detectors plus parallels, data volume can add up quickly. For this
particular program, the data volume is high enough that the observations must be split into an individual
observation for each filter instead of including all filters within a single observation, in the Filters panel. This
increases the overheads slightly, while allowing for more flexibility in defining exposure times for each filter.
The data volume in each visit should be limited to:
< 58 GB (APT error)

< 29 GB (APT warning)
< 0.654 MB/s (so as not to exceed 58 GB in 24 hours)
For the third limit, APT gives no warning or error, but exceeding this limit may make a program difficult or
impossible to schedule, since a data rate this high may not be sustained for more than 12 hours.
This program abides by all 3 limits.
Mosaic parameters
See also: JWST Mosaic Overview, NIRCam Dithers and Mosaics
To cover the necessary spatial area, this program uses a mosaic with 2 rows and 2 columns. The Row Overlap %
is set to 20% and the Column Overlap % is set to 78%. These overlaps are defined relative to the NIRCam field of
view. The 78% column overlap ensures 2 things: (1) that the large gap between the NIRCam modules is covered,
and (2) that the MIRI coverage is continuous. The resulting NIRCam mosaic has 2 wide stripes of increased (2×)
depth where the modules overlap. Figure 1 shows the Aladin visualization. The NIRCam mosaic covers
approximately 25 square arcmin, and the MIRI mosaic covers approximately 7 square arcmin.
NIRCam dithers
See also: NIRCam Primary Dithers, JWST Coordinated Parallels Custom Dithers
465
This program uses 4INTRAMODULEBOX primary dithers to cover detector gaps in the SW channel and yield
coverage of rectangular region. The 9-POINT-WITH-MIRI-F770Wcoordinated parallel subpixel dither pattern is also
used to improve the spatial resolution of both the NIRCam and MIRI images. Altogether, there are 36 dithers for
each exposure specification.
NIRCam filters
See also: NIRCam Filters
In the Filters panel, specify the required filters, readout patterns, and exposures. NIRCam has a short wavelength
and a long wavelength channel that produce simultaneous imaging (via a dichroic) over the same field of view.
Programs can therefore select one filter for each channel for each exposure sequence in the Filters box, and both
will be observed with the identical readout patterns and total exposure time. Filters used in this program are
summarized in Tables 1 and 2.
NIRCam readout patterns

See also: NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns
As described in the ETC Guide, this program uses the DEEP8Readout pattern, which is designed for deep imaging
and is required here to reduce data volume. To limit each integration time to <1,000 s, 5Groups/Int are used. To
achieve the required depth, this program uses 7 Groups/Int for each of the 36 exposures (dithers). The Total
Exposure Time displayed at the end of the row in the Filters box includes all integrations and dithers, and is set
up to achieve about 34 ks in some filters and 68 ks in others. See the ETC Guide for explanations about the
selected exposure times.
MIRI parallels
See also: MIRI Imaging, MIRI Detector Readout Overview
The parallel MIRI observations are specified under the MIRI Imaging tab. The program uses the F770W filter.
Readoutpattern set to SLOW is used for all observations, and is required to reduce data volume. Each MIRI
integration time is set to match (or be slightly less than) each NIRCam integration times.
Table 1. Exposure parameters for prime NIRCam imaging observations
466
Observation NIRCam NIRCam NIRCam NIRCam NIRCam Primary Secondary NIRCam
# SW LW Readout Groups Integrations Dithers Dithers Exposure
Filter Filter /Int /Exp Time (s)
1 F090W F410M DEEP8 5 1 4 9 34014
2 F090W F410M DEEP8 5 1 4 9 34014
3 F200W F335M DEEP8 5 1 4 9 34014
4 F150W F444W DEEP8 5 1 4 9 34014
5 F150W F444W DEEP8 5 1 4 9 34014
6 F115W F277W DEEP8 5 1 4 9 34014
7 F115W F356W DEEP8 5 1 4 9 34014
Table 2. Exposure parameters for parallel MIRI imaging observations
Observation MIRI MIRI MIRI MIRI Primary Secondary MIRI MIRI

# Filter Readout Groups Integrations Dithers Dithers Exposure Exposure
/Int /Exp Time (s) Time (hr)
1 F770W SLOW 39 1 4 9 33542 9.3
2 F770W SLOW 39 1 4 9 33542 9.3
3 F770W SLOW 39 1 4 9 33542 9.3
4 F770W SLOW 39 1 4 9 33542 9.3
5 F770W SLOW 39 1 4 9 33542 9.3
6 F770W SLOW 39 1 4 9 33542 9.3
7 F770W SLOW 39 1 4 9 33542 9.3

See also: APT Special Requirements
467
To ensure that the NIRCam and MIRI maps fall within the CANDELS region and includes the ACS Ultra Deep Field,
we must restrict the position angle of the observations. Under the Special Requirements tab, add a PA Range
of 280°–300° for each of the observations. It is important to set the PA range for each observation instead of
using the Same PA Link option because the visits are so long (see below), it is impossible for them all to be
observed at the exact same position angle.
468
Figure 1. Aladin visualization
Resulting coverage for each observation consisting of a 2 × 2 mosaic of NIRCam imaging (upper left) and MIRI imaging in parallel
(lower right). Darker blue indicates increased depth (exposure time).
Run Visit Planner

See also: APT Visit Planner
469
To determine the schedulability window of our proposed observations, we ran the Visit Planner Tool. The position
angle requirement restricts the observations to a 32 day window in September/October.

See also: APT Smart Accounting
After running Smart Accounting to reduce overheads, the total charged time (in APT 27.3) is 351.89 hours, of
which 264.60 hours is science time with NIRCam and MIRI in parallel. The efficiency is therefore 75%.
References
JWST Proposal Planning Workshop (May 2017)
Presentations from the May 2017 JWST Proposal Planning Workshop
Latest
updates 16 Dec 2019
Integration times reduced < 1000 s. Reduced data volumes with MIRI SLOW. Improved
dithering. Simplified and synced with ETC Guide.
30 Oct 2019
Updated to APT 27.3: some parallel MIRI exposure times are slightly shorter.
29 Apr 2019
Revisions include adding links and improving clarity. Final charged time and efficiency
updated to results from APT 27.1.
06 Oct 2017
Fixed typo in Exposure Parameters Table (changed MIRI depth units from "s" to "hr")

published
470
471
NIRCam Parallel Imaging and NIRISS
WFSS of Galaxies in Lensing Clusters
This example science program provides a walk-through of developing a JWST observing program using NIRISS
wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) as a prime observing mode and NIRCam imaging as a coordinated
parallel mode.
On this page
Steps for creating observations

Step 1 - Choose the instrument to use for the science case (NIRISS, NIRCam or both), based on the
wavelength coverage
Step 2- Choose the blocking filters that cover the wavelengths of interest
Step 3 - Check the direct image and grism (line and continuum) sensitivities in the WFSS mode(s) of
interest
Step 4 - Choose one or both of the orthogonal grisms
Step 5 - Decide on dither pattern
Step 6 - Decide whether mosaicking is required to cover the target field for the science program
Step 7 - Decide the readout pattern to use
Step 8 - Use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to determine the exposure parameters for the direct
images and for the dispersed images from the grisms
Step 9 - Fill out the Astronomers Proposal Tool (APT)
References
See also: Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRISS WFSS and Parallel NIRCam Imaging of Galaxies in Lensing
Clusters, Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRISS WFSS and NIRCam Parallel Imaging of Galaxies in Lensing
Clusters
The overarching science goals are from the GTO program "NIRISS Unbiased Cluster Survey (CANUCS)" to provide
context for navigating the Exposure Time Calculator and setting up the observation templates in the
Astronomers Proposal Tool.
The CANUCS program is designed to study galaxies within and lensed by galaxy clusters. The main science goals
are to:
measure physical properties (star formation rates, metallicities, abundances) of dwarf galaxies from 1 < z
< 5;
spatially resolve emission lines, metallicities, and star formation rates of lensed galaxies at z > 1;
detect extreme emission line galaxies from 1 < z < 8 and determine their evolution in their numbers and
472
detect extreme emission line galaxies from 1 < z < 8 and determine their evolution in their numbers and
their properties;
discover and characterize galaxies in the era of reionization (z > 7) via spectral diagnostics (continuum
breaks, Lyα emission lines; broad-band dropouts).
The CANUCS program will observe five strong lensing galaxy clusters from the HST Frontier Fields. For illustrative
purposes, we focus on one of these clusters for this example science program.
Step 1 - Choose the instrument to use for the

science case (NIRISS, NIRCam or both), based on
the wavelength coverage
See also: JWST Slitless Spectroscopy Roadmap, NIRISS Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, NIRCam Wide Field
Slitless Spectroscopy, JWST Coordinated Parallels Roadmap
NIRISS WFSS is the only JWST observing mode that permits slitless spectroscopy between 0.8–2.2 μm and is well-
suited to measure emission lines from a large sample of galaxies over a range of redshifts. A direct image is
taken before and after each set of dithered grism exposures to determine object positions, define the
wavelength zeropoint of the dispersed spectra, and to facilitate modeling of spectral overlaps (i.e.,
"contamination").
NIRCam imaging, executed as a coordinated parallel observation in this program, is designed to detect galaxies
with strong emission lines based on their medium-band filter excesses in regions several arcminutes away from
and adjacent to the lensing clusters (here "adjacent" is defined by the relative locations of NIRISS and NIRCAM in
the JWST focal plane and the spacecraft roll angle).
Step 2- Choose the blocking filters that cover the

wavelengths of interest
See also: NIRISS Filters, NIRCam Filters
The CANUCS program will observe with the F115W, F150W, and F200W NIRISS filters to optimize emission line
473
The CANUCS program will observe with the F115W, F150W, and F200W NIRISS filters to optimize emission line
and wavelength coverage. In this example program, the parallel field will be observed with 12 wide and medium
NIRCam filters, 6 in the short wavelength channel (F090W, F115W, F150W, F182M, F210M, F140M) and 6 in the
long wavelength channel (F277W, F250M, F300M, F335M, F360M, F410M).
Step 3 - Check the direct image and grism (line and

continuum) sensitivities in the WFSS mode(s) of
interest
See also: NIRISS Sensitivity, NIRCam Sensitivity
Use of the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) is required for the most accurate signal-to-noise ratio (SNR)
calculations for an observing program. Based on the predicted performance of NIRISS and NIRCam, the
sensitivity limits to achieve a SNR of 10 for a 10 kilosecond observation can be estimated. Users are referred to
the NIRISS Sensitivity and NIRCam Sensitivity articles for more information.
Step 4 - Choose one or both of the orthogonal

grisms
See also: NIRISS GR150 Grisms
This program will observe a galaxy cluster field, which is crowded. Thus the use of both orthogonal GR150R and
GR150C grisms is critical for removing contamination from overlapping spectra.

See also: NIRISS WFSS Recommended Strategies, JWST Coordinated Parallels Custom Dithers, NIRISS Dithers
, NIRISS WFSS Dithers
Since the NIRISS WFSS point spread function (PSF) is undersampled, dithering of NIRISS grism exposures is
required to properly sample the PSF and to mitigate bad pixels. As discussed in the NIRISS WFSS Recommended
Strategies, the MEDIUM dither step size (~0.6") is optimal for extragalactic studies of the moderate-to-high
redshift universe and is thus appropriate for this example science program.
Since this program is a coordinated parallel observation, we choose a custom dither pattern that is designed to
provide optimal pixel phase sampling for both the primary and parallel instrument. A 9-step dither strategy is
chosen to provide increased photometric depth in individual exposures and improve PSF sampling by increasing
astrometric and photometric precision. In the Astronomer's Proposal Tool, this dither pattern is called 9-POINT-
MEDIUM-NIRCam.
We note that the CANUCS program uses the standard NIRISS WFSS 8-step MEDIUM dither pattern, while we use
474
We note that the CANUCS program uses the standard NIRISS WFSS 8-step MEDIUM dither pattern, while we use
the custom dither pattern created for coordinated parallel observations for illustrative purposes.
Step 6 - Decide whether mosaicking is required to

cover the target field for the science program
See also: NIRISS Mosaics
The primary science goals of this example program require the spectra of distant galaxies that are lensed by the
cluster core region which lies within the 2.2' × 2.2' FOV of the NIRISS detector. The ancilliary NIRCam imaging
addresses the science goals related to the galaxies in the cluster outskirts, along with selection of emission line
galaxies through the medium band imaging. Mosaicking or multiple pointings is not essential for this program,
unlike observing programs where a wide area coverage is important to address the science goals.

See also: NIRISS Detector Readout Patterns, NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns, APT Coordinated Parallel
Observations
NIRISS offers 2 readout patterns: NIS (4 frames are averaged in a group) and NISRAPID (one frame per group).
NIS is the preferred readout pattern for long observations and is thus used for this program.
Since NIRCam imaging observations are performed as a coordinated parallel observation to the NIRISS WFSS
observations, the NIRCam readout patterns are chosen to best match the available observing time to the
contemporaneous NIRISS observation element (see Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRISS WFSS and NIRCam
Parallel Imaging of Galaxies in Lensing Clusters). For the direct imaging part of the NIRISS WFSS exposure, a
NIRCam readout pattern of MEDIUM8 is chosen for the parallel NIRCam imaging observations since the NIRISS
direct imaging exposures are relatively short. For the NIRCam imaging observations that are performed parallel
to the NIRISS grism exposures, the DEEP8 readout pattern is chosen since this readout pattern is optimized to
provide the highest signal-to-noise data for the faintest objects and the parallel NIRISS grism exposures are long
enough to support this contemporaneous NIRCam readout pattern.
Step 8 - Use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to

determine the exposure parameters for the direct
images and for the dispersed images from the
grisms
To determine the exposure parameters for this observation using the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC), please see
the article Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRISS WFSS and Parallel NIRCam Imaging of Galaxies in Lensing Clusters.
475
For details filling out the Astronomers Proposal Tool (APT) for this example science program, please see the
article Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRISS WFSS and NIRCam Parallel Imaging of Galaxies in Lensing Clusters.
References
CANUCS program information
http://www.stsci.edu/jwst/observing-programs/program-information?id=1208
Latest updates
476
Parallel Imaging and NIRISS WFSS of
Galaxies in Lensing Clusters
A walk-through of the JWST ETC for the NIRISS WFSS Example Science Program is provided, demonstrating how
to select exposure parameters for this observing program.
On this page
Define Sources and Scene in the ETC

Define sources for the "Multiple Galaxies" scene
Assign sources to "Multiple Galaxies" scene
Run ETC calculation for direct imaging
Select NIRISS imaging Calculation
Select instrument parameters
Run ETC Calculation
Adjust exposure parameters to obtain desired signal-to-noise ratio
Run ETC calculation for WFSS
Select NIRISS WFSS Calculation
Run ETC Calculation
Adjust exposure time to obtain desired signal-to-noise ratio
Examine signal-to-noise ratio for parallel NIRCam imaging observations
NIRCam imaging observed in parallel to NIRISS grism exposures
NIRcam imaging observed in parallel to NIRISS direct image exposures
See also: NIRISS Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, JWST ETC Exposure Time Calculator Overview, Proposal
Planning Video Tutorials
The JWST Exposure Time Calculator performs signal-to-noise (SNR) calculations for the JWST observing modes.
Sources of interest are defined by the user and assigned to scenes which are used by the ETC to run calculations
for the requested observing mode.
For the "Using NIRISS WFSS and NIRCam Imaging to Observe Galaxies Within Lensing Clusters" example science
program, we focus on selecting exposure parameters for NIRISS WFSS as the prime observing mode.
477
We start by defining a scene of sources relevant to this science case. We show how to s to achieve the desired
SNR for both the direct imaging and grism observations. An accompanying ETC workbook on which this tutorial is
based can be downloaded as a sample workbook from the ETC user interface.
The optimal exposure specifications (e.g., number of groups and integrations) are the input needed for the
Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) observation template, which is used to specify an observing program and
submit proposals.
The ETC workbook associated with this Example Science Program is called "#33: NIRISS WFSS with
NIRCam Parallel Imaging of Galaxies in Lensing Clusters" and can be selected from the Example Science
Program Workbooks dropdown tab on the ETC Workbooks page. The nomenclature and reported SNR
values in this article are based on ETC v. 1.5. There may be subtle differences if using a different version
of ETC.
Define Sources and Scene in the ETC

See also: JWST ETC Scenes and Sources Page Overview
Define sources for the "Multiple Galaxies" scene

See also: JWST ETC Defining a New Source, JWST ETC Source Spectral Energy Distribution
We first set up a scene with multiple galaxies with a range of magnitudes and SED types. We define the following
sources in ETC in the Source Editor pane:
Galaxy mAB= 26: a point source galaxy with a flat continuum in Fν, normalized to mAB = 26 in the NIRISS
/Imaging F200W filter;
Galaxy mAB=28:a point source galaxy with a flat continuum in Fν, normalized to mAB = 28 in the NIRISS
/Imaging F200W filter;
Emission Line Galaxy: a point source emission line only galaxy with no continuum and not renormalized (i.
e., Do not renormalize is selected in the Renorm table), where emission line wavelengths, widths, and
intensities are specified in the Lines tab in the Source Editor pane as:
Line Center = 1.15 μm, Line Width = 1,000 km/s, Line strength = 8e−18 erg/cm2/s
Line Center = 1.5 μm, Line Width = 1,000 km/s, Line strength = 8e−18 erg/cm2/s
Line Center = 2 μm, Line Width = 1,000 km/s, Line strength = 8e−18 erg/cm2/s
Starburst Galaxy: an Extended (Sersic (effective radius), semi-major axis = 0.3" and semi-minor axis =
0.15") starburst galaxy (using the SED of NGC 3690 from the extragalactic spectral templates available in
the ETC in the Continuum tab) at Redshift = 2, normalized to mAB = 25 in the NIRISS/Imaging F200W filter.

478
See also: JWST ETC Defining a Scene
After assigning these sources to one ETC scene, by highlighting them one-by-one and clicking the Add Source
button in the Select a Scene tab, and renaming the scene Multiple Galaxies, we applied the following offsets to
the sources within the scene using the Offset tab in the Source Editor pane:
Galaxy mAB=26: X offset = -1.5", Y offset = -1.2";

Galaxy mAB=28: X offset = 2", Y offset = 1.7";
Emission Line Galaxy: X offset = 0, Y offset = 0.5";
Starburst Galaxy: X offset = -2.7, Y offset = 2.7", Orientation = 30°.
Note that since the first 3 galaxies are point sources, orientation need not be specified in the Offset tab. The
position of the sources in the scene can be viewed in the lower left Scene Sketch pane. By checking the
checkbox in the "Plot" column in the Select a Source pane, the SEDs of the selected sources can be overplotted
and easily compared (note: it may be helpful to limit the wavelength axis to the range relevant to the NIRISS
WFSS mode, i.e., 0.8 - 2.2 µm).

See also: JWST ETC Calculations Page Overview, JWST ETC Creating a New Calculation, JWST ETC Imaging
Aperture Photometry Strategy, NIRISS Imaging Recommended Strategies, NIRISS Imaging, JWST ETC
Backgrounds, JWST ETC Outputs Overview, JWST ETC Batch Expansion
Select NIRISS imaging Calculation

A direct image is taken before and after each set of dithered grism exposures in NIRISS WFSS mode. This
program uses both the GR150R and GR150C grisms, which disperses the light in orthogonal directions. There are
therefore four direct image exposures per filter. The F115W, F150W, and F200W filters are used in this program.
Our goal is to detect Galaxy mAB = 28 at a SNR ~7 among the four coadded images in each of the filters, so we
run ETC calculations for NIRISS/Imaging for the three filters above to determine the exposure parameters we
need to achieve this SNR.
Since the JWST background is position dependent, fully specifying background parameters are important for the
most accurate SNR calculation. We therefore entered the coordinates of one of the HST Frontier Fields (04:16:
09.40 -24:04:04.00) in the Backgrounds tab, and selected Medium for Background configuration, which
corresponds to the 50th percentile of the sky background.

479
Calculation #1 represents our initial calculation to assess the SNR with (mostly) default parameters, as follows:
Instrument Setup tab - we kept the default Filter specification of F200W.
Detector Setup tab -

Subarray is set to Full (only full frame readout is supported for NIRISS imaging);
we chose the NIS Readout Pattern since we are observing faint objects;
number of Groups per integration is kept at the default value of 10 and the number of Integrations
per exposure is kept at the default value of 1 (for NIRISS imaging and WFSS modes, it is
recommended to maximize the number of groups per integration (up to a limit of 25 for the NIS
Readout Pattern to mitigate cosmic ray hits) to provide better sampling up-the-ramp);
number of Exposures per specification is set to 4 since four direct images will be taken within each
filter.
Strategy tab -
We selected the Centered on source option for Aperture location, choosing Galaxy mAB = 28 from
the drop-down menu, so that the SNR is calculated for this source.
Aperture radius is set to 0.185", which represents the 80% encircled energy fraction in the F200W
filter (see NIRISS Imaging Recommended Strategies for filter-dependent choices for the aperture
extraction radius and background annulus radii for point sources).
We sample the background from an annulus around the source, choosing an Inner radius and Outer
radius that is 2x and 4x the source extraction radius, or 0.37" and 0.74", respectively.
Run ETC Calculation

Running the calculation with these parameters (by clicking the Calculate button) gives a SNR of ~7.5, as
reported in the upper left Calculations pane and the bottom right Reports pane.
To calculate the SNR in the other filters, we selected Copy Calculation in the Edit pull-down menu. We copied this
calculation twice, and updated the filters in the Instrument Setup tab for the new calculations to F115W and
F150W (Calculations #2 and #3, respectively), and set the aperture radius to 0.20" and 0.185", respectively, in
the Strategy tab which represents the 80% encircled energy fraction in the PSF for these filters. The radii for the
sky annulus from which the background is extracted is set to 2x and 4x the source extraction radius, as above.
Running these new calculations on the updated filters shows the SNR is under 7 for both filters.
Adjust exposure parameters to obtain desired

signal-to-noise ratio
480
The SNR in the F150W filter is the median value, so we wanted to determine the number of groups needed to
achieve a SNR ~ 7 in this filter. To efficiently run this calculation for a range of groups, where only the number of
groups is varied, we used Batch Expansion by selecting Expand Groups from the Expand pull-down menu.
Calculations #4 through #8 shows the results of this exercise, where we updated the start value of number of
groups in Batch Expansion to 11 and kept the step size and number of iterations at their default values of 1 and 5
, respectively.
We see that with number of Groups per integration ≥ 13 (Calculations #6 through #8), we achieve a SNR ≥ 7.
Since this program is a coordinated parallel program with NIRCam imaging, there is a balancing act when
choosing exposure times. The exposure times for the coordinated mode (including overheads) can not exceed
the exposure time of the prime observing mode. However, minimizing dead time, when the coordinated mode is
not observing, is also important. From experimentation in APT, we find that choosing 13 Groups per integration
for NIRISS WFSS direct imaging allows us to achieve our SNR goals while making efficient use of simultaneous
NIRCam imaging observations (see the Step-by-Step APT Guide for the corresponding NIRCam specifications). In
general, determining optimal exposure parameters may involve some iteration between ETC and APT.
To determine the SNR for the other filters, we copied the calculations where the number of groups equals 13
(Calculation #6) twice, and updated the Filter to F115W and F200W (Calculations #9 and #10, respectively); the
aperture radius to 0.20" and 0.185", respectively; and the radii for the background sky annulus to 0.4" and 0.8" (
F115W) and 0.37" and 0.74" (F200W). By selecting the check-box next to the calculations corresponding to these
exposure specifications (number of Groups per integration = 13, number of Integrations per exposure = 1,
number of Exposures per specification = 4) for the various filters (Calculations #6, #9, and #10), we can
compare the predicted SNR through these calculations in the Plots pane.

See also: JWST ETC Aperture Spectral Extraction Strategy, NIRISS WFSS Recommended Strategies
Select NIRISS WFSS Calculation

This program uses an 9-step dither pattern for each filter, using the custom 9-POINT-MEDIUM-NIRCam dither
pattern created for coordinated parallel observations with NIRISS WFSS as the primary observing mode and
NIRCam imaging as the parallel observing mode (see NIRISS WFSS Recommended Strategies for a discussion
about the trade-offs between dither size and number of dither steps). Our goal is to obtain a SNR ~3 per pixel in
the emission lines from the Emission Line Galaxy from the coadded dithered WFSS exposures.
We initiated a NIRISS/WFSS calculation and updated the Backgrounds tab as above for the direct imaging
calculations (i.e., the coordinates were set to 04:16:09.40 -24:04:04.00 and we selected Medium for Background
configuration).

481
Calculation #11 represents our initial calculation to assess the SNR with (mostly) default parameters, as follows:
Instrument Setup tab -

Grism is set to GR150R;
we kept the default Filter specification of F115W.

Subarray is set to Full (only full frame readout is supported for the NIRISS WFSS mode);
we chose the NIS Readout Pattern since we are observing faint objects;
number of Groups per integration is kept at the default value of 10 and the number of Integrations
per exposure is kept at the default value of 1;
number of Exposures per specification is set to 9 since the program uses a 9-point dither pattern.
Strategy tab -
We selected the Centered on source option for Aperture location, choosing Emission Line Galaxy
from the drop-down menu, so that the SNR is calculated for this source.
Wavelength of Interest was set to the wavelength of the emission line, i.e., 1.15 µm.
Aperture Half-Height was set to 0.2", the 80% encircled energy fraction for a point source.
The sky sample start region and end region were set to 2x and 4x the aperture half-height value
(0.4" and 0.8", respectively).
Run ETC Calculation

With these parameters, we find SNR of ~2.2, which is too low.
Adjust exposure time to obtain desired signal-to-

noise ratio
Similar to the direct imaging calculation, we used batch expansion to repeat the calculation, increasing only the
number of Groups per integration, using a starting value of 16, 9 iterations, and a step size of 1 (Calculations
#12 - #20). It is recommended to limit the number of groups to 25 with the NIRISS NIS Readout Pattern to
mitigate the impact of cosmic ray hits which can result in discarded frames.
We find that with number of groups ≥ 18 (Calculation #14), the SNR ≥ 3. Similar to the experimentation we did
to match up parallel NIRCam Imaging exposures with NIRISS WFSS direct imaging exposures in APT, we strike a
balance between maximizing NIRCam exposure time within the exposure time window allowed by the prime
NIRISS WFSS exposures. We find that for 23 groups, we make the most efficient use of a simultaneous NIRCam
observation while achieving a WFSS SNR of ~3.4 (Calculation #19).
482
To determine the SNR in filters F150W and F200W for this exposure specification, we copied Calculation 19
twice, updated the Filter to F150W and F200W (Calculations #21 and #22, respectively), and set the wavelength
of interest in the Strategy tab to the wavelengths of the emission lines (i.e., 1.5 µm and 2 µm). We also updated
the Aperture Half-Height values to 0.185", which corresponds to the 80% encircled energy fraction for the PSF
through these filters, and the background sky sample start region and end region to 0.37" and 0.74" (i.e., 2x and
4x the aperture half-height value). We find a SNR of 4 - 5 through both filters with this exposure set-up.
Examine signal-to-noise ratio for parallel NIRCam

imaging observations
See also: NIRCam Imaging, NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns, NIRCam Point Spread Functions, NIRCam
Filters
NIRcam imaging observations are taken of a nearby field during the NIRISS WFSS exposures. As discussed in
more detail in the step-by-step APT guide, there is a set of NIRCam exposures in the short wavelength channel
and long wavelength channel for each set of NIRISS WFSS Direct Image → GR150 → Direct Image exposures.
NIRCam imaging observed in parallel to NIRISS

grism exposures
The longest NIRCam imaging exposure sequence is observed in parallel with the set of dithered NIRISS GR150
exposures. In Calculations #23 and 24, we show NIRCam imaging exposures for one of these sets of parallel
observations to the dithered GR150 exposures for illustrative purposes. Our set up is as follows:
Backgrounds tab - the position is set to the same position as the prime field, with the Medium background
level chosen;
Instrument Setup tab - the Filter is set to F090W for NIRCam short wavelength imaging (Calculation #23)
and to F277W for NIRCam long wavelength imaging (Calculation #24);

Subarray is set to Full since we are observing faint galaxies and we need the maximum field of view;
the readout pattern is set to DEEP8 to obtain the highest quality data for faint objects;
Exposures per specification is set to 9 to mimic the 9-POINT-MEDIUM-NIRCam dither pattern,
Groups per integration is set to 5 since experimentation with APT shows that this exposure time
best matches the time available during the parallel WFSS GR150 observation, and Integrations per
exposure is left to 1;
Strategy tab -
483
Aperture radius was to 0.068" for the F090W filter and 0.182" for the F277W filter, representing 2x
the PSF full width half maximum in these filters (see NIRCam Point Spread Functions).
The background Sky Annulus radii are set to 2x and 4x the source aperture radius, or 0.136" and
0.272" for the F090W filter and 0.364" and 0.728" for the F277W filter.
From this exercise, we see that if a galaxy with mAB = 28 is in the field, it would be detected with a SNR of ~16
in the F090W filter (Calculation #23) and the F227W filter (Calculation #24) when using these exposure
parameters.
NIRcam imaging observed in parallel to NIRISS

direct image exposures
One NIRCam imaging exposure is obtained in parallel with each NIRISS direct image exposure. In Calculations
#25 and 26, we show NIRCam Imaging exposures for one of these sets of parallel observations for illustrative
purposes. Our set up is as follows:
Backgrounds tab - the position is set to the same position as the prime field, with the Medium background
level chosen;
Instrument Setup tab - the Filter is set to F150W for NIRCam short wavelength imaging (Calculation #25)
and to F300M for NIRCam long wavelength imaging (Calculation #26);

Subarray is set to Full since we are observing faint galaxies and we need the maximum field of view;
the readout pattern is set to MEDIUM8 to obtain the high quality data of faint objects for a shorter
exposure.
Exposures per specification is set to 1 since there is only 1 NIRCam exposure per NIRISS direct
image, Groups per integration is set to 5 since experimentation with APT shows that this exposure
time best matches the time available during the parallel NIRISS direct image observation, and
Integrations per exposure is left to 1;
Strategy tab -
Aperture radius was set to 0.1" for the F150W filter and 0.2" for the F300M filter, representing 2x
the PSF full width half maximum in these filters.
The background Sky annulus radii were set to 2x and 4x the source aperture radius, or 0.2" and 0.4"
for the F150W filter and 0.4" and 0.8" for the F300M filter.
484
From this exercise, we see that if a galaxy with mAB = 26 is in the field, it would be detected with a SNR of ~22
in the F150W filter (Calculation #25) and with a SNR of ~12 in the F300M filter (Calculation #26) when using
these exposure parameters.
template in APT. See the Step-by-Step APT Guide to complete the proposal preparation for this example
science program.
Latest updates
485
Parallel Imaging and NIRISS WFSS of
Galaxies in Lensing Clusters
Instructions are provided for filling out the JWST APT observing template for the Galaxies in Lensing Clusters
example science program, where NIRISS WFSS is a prime observing mode and NIRCam Imaging is executed as a
coordinated parallel observation.
On this page
Fill out proposal information

Enter proposed targets
Observations
Complete APT observation template for NIRISS WFSS
Complete APT template for parallel NIRCam imaging observation
Run Visit Planner
APT warning
See also: NIRISS Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, NIRISS WFSS Template APT Guide, APT Coordinated
Parallel Observations, JWST APT Video Tutorials
The Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) is used for submitting JWST proposals. There are multiple components to
an APT submission: generic proposal information, target information, and exposure specifications for the
proposed program. This guide discusses how to fill out the APT observing template for the "Using NIRISS WFSS
and NIRCam Imaging to Observe Galaxies Within Lensing Clusters" Example Science Program.
NIRISS → 33 NIRISS WFSS and NIRCam Parallel Imaging of Galaxies in Lensing Clusters in APT. The APT
file was created with version 27.2. There may be inconsistencies or additional warnings or errors with
other versions of APT.

486
See also: JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool Overview
Information page, we entered Title, Abstract, and Category of the proposal and kept Cycle number at its default
value.
Enter proposed targets

Target information is entered by selecting Targets in the tree editor, which provides options in the active GUI
window. In our case, we chose the New Fixed Target button, entered MACSJ0416.1–2403 in the field for Name in
the Proposal, and selected Clusters of Galaxies for Category. We entered the coordinates for this source: RA = 04
16 9.40, Dec = -24 04 04.00. Near the Description field, we clicked the "+/-" button which opens a list of
approved keywords and selected Rich Clusters.
Observations
See also:: APT Observations, APT Coordinated Parallel Observations
Selecting Observations in the tree editor, we clicked on the New Observation Folder. In the Label field, we

entered MACSJ01416.1–2403 NIRISS WFSS Prime NIRCam Imaging Parallel. Note that while this label is not
required, setting it is useful for visually organizing your observation folders when potentially many targets and/or
instrument setups are used.
We clicked Observation 1 in the tree editor to open the observation template to be filled out. In the Prime
Instrument pull-down menu, we selected NIRISS, and then selected the NIRISS Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy
template in the Template pull-down menu. We checked the Coordinated Parallel checkbox and selected NIRISS
WFSS-NIRCam Imaging in the pull-down menu. In the Target pull-down menu, we selected the target we defined
above, MACSJ01416.1–2403.
487
Complete APT observation template for NIRISS
WFSS
See also: NIRISS WFSS Template APT Guide, NIRISS WFSS Dithers, NIRISS WFSS Recommended Strategies,
JWST Coordinated Parallels Custom Dithers
As discussed in the parent article and the step-by-step ETC guide, a set of observations will be taken through 3
filters: F115W, F150W, and F200W. Both the GR150C and GR150R grisms are used, with an 9-step custom dither
pattern for coordinated parallel observations. In the NIRISS WFSS template, a direct image is automatically taken
before and after each set of dithered grism exposures. An exposure sequence through a NIRISS filter is thus:
Direct Image → 9 × GR150C → Direct Image
Direct Image → 9 × GR150R → Direct Image
In the Science Observation panel, we selected 9-POINT-MEDIUM-NIRCam from the Dithers pull-down menu. We

clicked the Add button to add an entry to the Sequences dialog. We selected GR150C in the Grism field and
F115W in the Filter field and keep the default Readout Pattern of NIS. We entered 23 in the Groups/Int field and 1
in the Integrations/Exp field ("Sequence" #1). As discussed in the step-by-step ETC guide, these exposure
specifications will provide the desired signal to noise ratio (SNR) for the WFSS observation.
Though an option exists in APT to select BOTH grisms when specifying parameters in the Sequences dialog, this
would result in a single sequence in which we would have to specify the NIRCam setup in parallel. As the
CANUCS program wishes to observe in two separate short-wavelength/long-wavelength pairs of NIRCam filters
for each NIRISS blocking filter, we must specify separate GR150C and GR150R exposure sequences.
Note that entering a grism exposure in the Science Observation panel automatically adds a blank entry in the
Direct Image Exposure Parameters panel, where the filter will automatically match that of the WFSS exposure. In
the All Exposures Display panel, the order of exposures is listed. The entries of these fields cannot be edited
directly. Instead, any updates made in the Science Observation and Direct Imaging Exposure Parameters panels
are propagated to All Exposures Display.
In the Direct Image Exposure Parameters panel, we entered 13 in the Groups/Int field and 1 in the Integrations
/Exp field ("Direct Images" #1). We do not change the Two Extra Dithers default of "NO" (introduced in APT
v2020.2), since that option is only recommended for the GRISM = BOTH selection in the Sequences dialog. As
shown in the step-by-step ETC guide, 4 coadded exposures from one NIRISS filter will produce the desired SNR
for the imaging observation. The All Exposures Display panel shows the first exposure sequence in "Exposures"
#1: Direct Image → 9 × GR150C → Direct Image.
To enter the exposure parameters for the GR150R Grism for the F115W filter, we highlighted "Sequences" 1 in
the Science Observation panel, clicked Duplicate, and updated the Grism pull-down of this new entry to GR150R.
The Direct Images panel was automatically updated to have the same exposure specifications of the direct
image of the duplicated exposure ("Direct Images" #2), requiring no additional edits. Exposure 2 in the All
Exposures Display panel shows the exposure sequence for this set of direct image and WFSS exposures.
488
We repeated this procedure for the F150W filter (Exposures #3 - 4) and F200W filter (Exposures #5 - 6), using
the same exposure specifications for these filters (23 Groups/Int and 1 Integrations/Exp).
Complete APT template for parallel NIRCam

imaging observation
See also: NIRCam Imaging, NIRCam Imaging APT Template, JWST Parallel Observations, NIRCam Detector
Readout Patterns
NIRCam Imaging exposures will be observed in parallel with the WFSS observations as part of the CANUCS
program. Since each WFSS observation consists of 3 exposure specifications (Direct Image → 9 × GR150 →
Direct Image), the associated NIRCam Imaging observation has to also be specified as three exposures. Since
the primary instrument determines the total integration time per exposure, the exposure time for the NIRCam
observations (specified by readout pattern, the number of groups and number of integrations) must not exceed
that of the NIRISS exposure. APT will issue an error if the exposure time exceeds that of the prime exposure. For
each WFSS observation, NIRCam imaging observations are taken in the short wavelength channel and long
wavelength channel.
To specify the exposure parameters for these parallel observations, we clicked on the NIRCam Imaging tab. In
the Module pull-down menu, we selected ALL and ensured that FULL is selected in the Subarray pull-down menu.
In this program, NIRCam images are obtained for 12 filters, 6 in the short wavelength channel (F090W, F115W,
F150W, F182M, F210M, F140M) and 6 in the long wavelength channel (F277W, F250M, F300M, F335M, F360M,
F410M). The NIRCam images taken in parallel with the NIRISS direct images are shorter exposures and use the
MEDIUM8 Readout Pattern. The NIRCam images taken in parallel with the NIRISS grism exposures are longer and
use the DEEP8 Readout Pattern and follow the same dither pattern as the NIRISS grism exposures.
We clicked Add to add an entry to the observing template. We then selected F090W for the Short Filter and
F227W for the Long Filter. Since this exposure will be observed simultaneously with the NIRISS direct image, we
selected MEDIUM8 for Readout Pattern, 5 Groups/Int, and 1 Integrations/Exp (Exposure #1).
We clicked Duplicate to add an entry that will be observed simultaneously as the set of WFSS dithered
exposures. Since this exposure is longer, we selected DEEP8 for Readout Pattern. Notice that the number of
dithers is set to 9 by default, matching the dithering of the prime observing mode. This field can not be updated.
We kept the number of groups set to 5 and number of integrations set to 1 (Exposure #2).
We clicked Duplicate to add an entry that corresponds to the direct image after the first set of dithered WFSS
exposures. We updated the Readout Pattern to MEDIUM8, so that this entry matches the first entry in the
NIRCam sequence (Exposure #3). The set of 3 NIRCam Imaging exposures that are to be observed in parallel to
the first set of the NIRISS WFSS exposure sequence in the F115W filter (Direct Image → 9 × GR150C → Direct
Image) are now fully specified in Exposures #1 - 3.
489
We repeated the procedures above to create a set of NIRCam Imaging observations for the remaining sets of
NIRSS WFSS observations, using the following NIRCam filter combination in the short/long filters: F115W/F250M
(Exposures #4–6), F150W/F300M (Exposures #7–9), F182M/F335M (Exposures #10–12), F210M/F360M
(Exposures #13–15), and F140M/F410M (Exposures #16–18).

We defined an APT Special Requirement to restrict the position angle of the observation to avoid observing
nearby bright stars which would adversely affect data quality.
Run Visit Planner

To determine the visibility window of our proposed observation and ensure that guide stars can be found, we ran
the Visit Planner Tool, by clicking the Visit Planner icon in the top tool bar. We then selected Update Display in
the resulting active GUI window. The Visit Planner returned with a confirmation that the observation is
schedulable (green check on the selected observation) and shows us the observing window(s) for this target over
the next ~19 months.

To minimize excessive overheads, we ran Smart Accounting from the Visit Planner page by selecting the Run
Smart Accounting option. The charged time for the observing program, including exposure time and overheads,
is now accurately calculated.
APT warning
In addition to the APT issued errors about proposal category and science justification PDF discussed above, APT
issues a warning that the data volume for the JWST visit exceeds more than half of the maximum allowance.
Since this program uses NIRISS WFSS and NIRCam Imaging in parallel, it is expected that the data volume for the
program will be large. However, the visit does not exceed the data volume limit, and the observation can be
scheduled as is.
490
Latest
updates 10 Mar 2020
Added sentence in paragraph about Direct Image Exposure Parameters panel to address
new Two Extra Dithers option implemented in APT 2020.2.
28 Sep 2018
Updated APT screenshots to be compatible with APT v. 26.1
Originally 05 Jan 2018

Published
491
NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy
Observations
This example science program provides a walk-through of developing a JWST observing program using the
NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) mode, including descriptions on how to apply the ETC and APT
tools.
On this page
Science motivation
Step 1 - Choose the instrument to use for the science case (NIRISS, NIRCam, or both), based on the
wavelength coverage
Step 2- Choose the blocking filters that cover the wavelengths of interest
Step 3 - Check the direct image and grism (line and continuum) sensitivities in the WFSS mode(s) of
interest
Step 4 - Choose one or both of the orthogonal grisms
Step 6 - Decide whether mosaicking is required to cover the target field for the science program
Step 8 - Use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to determine the exposure parameters for the direct
images and for the dispersed images from the grisms
References
Science motivation
See also: Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations, Step-by-Step APT Guide for
NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations
The science case we describe here is based on the Exploring the End of Cosmic Reionization survey (GTO
program #1243) designed to explore the evolution of the intergalactic medium and of the circumgalactic
environment at the tail end of reionization. It aims to:
Measure the correlation between HI Lyman alpha opacity and galaxy overdensity.
Identify the host systems of metal absorption systems at z > 5 in the quasar spectra to investigate the
chemical enrichment and the ionization state of the gas in and around young galaxies.
Characterize the nature of the quasar host galaxies and the surrounding large scale environment, and to
492
Characterize the nature of the quasar host galaxies and the surrounding large scale environment, and to
measure their central black hole masses.
For the purpose of this use case, the survey will perform a census of emission line galaxies at 5.3 < z < 7.0 with
[OIII]4959, 5007 Å + Hβ 4861 Å and at 3.7 < z < 5.1 with Hα 6564 Å. The survey is aimed to reach an imaging
depth of m ~ 26.5 ABmag at 3.5μm and to detect an emission line with a flux of 10-17 erg/cm2/s at the 10-sigma
level. The fields will be selected around known z > 6 quasars from the literature and are therefore pre-defined.
The steps below follow the JWST wide field slitless spectroscopy roadmap with input from the NIRCam WFSS
Recommended Strategies article.
Step 1 - Choose the instrument to use for the

science case (NIRISS, NIRCam, or both), based on
the wavelength coverage
See also: NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, NIRISS Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy
NIRCam wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) is chosen to obtain R ~ 1,600 slitless observations (~10Å/pixel)
between the wavelengths of 2.5 and 5 μm. The targeted emission lines of the high redshift sources will be in this
wavelength range. NIRISS WFSS observes at lower wavelengths (0.8–2.2 µm). Also note this project does not
have an a-priori list of targets within each field and is therefore better suited to WFSS observations rather than
NIRSpec multi-object spectroscopy.
NIRCam WFSS observations will yield the following data:
Long wavelength grism data obtained with one or more filters between 2.5–5.0 µm
Short wavelength imaging data obtained simultaneously on the same field with one or more filters
between 0.6–2.4 µm
Long wavelength direct image (one pointing) obtained after the grism observations for reference and
calibration
Long wavelength out of field imaging (2 pointings) obtained on a slightly wider field covering all the
objects that contribute spectra to the grism data
We discuss the choices made for obtaining these data for this observing program below.
493
Step 2- Choose the blocking filters that cover the
wavelengths of interest
See also: NIRCam Filters, NIRCam WFSS Field of View
This program uses the wide filter F356W to cover a sufficiently broad wavelength range (roughly 3.1–4.1 µm) to
achieve the science goals. We accept that a wide filter yields a smaller full spectrum field of view. Among the
wide filters, F356W yields the largest full spectrum field of view, as it is closest to 4 µm. To support these WFSS
data, direct imaging and out of field imaging is also obtained in F356W.
While the WFSS data are being obtained in NIRCam's long wavelength channel, imaging is obtained
simultaneously in NIRCam's short wavelength channel. This program uses the F115W and F200W filters. The
combination of F115W, F200W, and F356W imaging is intended to constrain the stellar masses and star
formation rates of these 3 < z < 7 galaxies, similar to the BzK diagnostic for z ~ 2 galaxies.
Step 3 - Check the direct image and grism (line and

continuum) sensitivities in the WFSS mode(s) of
interest
See also: NIRCam Sensitivity
Based on the plots and tables for NIRCam WFSS sensitivity, we find an emission line at 3.5µm with flux <4 × 10
-18
erg/cm2/s can be detected at 10-sigma in 10,000 s. The emission lines targeted here are brighter than
that: 10-17 erg/cm2/s. A rough approximation is that a flux limit scales with 1/sqrt(exposure time). Thus, we
might expect this 2.5 times brighter target to yield a 10-sigma detection in roughly 10,000 s / sqrt(2.5) ~ 6,300 s
~ 1.75 hours. Thus, we are confident we can design a observing program to yield 10-sigma detections with
reasonable exposure times after consulting the ETC (see below).
Step 4 - Choose one or both of the orthogonal

grisms
See also: NIRCam Grisms, NIRCam WFSS Field of View
The use of both grisms (GRISMR and GRISMC) can be useful to disperse light in different directions and
disentangle spectra of overlapping sources. However, the 2 grisms yield different full spectrum fields of view,
and an even smaller area of overlap between the two (the "optimal field field of view"). For this program, the
choice is made to use one grism only. GRISMR is preferred over GRISMC, as the GRISMC field of view may be
494
choice is made to use one grism only. GRISMR is preferred over GRISMC, as the GRISMC field of view may be
affected by the coronagraph masks and substrate. Furthermore, GRISMR disperses light in different directions
(flipped 180°) in each module, which may be made to overlap by using a mosaic (see Step 6 below).

This program uses 3 INTRAMODULEX primary dithers and 4 standard subpixel dithers, for a total of 12 dithered
exposures. The primary dithers are required to fill the detector gaps in the short wavelength images.
INTRAMODULEX is slightly more compact than INTRAMODULE, preserving area observed at all dither positions. T
he subpixel dithers optimally improve the spatial sampling resulting in the combined images, while
also further mitigating the effects of bad pixels.
Step 6 - Decide whether mosaicking is required to

cover the target field for the science program
See also: NIRCam Mosaics, NIRCam WFSS Field of View
This program uses a 2 × 2 mosaic to cover a wider area (roughly 5' × 3') around a central target quasar. The
mosaic pattern includes some overlap allowing every tile to include the z > 6 quasar so that it is observed at full
depth.
Importantly, the mosaic also produces areas of overlap with complete spectra dispersed in opposite directions.
This will enable spectra of neighboring sources to be disentangled. For the remaining areas with only a single
dispersion direction, the survey will rely on detections of multiple emission lines (Hβ + [OIII]4959,5007) to
unambiguously identify individual galaxies.
495
Figure 1. Mosaic to be observed
Planned 2 × 2 mosaic GRISMR observations. Modules A and B are outlined in green and purple, respectively. Filled green and purple
regions represent the full spectrum fields of view. Rainbow colored arrows indicate the directions of dispersion, which are flipped between
the two modules. The black sun symbol at the center represents the primary science target z > 6 quasar.

See also: NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns, NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity
Above, we roughly estimated 6,300 s required for the long wavelength grism observations. We split this
exposure time into 2 observations each ~3,000 s. The first is obtained simultaneously with F115W imaging, and
the second is obtained simultaneously with F200W imaging. This observing time is further divided among 12
dither positions, yielding roughly ~250 s per exposure. Consulting NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity, we find the
recommended readout pattern is SHALLOW4. We test our rough assumptions using the ETC (below). Note the
exposure specifications (readout pattern and number of groups) will be the same for both the WFSS and imaging
data obtained simultaneously.
Step 8 - Use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to

determine the exposure parameters for the direct
images and for the dispersed images from the
grisms
To determine the exposure parameters for this observation using the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC), please see
the article Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations.

496
For details filling out the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) for this example science program, please see the
article Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations.
References
The Exploring the End of Cosmic Reionization survey
http://www.stsci.edu/jwst/observing-programs/program-information?id=1243
Latest updates
26 Sep 2019
497
WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations
A walk-through of the JWST ETC for the NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations Example Science Program is
provided, demonstrating how to select exposure parameters for this observing program.
On this page
Define Sources and Scenes

ETC Calculations overview
Run ETC calculation for short wavelength imaging
ETC Results Summary
References
See also: NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, JWST ETC Exposure Time Calculator Overview, Proposal
Planning Video Tutorials
for the requested observing mode.
The ETC workbook associated with this example science program is called #37: NIRCam WFSS Deep
Galaxy Observations and can be selected from the Example Science Program Workbooks dropdown tab
on the ETC Workbooks page. The nomenclature and reported SNR values in this article are based on ETC
v. 1.5. There may be subtle differences if using a different version of ETC.
After determining the exposure specifications required to meet the science goals (e.g., numbers of groups and
integrations), these will be input into the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) observation template, which is used
to specify an observing program and submit proposals; for this example program, see the Step-by-Step APT
Guide for NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations.
498
See also: JWST ETC Scenes and Sources Page Overview, JWST ETC Defining a New Source
We define 2 scenes, each containing one source:
1. Emission line galaxy (ELG) used for the wide field slitless spectroscopy (WFSS) grism calculation
2. Galaxy (without emission lines) for the imaging calculations. This extended source will have a width of σ =
0.15", the expected size of galaxies at z ~ 3 (e.g., Ferguson et al. 2004).
Source Name Continuum Normalization Line Shape
1 ELG Flat in fnu mAB = 26.5 in F356W center = 3.6 µm point source
width = 200 km/s
strength = 1e-17 erg/cm²/s
2 Galaxy Flat in fnu mAB = 26.5 in F356W extended source

2D Gaussian
σx = 0.15"; σy = 0.15"
ETC Calculations overview

See also: JWST ETC Calculations Page Overview, JWST ETC Creating a New Calculation, JWST ETC
Backgrounds, JWST ETC Outputs Overview

Below is a summary of the 4 calculations included in the accompanying ETC workbook. The following sections
provide the rationale for each calculation.
For all calculations, we use the following settings for Backgrounds:
Ra Dec: 01:00:13.02 28:02:25 (the position of one target in the GTO program)
Background configuration: Low (corresponding to the 10th percentile of the background level)
499
Calculation Observation Target
1 GRISMR + F356W ELG
2 F356W Galaxy
3 F115W Galaxy
4 F200W Galaxy

See also:
JWST ETC Aperture Spectral Extraction Strategy, NIRCam WFSS Recommended Strategies,
NIRCam WFSS Sensitivity, NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy, JWST ETC Batch Expansion
Recall that the total exposure time (for each mosaic tile) will consist of 24 exposures: 12 dither positions for each
of 2 grism observations at long wavelengths, one paired with short wavelength F115W imaging, and the other
with F200W. Our initial estimates suggest that roughly 2 hours (~7,200 s) of exposure time will be required, or
~300 s for each of the 24 exposures. Based on the NIRCam imaging sensitivity recommended readout patterns
for maximal depth, we find this corresponds roughly to 6 groups of the SHALLOW4 Readout pattern in each
exposure. Thus we use that as a baseline for our calculations:
Instrument setup:
Grism = GRISMR
Filter = F356W
Detector Setup:
Groups per integration = 6
Readout pattern = SHALLOW4
Exposure per specification = 24 (to mimic the 12 dither positions × 2 sets of grism observations)
Strategy: Wavelength of interest: 3.6 µm
We require a total exposure time that yields SNR ~ 10. We examine the SNR as a function of exposure time by
performing calculations for the range of 3–10 groups of the SHALLOW4 Readout pattern. This is done using the
Expand tab at the top of the screen.
Expand Groups: Start Value = 3, Step Size = 1, Iterations = 8
The resulting SNR for each exposure time is reported in the Calculations tab. One can also generate a plot of the
SNR vs. exposure time by selecting all the entries and viewing the SNR tab in the Plots pane. The results are
shown in Figure 1 below.
500
We find ~8,000 s of exposure time is required to yield a 10-sigma detection of the ELG defined above. In
practice, the GTO program opts for 6 groups of SHALLOW4 in each of the 24 exposures, yielding a total exposure
time of 7,472.79 s and SNR ~ 9.4.
The final SNR is a slight compromise relative to the initial goal of 10-sigma. After designing the observations in
APT, users realize the overhead times charged to their proposed observations. At that point, you will choose
either to propose for the full time required for your science goals or compromise the requirements slightly to
reduce the total proposal request.
(Note: in the accompanying ETC workbook, rather than providing the full range of calculations, we provide a
single calculation with the resulting choice of 6 groups of SHALLOW4.)
The ETC reports signal-to-noise estimates for the module A grism. The throughput for module B is 25%
lower.
501
Figure 1. SNR vs. exposure time for WFSS observations of the ELG
ETC v1.5 results of SNR vs. exposure time for NIRCam WFSS GRISMR + F356W observations of the ELG described above. Each point
represents 24 exposures of 3–10 groups of the SHALLOW4 readout pattern. We find a total exposure time of ~8,000 s yields SNR ~ 10.

See also: JWST ETC Imaging Aperture Photometry Strategy, NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies,
NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity, NIRCam Imaging
We would like to extract spectra in galaxies as faint as AB mag 26.5. Thus we need to ensure they are detected
in the direct imaging to be obtained in F356W. We use a similar setup as above and perform the calculation on
the galaxy without any emission line (Calculation #2).
502
Since this is an extended source, we must increase the size of the photometric apertures to accommodate it. For
faint Gaussian sources of width σ, optimal signal to noise is obtained with an aperture of radius ~1.6σ. The width
of our source is σ = 0.15", enlarged slightly to 0.158" after convolution with the NIRCam PSF for F356W (σ ~
0.05"). Thus we will use an aperture radius of 0.25". For the background estimation, we will use large annuli,
which is optimistic (assuming this area is free of other sources), but this choice does not affect the results
substantially.
Instrument setup: Filter = F356W
Detector Setup:
Readout pattern = SHALLOW4 (1 integration, 1 exposure)
Strategy:
Aperture radius = 0.25 (arcsec)
Sky annulus Inner radius = 1.2 (arcsec)
Sky annulus Outer radius = 1.95 (arcsec)
The resulting exposure time is 526.10 s, and SNR ~ 8 for the AB mag 26.5 galaxy. That will be sufficient for the
direct imaging.
Extended sources require larger photometric apertures than point sources. The ETC default apertures
will significantly underestimate signal-to-noise if the source size is larger than the aperture size. We also
recommend non-default sizes for point sources (see NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity).
Run ETC calculation for short wavelength imaging

Simultaneous with the WFSS observations, we plan to obtain imaging using the short wavelength filters F115W
and F200W, splitting the total exposure time equally between the two (i.e., 12 exposures totaling 3,736.4 s). The
specifications for each exposure must be the same as those used for the WFSS observations: 6 groups of
SHALLOW4. Thus we define two more ETC calculations on the galaxy as follows:
Instrument setup:
Filter = F115W (Calculation #3)
Filter = F200W (Calculation #4)
Detector Setup:
Readout pattern = SHALLOW4
Exposures per specification = 12
Strategy:
503
Sky annulus Inner radius = 1.2 (arcsec)
Sky annulus Outer radius = 1.95 (arcsec)
The ETC confirms that a small AB mag 26.5 galaxy (without the strong emission line) should be detected with
SNR ~ 9 and 14 in the F115W and F200W imaging, respectively.
ETC Results Summary

Below we summarize the ETC inputs and results for the planned observations.
Calculation Observation Target Readout Groups Exposures Exposure Aperture Sky

Pattern Time radius / annulus
half- inner
height radius
1 GRISMR + ELG SHALLOW4 6 24 7472.79 0.15" 0.3"

F356W
2 F356W Galaxy SHALLOW4 10 1 526.10 0.25" 1.2"
science program.
References
Ferguson, H. C. et al. 2004, ApJL, 600, L107
The Size Evolution of High-Redshift Galaxies
504
Latest updates
26 Sep 2019
505
WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations
Instructions are providing for filling out the JWST APT observing template for the NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy
Observations example science program, consisting of NIRCam WFSS observations. The steps below roughly
follow those given in NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy APT Template.
On this page
APT file
Fill out Proposal Information
Enter proposed target
Observations
Complete APT observation template for NIRCam WFSS observations
Dither patterns
Science (grism) exposures
Direct image exposures
Exposure sequence display
Define mosaic strategy
Run Visit Planner
View Observations in Aladin
APT file
See also: NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy APT Template, NIRCam WFSS Recommended Strategies,
JWST APT Help, JWST APT Training Examples and Video Tutorials
A filled out APT file can be accessed via the APT menu options File → JWST Example Science Proposals →
NIRCam → 37 NIRCam WFSS Deep Galaxy Observations. The APT file was created with version 27.3.
There may be inconsistencies or additional warnings or errors with other versions of APT.

See also: JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool overview
506
Information page, we entered Title, Abstract, and Category of proposal and kept Cycle number at its default
value.
Enter proposed target

This program is targeting SDSS J0100+2802, a z > 6 quasar at RA = 01 00 13.02, Dec = 28 02 25. In Targets,
create a new Fixed Target with those coordinates and provide a name J0100+2802 (abbreviated as spaces are
not allowed in APT target names).
Observations
In Observations, create a new Observation Folder. Observation 1 will be created automatically. Select NIRCam
Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy as the Template and select the Target defined above.
Instrument: NIRCAM
Template: NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy
Target: J0100+2802
Complete APT observation template for NIRCam

WFSS observations
See also: NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy APT Template, NIRCam WFSS Recommended Strategies
507
Proceed to the NIRCam Wide Field Slitless Spectroscopy tab (leftmost tab on the lower half of the APT screen).
Since a wide observing area is desired (saturation is not a concern for these faint targets), choose Module = ALL
and Subarray = FULL to cover a larger field of view. For the Grism (long wavelength), select GRISMR as
discussed in the introduction.
Module: ALL
Subarray: FULL
Grism (Long Wavelength): GRISMR
Dither patterns
See also: NIRCam Primary Dithers, NIRCam Subpixel Dithers
As discussed in the intro article, this program uses 3 INTRAMODULEX primary dithers and 4 standard subpixel
dithers, for a total of 12 dithered exposures.
Dither Parameters:
Primary Dither Type: INTRAMODULEX

Primary Dithers: 3
Subpixel Positions: 4-Point
Science (grism) exposures

Enter the WFSS exposure parameters determined in our ETC Calculations (Calculation #1). Again note the full
WFSS F356W exposure time is divided in 2: the first half with simultaneous F115W imaging and the second with
F200W imaging.
Direct Image Long Filter Short Filter Readout Pattern Groups Integrations ETC Wkbk.Calc ID
F356W F115W SHALLOW4 6 1 26201.1
✓ F356W F200W SHALLOW4 6 1 26201.1
The first column indicates that a single direct image will be obtained after the final WFSS exposure, as required.
This program forgoes the option of obtaining an additional direct image after the first set of exposures (F356W
GRISMR and F115W imaging).
Direct image exposures

Next, enter the direct image exposure parameters determined in our ETC Calculation #2.
508
Long Filter Short Filter Readout Pattern Groups Integrations ETC Wkbk.Calc ID
F356W F200W SHALLOW4 10 1 26201.2
Exposure sequence display

Given the inputs above, the display below will automatically populate showing the sequence of exposures. Note
that after the direct image, 2 out-of-field images are obtained with the same exposure specifications.
Sequence Exposure Long Short Readout Groups Dithers Total

Type Wavelength Wavelength Pattern Exposure
Time
1 Grism & GRISMR + F115W SHALLOW4 6 12 3736 s

Imaging F356W imaging
2 Grism & GRISMR + F200W imaging SHALLOW4 6 12 3736 s

Imaging F356W
2 Direct Image F356W F200W imaging SHALLOW4 10 1 526 s

imaging
2 Out of Field F356W F200W imaging SHALLOW4 10 2 1052 s

imaging
Define mosaic strategy

The above observation sequence will be repeated 4 times in a 2 × 2 mosaic, as described in the introduction.
The mosaic tiles will be spread to cover more area and capture more high redshift galaxies surrounding the
primary target quasar. But the mosaic tiles will also overlap such that every observation will include the quasar.
The desired mosaic coverage is implemented as follows in APT and shown below in Figure 1.
Under the Mosaic Properties tab:
Rows: 2
Columns: 2
Row Overlap %: 45
Column Overlap %: 72
Row shift: 0
Column shift: -1.2° (rotation)
The overlap and shift values can be determined by trial and error after inspecting the results in APT Aladin. The
final entry (column shift) makes the final mosaic a bit more symmetric (rectangular) as there are slight
asymmetries in the NIRCam Field of View.
509
Figure 1. Mosaic to be observed (Long Wavelength channel)
APT screenshot of the final 2 × 2 mosaic, with each tile consisting of 12 dither positions, 1 direct image, and 2 out-of-field images. Darker
regions correspond to greater exposure time in the long wavelength channel. The short wavelength observations are not shown, for clarity.

See also: APT Special Requirements, JWST Position Angles, Ranges, and Offsets
To recenter the target within the mosaicked observations, a small offset of (4", -3.5") in (X, Y) is added via the
Special Requirements tab (again determined by trial and error inspecting the output in APT Aladin).
Finally, the Aperture PA Range was restricted to include other targets of interest. Two options are provided: 60–
65 degrees and 230–240 degrees.
Run Visit Planner

To determine the visibility window of our proposed observation and ensure that guide stars can be found, we run
the Visit Planner Tool, by clicking the Visit Planner icon in the top toolbar, selecting the observation, and clicking
Update Display. The Visit Planner confirms observable windows totaling over 2 months per year.
Note after updating the display, there is no need to run Smart Accounting (the option is grayed out).
510
View Observations in Aladin
See also: APT Aladin Viewer
In the top toolbar, click View in Aladin to see the observations oriented on the sky in a new window. Then in that
window, click DSS in the top toolbar to see the observations overlaid on images from the Digital Sky Survey.
Note the orientation (rotation) is 62.5 degrees, the middle of the first range of position angles input as an option.
Latest updates 16 Oct 2019
511
NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of
HR8799 b
This example science program presents an application of the JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap, showing
how to create a cross-instrument observing program, using NIRCam and MIRI coronagraphy to observe the
outermost exoplanet previously imaged around the young star HR 8799.
See also: JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap, JWST High-Contrast Imaging, NIRCam Coronagraphic

Imaging, MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging
This example science program provides a walk-through of a JWST observing program using NIRCam and MIRI
coronagraphic imaging, focusing on the overarching science goals from the GTO Program #1194,
Characterization of the HR 8799 planetary system and planet search (PI: Charles Beichman) for context—albeit,
focusing solely on planet b, the simplest one for JWST. This article discusses how to assess the feasibility and
ultimately design a high-contrast imaging (HCI) observing program with JWST, and also links to further articles
discussing how to use the JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to determine exposure times required to meet
the science goals and how to set up the program in the JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool (APT) GUI.
Science goals
The 4 directly-imaged planets around the young A-type star HR 8799 (HR 8799 bcde; Marois et al. 2008a, 2010a)
provide a crucial reference point for understanding the physical properties and formation of young gas giants
several times the mass of Jupiter. This example science program presents the case of HR 8799 b, the outermost
planet of the HR 8799 planetary system, to demonstrate what JWST coronagraphy can bring to the knowledge of
planetary atmospheres. The program will use NIRCam and MIRI multi-filter photometry in order to characterize
the atmosphere of this benchmark exoplanet (particularly with filters/ bands which are not available from the
ground). From this information it will be possible to infer such basic properties as total luminosity, effective
temperature, and thus effective radius.
512
Figure 1. The power of direct imaging: multi-epoch animation of the orbital motion of HR8799 bcde planets from 2010 to 2015
Direct, multi-epoch high-contrast imaging of the 4-planet system around HR 8799. This footage consists of 7 images of HR 8799 taken
with the Keck Telescope over 7 years between 2009 and 2016. The video was made by Jason Wang, data was reduced by Christian Marois,
and the orbits were fit by Quinn Konopacky. Bruce Macintosh, Travis Barman, and Ben Zuckerman assisted in the observations.
Walkthrough of the JWST HCI roadmap

The JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap guides readers through the process of designing a high-contrast
imaging (HCI) observing program with JWST. Here we demonstrate this process, walking the user through the
decisions made at each stage for this example science program.
Stage 1: Become familiar with the HCI capabilities

and instrument-specific modes of JWST
See also: JWST High-Contrast Imaging, Getting Started with JWST Proposing
513
The first stage in the process of planning any HCI program with JWST is to to familiarize oneself with the JWST
HCI capabilities and terminology. Users should familiarize themselves with the various high-contrast imaging
articles, in particular the observing modes and optics that enable HCI with JWST, as well as the primary
performance metrics, operations, and recommended strategies that are particular to HCI. Users should also
consult the Getting Started with JWST Proposing, which provides more general instructions for planning JWST
observations.
Stage 2: Evaluate the required observations with

respect to the performance limits and capabilities
of the HCI observing modes
See also: JWST High-Contrast Imaging, MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging, NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging
(1) What is the wavelength range of interest and

how does this influence (or limit) the choice of
instrument(s), mask(s) and filter(s)?
See also: NIRCam Filters for Coronagraphy, MIRI Coronagraphic imaging filters , NIRCam Coronagraphic
Occulting Masks and Lyot Stops, MIRI Coronagraphs

NIRCam provides coronagraphic imaging from 1 to 5 µm, a key spectral region for exoplanet study. This program
uses 6 of NIRCam's medium bandpass filters, F250M, F300M, F335M, F410M, F430M and F460M, to characterize
the atmosphere of HR 8799b, measuring both the continuum and searching for signatures of CH4 (absorption
gradient between ~3.5 and ~4.5 µm), CO (absorption features between ~4.5 and ~5.5 µm) and CO2 (strong
absorption feature centered at ~3.7µm and gradient between ~4.5 and 5 µm).
MIRI will overcome the limited sensitivity of the largest ground-based observatories, extending planetary
characterization to the mid-infrared thermal regime, where objects are too faint to be detected from the
ground. For MIRI, the coronagraphic imaging filters are associated directly with each coronagraph and are not
interchangeable—selecting the filter selects the coronagraph.This program performs MIRI coronagraphic
observations in the F1065C, F1140C and F1550C 4QPM coronagraphic filters to enable: (1) the detection of the
NH3 line at 10.65 μm; (2) an off-line continuum measurement at 11.4 μm to calibrate the depth of the NH3 line;
and (3) a more distant continuum point at 15.5 μm to determine the mid-IR continuum temperature, which
traces the atmospheric temperature and cloud structure.
514
(2) Can choice of instrument(s) and mask-filter
combination(s) achieve the required working
angles?
See also: HCI Inner Working Angle
HR8799 b is at a separation of approximately 1.724" from HR 8799. For MIRI, the 4QPMs are able to reach an
inner working angle (IWA) of ∼ λ/D—corresponding to 0.34", 0.46" and 0.49" for the 10.65, 11.4 and 15.5 µm
coronagraphs, respectively. For NIRCam, the 6 medium band filters are used to characterize HR 8799 b in
conjunction with the long wavelength bar occulter (MASKLWB). The panchromatic characterization of planet b
could be carried out with a round mask but for training purposes, this article focuses on using the bar. MASKLWB
allows to reach an IWA in the range of 0.3"-0.89" which is suitable for planet b.
(3) Are the observations feasible given the contrast

limits of the instrument(s)?
See also: HCI Contrast Considerations, HCI MIRI Limiting Contrast, HCI NIRCam Limiting Contrast
The anticipated a planet-to-star flux ratios are ~10-4 and ~10-5 at MIRI and NIRCam wavelengths, respectively.
In order to achieve the best possible contrast, this program uses the small grid dither technique to build an
optimal PSF reference for subtraction. This program will follow the recommended coronagraphic practice of
observing the science target in 2 rolls and observing a nearby PSF reference star in an uninterruptible sequence.
(4) How important is the azimuthal coverage

around the science target?
See also: MIRI Coronagraphs, NIRCam Coronagraphic Occulting Masks and Lyot Stops
Careful attention is paid to the placement of the planet on each coronagraphic mask (particularly in relation to
any instrumental obscurations, such as the boundaries in the MIRI 4QPM). To make these assessments the
Coronagraph Visibility Tool (CVT) is used.
(5) Is it possible that the scientific goals can be

achieved with non-coronagraphic PSF subtraction?
See also: JWST Imaging
515
The angular sensitivity and contrast ratios required by this program can not be achieved through regular
imaging; the source is observed with the coronagraphs for the combination of wavelength coverage and
sensitivity.
Stage 3: Select a PSF calibration strategy

See also: HCI Coronagraphic Sequences, HCI PSF Reference Stars, JWST Wavefront Sensing and Control
(1) What are the degrading factors that may limit

the PSF calibration?
wavefront drifts of the observatory
PSF star color differences
self-subtraction biases
imperfect target acquisitions
line-of-sight jitter and dynamic wavefront error.
All the above are valid points which cannot currently be modeled by the ETC. For the inner-most planets of this
HR 8799 system (c, d, e) it would be necessary to address these points, possibly running most sophisticated
simulation. For planet b at 1.7", none of those factors are prohibitive and a high SNR can be reached rather
easily (within minutes) with each of the coronagraphic filters.
(2) Which observing technique(s) will be included in

the PSF subtraction strategy?
The Referenced Differential Imaging (RDI) technique? — Required
The Angular Differential Imaging (ADI) technique? — Recommended
The Small Grid Dithering (SGD) technique? — Optional
In order to draw out the best contrast and achieve the smallest inner working angles of each coronagraph, a
nearby and color- and flux-matched PSF reference source is observed using contemporaneous and identically
executed observation sequences. This program employs the standard coronagraphic sequence for every
instrument, mask and filter combination: an initial observation orientated at a desired nominal aperture position
angle (i.e., one that maximizes the spatial coverage of the disk); followed by a second observation with an
aperture position angle ~10° relative to the first observation; followed by an observation of the PSF reference
star, to assist with suppression of the residuals in the coronagraphic image. All of the observations are linked in a
non-interruptible sequence to ensure the PSF calibrator is observed close in time to the science target.
Furthermore, to achieve the best possible contrast, the small grid dither technique is employed to build an
optimal PSF reference for subtraction from each integration in the observations.
Stage 4: Assess target visibilities and allowed

516
position angles
See also: JWST Position Angles, Ranges, and Offsets, JWST Observatory Coordinate System and Field of
Regard, JWST Field of View, JWST Instrument Ideal Coordinate Systems, JWST Target Visibility Tools, JWST
Coronagraphic Visibility Tool Help
(1) Familiarity with JWST position angles,

coordinate systems, and pointing constraints.
See also: JWST Position Angles, Ranges, and Offsets, JWST Instrument Ideal Coordinate Systems,JWST
Observatory Coordinate System and Field of Regard
(2) What viewing constraints are placed on the

target?
See also: JWST Target Viewing Constraints
Coronagraphic observations have additional constraints that go beyond target visibility, such as the placement
and orientation of known sources on the coronagraphic masks, or offsets between multi-roll observations
. Indeed, some preplanning may save significant time and possibly wasted effort downstream, in the event that
certain desired angles or offsets are not available due to observatory level constraints.
Given the use of non-centro-symmetric occulters (i.e., the NIRCam bar occulter and MIRI 4QPMs), it is important
to identify dates and aperture position angle (PA) constraints that maximize the distance of planet b with respect
to the mask.
(3) What are the target visibilities and allowed

position angles versus time?
See also: JWST Coronagraphic Visibility Tool Help
To determine the target visibilities and available position angles versus time, the JWST Coronagraphic Visibility
Tool (CVT)—a GUI-based tool developed specifically for pre-planning and strategizing coronagraphic observations
with NIRCam and MIRI—is used. In addition to overall target visibility information, the CVT provides information
on location of assumed companions relative to instrumental structures, such as occulting bars in NIRCam or
boundaries in the MIRI 4QPM coronagraphs, as a function of time and shows how the instantaneous roll flexibility
changes (from approximately ±3.5° to ±7° from nominal) over the visibility period.
517
After installing and opening the CVT, the CVT is used to determine the observability of HR 8799. In the control
panel, the SIMBAD Target Resolver generates HR 8799's RA, Dec and Ecliptic coordinates, and then the Update
Plot button calculates and displays the target’s visibility. The plot generated on the left shows the target's
visibility windows, where the red highlights on the solar elongation line indicate the valid target's visibility
windows and the blue tracks show the allowed position angles for the selected instrument and mask over those
windows (see Figure 2 and 3).
518
Figure 2. NIRCam Observability of HR8799 b and c with the MASKLWB coronagraph using the CVT
NIRCam: HR8799 b and c, the outermost two planets of this system are difficult to observe simultaneously with the MASKLWB
coronagraph as the Coronagraph Visibility Tool (CVT) as displayed by these simulations. Top: the initial display after selecting the mask
and uploading the plots. Bottom: zooming in on the left plot, one can visualize the given roll stroke for a given date and corresponding
aperture PA (APA) and position on the right plot. Planet b can be observed advantageously for any dates corresponding to the red track.
Planet c on the other hand (blue track) is always very close to the MASKLWB axis (horizontal).
519
Figure 3. MIRI Observability of HR8799 b and c with the 4QPM coronagraphs using the CVT
MIRI: HR8799 b and c, the outermost two planets of this system are difficult to observe simultaneously with the 4QPM coronagraphs as
the Coronagraph Visibility Tool (CVT) as displayed by these simulations.
Top: the initial display after selecting the mask and uploading the plots.
Bottom: zooming in on the left plot, one can visualize the given roll stroke for a given date and corresponding aperture PA (APA) and
position on the right plot. Planet b is best observed when it is as distant as possible from the coronagraph axes (tilted by 5º with respect to
the detector axes). In this case, the white dot on the red track (TA quadrant 1) corresponds to an APA of ~90º and a ~30º angular distance
from the vertical most axis of the 4QPM mask. We choose this as the minimum APA. It is also favorable for planet c which is then just
outside of the IWA.
(4) Do the observations require any restrictions on

520
(4) Do the observations require any restrictions on
the orientation of the instrument field of view (FOV)
/ detector being referenced?
In order to determine the ideal placement and orientation of planet b, the CVT is used to judge the planet's
positions on the coronagraphic fields of view as a function of time. The CVT currently allows the placement of up
to 3 companions relative to the primary target, so we define companion b with PA of 65° and Sep of 1.7" as well
as companion c with PA of 330° and Sep of 1" because, at 1" separation, it is likely to be imaged "for free" with
our strategy. For each of our planned observations, we select the corresponding instrument and mask (see
Figure 2).
In order to maximize the distance of planet b from the coronagraphic masks, we will determine an orientation
that places the companion as close as possible to perpendicular to the MASKLWB occulting bar. It turns out that
b and c are difficult to image simultaneously and therefore our constraints focus on b solely for NIRCam taking
both equally suitable APA range: 59º–75º and 211º–250º.
For MIRI, we will orient the disk at an angle of ~45° from the 4QPM axes, which corresponds to an APA of ~89º to
~104º. This placement guarantees that b (in quadrant 1) is at least 30º away from the 4QPM "vertical" axis
(which has a 5º offset). By chance, this is a favorable position for planet c as well.
(5) How does the roll flexibility changes over the

visibility period?
See also: JWST Target Viewing Constraints, JWST Position Angles, Ranges, and Offsets
The maximum available roll stroke (or ApertureE PA Range: how much the observatory is allowed to rotate and
vary the aperture PA at a given time as JWST must remain oriented with respect to the Sun) is always between
~7º and ~14º. For this simplified program, focusing only on planet b, we do not want to have too strict
scheduling constraints and therefore we allow 7º as the minimum roll angle. At 1.7" it is enough to avoid self-
subtraction of the planet as it represents a linear shift of 0.21" which is 3.4 pixels for NIRCam and ~2 FWHM at
3.35µm. For MIRI, it corresponds to 2 pixels.
(6) Do the goals call for a larger roll offset on the

science target than can be obtained
instantaneously in a single visibility period?
See also: HCI Coronagraphic Sequences: Larger roll offset case
521
We do not find we require the use of a larger roll offset.
Stage 5: Use the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to

determine observing parameters
See also: JWST Exposure Time Calculator Overview, Understanding Exposure Times
Once target visibility is confirmed and a PSF calibration strategy adopted, we use the JWST Exposure Time
Calculator (ETC) to determine the optimal exposure specifications for our program. Step-by-step ETC calculation
instructions can be found in the Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b article.
Stage 6: Select a suitable PSF calibrator

See also: HCI PSF Reference Stars, NIRCam Coronagraphic PSF Estimation
(1) What is the choice of PSF calibrator?

See also: Selecting PSF reference stars with Simbad, Selecting PSF reference stars with SearchCal
The PSF calibration strategy of this program requires appropriate PSF reference stars.
(a) For NIRCam, HD218261 is identified as a potential PSF reference star, as it is only 1.24º away from HR
8799 and has roughly the same spectral type (F star) and K-band magnitude.
(b) For MIRI, ups Peg (HD 220657) is identified, as it has been successfully used before for HR 8799. It is 4.7
º away and brighter.
In GTO Prog. #1194, these 2 reference stars for NIRCam and MIRI are swapped with respect our
program, which was elaborated for training purposes.
To identify the PSF reference targets, the following criteria is considered:
(i) Well-known: Is the target a known good PSF reference star?
Selecting a reference PSF source that has been previously observed coronagraphically and found to be
single, is recommended. "Good references" are usually stars that are not astrophysically contaminated
(i.e., without additional astrophysical signal from a debris disk or companion).
(ii) Schedulability: Do the visibility windows of the science target and PSF calibrator overlap at the time
of the desired observation?
522
In order to observe the science target and PSF reference star in a contiguous, non-interruptible
sequence, both objects need to be observable at the same time. With the restrictions on the
observability HR 8799 known (from our previous work in the CVT), we now use the CVT to verify that
both HD 218261 and HD 220657 are visible at the same time HR 8799, finding that there are 2
periods over which the targets' visibility windows overlap. Since they are less than 5º apart, it is the
case.
(iii) Proximity: Is the PSF calibrator in relatively close proximity to the science target?
The JWST PSF is expected to be time variable, which has important consequences on the choice of PSF
reference targets. In order to minimize the opportunity for changes in the JWST wavefront between
science and PSF reference star observations, a reference star that is in close temporal and physical
proximity to the science target should be chosen. Choosing a nearby reference star also minimizes the
telescope overheads (by reducing slew time). We find that HD 218261 is an ideal match at a distance
of only 1.24°, enabling a slew time of approximately ~600 s between the 2 sources (with HR 8799).
With HD 220657 at 4.7º, the slew time is of the order of ~850 s, still very reasonable.
(iv) Avoidance of Binary: Is the PSF calibrator a single and unresolved source?
In order to ensure effective PSF subtraction, it is important to chose a star that is single and not
astrophysically contaminated (i.e., without additional astrophysical signal from a debris disk or
companion). HD 218261 and HD 220657 are known non-binary sources.
(v) Spectral Type: Does the PSF calibrator share the same spectral properties as the science target?
Spectral mismatch between a science target and its corresponding PSF reference star may lead to the
generation of extra noise during the process of photometrically rescaling the reference, allowing for
possible under- and over-subtraction of the PSF. The spectral type of HD 218261 is close to HR 8799
with a reasonable delta H-K and delta W1-W2, and therefore the sensitivity loss due to the spectral
mismatch should be negligible. For MIRI, this criterion is less important but nevertheless we chose HD
220657 with a close spectral type.
(vi) Brightness: Is the PSF calibrator similar in magnitude to the science target?
It is recommended to use a reference PSF that is at least as bright than the science target, so that the
noise isn't scaled during the flux rescaling process. For NIRCam, HD 218261 is 0.1 mag brighter than
HR 8799. For MIRI it is even brighter with K = 3.04 but for this program we use the same readout
parameters for all observations. Having a brighter reference star will ensure a good PSF subtraction
with the same background level (important for MIRI) as long as saturation is not reached, which is true
in our case.
523
(2) Returning to the previous ETC workbook, what
are the final exposure parameters for the PSF
reference star observations?
Stage 7: Finalize the observing strategy

See also: JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap, HCI Coronagraphic Sequences
Imaging HR 8799 b is quite an easy case and the recommended baseline strategy of 2 rolls and one reference
star may appear to overshoot. However, this strategy minimizes the risks in case the reference star is not a good
one (e.g, a close binary), the roll subtraction will allow to detect the planet. On the other hand, taking the
reference star could enable the imaging of more planets than b, closer in as it would mitigate the degree of self-
subtraction at small angular distances where the diversity provided by the roll strategy is limited.
Now that a series of technical decisions for the program have been made (such as our PSF calibration strategy,
exposure specifications, etc.), an observing strategy that incorporates each of these components whilst also
minimizing observing overheads and performance degradation is identified.
(1) What is the total number of observations required for the observing program?
For our set of NIRCam MASKLWB observations, we will require a total of 3 observations:
(1) an observation of HR 8799 in the NIRCam LW filters at one spacecraft orientation;
(2) following a telescope roll, an observation of HR 8799 in the NIRCam LW filters at a second spacecraft
orientation;
(3) an observation of the reference star HD 217261 in the NIRCam LW filters;
Our MIRI 4QPM observations will require a set of 9 observations:(4, 5, 6) HR 8799 with F1065C, F1140C
and F1550C at one spacecraft orientation; (7, 8, 9) HR 8799 with F1065C, F1140C and F1550C at a
different spacecraft orientation; (10, 11, 12) The Reference Star HD 218261 with F1065C, F1140C and
F1550C, respectively.
(2) How are the observations organized?
See also: HCI Coronagraphic Sequences
Observing HR 8799 with Observing HR 8799

524
Observing HR 8799 with Observing HR 8799
the NIRCam LW Bar with 3 MIRI 4QPM
Coronagraph Coronagraphs:
Slew to science target Slew to science target
Observe Science Target with NIRCAM LW filters Observe science target with MIRI F1065C
Observe science target with MIRI F1140C
Roll Observatory ~7 to 14° Observe science target with MIRI F1550C
Observe science target with NIRCAM LW filters Roll observatory ~7-14°
Slew to PSF reference star Observe science target with MIRI F1065C
Observe PSF reference star with NIRCAM LW filters
Slew to PSF reference star
Observe PSF reference star with MIRI F1065C

This order was chosen in order to somewhat minimize overheads while also minimizing time between reference
PSF observations and science target observations for each MASK/FILTER setup.
Stage 8: Prepare proposal in the Astronomers'

Proposal Tool
Once all other steps in the proposal planning process are completed, the program is entered, validated and
submitted through the JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool (APT). A step-by-step guide for entering this example
science program into the APT is provided in the Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of
HR8799 b article.
References
GTO Prog 1194: Characterization of the HR 8799 planetary system and planet search
525
SIMBAD entry for HR8799
Currie, T., Burrows, A., Girard, J. H., et al. 2014 ApJ 795 2

Deep thermal infrared imaging of HR 8799 bcde: new atmospheric constraints and limits on a fifth planet
Marois, C., Macintosh, B., Barman, T., et al. 2008 Science 322 1348

Direct imaging of multiple planets orbiting the star HR 8799
Petit dit de la Roche, D. J. M., van den Ancker, M. E., Kissler-Patig, M., et al. 2020 MNRAS 491 1795
New constraints on the HR 8799 planetary system from mid-infrared direct imaging
Rajan, A., Barman, T., Soummer, R., et al. 2015 ApJL 809 2

Characterizing the atmospheres of the HR8799 planets with HST/WFC3
Wang, J., Graham J. R., Dawson R., et al. 2018 AJ 156 192

Dynamical constraints on the HR 8799 planets with GPI
Latest updates
06 Jan 2020
526
and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b
A walk-through of the JWST ETC for the "NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b" Example Science Program
is provided, demonstrating how to select exposure parameters for this observing program.
On this page

Define Calculations
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging Calculations
MIRI coronagraphic imaging Calculations
Target acquisition calculations
Science target TA
Reference targets TA
Advanced strategies
References
See also: NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b, JWST Exposure Time Calculator Overview, JWST
High-Contrast Imaging, JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap, MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging, NIRCam
Coronagraphic Imaging,
The JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) performs signal-to-noise (SNR) calculations for the JWST observing
modes. Sources of interest are defined by the user and assigned to scenes which are used by the ETC to run
calculations for the requested observing mode.
This JWST example science program, NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b, is based on the on
observations in the Guaranteed Time Observer (GTO) Program #1194: Characterization of the HR 8799 planetary
system and planet search (PI: Charles A. Beichman) with great simplification. The goals of this GTO program are
two-fold: to search for previously unknown planets using NIRCam coronagraphy and the physical characterization
of the known planets, HR8789bcde, using NIRCam and MIRI multi-filter photometry. This example science
program presents a simplified version of the GTO program, with the aim of showcasing the workflow of building a
coronagraphic imaging observation of a point source using both NIRCam and MIRI.
Following the instructions in stage 5 of the JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap, we focus on selecting the
exposure parameters to detect the Beta Pictoris debris disk at the desired signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for the MIRI
coronagraphic imaging and NIRCam coronagraphic imaging observing modes. The optimal exposure
specifications (e.g., number of groups and integrations) are the input needed for the Astronomer's Proposal Tool
(APT) observation template, which is used to specify an observing program and submit proposals.
527
The ETC workbook associated with this example science program is called #36: NIRCam and MIRI
Coronagraphy of HR 8799 b and can be selected from the Example Science Program Workbooks
are based on ETC v.1.5. There may subtle differences if using a different version of ETC.

See also: JWST ETC Scenes and Sources Page Overview, JWST ETC Defining a New Source, JWST ETC Source
Spectral Energy Distribution

In order to perform our intended calculations, we must first build a library of relevant sources and scenes for our
ETC calculations. In the ETC, scenes are idealized representations of spatial (2 angular coordinates) and spectral
brightness distributions, before being observed by a telescope. For MIRI and NIRCam coronagraphic
imaging modes, scenes are composed of relatively small areas (8.19" and 6.36", respectively) centered on the
coronagraphic masks. When defined, a scene should contain the source targets of an observation, as well as all
other nearby sources that could contribute to the observed target and background fluxes within that area.
The source library for this program consists of 5 sources: HR8799 (the central star), its planet b (orbiting at a
distance of ~1.73''), and 3 reference stars to be used for PSF subtraction in the ETC calculations. The reference
stars differ by brightness and spectral type, and such differences will be exploited to illustrate separate use
cases.
To create a new source we go to the Scenes and Sources page and click the NEW button within the Select a
Source pane. Once created, the source properties can be modified using various tabs within the Source Editor
pane. Creating 5 new sources, we change the source properties as described below (note that the changes made
using the source editor under each tab are applied to the selected source only when the SAVE button is
activated):
528
ID ID tab Continuum tab Renorm tab Shape tab
#
1
we update from the library of we normalize the spectral energy we keep
the Source Phoenix Stellar distribution for the source by the default
identity Models we Select the providing the source's integrated option for
information F0V 7250 4.0 magnitude of "5.24" Vegamag in the the Shape
to "HR8799" template stellar Johnson K bandpass of source
spectrum* as Point
2
we update we assign the source we normalize the spectral energy we keep
the Source a Blackbody distribution for the source by the default
identity Spectrum with an providing the source's integrated option for
information affective magnitude of "14.25" Vegamag in the Shape
to "planet b" temperature (a Tb) the Johnson K bandpass of source
of "1100" K† as Point
3
information F8V 6250 4.5 magnitude of "5.14" Vegamag in the the Shape
to "Reference template stellar Johnson K bandpass of source
(HD218261)" ‡ as Point
spectrum
4
information K0V 5250 4.5 magnitude of "4.41" Vegamag in the the Shape
(HD218381)" spectrum
§ as Point
5
information G0III 5750 3.0 magnitude of "3.04" Vegamag in the the Shape
(HD220657)" spectrum¶ as Point
529
Table notes:
*
Values from SIMBAD
†
This is a simplifying assumption for illustrative purposes. It is understood that a more realistic spectral
shape, e.g. from an existing observed spectrum and/or model spectrum should be used if available
‡
Values from SIMBAD
§
Values from SIMBAD
¶
Values from SIMBAD, the spectral type used here is the closest available in the ETC library of PHOENIX
spectra to the SIMBAD value of F8III. Such difference is of little importance for imaging at the MIRI
wavelengths
With our source properties now defined, we will create the astronomical scenes in which to place them. To
perform our ETC calculations we require 3 Science scenes for our science calculations, and 3 Reference scenes
on which to perform our target acquisition calculations on the 3 reference sources. To create a new scene, we
need to click on the NEW button in the Select a Scene pane. To add a source to a scene we select the desired
source in the Select a Source pane, select the scene to which the source will be associated from the Select a
Scene, and click the ADD SOURCE button. We define our scenes and associate them with the appropriate
sources, as follows:
Table 2. Scene configurations, as seen in the Select a Scene pane
ID Name◊ Sources
1 Science - NIRCam 1,2,3
2 Science - NIRCam bright 1,2,4
3 Science - MIRI 1,2,5
4 Target Acq - HD218261 3
Table Note:
530
◊
To generate the scene Name we go into the Source Editor pane and update the Source Identity Information.
With our sources now associated with the relevant scenes, we can use the Offsets tab in the Source Editor pane
to place the sources at their desired locations. The source's spatial offsets are defined with respect to the center
of the scene. Selecting each scene and source in turn (refer to the Sources and Scene Tables section for a more
in-depth explanation) we provide the following source offsets:
In each Science Scene (i.e., scenes

ID:1, Name: "Science - NIRCam";
ID: 2, Name: "Science - NIRCam bright"; and
ID: 3, Name: "Science - MIRI", respectively):
we place the target star (i.e., source ID: 1, Name: "HR8799") at an X Offset and Y Offset of "0"
arcsec
we place the planet (i.e., source ID: 1, Name: "planet b") at an X Offset of "-1.6" arcsec and Y Offset
of "0.65" arcsec
we place the reference star source (i.e., sources
ID: 3, Name: "Reference (HD218261)";
ID: 4, Name: "Reference (HD218381)"; and
ID: 5, Name: "Reference (HD220657)", respectively)
at an X Offset and Y Offset of "10" arcsecΔ.
In each Reference Scene (i.e., scenes

ID: 4, Name: "Target Acq - HD218261";
ID: 5, Name: "Target Acq - HD218381"; and
ID: 5, Name: "Target Acq - HD220657", respectively)
we position the reference PSF target (i.e., scenes
ID: 3, Name: "Reference (HD218261)",
ID: 4, Name: "Reference (HD218381)" and
ID: 5, Name: "Reference (HD220657)", respectively)
at the center of the scene, defining an X Offset and Y Offset of "0" arcsec.
Δ
In order to perform ETC calculations using either one of the reference stars, they have to be added to the ETC
scene and be placed at a sufficiently large distance, as to not contaminate the target and thus not interfere with
the flux of the target star or its planet. This is just a trick that allows to perform simulations of the PSF
subtraction process. The "10'' arcsec Offset from the target in each of the scenes is a convenience value and
does not reflect the true angular distance between target and reference star).
Once each scene has been defined an idealized idealized 2D representation of the scene can be viewed in the
Scene Sketch pane.
531
Define Calculations
See also: JWST ETC Creating a New Calculation, JWST ETC Calculations Page Overview
The Calculations page in the ETC is where we specify the instrument mode, background, instrument and detector

configuration, observing setup and extraction strategy for a given calculation. The aim of these calculations is to
make a comparative analysis of locations in the scene and determine the exposure parameters required to
obtain the desired signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
With JWST, a coronagraphic observation consists of several steps. First, the telescope must slew towards the
desired target. After the slew, a target acquisition (TA) observation is performed to place the desired target
behind the selected coronagraphic mask. A science observation follows. This observation sequence (
slew→TA→science observation) is repeated twice: once for the actual science target and once for the PSF
reference star. The latter is used to build a coronagraphic PSF model that is subtracted from the coronagraphic
target observation.
The ETC allows the user to simulate all 4 observations: 2 targets x 2 modes (TA or coronagraphic exposure). The
ETC also allows the user to simulate the PSF subtraction process for the primary target coronagraphic
observation. In this article we will illustrate how.
We note that the Example Science Program #36 ETC workbook associated to this page only exemplifies 3 of the
4 observations; the calculation to derive the SNR in a given coronagraphic mode for the PSF reference star is not
shown. The reason behind this is as follows: the PSF reference star that should be used for any coronagraphic
observation should be at least as bright as the main target—this way, by using an exposure time that is equal to
the exposure time for the main target, the SNR of the PSF reference image will be at least as high as that of the
main target's observation. Thus the reference PSF subtraction step will not contribute substantially to the total
noise budget of the measurement.
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging Calculations

See also: NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging, JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap, JWST ETC Backgrounds,
JWST ETC Coronagraphy Strategy
For the NIRCam coronagraphic imaging observations, we subdivide the calculations in 2 groups: one using "
Scene 1: Science - NIRCam" (with PSF reference star HD218261); the other using "Scene 3: Science - NIRCam
bright" (with the brighter reference star HD218381). The underlying rationale for the setup of all the NIRCam
coronagraphic observations in this article is to reach an integrated SNR of ~100.

For all of the NIRCam coronagraphic imaging observations, the following applies:
532
under the Detector Setup tab we set the Groups per Integration equal to "10", Readout pattern to RAPID
and Subarray to SUB320 (nominal for LW coronagraphy with NIRCam). This readout pattern allows all the
frames to be saved. Data volume is not an issue when using the small 320 × 320 subarray. Moreover, a
10 arcsec field of view is large enough to have HR8799b fit with a great margin. We also keep the
Exposures per specification equal to "1" to simulate having no dithers for the science target observation (
note that dithers are recommended for only PSF reference star coronagraphic observations). With all the
parameters set in the Detector Setup tab defined, we use the Integrations per Exposure menu to achieve
the desired SNR. With this readout we are using only ~8% of the saturation dynamic of the detector. For
challenging (fainter) sources, it is recommended to use more but in this case, using this RAPID setup
guarantees a SNR of ~100 on HR 8799 b in one to 10 minutes depending on the NIRCam filter as well as
giving the flexibility to switch to a brighter star (calculation 9) while keeping the same readout and saving
all the frames.
Under the Strategy tab, Observation sub-tab, we set the Scene rotation equal to "0" and the PSF
subtraction source equal to either "2: HD218261" or "7: HD218381"—depending on which scene is being
used. From the PSF Subtraction menu we select the Optimal (PSF autoscaling) option, allowing for the
reference star brightness to be re-scaled to that of the science target for PSF subtraction. Variations to
this strategy are discussed below, under Advanced Strategies.
Under the Strategy tab, Extraction sub-tab, we select "3: planet b" as the SNR Source; set the Aperture
radius equal to "0.08" arcseconds; Sky annulus → Inner radius equal to "0.1" arcseconds and Sky annulus
→ Outer Radius equal to "0.2" arcseconds.
Adjust exposure time to achieve desired SNR
Scene "1: Science - NIRCam"

This scene contains HR 8799, HR 8799b and reference star HD218261. There are 8 calculations defined for this
scene corresponding to the 8 medium band filters supported for NIRCam coronagraphic observations in the LW
channel using the MASKLWB occulter. The number of Integrations per Exposure were adjusted to reach SNR of
~100, as summarized in Table 3.
Table 3. NIRCam coronagraphy calculation exposure parameters for scene ID: 1, Name: "Science - NIRCam"
533
Calc ID # Instrument Setup tab Detector Setup tab
Coronagraph Filter Groups per integration1 Integrations per exposure2
1 MASKLWB F250M 10 8
Table Notes:
1
Number of groups: set to the maximum (10) as getting as many frames as possible is an advantage for post-
processing in high contrast imaging. Also, in the event of partial saturation, one can recover the slope from the
first few unsaturated groups. Finally, one can reject bad frames associated with an eventual cosmic ray.
2
Integrations per Exposure chosen to reach SNR of ~100.
Scene "2: Science - NIRCam bright"

This science scene contains HR 8799, HR 8799b and reference star HD218381. This PSF reference star is brighter
(4.41 Johnson K, Vegamag) than that used in Scene ID: 1, (5.14 Johnson K, Vegamag). We only define one
calculation for this Scene, calculation ID #9, using the MASKLWB Coronagraph and F335M Filter. In the Detector
Setup tab we set the number of Groups per integration to "10" and Integrations per exposure to "5".
The Instrument and Detector Setup of calculation #9 is identical to that of calculation #3; however the selected
PSF subtraction source in the Strategy tab is different. The SNR for this calculation is ~108, compared to
~106 for calculation #3. The small difference in SNR is due to the lower noise introduced in the subtraction step
when using a brighter reference star.
MIRI coronagraphic imaging Calculations

See also: MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging, JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap, JWST ETC Backgrounds
534
For MIRI coronagraphic imaging we only use scene ID: 3, Name: "Science - MIRI" (whereby the PSF reference star
target is ID: 6, Name: "Reference (HD220657)"). Similarly to the NIRCam case, the underlying rationale for the
setup of all the MIRI coronagraphic observations in this example science program is to reach a SNR ~ 100.

The following set-up is defined for all of the MIRI coronagraphic imaging calculations:
Under the Detector Setup tab, because of the brightness of our targets we keep the default Readout
Pattern of FASTR1—FASTR1 mode provides short MULTIACCUM exposures to maximize dynamic range and
minimize noise in a background-dominated regime. We set the number of Integrations per exposure equal
to "5" and keep the Exposures per specification equal to "1"—this choice corresponds to having no dithers
for the science target observation (note that dithers are instead recommended for PSF reference star
coronagraphic observations). With all the other parameters set in the Detector Setup tab, we use the
Groups per Integration menu to achieve the desired SNR. We are following the MIRI Cross-Mode
Recommended Strategies for bright stars. Since planet b is really easily detected and we are using less
than 10% of the dynamic range of the detector (before saturation), it would be also fine to increase the
number of integrations and keep the number of groups/integrations fixed as we did for NIRCam. Since
MIRI allows to use a number of groups/integrations larger than 10, we prefer to raise this parameter and
largely meet the flux calibrations requirements (not guaranteed with less than 5 groups/integrations).
Under the Strategy tab, Observation sub-tab, we set the Scene rotation equal to "0" and the PSF
subtraction source equal to "5: Reference (HD220657)". From the PSF subtraction menu we select Optimal
(PSF autoscaling), which allows for re-scaling of the reference star brightness to that of the science target.
Variations to this strategy are discussed below, under Advanced Strategies.
Under the Strategy tab, Extraction sub-tab, we set the SNR source to be "3: planet b"; the Aperture radius
equal to "0.3" arcseconds, and Sky annulus → Inner radius equal to "0.45" arcseconds and Sky annulus →
Outer Radius equal to "0.7" arcseconds.
Adjust exposure time to achieve desired SNR

There are 3 MIRI coronagraphic imaging calculation in the ETC workbook which utilize the 3 different 4QPM
masks. The Groups per Integration were increased to achieve a SNR of ~100, as summarized in Table 4.
Table 4. MIRI Coronagraphy calculation exposure parameters for scene ID: 3, Name: "Science - MIRI"
535
Calc ID # Instrument Setup: Detector Setup:
Mask/Filter Groups per integration3
10 4QPM/F1550C 102
11 4QPM/F1140C 27
12 4QPM/F1065C 26
3
Groups per Integration chosen to reach SNR of ~100.
Target acquisition calculations

See Also: NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition, JWST ETC NIRCam Target Acquisition, MIRI
Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition, JWST ETC NIRCam Target Acquisition
Two types of target acquisition calculations are used in the Example Science Program #36: one for the main
science target, HR 8799 and its planet b, the other for the PSF reference stars.
Science target TA
The TA calculations for the science targets in the Example Science Program #36 ETC workbook are configured to
reach SNR of 100. With this goal in mind we adjust the Instrument and Detector Setup to reach approximately
the target SNR.
NIRCam target acquisition on science target

For the NIRCam target acquisition calculation (Calculation ID: 13) we configure the scene to be "1: Science -
NIRCam". This scene has 3 objects in it (Sources ID: 1,2,3, i.e., HR8799, HR8799b and HD218216, respectively).
In the Strategy tab we need to specify that Aperture centered on source should be set to "1: HR 8799".
Note that setting the Aperture centered on source to the reference star HD218216 would result in an
error: the PSF reference star in this scene has been placed at ~10 arcseconds from the main target;
however the calculation domain for TA SNR in the ETC is smaller than this area and the calculation would
fail—this is why we require Reference Scenes for TA on the PSF reference stars.
536
Given the K = 5.24 mag brightness of the source, in the Instrument Setup tab we set the Filter menu to "F335M+
NDsquare(bright)" (see this page). In the Detector Setup tab we set the Groups per integration to "65", and the
Readout Pattern to BRIGHT2. Note that these are the only 2 parameters that can be adjusted for this mode, and
that only certain fixed values of Ngroups are allowed. The resulting SNR for this calculation is ~112 while the
minimum recommended value to guarantee a good acquisition and centering is 30.
MIRI target acquisition on science target

For the MIRI target acquisition calculation (Calculation ID: 14, only 4QPM/1550 setup):
Under the Scene tab, we configure the Scene for calculation to be "3: Science - MIRI".
In the Strategy tab we need to specify that Aperture centered on source should be set to "1: HR 8799".
Under the Instrument Setup tab, we set the filter to FND (Neutral density), required because of the source
brightness (see this page). Given that we will be using the 4QPMs optical elements for our science
observations, the Acq Mode menu needs to be set in turn to each one of the "4QPM" values, "TA for 4QPM
/1065", "TA for 4QPM/1140", and "TA for 4QPM/1550".
In the Detector Setup tab, we set the Readout Mode to FASTR1 and the number of Groups per Integration
to "10". With MIRI, TA can be performed using 2 different readout modes: FASTR1 and FASTGRPAVG. In
general, users should consider using the FASTR1 readout mode; however, for TA with the Lyot
coronagraph concerning fainter stars (where longer than the shortest integration times are needed),
FASTGRPAVG can be used. Given the brightness of our target source and use of the 4QPMs, the FASTR1
readout mode is the appropriate choice.
The resulting SNR is ~100 for all the 4QPM TA calculations.
Reference targets TA
Similarly to the science target case, the TA calculations for the PSF reference stars in the Example Science
Program #36 ETC workbook are configured to reach SNR of ~100.
Calculation ID 15: NIRCam Target Acquisition on reference star HD218261.

For this calculation we configure the Scene to be "4: Reference - HD218261". This scene has one object in
it (Source ID: 3, Name: "Reference (HD218216)"). Given the very similar brightness of the targets, the
setup for this calculation is identical to calculation ID #16 (NIRCam TA on the science target). The
resulting SNR is ~119.
Calculation ID 16: NIRCam Target Acquisition on reference star HD218381.

For this calculation we configure the Scene to be "5: Reference - HD218381". This scene has 1 object in it
(Source ID: 4, Name: "Reference (HD218381)"). This brighter target is used to demonstrate possible trade-
offs in the science strategy. The brighter target allows much faster reference PSF observations (see the
APT page for this Example Science Program). The gain in execution time for TA is minimal given that TA
observations are already quite fast. In order to reach SNR ~100 for this brighter target, the calculation
setup is identical to that of Calculation ID #17, except for the Readout pattern in the Detector Setup tab,
which is set to RAPID since this star is brighter than HR 8799 The resulting SNR is ~102.
537
which is set to RAPID since this star is brighter than HR 8799 The resulting SNR is ~102.
Calculation ID 17: MIRI Target Acquisition on reference star HD220657.

For this calculation we configure the Scene to be "6: Reference - HD220657". This scene has 1 object in it
(Source ID: 2, Name: "Reference (HD220657)"). This source is brighter than HR8799 and thus we set
number of Groups per integration to "4" in the Detector Setup panel. Four is the minimum recommended
number of groups for MIRI TA—a lower number would not allow a robust fit of the accumulated charge vs.
time slope. Even with the smallest number of reads, the resulting SNRs are ~201 - 202 when selecting the
Acq Mode to be TA for 4QPM/1065, TA for 4QPM/1140, and TA for 4QPM/1550, under the Instrument Setup
tab.
Advanced strategies
The above example has been simplified for the purpose of the training. Since the objective of the program is to
study the atmosphere of the exoplanet HR 8799 b, one should in principle use a synthetic model spectrum which
has been optimized with existing observations and which account for the presence of an atmosphere rather than
a perfect black body. For GTO program 1194, the team has calculated the corresponding integrated flux in each
of the NIRCam and MIRI filters using the most up-to-date models. Nevertheless, Figure 1 below shows that using
a synthetic model spectrum with clouds (generated by Travis Barman as in Rajan et al. 2015), the SNR
previously adjusted to ~100 for a 1100K black body spectrum normalized at K = 14.25 (Vega mag) is comprised
between ~50 an ~110 using a ~1100 K cloudy synthetic model spectrum also at 1100 K but normalized at K =
14.05 to preserve the same energy and match the mid-IR tail.
Because HR8799 b can be easily detected and characterized with JWST, the approximation is fair.
For a more challenging object, fainter and/or closer to the coronagraph's IWA (typically inside 1 arcsecond for
these coronagraphs), it is recommended to upload a realistic model spectrum and be careful about its
normalization, using previous photometric points, often taken from the ground with different filters or filter
systems.
538
Figure 1. HR 8799 b's SNR (ETC Plots) across wavelength for both NIRCam and MIRI
Left: the input spectrum is a 1100 K black body and the SNR is roughly constant at ~100. Right: the input spectrum is now a modeled
synthetic spectrum taken from Rajan et al. 2015 (Teff = 1100 K, log(g) = 3.00, radius = 0.90 RJup) with a similar normalization. With the
same readout parameters, the SNR now varies from ~50 to ~110 for NIRCam and is still close to ~100 for MIRI (because our
normalization makes the long wavelengths match well as shown on the top-right plot).
science program.
References
SIMBAD entry for HR8799
SIMBAD entry for HD218261
539
Rajan, A., Barman, T., Soummer, R., et al. 2015 ApJL 809 2 (arXiv)

Characterizing the atmospheres of the HR8799 planets with HST/WFC3
Latest updates
06 Jan 2020
540
and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b
Instructions for filling out the MIRI and NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging observing templates in the Astronomers
Proposal Tool (APT) for the HR8799 b example science program are presented and discussed.
Example Science Program #36: APT Guide
On this page

Enter proposed Targets
Create observations
Specify observations
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging observations
MIRI coronagraphic Imaging observations
NIRCam Coronagraphic Observations (Special Requirements)
Timing Special Requirements
Aperture Position Angle Special Requirements
MIRI Coronagraphic Observations (Special Requirements)
Run Visit Planner
See also: NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b, JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool Overview
The Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) is the official submission tool for all JWST proposals. Filling out a JWST
proposal in the APT involves entering proposal information, specifying information about the target(s), setting up
the observation(s), defining any special requirements, and ensuring the program can be scheduled as specified.
This guide provides a walkthrough of this process for the NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of HR8799 b example
science program.
A filled out APT file can be accessed via the APT menu options File → JWST Example Science Proposals →
Multi-Inst → 36 NIRCam & MIRI Coronagraphy of HR 8799 b.

541
See also: APT Proposal Information

The APT Proposal Information section provides a place to enter the proposal Title, Abstract, PI and CoI
information, and other information of a supporting nature for your proposal. It can be found in the Tree Editor of
APT and contains the information that will ultimately appear on the cover page of the formatted APT proposal.
Opening the Proposal Information tab on the Tree Editor avails additional sub-sections, one for entering a
program summary text block and an interface to enter PI and CoI information as appropriate. It also contains a
place to add the name of the PDF file for uploading prior to submission of your proposal.

The next step is to specify our proposed targets. Target information is entered by selecting Targets in the Tree
Editor, which provides options in the Active GUI window.
Our program consists of 3 Fixed Targets: our science target HR 8799 (i.e., * HD 218396) and PSF reference
stars HD 218261 (for NIRCam) and and HD 220657 (* ups Peg; for MIRI). Using the APT Fixed Target Resolver tool
, we retrieve each target from the SIMBAD database using their archival names and then commit them to
our proposal.
Once resolved, we re-name the targets "HR8799", "HD220657" and "HD218261", in the Name in the Proposal
field respectively.
We define the Category of our "HR8799" target as Star and provide the F stars and Exoplanet Systems
Description keywords. For "HD220657" and "HD218261", we select Calibration in Category and select the
Coronagraphic and Point spread function Description keywords.
Create observations
542
With our targets specified, we can now begin fleshing out our proposal. In the APT, observations reside in one or
more observation folders, located under the main Observations folder in the tree editor. Because we have
decided to split our MIRI and NIRCam coronagraphic observations into 2 different coronagraphic observation
sequences (at different epochs), we can create 2 separate observation folders. To create a new folder, we click
on Observations in the tree editor and click the New Observation Folder button, creating a new observation
folder with a new blank observation form inside that folder. When an observation folder is selected, a new
observation can be created by clicking the Add button.
For ease, we will create each of the desired observation folders and observation templates as placeholders,
specifying only the Label and observation Number, Instrument, Template and Target, prior to entering the
specific details of each observation—this will make it much easier for us to specify various connections, such as
PSF reference observations and special requirement links, as we craft our individual observations. As such, we
create two new observation folders containing 3 and 9 observations, respectively, and specify them as follows:
1. Observation Folder 1: Label: NIRCam Coronagraphic observations

a. Number: we assign an Observation Number "1".
Label: we provide the Observation Label "HR 8799 - NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 1".
Instrument: we select "NIRCam" as the Instrument.
Template: we select the "NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging" Template.
Target: we select "1 HR8799" as the Target.
b. Number: we assign an Observation Number "2".
Label: we provide the Observation Label "HR 8799 - NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 2".
c. Number: we assign an Observation Number "3".
Label: we provide the Observation Label "Reference Star - NIRCam - MASKLWB".
Target: we select "3 HD218261" as the Target.
2. Observation Folder 2: Label: MIRI Coronagraphic observations
a. Number: we assign an Observation Number "4".
Label: we provide the Observation Label "HR8799 - MIRI - 1065C - Roll 1".
Instrument: we select "MIRI" as the Instrument.
Template: we select the "MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging" Template.
b. Number: we assign an Observation Number "5".
c. Number: we assign an Observation Number "6".
543
c.

d. Number: we assign an Observation Number "7".
e. Number: we assign an Observation Number "8".
f. Number: we assign an Observation Number "9".
g. Number: we assign an Observation Number "10".
Label: we provide the Observation Label "Reference Star - MIRI - 1065C".
h. Number: we assign an Observation Number "11".
i. Number: we assign an Observation Number "12".
Note that while we may create these observations in any order, it is essential that we assign the "
Observation Number" for each observation as stated above (i.e., organized according to the
observing strategy we previously devised). This is because within the APT, observations occur
according to increasing observation number.
Specify observations
See also: JWST APT Observation Templates
With our proposal fleshed out, we will now return to each observation and fill out the observation specifications
in the selected observation template. For both the MIRI and NIRCam coronagraphic imaging modes, an observer
has control over three primary parameters:
coronagraphic mask + filter combination
544
small grid dithering type
detector read out mode and exposure time (via the number of frames and integrations).
The allowed values are documented and maintained in the MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging Template Parameters
and NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Template Parameters pages, respectively.
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging observations

The NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Template Parameters article documents the allowed values for this
template. We define these for our observations with the following template specific information (in accordance
with the ETC). The strategy here is to generate as many frames as possible (RAPID, 10 Groups/Integration), avoid
saturation and adjust the Number of Integrations per Exposure to yield a SNR of ~100 on HR 8799 b for all
filters.
For the reference star which is taken with a 5-point small-grid-dither pattern (the maximum for the bar, to
guarantee an optimal PSF subtraction), the Number of Integrations per Exposure is logically 5 times smaller, 4
when not divisible by 5, to keep the total time and photon count on the reference star approximately the same
as on HR 8799).
We request Astrometric Confirmation Images for the observation on the science target. Indeed, those are
necessary to know the position of the star when it is behind the occulter (with respect to other stars in the field)
and hence to get a precise astrometric calibration for the planet b whose orbital refinement is of interest for the
community. This astrometric calibration is not necessary for the reference star. We will need to define a number
of parameters, including Coronagraphic Mask, Acquisition Target Parameters (Brightness, Filter, Readout Pattern,
Number of Groups/Integration), ETC Wkbk. Calc. ID, Astrometric Confirmation Image Parameters, Dither Pattern,
Subarray, Science Filters, Science Readout Patterns, Number of Groups/Integration, Number of Integrations
/Exposure, and NIRCam PSF Reference Observation. We choose the following parameters for our observations:
1. Observation Folder 1: Label: "NIRCam Coronagraphic observations"
Coronagraphic Mask: we select the "MASKLWB" Coronagraphic Mask

Target ACQ: we specify the Acquisition Target to be the "Same Target as Observation"

and the Acquisition Target Brightness type to be "BRIGHT (ND Square)"
Acq Exposure Time: we select the "BRIGHT2" Acquisition Readout Pattern;
specify Acquisition Number of Groups/Integration as "65" and provide the name of
the ETC Wkbk. Calc. ID we used to arrive at these exposure settings.
Astrometric Confirmation Image Paramaters
we specify that we do not need to Obtain Astrometric Confirmation Images by

selecting "Yes"
Science Exposures
Subarray: we select the "SUB320" Science Subarray

Dither Pattern: for the Dither Pattern we select "NONE"
545
Dither Pattern: for the Dither Pattern we select "NONE"
Filters: exposures are grouped by filter, so for each set of exposures to be executed
we "Add" a new filter and configure it as follows:
#1: we select the "F335M" Science Filter; "RAPID" Science Readout Pattern;

define the Number of Groups/Integration as "10" and Number of Integrations
/Exposure as "5"
/Exposure as "8"
/Exposure as "7"
/Exposure as "4"
/Exposure as "5"
/Exposure as "12"
/Exposure as "60"
/Exposure as "60"
PSF Reference Observations: we select "Reference Star– NIRCam - MASKLWB (Obs 3)"
as our first designated PSF Reference Observation.
PSF Reference Observations: we select "HR 8799 - NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 2 (Obs 2)"
as our second designated PSF Reference Observation.
We keep the same Coronagraphic Mask,Target Acquisition Parameters, Astrometric
Confirmation Image Parameters, Science Exposure parameters as Obs 1 (i.e., "HR 8799 -
NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 1").
PSF Reference Observations: we select "Reference Star– NIRCam - MASKLWB (Obs 3)"
as our first designated PSF Reference Observation.
PSF Reference Observations: we select "HR 8799 - NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 1 (Obs 1)"
as our second designated PSF Reference Observation.
Target ACQ: we specify the Acquisition Target to be the "Same Target as Observation"

and the Acquisition Target Brightness type to be "BRIGHT (ND Square)"
546
Astrometric Confirmation Image Paramaters
we specify that we do not need to Obtain Astrometric Confirmation Images by

selecting "No"
Science Exposures
Subarray: we select the "SUB320" Science Subarray

Dither Pattern: for the Dither Pattern we select "5-POINT-BAR"
Filters: exposures are grouped by filter, so for each set of exposures to be executed
we "Add" a new filter and configure it as follows:

/Exposure as "1"
/Exposure as "2"
/Exposure as "2"
/Exposure as "1"
/Exposure as "1"
/Exposure as "2"
/Exposure as "12"
/Exposure as "12"
We check the This is a PSF Reference Observation box, indicating that it is a PSF

observation.
MIRI coronagraphic Imaging observations

See also: MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging APT Template
547
In accordance with our advance work in the ETC (see Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam and MIRI
Coronagraphy of HR8799 b article), we define the MIRI observations with the template specific information for
MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging. Unlike for NIRCam, it is allowed to use a large number of Groups/Int (recommended
for sake of calibration) and thus we fix the Number of Integrations/Exposure to 5 (1 for the reference star) and
vary the Groups/Int to also achieve a SNR of ~100 on HR 8799 b for each of the 3 filer/mask setup. We use the
same readout parameter for the reference star to guarantee the same frame background level. The reference
star for MIRI is taken, as for NIRCam, with a 5-point small-grid-dither (9-point would be overshoot considering HR
8799 is an easy target at a separation where the SNR is limited by the background rather than by speckle
noise). We will need to define a number of parameters, including Coronagraphic Filter/Mask, Acquisition Target
Parameters (Brightness, Filter, Quadrant, Readout Pattern, Number of Groups/Integration), ETC Wkbk. Calc. ID,
Dither Pattern, Science Readout Patterns, Number of Groups/Integration, Number of Integrations/Exposure, and
MIRI PSF Reference Observation. We choose the following parameters for our observations:
For your own tracking purposes, it is recommended you include the ETC workbook and calculation ID
number in the Acq ETC Wkbk Calc ID field so the TA SNR calculations can be verified by Instrument
Scientists during technical reviews after the proposal is accepted. In this example, we do not include an
ETC workbook ID number in the provided APT file since a unique ID number is generated when an
example workbook is added to a user's list of workbooks.
1. Observation Folder 2: Label: "MIRI Coronagraphic observations"

Target ACQ: we select the "FND" Target Acquisition Filter.

Acq Exposure Time: we select the "FAST" Acquisition Readout Pattern;
Acq Quadrant: we select Target Acquisition Quadrant "1" in which to perform the
initial TA
Coron Parameters
Coron Filter: we select the "4QPM/F1065C" Coronagraphic Mask/Filter combination

Exposure Time: we select the "FAST" Readout Pattern; specify the Number of Groups
/Integration as "26"; the Number of Integrations/Exposure as "5" and the Number of
Exposures/Dither as "1".
Dither Type: we select "NONE"
PSF Reference Observations: we select "Reference Star– MIRI - 1065C (Obs 10)" as our
first designated PSF Reference Observation.
PSF Reference Observations: we select "HR 8799 - MIRI - 1065C- Roll 2 (Obs 7)" as our
second designated PSF Reference Observation.
We keep the same Target Acquisition Parameters, Coron parameters and PSF Reference
Observation parameters as Obs 4 (i.e. "HR8799 - MIRI - 1065C - Roll 1").
Coron Parameters

548
We keep the same Target Acquisition Parameters, Coron parameters and PSF Reference
Observation parameters as Obs 4 (i.e. "HR8799 - MIRI - 1065C - Roll 1").
Coron Parameters

We keep the same Target Acquisition Parameters, Coron Parameters as Obs 4 (i.e. "HR8799 - MIRI -
1065C - Roll 1").
PSF Reference Observations: we select "HR8799 - MIRI - 1065C - Roll 1 (Obs 4)" as our
1140C - Roll 1").
1550C - Roll 1").
549
Target ACQ: we select the "FND" Target Acquisition Filter.

Acq Exposure Time: we select the "FAST" Acquisition Readout Pattern;
Acq Quadrant: we select Target Acquisition Quadrant "1" in which to perform the
initial TA.
Coron Parameters
Coron Filter: we select the "4QPM/F1065C" Coronagraphic Mask/Filter combination.

Dither Type: we select "5-POINT-SMALL-GRID".

observation.
1550C - Roll 1").
Coron Parameters

Dither Type: we select "5-POINT-SMALL-GRID".

observation.
1550C - Roll 1").
Coron Parameters

Dither Type: we select "5-POINT-SMALL-GRID"

observation.

550
Adding Special Requirements in APT
In the APT, Special Requirements (SRs) are defined parameters used to observation scheduling for scientific
reasons, or to indicate other situations requiring specific actions. In order to fulfill the guidelines of our proposed
observing strategy (see parent article), we will require the use of two kinda of special requirements: Timing
Special Requirements, which are used to restrict the scheduling of JWST observations by timing constraints, and
Aperture Position Angle Special Requirements, which are used to restrict the scheduling of observations by
position angle constraints.
NIRCam Coronagraphic Observations (Special

Requirements)
For the "NIRCam Coronagraphic observations" folder, the SRs placed are as follows:
To ensure the observations execute together and in the order provided:
SEQUENCE OBSERVATIONS 1, 2, 3, NON-INTERRUPTIBLE

1. We select "Reference Star - NIRCam - MASKLWB (Obs 3)":
2. Add a Timing → Group/Sequence Observations Link:
In the Observation list we select observations 1, 2 and 3.

We check the Sequence and Non-interruptible checkboxes.
HR 8799 b is always well positioned with respect to NIRCam's MASKLWB axis (horizontal). Nevertherless, for
training purposes, we set two "Aperture PA Range" requirements which correspond roughly to the whole
observability intervals and for both "Roll 1" and "Roll 2" (see parent article).
APERTURE PA RANGE: 59 to 75 Degrees (V3 58.599 to 74.599) AND 211 to 250 Degrees (V3 210.599 to
249.599)
1. We select
a. "HR 8799 - NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 1 (Obs 1)"

b. "HR 8799 - NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 2 (Obs 2)"
2. We add 2 Position Angle → PA Range special requirements:
551
2. We add 2 Position Angle → PA Range special requirements:
Aperture PA Range: we define as "59" to "75" Degrees.

Aperture PA Range: we define as "211" to "250" Degrees.
APERTURE PA OFFSET 2 from 1 by 7 to 14 Degrees (Same offsets in V3)

1. We select "HR 8799 - NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 1 (Obs 1)
2. We add a Position Angle → PA Offset Link:
Orient observation: "HR 8799 - NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 2 (Obs 2)"

Offset from: "HR 8799 - NIRCam - MASKLWB - Roll 1 (Obs 1)"
Min PA offset: we define as "7" Degrees
Max PA Offset we define as "14" Degrees
Reference Axis: we select "Aperture"
MIRI Coronagraphic Observations (Special

Requirements)
For the "MIRI Coronagraphic observations" folder, we impose the following special requirements on the
observations:
To ensure the observations execute together and in the order provided—minimizing possible thermal variations
differentially affecting the acquired PSFs, as well as the number of rolls and slews—we group all of the MIRI
observations using a non-interruptible sequence:
SEQUENCE OBSERVATIONS 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, NON-INTERRUPTIBLE

1. We select "HR 8799 - MIRI- 1065C - Roll 1 (Obs 4)"
2. Add a Timing → Group/Sequence Observations Link:
In the Observation list we select observations 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12.

We check the Sequence and Non-interruptible checkboxes.
In order to position HR 8799 b in quadrant 1 at more than 30º from the 4QPM vertical most axis, we restrict the
aperture PA (APA) to > 89º and < 104º. According to our previous work in the CVT (see parent article) we find
that restricting the APA of the Roll Angle 1 to 89-103° yields good target positioning at Roll Angle 2. Additionally
it allows a favorable positioning of planet c in quadrant 4. We set the aperture PA offsets from the
minimum (~7º) to relax as much as possible the already stringent scheduling constraint for MIRI to the
maximum (~14°). At the angular separation of b, ~7º is good enough.
We place the following APA Special Requirements on our observations:
552
APERTURE PA RANGE 89.20 to 103.55 Degrees (V3 84.750 to 99.100)

2. We add a Position Angle → PA Range special requirement:
Aperture PA Range: we define as "89.20" to "103.55" Degrees.
APERTURE PA OFFSET 7 from 4 by 7 to 14 Degrees (Same offsets in V3)

2. We add a Position Angle → PA Offset Link:
Orient observation: "HR 8799 - MIRI- 1065C - Roll 1 (Obs 4)"

Offset from: "HR 8799 - MIRI- 1065C - Roll 2 (Obs 7)"
Min PA offset: we define as "7" Degrees
Max PA Offset we define as "14" Degrees
Reference Axis: we select "Aperture"
3. Repeat 1. and 2. for Obs 5 & 8 and Obs 6 & 9
Run Visit Planner

APT Visit Planner,
Using Aladin and APT Visit Planner
With the targets, observations and special requirements of our proposal now defined, our next step is to verify
that our observation sequences can be executed as specified. To do so, we will make use of the APT Visit Planner
. The Visit Planner (VP) is a tool that performs detailed scheduability checks for observations in the APT,
including visibility, constraints checking and guide star availability. The VP may be run on individual
observations, collection of observations, and ultimately on the entire set of proposed observations prior to
proposal submission.
In the form editor in APT, we first select the MIRI coronagraphic observations folder, and select the Visit Planner
icon from the top tool bar. Clicking the Update Display button in the active GUI window, we run the VP on all of
the observations, and their associated visits, in the folder. Once the schedulability of the MIRI Coronagraphic
observations is confirmed (the VP displaying green checks on the observations), we repeat this process on the
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging folder.
553
For an overall observation to be schedulable, the constraints for all visits need to have a window of schedulability
at the same time. Running the Visit Planner, we find that the observability of our targets (with respect to the
observatory as a function of time) and guide star availability, combined with the overlap of all of our special
requirements, results in a scheduling window of ~2 weeks in length for each instrument. Below are two screen
captures (Figure 1 & 2) of the Visit Planner for both NIRCam and MIRI showing the available time intervals that
satisfy the constraints of each observation in our program:
554
Figure 1. Observability of the NIRCam observations.
Visit Planner screenshot: observability of the three NIRCam observations.
555
Figure 2. Observability of the MIRI observations.
Visit Planner screenshot: observability of the nine MIRI observations. The CVT was used to narrow down the timing constraints to avoid
having planet b too close to the 4QPM vertical axis (5º from the detector axis).

See also: APT Smart Accounting, JWST Observing Overheads and Time Accounting Overview
With the scheduability of our coronagraphic sequences verified, we can now run the APT Smart Accounting on
our proposed observations to see whether charged overhead time can be reduced. To run the Smart Accounting
tool, we select the main Observations folder in the Tree editor and select the Visit Planner tool in the top tool
bar, providing access to the Run Smart Accounting button.
Because our set of observations is in a non-interruptible sequence, it will obviously only need one major slew at
the beginning of the sequence. Smart Accounting will catch and correct this and reduce our reported overheads.
Prior to running the Smart Accounting tool, the APT reports 1.66 hours of Science time and 13.86 hours of
Charged time (as reported in the proposal cover page); once run, the total charged time is reduced to 11.17
hours.
Latest updates
06 Jan 2020
556
NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of
the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk
This example science program presents an application of the high-contrast imaging roadmap, demonstrating
how to create a cross-instrument MIRI/NIRCam program to observe the debris disk around Beta Pictoris.
Science goals
Stage 1: Become familiar with the HCI capabilities and instrument-specific modes of JWST
Stage 2: Evaluate the required observations with respect to the performance limits and capabilities of
the HCI observing modes
Stage 4: Assess target visibilities and allowed position angles
Stage 5: Use the Exposure Time Calculator to determine observing parameters
Stage 6: Select a Suitable PSF Calibrator
Stage 8: Prepare our proposal in the Astronomers' Proposal Tool
References
Links
See also: JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap, Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam and MIRI
Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk, Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy
of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk
This example science program provides a walk-through of a JWST observing program using the NIRCam and MIRI
Coronagraphic imaging, focussing on the overarching goals of the JWST Guaranteed Time Observation (GTO)
program "Coronagraphy of the Debris Disk Archetype Beta Pictoris" (PI: Chris Stark). This article discusses how to
assess the feasibility and ultimately design a high-contrast imaging (HCI) observing program with JWST, and also
links to further articles discussing how to navigate the Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to determine exposure
times required to meet the science goals, and how to set up the observation templates in the Astronomer
Science goals
557
The debris disk around Beta Pictoris (Beta Pic) is famous for being the first circumstellar disk to be spatially
resolved. Since the discovery with IRAS of its thermal excess emission above that expected from the stellar
photosphere in 1983, and subsequent ground-based coronagraphic images in 1984, generations of observations
have delivered insights into its complex structure, the composition of its constituent particles and the physical
processes that shape the disk. As one of the brightest and largest (in angular size) disks on the sky, it remains a
compelling target for detailed investigations at unprecedented sensitivities with JWST.
The science case described here is based on the "Coronagraphy of the Debris Disk Archetype Beta Pictoris" GTO
Program. The goal of this program is to characterize the archetypical debris disk around Beta Pic with deep
imaging in multiple filters across JWST’s entire wavelength range. Specific objectives include:
Measuring the disk structure, composition and interactions with planets.

Testing for the presence of water and CO2 ices and organic tholins (such as those on Titan).
Measuring color variations and asymmetries across the disk.
Probing the thermal emission from both the warm inner belt and outer cooler main disk.
Obtaining a comprehensive legacy dataset on this target, for analysis alongside similar data and/or on
other debris disks studied using JWST.

The HCI roadmap guides readers through the process of designing a high-contrast imaging (HCI) observing
program with JWST. Here we demonstrate this process, walking the user through the decisions made at each
stage for this example science program.
Stage 1: Become familiar with the HCI capabilities

and instrument-specific modes of JWST
See also: JWST High-Contrast Imaging, Getting Started with JWST Proposing
The first stage in the process of planning any HCI program with JWST is to become familiar with the JWST HCI
capabilities and terminology. Observers should become acquainted to the various high-contrast imaging articles,
in particular the observing modes and optics that enable HCI with JWST; as well as the particular primary
performance metrics, operations and recommended strategies for HCI. Observers should also consult the JWST
Getting Started with JWST Proposing, which provides more general instructions for planning JWST observations.
558
Stage 2: Evaluate the required observations with
respect to the performance limits and capabilities
of the HCI observing modes
See also: JWST High-Contrast Imaging, MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging, NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging
For a given JWST HCI investigation, the intended science ultimately determines the choice of high-contrast
imaging mode, depending on the wavelength(s) of interest and, to some extent, on contrast and separation of
the science target from the central bright object (his star in this case). Therefore, consider the following:
1. What is the wavelength range of interest and how does this influence (or limit) the choice of instrument
(s), mask(s) and filter(s)?
See also: NIRCam Filters for Coronagraphy, MIRI Coronagraphic imaging filters, NIRCam Coronagraphic
Occulting Masks and Lyot Stops, MIRI Coronagraphs
In order to achieve the science goals of this program, multi-wavelength, high-spatial resolution imaging of
the Beta Pic debris disk from the near- to mid-Infrared are required. Resolved images at multiple
wavelengths enable detailed characterization of debris disks: images can provide an independent
measurement of the spatial distribution of the dust, while the variation of its brightness with wavelength
allows for the size distribution and composition of the dust to be constrained (e.g. Debes et al 2008;
Rodigas et al 2015). Therefore, this program employs the NIRCam and MIRI coronagraphs to cover the
wavelength range 1.8-23 μm.

Using the NIRCam Coronagraphs will enable us to obtain images of Beta Pic with HST-like resolution at
near-IR wavelengths, with great sensitivity. This program uses NIRCam’s F182M, F210M, F250M, F300M,
F335M and F444W medium band filters (sensitive to the presence of water and CO ices, and organic
tholins) to characterize the composition and spatial variations of the dust. In addition to revealing the disk
in detail, the F444W observations enable the search for unknown, wide-separation (>10AU) planetary
companions, reaching well below the mass of Saturn.
559
Figure 1. Laboratory reflectance spectra of water ice, CO2 ice and Tholins, and filter throughput curves of NIRCam
Figure courtesy of Andras Gaspar et al. (NIRCam GTO).

For the NIRCam observations, the round coronagraphic masks are used to obtain full azimuthal coverage
of the disk, and allow study of its vertical structure. The MASK210R coronagraphic mask is used for the
two filters in the short wavelength (SW) channel (i.e. F182M and F210M) and MASK335R for all four filters
in the long wavelength (LW) channel (i.e. F250M, F300M, F335M and F444W). The rational for using only
MASK335R (as opposed to both MASK335R and MASK430R) for the LW observations is that it avoids the
cost of performing target acquisition (TA) between a change in coronagraphs.
Any change of mask requires a new Target Acquisition (TA) with associated overheads (up to 15
minutes depending on the brightness of the star, generally longer for fainter stars).
The MIRI Coronagraphs will enable imaging of faint disk structures close to the star that have been
unresolvable until now. For MIRI, the coronagraphic imaging filters are associated directly with each
coronagraph and are not interchangeable—selecting the filter selects the coronagraph. The F1550C
coronagraphic filter is used to probe the thermal emission from the warm inner belt, and the broadband
F2300C coronagraphic filter to image the thermal emission from the outer cooler main disk.
2. Can choice of instrument(s) and mask-filter combination(s) achieve the required working angles?
See also: HCI Inner Working Angle
With JWST coronagraphy, the achievable inner working angles (IWAs) vary with wavelength and type of
coronagraphic mask. The design specification is IWA = Nλ/D, where the nominal aperture diameter is D =
6.5 m, λ is a fiducial wavelength, and N = 6 for the NIRCam round occulters, N = 3.3 for MIRI Lyot-type
560
2.
6.5 m, λ is a fiducial wavelength, and N = 6 for the NIRCam round occulters, N = 3.3 for MIRI Lyot-type
Coronagraph and N = 1 for MIRI's 4QPMs.
Specifically, the NIRCam MASK210R and MASK335R round occulters will allow imaging the disk outward
of 0.4" and 0.64", respectively; while the MIRI 4QPM at 15.5 μm and Lyot coronagraph at 23 μm probe the
warm inner belt beyond 0.49" and the thermal emission of the cooler main disk beyond 2.16",
respectively.
3. Are the observations feasible given the contrast limits of the instrument(s)?
See also: HCI Contrast Considerations
The companion-to-host flux ratio expected to achieve for Beta pic is ~2x10−3 (Lagrange et al. 2000),
which will be feasible given the achievable contrasts of NIRCam and MIRI.
4. How important is the azimuthal coverage around the science target?

See also: MIRI Coronagraphs, NIRCam Coronagraphic Occulting Masks and Lyot Stops
For NIRCam observations, the uninterrupted 360º fields of view provided by the round occulters make
them the best choice for these disk observations and planet search. Because the Beta Pic disk is edge-on,
care must be used to orientate the disk away from obscurations in the MIRI coronagraphic fields of view,
including the boundaries of the 4QPM and the supporting struts for the Lyot coronagraph.
5. Is it possible that the scientific goals can be achieved with non-coronagraphic PSF subtraction?
See also: JWST Imaging
The angular sensitivity and contrast ratios required by this program can not be achieved through regular
imaging. Thus, this source requires observations with the coronagraphs for the combination of wavelength
coverage and sensitivity.

See also: HCI PSF Reference Stars, NIRCam Coronagraphic PSF Estimation
1. Which observing technique(s) will be included in the PSF subtraction strategy?

The Referenced Differential Imaging (RDI) technique? — Required
The Angular Differential Imaging (ADI) technique? — Recommended
The Small Grid Dithering (SGD) technique? — Optional
In order to achieve the best contrast and utilize the smallest inner working angles of each coronagraph, a
nearby and color- and flux-matched PSF reference source is observed, using contemporaneous and
identically executed observation sequences. The standard coronagraphic sequence for every instrument,
mask and filter combination is employed: an initial observation orientated at a desired nominal aperture
position angle (i.e. one that maximizes the spatial coverage of the disk); followed by a second observation
with an aperture position angle ~10° relative to the first observation; followed by an observation of the
PSF reference star. Furthermore, all observations will be linked in a non-interruptible sequence to ensure
the PSF calibrator is observed close in time to the science target. Lastly, because of the brightness of Beta
561
the PSF calibrator is observed close in time to the science target. Lastly, because of the brightness of Beta
Pic, the small grid dithering technique is likely not required.

position angles
See also: JWST Coronagraphic Visibility Tool Help, JWST Position Angles, Ranges, and Offsets, JWST Target
Viewing Constraints, JWST General Target Visibility Tool Help
1. Familiarity with JWST position angles, coordinate systems, and pointing constraints.
See also: JWST Position Angles, Ranges, and Offsets, JWST Instrument Ideal Coordinate Systems, JWST
Observatory Coordinate System and Field of Regard
2. Are there any viewing constraints on the target?

See also: JWST Target Viewing Constraints
Coronagraphic observations have additional constraints that go beyond target visibility, such as the
placement and orientation of known sources on the coronagraphic masks, or offsets between multi-roll
observations. Indeed, some preplanning may save significant time and possibly wasted effort
downstream, in the event that certain desired angles or offsets are not available due to observatory level
constraints.
3. What are the target visibilities and allowed position angles versus time?
See also: JWST Coronagraphic Visibility Tool Help
The target visibilities and allowed position angles versus time can be determined using the JWST
Coronagraphic Visibility Tool (CVT)—a GUI-based tool developed specifically for pre-planning and
strategizing coronagraphic observations with NIRCam and MIRI. In addition to overall target visibility
information, the CVT provides information on the location of assumed companions relative to instrumental
structures, such as occulting bars in NIRCam or boundaries in the MIRI 4QPM coronagraphs, as a function
of time, and shows how the instantaneous roll flexibility changes (from approximately ±3.5° to ±7° from
nominal) over the visibility period.
After installing and opening the CVT, the CVT is used to determine the observability of Beta Pic. In the
control panel, the SIMBAD Target Resolver retrieves Beta Pic's RA, Dec and Ecliptic coordinates, and then
the Update Plot button calculates and displays the target’s visibility. The plot generated on the left shows
the target's visibility windows, where the red highlights on the solar elongation line indicate the valid
target's visibility windows, and the blue tracks show the allowed position angles for the selected
instrument and mask over those windows (see Figure 2).
4. Do the observations require any restrictions on the orientation of the instrument field of view (FOV)/
detector being referenced?
See also: CVT Help: Adding companions to the primary target
562
4.
In order to determine the ideal placement and orientation of the disk, the CVT is used to judge the extent
of the disk in the coronagraphic fields of view. Beta Pic's mid-plane is at a PA of ~30°, with inner and outer
radii of ~1.2" and 11", respectively (Apai et al. 2015). The CVT allows the placement of up to 3
companions relative to the primary target, so we define a companion PA of 30° and Sep of 1.2" (to
represent the inner radius of the disk); a second companion with a PA of 32° and Sep of 11" (to represent
the outer radius of the disk); and a third companion, diametrically opposed to the second, with a PA of
210° and Sep of 11" (representing the other side of the disk). For each planned observation, the
corresponding instrument and mask are selected (see Figure 2).
Because the observations are split into two separate groups/ sequences, slightly different orientations for
the MIRI and NIRCam observations can be chosen. The aim is to determine orientations that maximize the
spatial coverage of the disk, but that are not coincident with any obscurations in the coronagraphic fields
of view.
For the NIRCam observations, because the disk is edge-on, an orientation is chosen that places the disk
mid-plane near the diagonal of the NIRCam coronagraph subarray to maximize spatial coverage, but
avoids the ND spots. The ideal orientation would be at an aperture position angle (APA) of ~350°, and
other orientations would sacrifice some of the science. Consequently, an APA range of 345°–360° will be
suitable for the NIRCam observations.
For MIRI, the disk is oriented at an angle of ~45° from the 4QPM axes, which corresponds to an APA of
~345°. Note that this orientation also avoids the two supporting struts in the mounting bracket of the Lyot
coronagraph, which themselves block light in the FOV. The corresponding APA lies in the range of 340°
–355°, placing the disk in quadrants 2 and 4 of the 4QPM (thus we will specify that TA is performed in
quadrant 1).
563
Figure 2. Coronagraphic Visibility Tool outputs for Beta Pictoris
Left: Observability of Beta Pictoris. Center: The field of view of the NIRCam 210R mask (red dashed line), where the red shaded
areas represent the various obscurations due to hardware. The added companions' positions as a function of time within the
visibility window(s) are marked as tracks with red, blue, and purple (see legend). Right: The field of view of the MIRI Lyot mask
(red dashed line), where the blue shaded areas indicate the location of the 4QPM axes. The added companions' positions as a
function of time are marked by blue, red and purple tracks.
Note that these specific PA range requirements are not completely rigid. In the event of a target
acquisition issue or other scheduling problem, one could consider alternative orientations. For the MIRI
observations in particular, the only requirement is that the disk mid-plane is oriented near ~45 deg from
the 4QPM axes—there are several orientations acceptable, but only one choice is allowed in APT. For
NIRCam, the orientation requested is ideal; however, alternative orientations could be considered if
absolutely necessary.
5. How does the roll flexibility changes over the visibility period?

See also: JWST Target Viewing Constraints, JWST Position Angles, Ranges, and Offsets
Given the observing restrictions determined above, this program adopts a relative roll angle between
observations of 10° to 14°. The CVT is also used to check that the disk does not become incident with any
of the instrumental obscurations following a 14° telescope roll from an orientation in the APA ranges
defined above.
6. Do the goals call for a larger roll offset on the science target than can be obtained instantaneously in a
single visibility period?
See also: HCI Coronagraphic Sequences: Larger roll offset case
This program does not require the use of a larger roll offset.
Stage 5: Use the Exposure Time Calculator to

determine observing parameters
See also: JWST Exposure Time Calculator Overview, HCI ETC Instructions
564
See also: JWST Exposure Time Calculator Overview, HCI ETC Instructions
Once target visibility is confirmed and a PSF calibration strategy adopted, the JWST Exposure Time Calculator
(ETC) is used to determine the optimal exposure specifications for the program. Step-by-step ETC calculation
instructions can be found in the Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris
Debris Disk article.
Stage 6: Select a Suitable PSF Calibrator

See also: HCI PSF Reference Stars
1. What is the choice of PSF calibrator?

See also: Selecting PSF reference stars with Simbad, Selecting PSF reference stars with SearchCal
In the PSF calibration strategy developed above, the need for an appropriate PSF reference star was
established. Using Simbad's Query by criteria form, a search for a star in the vicinity of Beta Pic with
similar properties is performed using the following search expression:
rah >= 04 & rah <= 07 & dec > -70 & dec < -40 & Kmag <= 4 & sptypes <= 'A9'
The returned results are:
Number of objects : 6
#| identifier |typ| coord1 (ICRS,J2000/2000) |Mag V |Mag K | spec. type |#bib|#not

-|-------------------------|---|-----------------------------|------|------|---------------|----|----
1|* bet Pic |* |05 47 17.08769 -51 03 59.4412| 3.86 | 3.48 |A6V |1149| 1
2|* del Dor |* |05 44 46.37811 -65 44 07.9011| 4.36 | 3.71 |A7V | 50| 0
3|* alf Dor |a2*|04 33 59.77719 -55 02 41.9243| 3.28 | 3.52 |B8IIIpSi | 46| 0
4|* nu. Pup |Ce*|06 37 45.67135 -43 11 45.3602| 3.17 | 3.39 |B8III | 35| 0
5|* alf Car |* |06 23 57.10988 -52 41 44.3810|-0.74 |-1.35 |A9II | 149| 0
6|* alf Pic |PM*|06 48 11.45512 -61 56 29.0008| 3.30 | 2.570|A8VnkA6 | 67| 0
================================================================================
To identify Alpha Pictoris ("* alf Pic") as a potential PSF reference target, the following criteria is
considered:
Well-known: Is the target a known good PSF reference star?

Selecting a reference PSF source that has been perviously observed coronagraphically and found to
be single, is recommended. "Good references" are usually stars that are not astrophysically
contaminated (i.e., without additional astrophysical signal from a debris disk or companion). Alpha
Pic is a known single star and has been successfully used as a PSF calibrator for Beta Pic in many
HST observations.
Schedulability: Do the visibility windows of the science target and PSF calibrator overlap at the time
of the desired observation?
565
sequence, both objects should be observable at contemporaneously. With the restrictions on the
observability Beta Pic known (from previous work in the CVT), the CVT is used to verify that Alpha
Pic is indeed visible at the same time as Beta Pic, finding that there are two periods over which the
targets' visibility windows overlap: Jan 1st–Apr 4th and Sept 27th–Dec 31st (see Figure 3).
566
Figure 3. Observability plots of Beta and Alpha Pic produced by the Coronagraph Visibility Tool
Proximity: Is the PSF calibrator in relatively close proximity to the science target?
The JWST PSF is expected to be time variable, which has important consequences on the
choice of PSF reference targets. In order to minimize changes in the JWST wavefront between
science and PSF reference star observations, a reference star that is in close temporal and
physical proximity to the science target should be chosen. Choosing a nearby reference star
also minimizes the telescope overheads (by reducing slew time). Alpha Pic has J2000
coordinates (ICRS) of 06 48 11.4551 (RA), -61 56 29.00 (Dec) and is located ~19° from Beta
Pic (which has J2000 co-ordinates of 05 47 17.0877, -51 03 59.44).
Avoidance of Binary: Is the PSF calibrator a single and unresolved source?

In order to ensure effective PSF subtraction, it is important to chose a star that is single and
not astrophysically contaminated (i.e., without additional astrophysical signal from a debris
disk or companion). Alpha Pic is a known non-binary star and so will appear optically single at
JWST resolution. Using the Vizier Photometry viewer, it is verified that there is no obvious IR
excess around Alpha Pic.
Spectral Type: Does the PSF calibrator share the same spectral properties as the science
target?
Spectral mismatch between a science target and its corresponding PSF reference star may
degrade the fidelity of the PSF subtraction process. Alpha Pic (A8V) is fairly close in spectral
type to Beta Pic (A6V), which provides a more than adequate color match (given previous
estimates of the impact of color mismatch on NIRCam coronagraphy contrast) to minimize
chromatic differences between the reference PSF and target PSF. For the MIRI observations,
color match is less important for stellar point-sources, since their photospheric spectral
energy distributions follow a Rayleigh distribution at these wavelengths..
Brightness: Is the PSF calibrator similar in magnitude to the science target?

Whenever possible, it is recommended to use a reference PSF that is at least as bright as the
primary target. Strong preference for reference PSF sources brighter than the science target
567
primary target. Strong preference for reference PSF sources brighter than the science target
should be considered, so that the noise (and any background) is not scaled during the flux
rescaling process. The difference in K mag between Alpha Pic (K=2.57) and Beta pic (K=3.
48) is ~0.9. This will enable for a shorter exposure time on PSF star, and therefore provide
savings in the total time of the program.
2. Returning to the previous ETC workbook, what are the final exposure parameters for the PSF reference
star observations?
Because Alpha Pic is 0.9 mag brighter than the science target, in order to achieve similar photon noise
level on the speckles we reduce the exposure times to be roughly half as long in each filter. For the MIRI
coronagraphic observations in both F1550C and F2300C filters we reduce the number of Integrations per
exposure to "30". For the NIRCam observations we reduce the number of integrations per exposure to "50"
for the F182M and F210M observations; "40" for the F250M and F300M observations; and "20" for the
F335M and F444W observations.

See also: JWST High-Contrast Imaging Roadmap, HCI Coronagraphic Sequences, MIRI Observing Strategies,
A series of technical decisions for the program (such as our PSF calibration strategy, exposure specifications,
etc.) have been made, and now an observing strategy needs to be identified that incorporates each of these
components, whilst also minimizing observing overheads and performance degradation.
1. What is the total number of observations require for the observing program?
This program requires a set of 6 NIRCam coronagraphic observations:
Beta Pic in the LW filters at one spacecraft orientation — LW Roll 1

Beta Pic in the LW filters at a different spacecraft orientation — LW Roll 2
Alpha Pic in the LW filters — LW Reference PSF
Beta Pic in the SW filters at one spacecraft orientation — SW Roll 1
Beta Pic in the SW filters at a different spacecraft orientation — SW Roll 2
Alpha Pic in the SW filters — SW Reference PSF
and a set of 6 MIRI coronagraphic observations :
Beta Pic with F1550C at one spacecraft orientation — 4QPM Roll 1

Beta Pic with F1550C at a different spacecraft orientation — 4QPM Roll 2
Alpha Pic with F1550C — 4QPM Reference PSF
Beta Pic with F2300C at one spacecraft orientation — Lyot Roll 1
Beta Pic with F2300C at a different spacecraft orientation — Lyot Roll 2
Alpha Pic with F2300C — Lyot Reference PSF
2. How will the observations be organized?

See also: HCI Coronagraphic Sequences
568
2.
There are two strategies in which to schedule the set of observations. In the first approach, the
observations made in each instrument are scheduled together in a non-interruptible sequence, at the
orient in which the spatial coverage of the disk is maximized. Alternatively, by making a slight sacrifice in
orientation and requiring that the NIRCam and MIRI observations be scheduled together in one long non-
interruptible sequence (with the PSF reference observations placed between them) it is possible to save
on overheads. However, this second approach puts very tight restrictions on the schedulability of the
observations, resulting in a single two-day scheduling window. This is potentially problematic: if any
observation failures were to occur that were not caused by the program itself (e.g., caused by an
instrument or telescope operational problem, malfunction or safing event), there would not be another
opportunity in which to repeat this sequence of observations within that observing cycle—the program
would need to be deferred for at least another year. Thus, the first scheduling approach is adopted. This
increases the schedulability of the observations from ~2 days per year to ~2 weeks and allows slightly
more ideal instrument orientations, at the expense of slightly longer overheads. Note that if there is a
target acquisition issue or something that prevents scheduling of the observations, there are other
possible orientations that are available other than those provided.
The order in which the two sets of observations will be scheduled is as follows:
Table 1. Beta Pictoris observation techniques with NIRCam and MIRI coronagraphs
Observing Beta Observing Beta

Pictoris with the Pictoris with the MIRI
NIRCam coronagraphs Coronagraphs:
Slew to PSF reference star Slew to science target
Observe PSF reference star with NIRCAM LW Observe science target with MIRI F2300C
filters Observe science target with MIRI F1550C
Observe PSF reference star with NIRCAM SW
filters Roll observatory ~12°

Slew to science target
Observe science target with NIRCAM SW filters
Slew to PSF reference star
Roll Observatory ~12°
Observe science target with NIRCAM SW filters Observe PSF reference star with MIRI F1550C
Observe science target with NIRCAM LW filters
Roll Observatory ~12°
Observe science target with NIRCAM LW filters
569
This order is chosen to minimize overheads while also minimizing time between reference PSF
observations and science target observations.
Stage 8: Prepare our proposal in the Astronomers'

Proposal Tool
See also: Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk, JWST
Astronomers Proposal Tool Overview
Once all other steps in the proposal planning process are completed, the program can be written, validated and
submitted using in the JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool Overview (APT). A step-by-step guide for entering this
example science program into the APT is provided in the Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam and MIRI
Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk article.
References
Apai D., Schneider G., Grady C. A., et al. 2015 ApJ 800 2
The inner disk structure, disk-planet interactions, and temporal evolution in the β Pictoris System: A two-
epoch HST/STIS Coronagraphic Study
Augereau J. C., Nelson R. P., Lagrange A. M., et al. 2001 A&A 370 447
Dynamical modeling of large scale asymmetries in the β Pictoris dust disk
Debes, J. H., Weinberger, A. J., & Schneider, G. 2008 ApJL 673 L191 (ADS)

Complex organic materials in the circumstellar disk of HR 4796A
Lagrange, A.-M., Boccaletti, A., Milli, J., et al. 2012 A&A 542 A40 (ADS)
The position of β Pictoris b position relative to the debris disk
Larwood, J. D., & Kalas, P. G. 2001 MNRAS 323 402

Close stellar encounters with planetesimal discs: the dynamics of asymmetry in the βPictoris system
Milli, J., Lagrange, A.-M., Mawet, D., et al. 2014, A&A, 566, A91 (ADS)
Very deep images of the innermost regions of the β Pictoris debris disc at L′
Mouillet, D., Larwood, J.D., Papaloizou, J. C. B., et al. 1997, MNRAS, 292, 896
A planet on an inclined orbit as an explanation of the warp in the β Pictoris disc
Rodigas, T. J., Stark, C. C., Weinberger, A., et al. 2015, ApJ 798 2

On the morphology and chemical composition of the HR 4796A debris disk
Links
570
Links
"Coronagraphy of the Debris Disk Archetype Beta Pictoris" GTO Program
Simbad entry for Beta Pic
Latest updates
03 Jan 2020
571
and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta
Pictoris Debris Disk
A walk-through of the JWST Exposure Time Calculator for the "NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta
Pictoris Debris Disk" Example Science Program is provided, demonstrating how to select exposure parameters
for this observing program.
Define Sources and Scenes in ETC

Define Calculations
Target acquisition
References
See also: NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk, JWST Exposure Time Calculator
Overview, JWST High-Contrast Imaging, MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging
The JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) performs signal-to-noise (SNR) calculations for the JWST observing
modes. Sources of interest are defined by the user and assigned to scenes which are used by the ETC to run
calculations for the requested observing mode. Following the instructions in Stage 5 of the JWST High-Contrast
Imaging Roadmap, we focus on selecting the exposure parameters to detect the Beta Pictoris debris disk at the
desired signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for the MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging and NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging
observing modes. An accompanying ETC workbook for this tutorial can be downloaded as a sample workbook
from the ETC user interface and used for reference.
NB: This sample workbook is based on work prepared by the #1411 GTO Program coordinators.
The ETC workbook associated with this Example Science Program is called "#35: NIRCam and MIRI
Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk" and can be selected from the Example Science Program
Workbooks dropdown tab on the ETC Workbooks page. The nomenclature and reported SNR values in
this article are based on ETC v. 1.5. There may be subtle differences if using an alternate version of ETC.
After determining the exposure specifications required to meet the science goals (e.g., numbers of groups and
integrations), these will be input into the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT), which is used to specify an observing
program and submit proposals. For instructions on how to implement this example science program into the APT,
see the Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk.
572
Define Sources and Scenes in ETC
See also: JWST ETC Scenes and Sources Page Overview, JWST ETC Defining a New Scene, JWST ETC
Defining a New Source
In order to perform our intended calculations, we must first build a library of relevant sources and scenes. In the
ETC, scenes are idealized representations of spatial (two angular coordinates) and spectral brightness
distributions, before being observed by a telescope. For MIRI and NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging modes, scenes
are composed of relatively small areas (8.19" and 3.14"/6.36", respectively) centered on the coronagraphic
masks. When defined, a scene should contain the source targets of an observation, as well as all other nearby
sources that could contribute to the observed target and background fluxes within that area.
The filter choice for this program includes the NIRCam F182M, F210M, F250M, F300M, F335M and F444W filters,
as well as the MIRI's F1550C and F2300C coronagraphic filters (see parent article for scientific justification). In
order to model the disk at these wavelengths we use a surface brightness model based on the results of
Ballering et al. 2016. To create the model, we used the 1.16 μm scattered light surface brightness (shown in Fig.
3 of Ballering et al. 2016) scaled to other wavelengths by the flux of a stellar model of the Beta Pic star, and the
24 μm thermal emission surface brightness (shown in Fig. 5 of Ballering et al.) scaled to other wavelengths
based on the provided disk SED (shown in Fig. 14 of Ballering et al. 2016). We then combined the scattered light
model and the thermal emission model to get the total surface brightness model at all wavelengths.
Now that we are able to model the disk at a given wavelength, we define a different scene for each of the
observed filters—referred to as our "science" scenes—in addition to a "reference" scene for performing our TA
calculations for the reference PSF source. For each science scene, the target source (Beta Pic) will be placed a
the center of the scene, with the reference PSF source (Alpha Pic) placed at a significant offset, e.g. 15 arcsec).
For the reference scene, the central source—moreover the only source—will be the reference PSF source (Alpha
Pic).

For our Beta Pic source (i.e., source ID #1 in Example Science Program workbook), we assume an A5I star (i.e.,
the "A5I 8500 2.0" Phoenix Stellar Model) normalized to a known Vega magnitude of V = 3.9 in the Johnson filter.
For Alpha Pic (i.e., source ID #2 in Example Science Program workbook) we assume a F0I spectral type star ("F0I
7750 2.0" Phoenix Stellar Model) normalized to a Vega magnitude of V = 3.3 in the Johnson filter. Because the
ETC allow users to define sources that are persistent and reusable, we need only define each source once and
then associate it with each of the relevant scenes.
MIRI coronagraphic imaging Scenes and Sources
573
For our MIRI Coronagraphic observations we create 2 science scenes: a MIRI F1550C science scene and a MIRI
F2300C science scene. Both scenes include Beta Pic (source #1) and Alpha Pic (source #2). For each scene, we
define 5 extended sources with uniform brightness. Each source is placed at a different location and assigned a
surface brightness according to the model at seperations of 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 arcsec. The properties of these
scenes and sources are defined as follows:
#1: MIRI F1550C science Scene

(i.e., Scene ID #1 in Example Science Program workbook)
We first define the source representing the 15.5 µm disk at a separation of 2", which we identify as "Disk 15.5
mic, 2" sep" (i.e., source ID #3 in Example Science Program workbook). In the Shape tab, we change the default
point source to an Extended source with a Flat profile defined by Semi-Major and Semi-Minor axes of "1" arcsec (i.
e., a circular source), and select the SurfaceBrightnesspersquarearcsec as the Normalizationchoice—this this will
automatically change the units in the Renorm tab to read perarcsec^2. In the Continuum tab, we then define the
source to have a FlatContinuum in fnu units and renormalize to its "15.5" µm surface brightness of "15"
mJyperarcsec^2 in the Renorm tab. Lastly, ensuring that the source has been appropriately associated with the
"MIRI F1550C science scene", we position the source at 2" from the target star by setting the X Offset to "2"
arcsec.Because the remaining four sources (used to model the 15.5 µm disk at 4, 6, 8 and 10arcsec from the
target star) will share many of the same properties, we can save some time by simply duplicating our "Disk 15.5
mic, 2" sep" source—using the Copy Source option available under the drop-down menu of the Edit button at the
top of the Scenes and Sourcespage—four times. Appropriately renaming the sources ("Disk 15.5mic, 4" sep",
"Disk 15.5mic, 6" sep" etc) in the ID tab, we can then reposition each source in the scene in the Offset tab and
assign it a 15.5 µm surface brightness according to the model at that location (in the Renorm tab).
Note, because the ETC only allows for MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging calculations to be performed over a
maximum scene size of 8.19", we cannot place our 6", 8" and 10" sources at the desired locations.
Instead, we will position these sources at unique positions 4" from the target source in order to make an
approximation of the achievable SNRs of the disk at these locations, based on their modeled surface
brightnesses.
We define the remaining four sources (duplicates of our 2" sep source) by making the following alterations in the
Configuration pane:
574
Source ID # Alterations
in the Ex.
Sci.Prog. ID Tab: Renorm Tab: Offset:
Wb.
4
Change name to "Disk 15.5 re-normalize the source to its Reposition the
mic, 4" sep" in the Source "15.5" µm surface brightness of source at an X
Identity Information field. "15" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "2.8"
arcsec
Reposition the
source at a Y
Offsetof "-2.8"
arcsec.
5
mic, 6" sep" in the Source "15.5" µm surface brightness of source at anX
Identity Information field. "8" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "0"
arcsec.
Reposition the
source at a Y
Offsetof "-4"
arcsec.
6
Identity Information field. "5" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "-4"
arcsec.
Reposition the
source at a Y
Offsetof "0"
arcsec.
7
arcsec.
Reposition the
source at a Y
Offsetof "4"
arcsec.
575
576
Figure 1. Scene sketch of "MIRI F1550C Science Scene"
#2: MIRI F2300C science Scene

(i.e., Scene ID #2 in Example Science Program Workbook)
As with the previous science scene, we create the five extended sources (uniform brightness, 1x1") to model the
disk at locations 2–10" from the star. The 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 arcsec sources are positioned in the same
configuration as the previous scene ("MIRI F1550C science scene"), and are assigned the following values in the
Renorm tab:
We renormalize the "Disk 23mic, 2" sep" source (i.e., source ID #8 in the Example Science Program
workbook) to its "23" µm surface brightness of "42" mJy per arcsec^2 (according to the model at 2").
We renormalize the "Disk 23mic, 4" sep" source (i.e., ID #9) to a "23" µm surface brightness of "42" mJy
577
per arcsec^2.
per arcsec^2.
per arcsec^2.
per arcsec^2.
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging Scenes and Sources

For our NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging observations we require 5 science scenes: "NIRCam F182M science
scene"; "NIRCam F210M science scene"; "NIRCam F250M science scene"; "NIRCam F335M science scene" and
"NIRCam F444W science scene". We define 5 extended sources with uniform brightness, defined by Semi-major
and Semi-minor axes of "0.5" arcsec. Each source is placed at a different location and assigned a surface
brightness according to the model at seperations of 1, 2, 4, 6 and 8 arcsec. The properties of these scenes and
sources are defined as follows:
#3: NIRCam F182M science Scene

(Scene ID #3 in Example Science Program Workbook)
Starting with the source located at 1" from the target star (i.e., source ID #13 in the example science program
workbook), we identify the source as "Disk 1.82mic, 1" sep" in the ID tab. We then define the Shape of source as
Extended, the Flux distribution to be Flat, the Semi-Major and Semi-Minor axes as "0.5" arcsec, and the
Normalization choice to be Surface Brightness per Square arcsec. In the Continuum tab, we select a Flat
Continuum in fnu units and renormalize the source to its "1.82" µm surface brightness of "16" mJy per arcsec^2.
To position the source at a separation of 1", we then place the source at an X Offset of "1" arcsec in the Offset
Tab. For the remaining four sources, we duplicate our "1.82 mic disk, 1" sep" source and associate them with our
NIRCam F182M science scene, adjusting their properties as follows:
578
Note that because the ETC only allows for
NIRCam Coronagraphic calculations to be
performed over a maximum scene size of 3.14"
square, we cannot place our sources at the
desired 4, 6 and 8". Instead, we position the
sources at positions 2" away from our target
source, such that we can at least make an
approximation of the achievable SNRs of the
disk at these locations, based on their modeled
surface brightnesses.
(including in
the Ex.Sci. ID Tab: Renorm Tab: Offset:
Prog. Wb.)
Change name to "1.82 mic re-normalize the source to its Reposition the
disk, 1" sep" in the Source "1.82" µm surface brightness source at an X
Identity Information field. of "16" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "1"
arcsec.
Reposition the
source at a Y
Offset of "0"
arcsec.
579
14
Identity Information of "5" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "1.414"
field. arcsec.
Reposition the
source at a Y
Offset of "-1.414"
arcsec.
15
Identity Information of "1.5" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "0"
field. arcsec[2].
Reposition the
source at a Y
Offset of "-1.5"
arcsec.
16
Identity Information of "0.6" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "-1.414"
field. arcsec[2].
Reposition the
source at a Y
Offset of "-1.414"
arcsec.
17
Identity Information of "0.21" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "-1.414"
field. arcsec[2].
Reposition the
source at a Y
Offset of "1.414"
arcsec.
#4: NIRCam F210M science Scene
580
Our NIRCam F210M science scene is set up in much the same way as the NIRCam F182 Science Scene: we
create five extended sources sharing the same Shape, Continuum and Offset properties as the five extended
sources above—i.e., ID #13, #14, #15 and #16, located at (1, 0), (1.414, -1.414), (0, -1.5), (-1.414, -1.414) and (
-1.414, 1.414) arcsec, respectively—however, with different ID and Renorm properties, as below:
(including in ID Tab: Renorm Tab:

the Ex.Sci.
Prog. Wb.)
18
Change name to "2.1 mic disk, 1" sep" Re-normalize the source to its "2.1" µm
in the Source Identity Information surface brightness of "15" mJy per
field. arcsec^2.
19
in the Source Identity Information surface brightness of "4.5" mJy per
field. arcsec^2.
20
field. arcsec^2.
21
field. arcsec^2.
22
field. arcsec^2.
#4: NIRCam F250M Science Scene
581
Given that we will be using the F250M filter with the MASK335R (rather than MASK210R, as previously), the ETC
will allow us to perform calculations over a larger scene size. While the five extended sources will share the
Shape and Continuum properties as previous sources 5 sources (in the F210M scene), we change the following
properties in the ID, Renorm and Offset tabs:
Source ID Alterations
#
ID Tab: Renorm Tab: Offset Tab
(including
in the Ex.
Sci.Prog.
Wb.)
23
Change name to "2.5 mic Re-normalize the source to its " Reposition the
disk, 1" sep" in the Source 2.5" µm surface brightness of source at a X
arcsec
Reposition the
source at a Y
offset of "0"
arcsec
24
disk, 2" sep" in the Source 2.5" µm surface brightness of "3 source at a X
Identity Information field. " mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "1.414"
arcsec
Reposition the
source at a Y o
ffset of "-1.414"
arcsec
25
disk, 4" sep" in the Source 2.5" µm surface brightness of " source at a X
Identity Information field. 0.9" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "-2.8"
arcsec
Reposition the
source at a Y
offset of "-2.8"
arcsec
582
26
Identity Information field. 0.4" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "-3"
arcsec
Reposition the
source at a Y
offset of "3"
arcsec
27
Identity Information field. 0.15" mJy per arcsec^2. Offset of "3"
arcsec
Reposition the
source at a Y
offset of "3"
arcsec
#3–5: NIRCam F300M–F444W science scenes

Our NIRCam F300M, F335M and F444W science scenes are set up in much the same way as our F250M science
scene: containing create five extended sources with the same Shape, Continuum and Offset properties as the
five extended sources above—i.e., located at (1, 0), (1.414, -1.414), (-2.8, -2.8), (-3, 3) and (3, 3) arcsec,
respectively—however, with different ID and Renorm properties, as below:
ID # / Scene Name Source ID Alterations

(including in the #
Ex.Sci.Prog. Wb.) ID Tab: Renorm Tab:
(including
in the Ex.
Sci.Prog.
Wb.)
28
Change name to "3 mic Re-normalize the source to its "3
disk, 1" sep" in the Source " µm surface brightness of "8"
#6: NIRCam F300M Identity Information field. mJy per arcsec^2.
science scene
583
29
disk, 2" sep" in the Source " µm surface brightness of "2.5"
Identity Information field. mJy per arcsec^2.
30
31
32
33
Change name to "3.35 mic Re-normalize the source to its "
disk, 1" sep" in the Source 3.35" µm surface brightness of
#7: NIRCam F335M Identity Information field. "6" mJy per arcsec^2.
science scene
34
disk, 2" sep" in the Source 3.35" µm surface brightness of "
Identity Information field. 2" mJy per arcsec^2.
35
Identity Information field. "0.55" mJy per arcsec^2.
36
584
37
38
Change name to "4.4 mic Re-normalize the source to its "4.
disk, 1" sep" in the Source 4" µm surface brightness of "4"
#8: NIRCam F444W Identity Information field. mJy per arcsec^2.
science scene
39
Change name to "4.4 mic Re-normalize the source to its
disk, 2" sep" in the Source "4.4" µm surface brightness of
40
41
disk, 6" sep" in the Source 4" µm surface brightness of
42
disk, 8" sep" in the Source 4" µm surface brightness of
585
Figure 2. Scene Sketch of the NIRCam F444W science scene
The star is in the center, sources 38 to 42 around, and the PSF reference star located in the top right corner.
586
Figure 3. ETC Scene 7 sources superimposed on Beta Pic image
On the left, an image of the beta Pictoris disk imaged by ESO's 3.6m telescope (ADONIS instrument, scattered light imaging in J-band ~1.
25 µm, Mouillet et al. 1997) superimposed with 3.8µm VLT/NACO images of the planet b located in 2003 and 2009 on either side of the
star. The labeled grey circles correspond to five 0.5" zones of the disk that our program is simulating and on the right is shown the
corresponding ETC sources that have been created in the NIRCam LW calculation field of view (6.36"). This is a zoom in on the same
Scene Sketch of the NIRCam F444W science scene as in Figure 2.
#9: Reference scene

Our 7th and final scene will be our reference scene, which we will use to perform our TA and science calculations
on the PSF reference source. This scene contains only the PSF reference source (Alpha Pic), which is placed at
the scene center.
Define Calculations
See also: JWST ETC Creating a New Calculation, JWST ETC Calculations Page Overview, Proposal Planning
Video Tutorials
587
The Calculations page in the JWST ETC is where we specify the instrument and mode, background, instrument
and detector configuration, observing setup and extraction strategy for a given calculation. The aim of these
calculations is to make a comparative analysis of locations in the scene and determine the exposure parameters
required to obtain the desired signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
Science calculations
See also: JWST ETC Creating a New Calculation
In order to setup a science calculation for each of our observations, we select the appropriate Scene for
Calculation in the Scene ★ tab and Coronagraphic Mask and Filter combination in the Instrument Setup tab. For
the Coronagraphic Imaging calculations, the Strategy tab is split into two tabs: (1) Observation, where the
parameters for the PSF calibration are set, and (2) Extraction, where the details of the extraction aperture and
background subtraction are set. The Detector Setup tab is where we will specify the parameters that control the
exposure time and photon-collecting duration.
Because we are interested in the disk at a range of separations, including regions where the stellar residuals
dominate, we have a large dynamic range to consider and must avoid saturation for precise PSF subtraction.
Thus we will avoid full saturation of the target star's speckles, but will allow for a few dozen pixels to be partially
saturated, under the assumption that the ramps for these pixels can be recovered by the pipeline.
MIRI science calculations

Starting with our MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging observation in the F1500C filter, we set up our calculation as
follows (i.e., Calc ID #1 in Example Science Program workbook):
1. First, we select the "1: MIRI F1550C scence scene" as our Scene for Calculation in the Scene tab.
2. In the Instrument Setup tab, we then select the 4QPM/F1550C Coron Mask/ Filter combination.
3. In the Detector Setup tab, because of the brightness of our targets, we keep the default Readout pattern
of FAST—FAST1 mode provides short MULTIACCUM exposures to maximize dynamic range and minimize
noise in a background-dominated regime.
4. In the Strategy tab, we click on the Observation tab and select "2: Alpha Pic" as the PSF Subtraction Source
, keeping the Optimal (PSF Autoscaling)/ default PSF subtraction method, allowing for the reference star to
brightness to be re-scaled to that of the science target for optimal PSF subtraction.
5. We click on the Extraction tab (also located in the Strategy tab) and set the SNR source as "7: Disk 15.5
mic, 10" Sep" (i.e., the source representing the faintest region of the disk), the Aperture Radius to "0.25"
arcsec; the Sky annulus Inner radius to "0.45" arcsec and the Sky annulus Outer radius to "0.7" arcsec.
For our MIRI coronagraphic observation in the F2300C filter, we adopt the same detector setup and observation
strategy, however we make the following changes to the calculation ((i.e., Calc ID #2 in Example Science
Program workbook:
1. We select the "2: MIRI F2300C science scene" in the Scene tab.
2. We select the LYOT/F2300C Mask/Filter combination for our instrument setup.
3. For our Extraction Strategy we select the "12: Disk 23mic, 10" sep" as the extraction source and set the
588
3. For our Extraction Strategy we select the "12: Disk 23mic, 10" sep" as the extraction source and set the
Aperture Radius to "0.35" arcsec
For our MIRI science calculations we have set the extraction radius set to 0.25" for F1550 (l/D = 0.5"),
0.35" for F2300 (l/D = .7")
Once setup, we then explore the exposure parameters in the Detector Setup tab, with the aim of determining
the exposure time required to obtain a high SNR on the faintest portion of the disk (10" separation, which is at (0,
+4) in this scene), whilst also avoiding saturation in the brighter regions, and maintaining some balance with the
resulting observatory overheads (science time to overhead time ratio is roughly 1:2).
For our F1550C/4QPM observation (i.e., Calc ID #1), we find that setting the Groups per Integration to "100" and
Integrations per Exposure to "50", we are able to obtain an extracted SNR of 30.16 on the disk at a
~10" separation, in a Total exposure time of 1198.4 s and with no saturation issues. For the F2300C/Lyot
observation (i.e., Calc ID #2), we find the same exposure parameters (Groups per Integration = "100" and
Integrations per Exposure = "50") allow us to achieve a SNR of 22.67 on the 10" portion of the disk,
without saturation, in an estimated exposure time of 1620 s.
NIRCam science calculations

For NIRCam our observations, we will observe with the 210R coronagraphic mask (MASK210R) in two filters (
F182M and F210M), and the 335R mask (MASK335R) in 4 filters (F250M, F300M, F333M, F444W). For each
calculation we will determine the optimal exposure parameters, with the aim of determining the exposure time
required to obtain a sufficient SNR on the faintest portion of the disk (in this case at the 8" separation) while
maintaining balance with observatory overheads (for NIRCam coronagraphic imaging, the science-to-overhead-
time ratio varies from 1:1 to 2:1). Furthermore, we will a select a Readout Pattern for each calculation that allows
us to maintain a large number of Groups per integration (around 10) while also avoiding saturation as much as
possible (i.e., no more than a few partially saturated pixels).
Starting with our observation in the F182M filter, we set up our calculations as follows:
NIRCam F182M calculation (i.e., Calc ID #5 in Example Science Program workbook):
1. Under the Scene ★ tab, we select the "3: NIRCam F182M science scene" as our Scene for calculation.
2. In the Instrument Setup tab, we select the MASK210R Coronagraph and the F182M Filter.
3. In the Detector Setup tab, we select the SUB640 Subarray, allowing for our bright target to be observed in
shorter exposures (subarrays are read out more quickly than the full detector) to avoid saturation (see
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Recommended Strategies).
4. For our Observation Strategy, we select "2: Alpha Pic" as our PSF Subtraction Source and keep the default
PSF Subtraction Method as Optimal.
5. For the Extraction Strategy, we set "17: Disk 1.82mic, 8" Sep" as the SNR source; define a "0.029" arcsec
Aperture Radius; set the Sky Annulus Inner Radius to "0.5" arcsec and Outer Radius to
"0.7" arcsec.
589
As before, we explore our exposure parameters, finding that using the "RAPID" Readout pattern, "4" Groups
per integration and "90" Integrations per exposure, we are able to achieve a SNR on the faintest portion of
the disk (at 8" separation) of approximately 1.6 in an exposure time of 1885.47 s.
Because the target star is very bright (Kmag=3.5), even when reading out the coronagraphic Subarray in
RAPID, a small number of pixels may fully saturate. The ETC reports 1 fully saturated pixel and 51 partially
saturated pixels in the Warnings tab of the Reports pane; however by selecting the Saturation tab in the
Images pane, we are determine that this saturation occurs in the vicinity of the coronagraph, and not at the
position of the source of interest, which is acceptable.
For our F210M calculation, we adopt the same general settings as the F182M calculation, however with the
following differences:
1. We select "4: NIRCam F210M science scene" as our Scene for calculation.

2. In the Instrument Setup tab, we select the MASK210R Coronagraph and F210M Filter.
3. In the Extraction/Strategy tab, we set the SNR source as "22: Disk 2.1mic, 8" sep" and Aperture Radius to "
0.033" arcsec.
Exploring exposure parameters, we find that with the RAPID Readout pattern, "4" Groups per integration
and "90" Integrations per exposure, we are able to achieve a SNR of 1.5 on the faintest portion
of the disk (at 8" separation) in a Total exposure time of 1885.47 s, with only 15 pixels partially
saturated.
We again adopt the same general settings as the F182M calculation, however with the following differences:

2. In the Instrument Setup tab, we select the MASK335R Coronagraph and F250M Filter.
3. In the Detector Setup tab, we select the SUB320 Subarray (again, because using the subarray will allow
for shorter exposures).
4. In the Extraction/Strategy tab, we set the SNR source as "27: Disk 2.5mic, 8" sep" and Aperture Radius to "
0.04" arcsec.
For our F250M calculation, we find that using the BRIGHT2 Readout Pattern, "10" Groups per integration
and "80" Integrations per exposure, we can obtain a a SNR of 7.64 on the faintest region of the
disk (at 8" separation) in a Total exposure time of 1797.63 s, with only 8 partially saturated pixels.
For this calculation, we Copy our F250M calculation, but change the following parameters:

2. In the Instrument Setup tab, we select the F300M Filter.
3. In the Detector Setup tab, we select the SUB320 Subarray.
4. In the Extraction/Strategy tab, we set the SNR source as "32: Disk 3mic, 8" sep" and Aperture Radius to "
0.047" arcsec.
590
For our F250M calculation, we find that using the BRIGHT2 Readout Pattern, "10" Groups per integration
and "80" Integrations per exposure, we can obtain a a SNR of 5 on the faintest region of the
disk (at 8" separation) in a Total exposure time of 1797.63 s, with only 1 partially saturated pixels.
Duplicating the previous calculation, we change the following parameters:

2. In the Instrument Setup tab, we select the F335M Filter.
3. In the Extraction/Strategy tab, we set the SNR source as "37: Disk 3.35mic, 8" sep" and Aperture Radius to
"0.053" arcsec.
We find that with the SHALLOW4 Readout pattern, "10" Groups per integration and "35" Integrations per
exposure, the ETC reports an extracted SNR of 7.06 in a Total exposure time of 1871.54 s,
with 40 partially saturated pixel.
NIRCam F444W calculation (i.e., Calc ID #10 in Example Science Program workbook):
Again, we duplicate the previous calculation and then:
1. We select "9: NIRCam F444W science scene" as our Scene for calculation.

2. In the Instrument Setup tab, we select the F444W Filter.
3. In the Strategy/Extraction tab, we set the SNR source as "42: Disk 4.44mic, 8" sep" and Aperture Radius to
"0.07" arcsec.
For this calculation, we find that using the SHALLOW4 Readout pattern, "10" Groups per integration and
"35" Integrations per exposure we are able to obtain a SNR of 8.54 at on the disk 8" from the star,
in a Total exposure time of 1871.54 s and resulting in 28 partially saturated pixels.
Warnings
591
The ETC calculation field of view is limited to a 3.14", 6.36" or 8.91" square box for NIRCam SW, NIRCam
LW and MIRI, respectively. A field of view of ~20" would be necessary to fit the whole beta Pictoris disk.
This ETC workbook is thus a workaround where various parts of the edge-on disk have been simulated at
the four edges of our calculation boxes (see the NIRCam F444W example in Figure 3.). The sky
background is estimated in a Sky annulus which can only be centered around the extraction SNR source
of interest. In our case, some of our sources are 0.5" or 1" and and already grazing the edges of the
calculation field of view. As a result, there is the following warning in the Reports : "Background
estimation region partially outside of the field of view.” For instance, for Calc ID #10, the source #42 is
0.5" in diameter with a Sky annulus of 0.5" to 0.7" around it and provokes this warning.
Reducing the size of the sources (also scaling with angular distance) or moving the sources closer to the
calculation window centers might solve this issue but can introduce biases due to the presence of
residual stellar signal around the occulters. For training purposes, we leave and acknowledge this
warning to emphasize on the limitations of the ETC which nevertheless, allows a decent workaround to
prepare such a complex program.
Target acquisition
See also: JWST ETC Target Acquisition, MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition, NIRCam
Coronagraphic Imaging Target Acquisition, JWST ETC MIRI Target Acquisition, JWST ETC NIRCam Target
Acquisition
All coronagraphic observations require a science instrument assisted target acquisition (TA) procedure, with the
goal of accurately aligning a bright astronomical source (the "host") at the location of maximum attenuation on
the coronagraphic mask (occulter). For each of our observations, we will use the ETC to determine the exposure
time required to obtain a sufficient signal-to-noise for the TA procedure to achieve the desired centroid
accuracy. For MIRI a SNR ≥ 20 is required in order to obtain an absolute centroid accuracy of ≤ 10 and 22.5 mas
for the 4QPM and Lyot coronagraphs, respectively; for NIRCam TA, the minimum recommended integrated SNR
is ≥ 30, which is required to obtain a centroid accuracy better than 0.1 pixels. Saturation can also affect the
accuracy of the centroiding procedure, and should be avoided.
MIRI target acquisition

Because MIRI coronagraphic imaging filters are directly associated with each coronagraph and are not
interchangeable, each filter change requires a new TA procedure. Starting with our F1550C science observation,
we initialize a MIRI TA calculation and specify the following in the Configuration pane:
In the Scene ★ tab, we select "1: MIRI F1550C" as the Scene for Calculation.

In the Instrument Setup tab, we specify the Acq Mode as TA for 4QPM/1550 and select the FND (Neutral
Density) Filter (which provides the strongest flux attenuation) in order to avoid saturation and persistence
while performing TA on our bright target star (see MIRI Coronagraphic Recommended Strategies).
In the Strategy tab, we specify that the extraction Aperture be centered on "1: Beta Pic".
592
In the Detector Setup tab, we keep the default FAST Readout Pattern and the number of Groups as "4".
Running this initial calculation (Calc ID #3 in Ex.Sci.Prg.Wb), we find that "4" Groups is indeed sufficient to obtain
an integrated SNR above the SNR threshold for MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging TA. Changing the Acq Mode to TA for
LYOT/2300 and the Scene for Calculation to "2: MIRI F2300C", we find the same is true for our Lyot TA
calculation.
Because TA exposures are so short compared to the rest of the program (i.e., low cost), we decide to push for
a number of Groups of "6", allowing us to obtain an extracted SNR of ~182 and ~237 in 1.44 s for the 4QPM
/F1500C and Lyot/F2300C calculations, respectively. Because Alpha Pic is only a factor of 2 brighter, and we
have plenty of dynamic range with TA left, we adopt the same exposure settings for the reference PSF target in
each filter. Changing the Scene for Calculation to "37: Reference Scene" and running the same exposure
settings, the ETC estimates an extracted SNR of 301.93 and 372.87 for the 4QPM/F1550C (Calc ID
#3) and Lyot/F2300C (Calc ID #4) reference target TA calculations, respectively.
NIRCam target acquisition

Unlike MIRI, NIRCam can take multiple filters on the same coronagraph after one target acquisition. For this
reason, we need only perform a TA calculation for the two coronagraphic masks that we plan to use: MASK210R
and MASK335R. Starting with MASK210R, we create a new NIRCam TA calculation (Calc ID #11 in Ex.Sci.Prg.Wb
) and set it up as follows:
In the Scene ★ tab, we select "3: NIRCam F210M" as the Scene for Calculation.

In the Instrument Setup tab, we specify the Acq Mode as Coronagraphy MASK210R and because Beta Pic
is a bright target, select the F210M+ND Square (Bright) Filter to avoid saturation.
In the Detector Setup tab, we keep the default RAPID Readout Pattern and the number of Groups as "3".
Running this calculation, the ETC indicates that 3 Groups is sufficient to meet the recommended threshold of 30
for the extracted SNR, achieving a SNR of 35.23. However—as with our MIRI calculations—we choose to push
push for higher SNR, and set the number of Groups to "17", achieving a SNR of 181.72 in 3.28
seconds with no saturation issues. For the Reference PSF observation (changing the Scene for calculation to "9:
Reference scene"), these exposure specifications reach a SNR of 290.32 for the TA procedure on Alpha
Pic.
For the NIRCam Coronagraphy MASK335R Acq mode, we select the F335M+ND square (Bright) as the TA Filter
and change the Scene for Calculation to "7: NIRCam F335W". Setting the Readout Pattern to RAPID, we find that
a minimum number of "9" Groups is required to achieve an extracted SNR > 30. As before, we choose to push
for a higher SNR, and select "33" Groups for an extracted SNR of 118.83 in 1.71 s. For the
Reference PSF observation (again, setting the Scene for calculation to "9: Reference scene"), these exposure
specifications reach a SNR of 199.56 .
See the Step-by-Step APT guide to complete the proposal preparation for this example science program,
where we will input the exposure parameters we derived here.
593
References
"Coronagraphy of the Debris Disk Archetype Beta Pictoris" GTO Program
Golimowski, D. A., et al. 2006, AJ, 131, 3109

Hubble Space Telescope ACS Multiband Coronagraphic Imaging of the Debris Disk around β Pictoris*
Lagrange, A.-M., Boccaletti, A., Milli, J. et al 2012, A&A 542, A40
The position of β Pictoris b position relative to the debris disk
Mouillet, D., Larwood, J.-D., Papaloizou et al. 1997, MNRAS, 292, 896

A planet on an inclined orbit as an explanation of the warp in the β Pictoris disc
Pantin, E., Lagage, P. O., Artymowicz, P. 1997, A&A, 327, 1123

Mid-infrared images and models of the beta Pictoris dust disk
Smith, B. A. & Terrile, R. J. 1984, Science, 226, 1421

A Circumstellar Disk Around β Pictoris
Wyatt, M. C., et al. 1999, ApJ, 527, 918

How Observations of Circumstellar Disk Asymmetries Can Reveal Hidden Planets: Pericenter Glow and its
Application to the HR 4796 Disk
Latest updates
594
and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta
Pictoris Debris Disk
Instructions for filling out the MIRI and NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging observing templates in the Astronomers
Proposal Tool (APT) for the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk example science program are presented and discussed.
Example Science Program #35: APT Guide
On this page

Create Observations
Observation Folder 1:
Specify Observations
MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging Observations
NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Observations
Define Special Requirements
Timing SRs
Aperture Position Angle SRs
Run Visit Planner
See also: NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk, JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool
Overview
The Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) is the official submission tool for all JWST proposals. Filling out a JWST
proposal in the APT involves entering proposal information, specifying information about the target(s), setting up
the observation(s), defining any special requirements, and ensuring the program can be scheduled as specified.
This guide provides a walkthrough of this process for the "MIRI and NIRCam Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris
Debris Disk" Example Science Program.
A filled out APT file can be accessed via the menu options File → JWST Example Science Proposals → Multi-
Inst → 35 MIRI and NIRCam Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk in APT. The APT file was
created with version 27.3. There may be inconsistencies or additional warnings or errors with other
versions of APT.
595
See also: APT Proposal Information

After opening APT, we selected "New JWST Proposal" under the "New Document" pull-down menu. On the
proposal information page, we entered Title, Abstract, and Category of proposal and kept Cycle number at its
default value.

Target information is entered by selecting Targets in the Tree Editor, which provides options in the Active GUI
window.
Our program consists of two fixed targets: the science target star Beta Pictoris (i.e., * bet Pic) and PSF
reference star Alpha Pictoris (* alf Pic). Using the APT Fixed Target Resolver tool, we retrieve both targets
from the SIMBAD database using their archival names and commit them to our proposal.
Once resolved, we select the new target entry for Beta Pic ("-BET-PIC") and change the Name in the Proposal to "
Beta-Pic"; select the "Star" Category and assign it with relevant Keywords (e.g. "A stars", "Debris Disks" etc.).
Likewise, we re-define the Name in the Proposal for our Alpha Pic target as be "Alpha-Pic", and then select the
"Calibration" Category and appropriate description Keywords (e.g. "Coronagraphic", "Point Spread Function", "A
stars", etc.).
Create Observations
596
With our targets now specified, we can now begin fleshing out our proposal. In the APT, Observations are the
basic proposal design element, consisting of one astronomical target and one JWST observing mode using a
corresponding APT Observing Template. Any number of observations involving one or more instruments can be
entered into a given proposal, as required by the proposed science, and may be lined together in time and/or
position angle if necessary, using special requirements. In APT, observations reside in one or more observation
folders, located under the main Observations folder in the tree editor.
Because we have decided to split our MIRI and NIRCam coronagraphic observations into two different
coronagraphic observation sequences (at different epochs; see parent article), we will organize the respective
sequences into separate observation folders. To create a new folder, we click on Observations in the tree editor
and click the New Observation Folder button—this creates a new observation folder containing a new blank
observation. These folders and observations can be rearranged simply by dragging them.
For ease, we will create each of the desired observation folders and observations as placeholders, specifying only
the Label and observation Number, Instrument, Template and Target, prior to entering the specific details of
each observation—this will make it much easier for us to specify various connections, such as PSF reference
observations and special requirement links, as we craft our individual observations.
As such, we create two observation folders, each containing 6 observations, specified as follows:
Label: "MIRI Coronagraphic observations"
Observations:
1.
Number: we assign an Observation
Number of "1".
Label: we provide the Observation Label
"Beta Pic - F2300C/Lyot Roll 1".
Instrument: we select "MIRI" as the
Instrument.
Template: we select the "MIRI
Coronagraphic Imaging" Template.
Target: we select "1 BETA-PIC" as the

597
Target.
2.
Number of "2".
"Beta Pic - F1550C/4QPM Roll 1".
Instrument.
Target.
3.
Number of "3".
Label: we provide the Observation Label "
Beta Pic - F1550C/4QPM Roll 2".
Instrument.

598
Target.
4.
Number of "4".
"Beta Pic - F2300C/Lyot Roll 2".
Instrument.
Target.
5.
Number of "5".
"Alpha Pic - F2300C/Lyot PSF".1
Instrument.
Target: we select "2 ALPHA-PIC" as the

599
Target.
6.
Number of "6".
"Alpha Pic - F1550C/ 4QPM PSF".
Instrument: we select "MIRI" as
the Instrument.
Target.
Label: "NIRCam Coronagraphic observations"
Observations:
1.
Number of "7".
"Alpha Pic - LW PSF".
Instrument: we select "NIRCam" as the
Instrument.
600
Target.
2.
Number of "8".
"Alpha Pic - SW PSF".
Instrument.
Template: we select the "NIRCam
Target.
3.
Number of "9".
"Beta Pic - SW Roll 1".
Instrument.

601
Target: we select "1BETA-PIC" as the
Target.
4.
Number of "10".
"Beta Pic - SW Roll 2".
Instrument.
Target: we select "1 BETA-PIC" as
the Target.
5.
Number of "11".
"Beta Pic - LW Roll 2".
Instrument.

602
Target.
6.
Number of "12".
"Beta Pic - LW Roll 1".
Instrument.
Target.
Note that while we may create these observations in any order, it is essential that we assign the "Observation
number" for each observation as stated above (i.e., organized according to the observing strategy we previously
devised). This is because within the APT, observations occur according to increasing observation number.
Specify Observations
See also: JWST APT Observation Templates
With our proposal fleshed out, we will now return to each observation and fill out the observation specifications
in the selected observation template. For both the MIRI and NIRCam coronagraphic imaging modes, an observer
has control over three primary parameters:
603
small grid dithering type
detector read out mode and exposure time (via the number of frames and integrations).
The allowed values are documented and maintained in the MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging Template Parameters
and NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Template Parameters pages, respectively.
MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging Observations

See also: MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging APT Template, APT Target Acquisition
We will need to define a number of parameters, including Coronagraphic Filter/Mask, Acquisition Target
Parameters (Brightness, Filter, Quadrant, Readout Pattern, Number of Groups/Integration), Dither Pattern,
Science Readout Patterns, Number of Groups/Integration, Number of Integrations/Exposure, and MIRI PSF
Reference Observation. In accordance with out advance work in the ETC (see Step-by-Step ETC Guide for
NIRCam and MIRI Coronagraphy of the Beta Pictoris Debris Disk article), we define the MIRI observations with the
template specific information for MIRI Coronagraphic Imaging as follows:
For your own tracking purposes, it is recommended you include the ETC workbook and calculation ID
number in the Acq ETC Wkbk Calc ID field so the TA SNR calculations can be verified by Instrument
Scientists during technical reviews after the proposal is accepted. In this example, we do not include an
ETC workbook ID number in the provided APT file since a unique ID number is generated when an
example workbook is added to a user's list of workbooks.

Target ACQ: we select the "FND" Target Acq
Filter.
Acq Exposure Time: we select the "FAST" Acq
Readout Pattern and specify Acq Groups/Int
as "6".
Acq Quadrant: we select Target Acq Quadrant
"1" in which to perform the initial TA1
Coron Parameters
Coron Filter: we select the "LYOT/F2300C"

604
Coron Mask/Filter combination
Exposure Time: we select the "FAST" Readout
Pattern; specify the Groups/Int as "100"; the
Integrations/Exp as "50" and the Exposures
/Dith as "1".
PSF Reference Observations: we assign "
Alpha Pic – F2300C Lyot PSF (Obs 5)" as our
designated PSF Reference Observation.

Filter.
as "6".
"1" in which to perform the initial TA
Coron Parameters
Coron Filter: we select the "4QPM/F1550C"

605
/Dith as "1".
PSF Reference Observations: we assign "Alpha
Pic – 1550 4QPM PSF (Obs 6)" as our
designated PSF Reference Observation.
We keep the same Target Acquisition Parameters,

Coron parameters and PSF Reference Observation
parameters as Obs 2 (i.e. "Beta Pic – 1550 4QPM
Roll 1").
We keep the same Target Acquisition Parameters,
Coron parameters and PSF Reference Observation
parameters as Obs 1 (i.e. "Beta Pic – 2300 Lyot Roll
1").

606
Filter.
as "6".
Acq Quadrant: we select Acq Quadrant "1" in
which to perform the initial TA.
Coron Parameters
/Dith as "1".
We check the This is a PSF Reference
Observation box, indicating that it is indeed a
PSF observation.

607
Filter.
Readout Pattern; specify Acq Groups/Int as
"6" and provide the ETC Wkbk. Calc. ID we
used to arrive at these exposure settings.
"1" in which to perform the initial TA.
Coron Parameters
/Dith as "1".
PSF observation.
1
According to our previous work in the CVT, our chosen orientations for the MIRI coronagraphic observations
place the disk midplane in quadrants 2 and 4, therefore we chose to perform the initial TA in Quadrant 1.

608
We will need to define a number of parameters, including Coronagraphic Mask, Acquisition Target Parameters
(Brightness, Filter, Readout Pattern, Number of Groups/Integration), Astrometric Confirmation Image Parameters,
Dither Pattern, Subarray, Science Filters, Science Readout Patterns, Number of Groups/Integration, Number of
Integrations/Exposure, and NIRCam PSF Reference Observation. The NIRCam Coronagraphic Imaging Template
Parameters article documents the allowed values for this template. We define these for our observations with
the following template specific information (in accordance with our advance work in the ETC).
Coronagraphic Mask: we select the "MASK335R"

Coronagraphic Mask
Target ACQ: we specify the Acq Target to be
the "Same Target as Observation" and the
Acq Target Brightness type to be "BRIGHT
(ND Square)"
Acq Exposure Time: we select the "RAPID"
Acq Readout Pattern; specify Acq Groups/Int
as "33".
Science Exposures
Subarray: we select the "SUB320" Subarray
Dither Pattern: for the Dither Pattern we
select "NONE"2
Filters: In the NIRCam coronagraphic imaging

609
Filters: In the NIRCam coronagraphic imaging
template, exposures are grouped by filter, so
for each set of exposures to be executed we
"Add" a new filter and configure it as follows:
#1: we select the "F250M" Science Filter;
"BRIGHT2" Science Readout Pattern;
define the Groups/Int as "10" and
Integrations/Exp as "40"
"SHALLOW4" Science Readout Pattern;
#4: we select the "F444W" Science Filter;
610
PSF observation.
Coronagraphic Mask
(ND Square)"
as "17".
Science Exposures
Subarray: we select the "SUB640" Science
Subarray
select "NONE"
Filters: exposures are grouped by filter, so for

611
each set of exposures to be executed we
"RAPID" Science Readout Pattern; define
the Groups/Int as "4" and Integrations/Exp
as "50"
"RAPID" Science Readout Pattern;
PSF observation.

Coronagraphic Mask

612
(ND Square)"
as "17 .
Science Exposures
select "NONE"
"RAPID" Science Readout Pattern; define
the Groups/Int as "4" and Integrations/Exp
as "90"
"RAPID" Science Readout Pattern;
PSF Reference Observations: We assign

613
"Alpha Pic - SW PSF (Obs 8)" as our PSF
Reference Observation
We keep the same Coronagraphic Mask,Target

Acquisition Parameters, Astrometric Confirmation
Image Parameters, Science Exposure parameters
and PSF Reference Observation parameters as Obs
9 (i.e. "Beta Pic – SW Roll 1").

Coronagraphic Mask
(ND Square)"
Acq Readout Pattern and specify the Acq
Groups/Int as "33".
Science Exposures

614
select "NONE"
#4: we select the "F444W" Science Filter;

615
"Alpha Pic - LW PSF (Obs 7)" as our PSF Reference
Observation
We keep the same Coronagraphic Mask,Target

Acquisition Parameters, Astrometric Confirmation
Image Parameters, Science Exposure parameters
and PSF Reference Observation parameters as Obs
11 (i.e. "Beta Pic – LW Roll 2").
2
As mentioned previously (see parent article) Beta Pictoris is one of the brightest disks in the sky, and so we do
not require the use of small grid dithers—for this reason, we keep the default option of "NONE" for the Dither
Type.

Adding Special Requirements in APT
In the APT, Special Requirements (SRs) are defined parameters used to observation scheduling for scientific
reasons, or to indicate other situations requiring specific actions. In order to fulfill the guidelines of our proposed
observing strategy (see parent article), we will require the use of two kinda of special requirements: Timing
Special Requirements, which are used to restrict the scheduling of JWST observations by timing constraints, and
Aperture Position Angle Special Requirements, which are used to restrict the scheduling of observations by
position angle constraints.
Timing SRs
616
In order to minimizing possible thermal variations differentially affecting the acquired PSFs, as well as the
number of rolls and slews, we need to ensure that our observations execute together and in the order we have
defined. To achieve this, we will use the Group/Sequence Observations Link timing SR to link the each sequence
of observations together, so that they are scheduled in a non-interruptible manner and executed in order of their
observation number.
As per our observing strategy (see parent article), we have decided to split our program such that the
observations made in each instrument are scheduled together in their own non-interruptible sequence (as
opposed to one long non-interruptible sequence for all observations). Starting with the MIRI coronagraphic
observations, we apply a Timing SR with the SEQUENCE OBSERVATIONS and NON-INTERRUPTIBLE constraints as
follows:
1. In the tree editor, we select an observation from the MIRI coronagraphic observations folder (e.g. "Beta Pic
- F2300C/Lyot Roll 1 (Obs 1)").
2. In the observation's template, we click on the tab labeled "Special Requirements".
3. In the Special Requirements box, we click the Add... button and select the Timing → Group/Sequence
Observations Link option.
4. In the pop-up box that appears, we select Obs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 from in the Observation list and check
the Sequence and Non-interruptible checkboxes.
5. Clicking on the OK button, the SR is then displayed in the Special Requirements box in the GUI, where it
reads as follows: "Sequence Observations 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Non-interruptible"
Likewise, for our NIRCam sequence of observations:
1. We select an observation from the NIRCam coronagraphic observations folder (e.g. "Alpha Pic - LW PSF
(Obs 7)")
2. Under the Special Requirements tab, we Add... a Timing → Group/Sequence Observations Link
3. We select Obs 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 from in the Observation list
4. We check the Sequence and Non-interruptible checkboxes and hit the OK button, resulting in a "Sequence
Observations 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, Non-interruptible" SR, displayed in the Special Requirements box.
Note that APT will execute the observations in a Sequence Observations ... Non-interruptible grouping in
the order of increasing observation number.
Aperture Position Angle SRs

With our previous work with the Coronagraph visibility tool (CVT; see parent article), we have already identified
the desired position angles and offsets for our observations. For our MIRI observations, we determined that
restricting the APA of the science observations at the initial spacecraft orient (i.e. "Roll Angle 1") in the range of
340-355° yields good target positioning at the second spacecraft orient (i.e. "Roll Angle 2"), assuming a
spacecraft roll of 10 to 14°. To enter these position angle constraints into the APT, we take the following steps:
1. We select observation 1 "Beta Pic - F2300C/Lyot Roll 1 (Obs 1)" from the MIRI coronagraphic observations
617
folder,
Under the Special Requirements tab, we click Add... and select the Position Angle → PA Range
option.
In the pop-up box, we define an Aperture PA Range of "340" to "355" Degrees.
Clicking on the OK button, the SR is displayed in the Special Requirements box, where it
reads:
"Aperture PA Range 340 to 355 Degrees (V3 335.550295 to 350.550295)"
Under the Special Requirements tab, we click Add... and select the Position Angle → PA Offset Link
option.
in the pop-up box, we select the Orient observation to be "Beta Pic - F2300C/Lyot Roll 2 (Obs
4)" and define it as Offset from: "Beta Pic – F2300C/Lyot Roll 1 (Obs 1)".
We define a Min PA offset of "10" Degrees and Max PA offset of "14" Degrees.
reads:
"Aperture PA offset 4 from 1 by 10 to 14 Degrees (Same offsets in V3)"
folder
Under the Special Requirements tab, we click Add... and select the Position Angle → PA Range
option.
reads:
Under the Special Requirements tab, we click Add... and select thePosition Angle → PA Offset Link
option.
in the pop-up box, we select the Orient observation to be "Beta Pic - F1550C/4QPM Roll 2
(Obs 4)" and define it as Offset from: "Beta Pic – F1550C/4QPM Roll 1 (Obs 1)".
reads:
For our NIRCam observations, we determined that an aperture position angle in the range of 345°–360° for the
science observations at the initial spacecraft orient (i.e. "Roll Angle 1"), will also yield good target positioning at
the second spacecraft orient (i.e. "Roll angle 2"; see parent article). As with our MIRI observations, we enter
these position angle constraints on our NIRCam observations as follows:
1. We select observation 10 "Beta Pic - SW Roll 1 (Obs 10)" from the NIRCam coronagraphic observations
folder,
a. Under the Special Requirements tab, we click Add... and select the Position Angle → PA Range
618
1.
a. Under the Special Requirements tab, we click Add... and select the Position Angle → PA Range

option.
reads:
b. Under the Special Requirements tab, we click Add... and select thePosition Angle → PA Offset Link
option.
in the pop-up box, we select the Orient observation to be "Beta Pic - SW Roll 2 (Obs 10)" and
define it as Offset from: "Beta Pic – SW Roll 1 (Obs 9)".
reads:
2. We select observation 2 "Beta Pic - LW Roll 1 (Obs 12)" from the NIRCam coronagraphic observations
folder
a.
reads:
Aperture PA Range 345 to 360 Degrees (V3 345.186639 to 0.186639)
b. Under the Special Requirements tab, we click Add... and select thePosition Angle → PA Offset Link
option.
in the pop-up box, we select the Orient observation to be "Beta Pic - LW Roll 2 (Obs 12)" and
define it as Offset from: "Beta Pic – LW Roll 1 (Obs 11)".
reads:
"Aperture PA Offset 11 from 12 by 10 to 14 Degrees (Same offsets in V3)"
Run Visit Planner

APT Visit Planner,
Using Aladin and APT Visit Planner
619
With the targets, observations and special requirements of our proposal now defined, our next step is to verify
that our observation sequences can be executed as specified. To do so, we will make use of the APT Visit Planner
. The Visit Planner (VP) is a tool that performs detailed scheduability checks for observations in the APT,
including visibility, constraints checking and guide star availability. The VP may be run on individual
observations, collection of observations, and ultimately on the entire set of proposed observations prior to
proposal submission.
In the form editor in APT, we first select the MIRI coronagraphic observations folder, and select the Visit Planner
icon from the top tool bar. Clicking the Update Display button in the active GUI window, we run the VP on all of
the observations, and their associated visits, in the folder. Once the schedulability of the MIRI Coronagraphic
observations is confirmed (the VP displaying green checks on the observations), we repeat this process on the
NIRCam coronagraphic imaging folder.
For the overall observation to be schedulable, all constraints for all visits need to have a window of schedulability
at the same time. The bar graph at the observation level shows a roll up of the available times that satisfy the
constraints at the visit level. Running the Visit Planner, we find that the observability of our targets (w.r.t. the
observatory as a function of time) and guide star availability, combined with the overlap of all of our special
requirements, results in a scheduling window of ~2 weeks in length for each instrument.
620
Visit Planner GUI showing all observations active
With the main Observation folder in the tree editor selected and the VP active, running the VP indicates that all of our observations are
schedulable

See also: APT Smart Accounting, JWST Observing Overheads and Time Accounting Overview
With the scheduability of our coronagraphic sequences verified, we can now run the APT Smart Accounting on
our proposed observations to see whether charged overhead time can be reduced.
Because of the piecemeal approach used by the APT to calculate the total time needed to execute a
proposal (tallying the resource estimate as each new observation is entered), there is the possibility of
overestimating the overheads a given proposal requires. Thus, after designing an observing program in its
entirety, it is important for all proposers to re-run a full accounting on their proposal to remove any excess
overhead charges and obtain a final, improved resource estimate. This step is called Smart Accounting.
With the Visit Planner active and green checks indicating all observations are schedulable, select Visit Planner →
Force Run Smart Accounting from the main APT menu at the top of our screen. After running Smart Accounting,
we can view the revised total resource assessment in the proposal cover page.
Because our set of observations is in a non-interruptible sequence, it will obviously only need one major slew at
the beginning of the sequence. Smart Accounting will catch and correct this and reduce our reported
overheads. Prior to running the Smart Accounting tool, the APT reports 9.33 hours of Science time and 23.69
hours of Charged time (as reported in the proposal cover page); once run, the total charged time is reduced to
19.12 hours.
621
Latest updates
622
NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-
P-18 b
This article illustrates a JWST observing program using NIRCam time-series imaging to search for the secondary
eclipse of a transiting exoplanet. This includes determining exposure times with the Exposure Time Calculator
(ETC), and setting up the observation template with the Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT).
On this page
Science motivation
Step 1 - Determine required wavelength coverage
Step 2 - Determine array configuration
Step 3 - Choose pupil/filter configuration
Step 4 - Calculate required exposure configuration using the JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC)
Step 5 - Determine the appropriate target acquisition strategy in ETC
Step 6 - Complete the Astronomer Proposal Tool (APT) template
References
Science motivation
The goal of this program is to detect the secondary eclipse of the extrasolar planet HAT-P-18 b
using NIRCam's time-series imaging mode. HAT-P-18 b is a low-gravity giant planet with a predicted
equilibrium temperature of 852 K, a radius of 0.995 RJ, and a mass of 0.2 MJ (Wallack et al 2019),
placing it in an interesting mass range between Neptune and Saturn with relatively low surface
gravity.
lts equilibrium temperature is near the transition from CO to CH4-dominated chemistry, so departures from
chemical equilibrium could be evaluated by measuring its composition at a range of atmospheric temperatures
and pressures. It would be best to do this via both transmission and emission spectroscopy observations.
Hartman et al. (2011) first detected the transit. Detecting the secondary eclipse is difficult with Spitzer, but
straightforward with JWST using NIRCam and its F444W filter. We have constructed this observing program to
search for the secondary eclipse so that emission spectroscopy can be conducted in subsequent programs.
Measuring the planet-to-star flux at two NIRCam wavelengths simultaneously will also constrain the planet day-
side temperature and the day-night energy transport and circulation.
623
Here are the system's star and Planet parameters adopted here (Wallack et al 2019, Hartman et al 2011, Simbad
):
RA = 17h 05m 23.151s Dec = +33° 00′ 44.97″ (J2000)

Teff = 4,800 K dwarf
K = 10.23 mag (Vega)
Tc = 2454715.02254 BJD (primary transit epoch)
Ts = 2454717.65 BJD (secondary transit epoch)
P = 5.508023 ± 0.000006 days (period)
Planet Teq = 852 K
Rp = 0.995 RJ
W = T14 = 2.71 hours (total transit duration)
If the planet and star are both blackbodies, then these parameters predict that the planet / star signal will be
about 433 ppm. This should be a straightforward detection (much larger than the anticipated systematic noise
level) provided that enough photo-electrons are collected.

See also: JWST Time-Series Observations Roadmap
The emission we aim to detect in the secondary eclipse is observable at near-infrared wavelengths, using the
NIRCam F444W filter.
Step 2 - Determine array configuration

See also: NIRCam Detector Subarrays, NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns, NIRCam Time-Series
Observation Recommended Strategies
Several subarrays are available for NIRCam Time Series Imaging observations. Given that targets are typically
bright point sources and transit observations can be many hours in duration, it may be advisable to choose the
smallest possible subarray to avoid data volumes exceeding the capacity of the Solid State Recorders (SSRs). For
this observation we therefore choose the smallest subarray available for Time Series Imaging observations on
NIRCam, SUB64P, which measures 64 x 64 pixels (corresponding to 2.0" and 4.0" fields of view in the short- and
long-wavelength channels, respectively). This subarray has a frame read time of 0.05016 seconds.
We choose the RAPID readout pattern for this observation, for which there is no averaging of reads into groups.
624
For all types of time series observations (TSOs) with NIRCam, the short- and long-wavelength channel detectors
must be configured with the same readout pattern, subarray configuration, and exposure time parameters (i.e.,
number of groups, number of integrations).
Step 3 - Choose pupil/filter configuration

See also: NIRCam Pupil and Filter Wheels, NIRCam Filters, NIRCam Imaging Sensitivity, NIRCam Bright
Source Limits
NIRCam time-series imaging can be performed simultaneously in the short- and long-wavelength channels. For
such observations, users should choose filters with similar sensitivities and bright source limits; for example 2
broad-band filters such as F150W and F356W, or two narrow-band filters such as F212N and F323N. Note that for
NIRCam Time Series Imaging, both channels are configured for photometry, i.e., in this template the user cannot
perform simultaneous photometry and grism spectroscopy in the same observation. For very bright targets,
weak lenses are available to defocus the target and avoid saturation.
For this example observation, we combine the medium-band F210M filter and the wide-band F440W filter for the
two channels. Due to the steep spectrum of the source, we chose a medium-band rather than wide-band filter in
the short wavelength channel to avoid saturation while observing simultaneously with both channels.
Step 4 - Calculate required exposure configuration

using the JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC)
See also: JWST Exposure Time Calculator Overview, JWST Time-Series Observations Signal to Noise and
Saturation
The Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18b walks the user through navigating
the JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to determine exposure parameters appropriate for the science goals
for this program, providing a conservative average SNR estimate.
Because the implementation of the signal to noise calculation in the ETC is optimised for non-TSOs, it does not
accurately compute the SNR for long transit-like observations. For transit-type observations, the duration of the
exposure is typically determined by the duration of the event being captured rather than SNR requirements. We
therefore recommend that the ETC is used to determine the optimal SNR in a single integration (i.e. high enough
for the detection and following the appropriate instrument guidance on saturation), and from there multiplying
the number of groups by the required number of integrations to cover the required time period.
Step 5 - Determine the appropriate target

625
acquisition strategy in ETC
See also: NIRCam Target Acquisition, NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target Acquisition, JWST ETC NIRCam
Target Acquisition
All NIRCam TSOs require target acquisition to place the target at the appropriate pointing location. Please refer
to the above pages for a detailed description of this procedure, and the various options for execution. The ETC
can be used with dedicated Target Acquisition calculation templates for calculating the optimal number of
groups to reach the recommended SNR (SNR ≥ 30).
The Step-by-Step ETC guide discusses how the exposure parameters are chosen for this program's TA.
Step 6 - Complete the Astronomer Proposal Tool

(APT) template
See also: JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool Overview, NIRCam Time-Series APT Template
The Astronomer Proposal Tool (APT) is used to submit JWST proposals. The Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam
Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b provides instructions for filling out the APT observation templates. The
exposure parameters determined by the ETC are specified in the APT observation template.
References
Hartman, J. D., Bakos, G. A., Sato B., et al. 2011, ApJ, 1007, 4850 (arXiv)
HAT-P-18b and HAT-P-19b: Two Low-Density Saturn-Mass Planets Transiting Metal-Rich K Stars
Wallack, N. L, Knutson, H. A., Morley, C. A., et al. 2019, AJ, 158, 6 (arXiv)
Investigating Trends in Atmospheric Compositions of Cool Gas Giant Planets Using Spitzer Secondary Eclipses
Simbad properties for HAT-P-18
626
Latest updates
02 Oct 2019
627
Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18b
A walk-through of the JWST ETC for the NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Example Science Program is provided,
demonstrating how to select exposure parameters for this observing program.
On this page
Define Sources and Scenes in the ETC

Select NIRCam target acquisition Calculation
Select NIRCam time-series imaging Calculation
Examine signal-to-noise ratio
See also: NIRCam Time-Series Imaging, JWST ETC Exposure Time Calculator Overview, Proposal Planning
Video Tutorials
for the requested observing modes.
For the "NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b" Example Science Program, we focus on selecting the
exposure parameters for NIRCam Time-Series Imaging.
We start by defining a scene relevant to this science case. We show how to run ETC calculations to achieve the
desired SNR for a single integration and how to convert this to the SNR over the secondary eclipse observation
and assess how it will be detected. An accompanying ETC workbook on which this tutorial is based can be
downloaded as a sample workbook from the ETC user interface.
submit proposals.
The ETC woorkbook associated with this Example Science Program is called "#29: NIRCam Time-Series
Imaging of HAT-P-18 b" and can be selected from the Get a Copy of an Example Science Program
dropdown on the ETC Workbooks page to get the read only version. The nomenclature and reported SNR
values in this article are based on ETC v.1.5. There may subtle differences if using a different version of
ETC.
628
Define Sources and Scenes in the ETC
In the "Scene and Sources" tab, you can edit the sources within your scene. In the "Scene Editor" box, there are
tabs for setting the source continuum, shape, and flux normalization. Below are the specification for this case.
Table 1. Input Source Parameters
Source Continuum Normalization Shape
GSC 2594-00646 Phoenix Stellar Models: K (Johnson) = 10.23 (Vega point

K2V mag) source
(host star for the planet HAT-P-18
b)

See also: NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target Acquisition, JWST ETC NIRCam Target Acquisition

All NIRCam TSOs require target acquisition (TA) to place the target at the appropriate pointing location. It is
recommended that the TA achieves a SNR ≥ 30, which enables a centroid accuracy < 0.15 pixel. Increasing the
SNR to 100 improves the centroiding accuracy up to ≤ 0.05 pixel.
We selected "Target Acquisition" in the NIRCam pull-down menu to determine the exposure parameters we need
to specify in order to achieve the desired SNR. For Calculation #1, we set the following parameters:
"Backgrounds" tab - we entered the coordinates of GSC 2594-00646 (17:05:23.151, 33:00:44.97) and

selected "Low" for "Background configuration," which corresponds to the 10th percentile background.
"Instrument Setup" tab - we selected "Time Series or Grism Time Series" for Acq Mode. The filter (F335M)
is fixed for TA.
"Detector Setup" tab -
We choose the RAPID readout pattern, which is optimal for bright targets.
Subarray (Sub32 Time Series TA) is fixed for TA.
Number of integrations and number of exposures are fixed to 1 for TA.
Among the possible choice, the number of "groups per integration" is set to 9.
629
Among the possible choice, the number of "groups per integration" is set to 9.
"Strategy" tab - the only permissible option for target acquisition is "Aperture centered on source".
With number of groups per integration set to 9, we achieve SNR = 145 for the TA.
Select NIRCam time-series imaging Calculation

See also: JWST ETC Creating a New Calculation, NIRCam Time-Series Observations Recommended Strategies
, NIRCam Time-Series Imaging
In APT, the NIRCam Time-Series imaging template, include both the short-wavelength (SW) and long-wavelength
(LW) detector setups. In ETC, however, this is split in two modes: SW Time-Series and LW Time-Series. Hence, we
need to setup two different calculations for the SW and LW with the same parameters (i.e., same subarray,
readout pattern, number of groups per integration, etc.) to verify that the SNR is well chosen for both channels.
From the NIRCam pull-down menu, we select both "SW Time Series" (Calculation #2) and "LW Time series"
(Calculations #3).
As we did for the TA calculation, we entered the coordinates of GSC 2594-00646 in the "Background" tab and
selecting "Low" for "Background configuration" for both calculations.

We entered the following parameter for the NIRCam Time-Series SW calculation (Calculation #2) and LW
calculation (Calculation #3):
"Instrument Setup" tab -

SW Time-Series (Calculation #2)
LW Pairing: LW Imaging Time Series
SW Pupil: CLEAR
Filter: F210M
LW Time-Series (Calculation #3):
LW Pupil: CLEAR
Filter: F444W
"Detector Setup" tab, for both SW and LW calculations -

subarray is set to SUB64P. This is the smallest subarray available for NIRCam Time-Series imaging.
For this observation, it is advisable to choose the smallest possible subarray to avoid data volumes
exceeding the capacity of the Solid State Recorders (SSRs).
we choose the RAPID readout pattern for which there is no averaging of reads into groups.
number of "groups per integration" is set to 10 and the number of "integrations per exposure" is
630
number of "groups per integration" is set to 10 and the number of "integrations per exposure" is
kept at 1.
"Strategy" tab -
We selected the "centered on source" option for "Aperture location" from the drop-down menu, so
that the SNR is calculated for the source.
"Aperture radius" is set to 0.180" (0.280") for Calculation #2 (Calculation #3), which represents the
~ 80% encircled energy fraction in the F210M, (F444W) filter (see NIRCam Point-Spread Function
and NIRCam Imaging Recommended Strategies for filter-dependent choices for the aperture
extraction radius and background annulus radii for point sources).
We sample the background from an annulus around the source, choosing an inner radius and outer
radius that is 2x and 4x the source extraction radius, or 0.36", (0.55") and 0.72", (1.12") for
Calculation #2 and #3, respectively.
Examine signal-to-noise ratio

See also: JWST Time-Series Observations Signal to Noise and Saturation
For the Time-Series Imaging Calculation, the ETC predicts that one F444W integration will have SNR ~ 480
(Calculation #3); in the short-wavelength channel, we expect to achieve a SNR in the F210M filter of ~580 in this
same integration time. The risk to observations of such a bright star with this spectral time is saturation at the
shorter wavelength. The "Groups before saturation" panel in the image view of the ETC results shows that the
short-wavelength setting allows NGROUPS = 13 before saturation occurs, so our choice of NGROUPS = 10 will
not saturate the detector.
We note that the integration time for a single integration of 10 groups, with the RAPID readout pattern and the
SUB64P subarray, is 0.55 seconds.
For these observation we plan to monitor the star's brightness through 3 full lengths of the secondary eclipse
duration (3 x T14 = 3 x 2.71 hrs = 8.13 hrs), assuming the length of the secondary eclipse is the same as the
total transit time T14. Given the time taken for a single integration, we compute the required number of
integrations to be 8.13 * 3600 / 0.55 = 53,200 integrations. In the Poisson limit, the SNR increases with the
square root of the number of integrations, i.e. if we co-added the integrations we would achieve a SNR in F444W
of 480 x √53,200 ≈ 110,700.
By observing three full T14 durations, we have the same amount of observing time on the star alone as on the
star + planet dayside. The secondary eclipse signal is the difference between these two periods, which we
estimate will be measured with SNR ≈ 110,700 / √2 ≈ 78,000; giving a photometric precision of 1/78,000 ≈ 13
parts per million (ppm). This is sufficient for detecting the signal change from the eclipse with high accuracy. We
note that this calculation does not fully account for systematics. This is sufficient for determining whether the
planet day-side temperature is close to its predicted equilibrium value, and this result will constrain the
efficiency of day–night circulation on the planet.
To account for detector settling time, we add an extra hour (9.13 hrs), giving a total number of integrations of
631
To account for detector settling time, we add an extra hour (9.13 hrs), giving a total number of integrations of
59,759, which we round up to 60,000.
science program.
Latest updates
02 Oct 2019
632
Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b
Instructions are provided for filling out the APT observing template for the JWST NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of
HAT-P-18 b Example Science Program.
On this page

Observations
Complete APT observation template for NIRCam time series
Target acquisition
Time-series parameters
Run Visit Planner
References
See also: NIRCam Time-Series Imaging, NIRCam Time-Series APT Template, JWST APT Training Examples
and Video Tutorials
The Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) is used for submitting JWST proposals. There are multiple components to
an APT submission: generic proposal information, target information, and exposure specifications for the
proposed program. This guide discusses how to fill out the APT observing template for the "NIRCam Time-Series
Imaging of HAT-P-18 b" Example Science Program.
NIRCam → 29 NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b in APT. The APT file was created with version
27.3. There may be inconsistencies or additional warnings or errors with other versions of APT.

633
After opening APT, we selected New JWST Proposal under the New Document pull-down menu. On the proposal
information page, we entered Title, Abstract, and Category of proposal and kept Cycle number at its default
value.

window. In our case, we chose the Fixed Target Resolver button and entered HAT-P-18 which is the host star for
the planet HAT-P-18 b in the Object Name search box of the pop-up window. By clicking Select Object as Target,
the target name and coordinates were imported to the APT observation template. Before importing the selected
target, a pop-up informs us that proper motions were detected for this object and imported in the APT
observation template.
We selected this target in the left-hand Tree editor to enable us to provide additional information in the Target
GUI. In the Category drop-down menu, we selected Star. In the Description menu, we selected Exoplanets. The
Proper Motion menu is filled automatically with the following information: proper motion in RA = -0.0011 sec of
time/year, proper motion in Dec = -0.0366 arcsec/year, and the Epoch box, with 2015.5.
Observations
Selecting Observations in the tree editor, we clicked on the New Observation Folder, and in the Label field, we
entered HAT-P-18b.
We next clicked Observation 1 in the tree editor to open the observation template in the active GUI window. In
the Instrument pull-down menu, we selected NIRCam, and then selected the NIRCam Time Series template in the
Template pull-down menu. Note that only parameters of interest to NIRCam time-series are shown in the GUI. In
the Target pull-down menu, we selected HAT-P-18b which we defined above.

634
time series
See also: NIRCam Time-Series APT Template, NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target Acquisition
Target acquisition
A target acquisition (TA) is required for all the NIRCam time-series observations to ensure the target is placed on
the "sweet spot" on the detector. As described in the Step-by-Step ETC guide, a SNR ≥ 30 is required to ensure
the TA will succeed (with a centroid accuracy of < 0.15 pixel), otherwise the observation fails. We chose
exposure parameters for a SNR ≥ 100 so that the centroid accuracy will be ≤ 0.05 pixel.
For this science program, we perform the TA on the target, so we kept the acquisition target in the Target ACQ
pull-down menu at its default value of SAME TARGET AS OBSERVATION. Using the results from the ETC
calculations, we selected RAPID for Acq Readout Pattern, and 9 Acq Groups/Int. For your own tracking purposes,
it is recommended you include the ETC workbook and calculation ID number in the Acq ETC Wkbk Calc ID field so
the TA SNR calculations can be verified by Instrument Scientists during technical reviews after the proposal is
accepted. In this example, we do not include an ETC workbook ID number in the provided APT file since a unique
ID number is generated when an example workbook is added to a user's list of workbooks.
Time-series parameters
We populated the tim-series parameters portion of the Time Series template with the exposure parameters
determined from the Step-by-Step ETC guide. We note that the only Module option permitted for NIRCam
imaging time series observation is module B, and since we take only 1 exposure per observation, we leave
Exposures/Dith at the default value of 1.
We selected SUB64P from the Subarray pull-down menu. From the Short Wavelength pull-down menu, we

selected CLEAR for the Pupil and F210M for the Filter, whereas from the Long Wavelength pull-down menu, we
selected CLEAR for the Pupil and F444W for the Filter.
Then, for the Exposure Time we selected RAPID in the Readout Pattern pull-down menu, we entered 10 for
Groups/Int and 60000 for Integration/Exp (from the Step-by-Step ETC guide). The ETC Wkbk. Calc ID can also be
entered in the template. The yellow exclamation point indicates a warning for this exposure, which alerts the
user that, due to the long exposure (> 10,000 seconds), a High Gain Antenna move may be performed during
the exposure which can induce jitter that affects the science observation. This is an informational warning, and
no action is required.
635
To observe the transit of exoplanet, phase constraints need to be applied to the proposal, which are specified in
the Special Requirements tab of the observation template. Two special requirements were already added by APT:
Time Series Observation, which signals the pipeline how to process the data and causes APT to give a warning
rather than an error about the exposure duration exceeding 10,000s, and No Parallel, which prohibits a parallel
observation from being scheduled simultaneously with this program.
We also specify here the phase constraints for the transit observation, to ensure the observation is scheduled at
the correct time. For this we use the Phase requirement, listed under Timing. In the phase constraints box that
appears, we enter:
Phase = 0.43854 to 0.43927,

Period = 5.508023 days
Zero-Phase = 2454715.02174 HJD.
These parameters are obtained from the literature. For HAT-P-18 b, Hartman et al. (2011), predict that the
secondary eclipse will come 2.63 days after transit, at an equivalent 0 eccentricity PHASE of 0.4772, given its
5.508 days period. We will center the schedule of the exposure to start 5.07 hours before the predicted
secondary eclipse time, allowing for 1 hour of detector settling and one transit time before the predicted time of
the secondary eclipse start (see JWST Time-Series Observations Noise Sources). This corresponds to PHASE
0.4385 and will allow us to catch the secondary eclipse if it occurs within ±1 transit time (2.71 hours) of the
predicted value. We thus set the special requirement to start the exposure at PHASE 0.4385 to 0.4392 with
period 5.508023 days and zero-phase 2454715.02174 HJD, just outside of the minimum allowed 5 minute
tolerance.
Run Visit Planner

The APT Visit Planner tool checks the schedulability of an observation and whether guide stars can be found to
support the observation. To check the schedulability of this observation as specified, we made sure the
observation was selected in the Tree editor and clicked on the Visit Planner icon in the Top Tool Bar. We then
selected Update Display in the resulting Active GUI Window. After a few moments, the Visit Planner returned with
a confirmation that the observation is schedulable (green check on the selected observation).
Because JWST has time-variable observational constraints – related to the position of the sun relative to the
observatory's orbit – each target's RA and Dec has a specific set of ranges of days that targets can be
observed. We can "zoom in" on one of those ranges: using the zoom slider bar above the figure and manually
adjusting the grey box to the right of that slider bar, we can isolate a the leftmost range of observing windows.
By zooming in on specific windows, we can see the specific calendar dates when this target can be observed by
JWST, given the phase constraint. It is good practice to confirm future dates of an estimated transit opportunity.
636
References
SIMBAD Astronomical Database
Hartman, J. D., Bakos, G. A., Sato B., et al. 2011, ApJ, 726, 1 (arXiv)
HAT-P-18b and HAT-P-19b: Two Low-Density Saturn-Mass Planets Transiting Metal-Rich K Stars
Latest updates
20 Sep 2019
637
NIRCam Grism Time-Series
Observations of GJ 436b
This page outlines an example science program for JWST/NIRCam grism time series observations (TSO) of
exoplanet GJ 436b, including descriptions of how to apply the ETC and the APT tools.
On this page
Science motivation
Step 2 - Select an instrument observing mode
Step 3 - Determine subarray configuration
Step 4 - Calculate required exposure configuration using the JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC)
Step 5 - Use PandExo for more detailed modeling of spectroscopic exoplanet transits
Step 6 - Determine the appropriate target acquisition strategy in ETC
Step 7 - Complete the Astronomer Proposal Tool (APT) template
References
Related Links
For this science use case, we illustrate how to measure the 2.4–5.0 µm emission spectrum of the planet GJ 436 b
using NIRCam grism time-series observations (TSO).
Science motivation
GJ 436 is an M2.5 dwarf star located 10 pc away, so it is bright in the near infrared (NIR), with K = 6.1 mag
(Vega). It hosts the planet GJ 436 b, which has a mass and radius similar to Uranus and Neptune (22 ME and 4.2 R
E
) and a zero-albedo equilibrium temperature of 700 K. If in chemical equilibrium, its atmosphere would have
relatively high CH4 and relatively low CO and CO2 molecular mixing ratios. However, Stevenson et al. (2010)
interpreted the Spitzer 3.6 and 4.5 µm photometric secondary eclipse data to find the reverse to be true,
suggesting significant non-equilibrium atmospheric chemistry.
638
We now describe NIRCam GTO grism time series observations over 2.4–5.0 µm that will be made
to investigate this puzzle further. This spectral region covers features of H2O, CH4, CO2, and CO
and will be much more diagnostic than the existing Spitzer photometry. Covering this entire
wavelength range will require observations of two secondary eclipses, one with the F322W2
filter + Long-wavelength (LW) grism and one with the F444W filter + LW grism. All time-series
grism observations are conducted with Module A using GRISMR, which is dispersed across
detector columns. We plan to obtain scientific data for a total of 2T14 each visit (T14 = total transit duration),
with equal time spent during and before / after the secondary eclipse.
The list of star and planet parameters we adopt for this program is as follows (Simbad, Exoplanet
catalog, Torres et al 2008):
RA = 11h42m11s.09 Dec = +26d42m23s.66 (J2000)

Spectral type = M2.5
Teff = 3350 K
K = 6.07 (Vega)
Tc= 2454221.61588 (primary transit epoch)
P = 2.64394± 9.85041e-05 (period)
MP = 23.2 ME
Planet Teq= 852 K
Rp= 4.2 RE
W = T14 = 1.02 hrs (total transit duration)
Note that these properties can also be retrieved via the ExoMAST portal, which contain information from both the
Exoplanet Catalog and NexSci.

See also: JWST Time-Series Observations Roadmap
The spectroscopic transitions we aim to detect in the secondary eclipse emit between 2.4–5.0 µm, requiring near-
infrared coverage.
Step 2 - Select an instrument observing mode
639
See also: NIRCam Grism Time Series, NIRCam Time-Series Observation Recommended Strategies, NIRCam
Filters, NIRCam Grisms
Since we wish to observe spectroscopic transitions between 2.4–5.0 µm, we choose NIRCam grism time series
over NIRISS single object slitless spectroscopy (which does not cover this wavelength range). Since this mode
uses slitless spectroscopy, we will not have to be concerned with pointing-related flux variations that affect slit
spectroscopy (e.g., NIRSpec BOTS operations).
The grism osbervations in the long-wavelength channel can be used with a number of different broadband filters
in the 2.4–5.0 µm range: F277W, F322W2, F356W, and F444W. For these observations, we perform the same
length of observation with the F322W2 and with the F444W filters, covering 2 secondary eclipse events.
There is no choice of grating element with this template.
Step 3 - Determine subarray configuration


As our target is bright and isolated, we choose to read out the smallest subarray, SUBGRISM64. This subarray
measures 64 rows × 2048 columns, with a single-frame readout time of 0.34 s (assuming 4 outputs). NIRCam
subarrays are usually read out with Noutput = 1, but the Noutput = 4 option is available for time series
observations for even faster read times.
Step 4 - Calculate required exposure configuration

using the JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC)
See also: JWST Exposure Time Calculator Overview, JWST Time-Series Observations Signal to Noise and
Saturation
The Step-by-Step ETC Guide for NIRCam Grism Time-Series of GJ 436b walks the user through navigating the
JWST Exposure Time Calculator (ETC) to determine exposure parameters appropriate for the science goals for
this program. Users are recommended to use the JWST ETC for initial estimation of the signal-to-noise-ratio in a
single integration.
640
Step 5 - Use PandExo for more detailed modeling of
spectroscopic exoplanet transits
Interested users are encouraged to use PandExo (Batalha et al. 2017) for detailed modeling of exoplanet transits
and to optimize exposure configurations for their observing program.

acquisition strategy in ETC
Target Acquisition is required for spectroscopic time series observations with NIRCam, and are performed using a
dedicated 32 × 32 pixel subarray using the F335M (medium-band) filter. In this particular case, the exposure
time calculations will show that we cannot perform TA on the science target itself without saturation. Analysis
has shown that at low levels of saturation, TA can still return accurate centroiding results; this is detailed in the
above article.
The Step-by-Step ETC guide discusses how the exposure parameters are chosen for this program's TA.
Step 7 - Complete the Astronomer Proposal Tool

(APT) template
See also: JWST Astronomers Proposal Tool Overview, NIRCam Grism Time-Series APT Template
The Astronomer Proposal Tool (APT) is used to submit JWST proposals. The Step-by-Step APT Guide for NIRCam
Grism Time-Series of GJ 436b provides instructions for filling out the APT observation templates. The exposure
parameters determined by the ETC are specified in the APT observation template.
References
641
Batalha, N. E., Mandell, A., Pontoppidan, K., et al. 2017, PASP, 129, 064501 (ADS)
PandExo: A Community Tool for Transiting Exoplanet Science with JWST & HST
Stevenson, K.~B., Harrington, J., Nymeyer, S., et al. 2010, Nature, 464, 1161
Possible thermochemical disequilibrium in the atmosphere of the exoplanet GJ 436b
Torres, G., Winn, J. N., Holman, M. J. 2008, ApJ 677, 2 (arXiv)

Improved parameters for extrasolar transiting planets
Simbad properties for GJ 436
Exoplanet Catalog - entry for GJ 436 b
Related Links
PandExo homepage
Latest updates
09 Oct 2019
642
Grism Time-Series of GJ 436b
A walk-through of the JWST ETC for the NIRCam Grism Time-Series Example Science Program is provided,
demonstrating how to select exposure parameters for this observing program.
On this page
Define Source and Scene in the ETC

Select NIRCam grism time-series Calculation
Adjust exposure parameters to obtain desired signal-to-noise ratio
Determining Number of Integrations
Interpreting SNR results
References
See also: NIRCam Grism Time-Series, JWST Exposure Time Calculator Overview, Proposal Planning Video
Tutorials
for the requested observing modes.
For the "NIRCam Grism Time-Series Observations of GJ 436b" Example Science Program, we focus on selecting
the exposure parameters for NIRCam Grism Time-Series.
We start by defining a scene relevant to this science case. We show how to run ETC calculations to achieve the
desired SNR for a single integration and how to convert this to the SNR over the secondary eclipse observation
and assess how it will be detected. An accompanying ETC workbook on which this tutorial is based can be
downloaded as a sample workbook from the ETC user interface.
submit proposals.
643
The ETC workbook associated with this Example Science Program is called "#30: NIRCam Grism Time-
Series Observations of GJ 436b" and can be selected from the Example Science Program Workbooks
are based on ETC v.1.5. There may subtle differences if using a different version of ETC.
Define Source and Scene in the ETC


In the "Scene and Sources" tab, you can edit the sources within your scene. In the Scene Editor pane, there are
tabs for setting the source continuum, shape, and flux normalization. Below are the specification for this case.
We renamed the Scene "Target".
Source Continuum Normalization Shape
GJ 436 Phoenix Stellar Models: M2V K (Johnson) = 6.1 (Vega mag) point source
Select NIRCam grism time-series Calculation

See also: JWST ETC Creating a New Calculation, NIRCam Grism Time-Series, JWST ETC Backgrounds
In APT, the NIRCam Grism Time-Series template, include both the short-wavelength (SW) and long-wavelength
(LW) detector setups. In ETC, however, this is split in two modes: SW Time-Series and LW Grism Time-Series.
Hence, we need to setup two different calculations for the SW and LW with the same parameters (i.e., same
subarray, readout pattern, number of groups per integration, etc.).
After selecting "LW Grism Time Series" from the NIRCam pull-down menu (Calculation #1), we specified the
background parameters. The observatory background is very low for these observations (~ 1 e- / s / pixel in
F322W2 + grism and F444W + grism). In the "Backgrounds" tab, we can specify the position RA Dec = 11:42:11.
09 +26:42:23.66 (J2000) and select "Low", which corresponds to the 10th percentile of the sky background.
644
See also: NIRCam Time-Series Observation Recommended Strategies, JWST Time-Series Observations Signal
to Noise and Saturation, NIRCam Detector Subarrays, NIRCam Detector Readout Patterns
For this example, we observed the target GJ346 using two LW filters (F332W2 and F444W), hence we need to
create two different calculations. We entered the following parameter for the NIRCam Grism Time-Series
Calculation #1:

GRISMR is the only permitted Grism option
We selected the filter F322W2

subarray is set to SUBGRISM4.
we choose the RAPID readout pattern for which there is no averaging of reads into groups.
The ETC shows that the onset of saturation occurs in some pixel when the number of “groups per
integration” is set to 9. We chose to set the number of “groups per integration” to 5 to stay below
saturation and achieve about 50% full-well. This is to provide a recommended (i.e. NGroupssat/2
rounding up) margin of protection against the non-linear regime of the infrared detectors (see note
below).
"Strategy" tab -
"Aperture Half-Height" is set to 0.15" and we sample the background in the regions 0.8" - 1.6" (~
13 - 25 pixels) above and below the target spectrum.
For Calculation #2, we changed the LW filter and the number of "groups per integration;" the other parameters
remained in the same. In detail, the updates are:

we selected the filter F444W.
The ETC shows that the onset of saturation occurs in some pixel when the number of "groups per
integration" is set to 14. For the reason explained above, we set the number of "groups per
integration" to 10.
Due to the intrinsic non-linearity in JWST’s infrared detectors, uncertainties in gain, and precise
measurements needed by time-series observations, saturation for NIRCam Time-Series science modes is
set to a “full-well” threshold of 70% in the ETC.
645
Details for the SW observation in Calculation #4:

"LW Pairing" is set to LW Grism Time Series
"SW Pupil" is set to CLEAR
"SW Filter" is set to WLP4 (F212N2)

subarray is set to SUBGRISM64
we chose the RAPID readout pattern
"Groups per integration" is set to 5 to match the NIRCam Grism Time Series F332W2 observation.
"Strategy" tab -
"Aperture Half-Height" is set to 0.1" and we sample the background in the regions 0.22" - 0.4" (~ 7
- 13 pixels) above and below the target spectrum.
Note that in the ETC workbook associated with this Example Science Program, we created only 1
calculation for the SW observation (Calculation #4), since for both LW Grism Time-Series calculations we
use the same filter (WLP4). We set the parameters for the SW calculation in order to match the LW
calculation for filter F332W2. If the users want to calculate the SNR for the SW channel, when paired with
filter F444W, they need to modify the number of "groups per integrations" accordingly (i.e., set "groups
per integration" to 10).

All NIRCam TSOs require target acquisition (TA) to place the target at the appropriate pointing location. It is
recommended that the TA achieves a SNR ≥ 30, which enables a centroid accuracy < 0.15 pixel. For very bright
targets, a small number of saturated pixels can be tolerated for TA; users are advised to read the dedicated page
on this.
We selected "Target Acquisition" in the NIRCam pull-down menu to determine the exposure
parameters we need to specify in order to achieve the desired SNR. For Calculation #1, we set
the following parameters:
"Backgrounds" tab - we entered the coordinates of GJ 436b (11:42:11.09, +26:42:23.66) and selected

"Low" for "Background configuration," which corresponds to the 10th percentile background.
"Instrument Setup" tab:
Filter (F335M) is fixed for NIRCam Target Acquisition.
"Detector Setup" tab:
646
Filter (F335M) is fixed for NIRCam Target Acquisition.
"Detector Setup" tab:
Subarray (Sub32 Time Series TA) is fixed for NIRCam Target Acquisition.
we choose the RAPID readout pattern due to the brightness of the source.
among the possible choice, the number of "groups per integration" is set to 3 (minimum number of
group allowed).
The calculation output shows that GJ 436 b images saturate in 1 pixel at the end of the first group and in 4 pixels
at the end of the ramp with these settings. Ideally a fainter nearby star should be used for target acquisition, but
there are no suitable star within the 35″ visit splitting distance of GJ 436. Analysis has shown that this number of
saturated pixels can still give good centroiding results, so we can go forward with these settings.
Adjust exposure parameters to obtain desired

signal-to-noise ratio
The grism time series calculation with the F322W2 filter shows a SNR of ~217 per pixel for a single integration
with NGROUPS = 5 in RAPID mode with the SUBGRISM64 subarray (Calculation #1). Similarly, the calculation
through the F444W filter (for the same subarray and readout mode) shows that the SNR per pixel is ~222 for
NGROUPS = 10 (Calculation #2).
Determining Number of Integrations

We plan to observe GJ 436 for enough time to allow for sufficient detector settling time (currently estimated to
be ~30 minutes), and to observe the secondary eclipse and twice the eclipse duration before and after the
secondary eclipse to reduce photon noise (see JWST Time-Series Observations Noise Sources). We also allow for
some margin if the observations do not start exactly when expected or if the secondary eclipse occurs at a
slightly different time than predicted.
We use the dwell time (Tdwell) to calculate this exposure time: Tdwell ~ 0.75 hr + MAX(1 hr, T14/2)(before transit)
+ T14 (eclipse) + MAX(1 hr, T14/2)(after transit) + 1 hr (timing window), where T14 is the transit duration.
For GJ 436, T14 is 1.02 hours which gives us a total exposure time of 4.77 hours.
From inputting 5 Groups into the Astronomer's Proposal Tool, with the RAPID Readout Pattern and SUBGRISM64
Subarray, we find that 1 integration corresponds to 2.049 seconds for the observation in the F332W2 filter. We
thus need 8381 integrations to cover the exposure window with this filter.
For the F444W filter, we found 10 Groups/Int to be the optimal integration ramp length, again with the RAPID
Readout Pattern and SUBGRISM64 subarray. APT shows us that this combination corresponds to an exposure
time of 3.752 s for 1 Groups/Int, such that we need 4577 integrations to cover the exposure window.

647
See also: JWST ETC Residual Flat Field Errors
The scientific measurement for an exoplanet transit is the "transit depth", which is a temporal
measurement. The spectroscopic result is therefore a relative comparison between a contiguous sequence of
time-series measurements – i.e. transit depth over wavelength. It is equivalent to measuring variations in the
stellar spectrum over time.
Our goal in this example is to achieve a relative precision < 20 parts per million (ppm) on the transit depth per
"spectral bin" or "channel," after subtracting the primary transit from the out-of-transit data (e.g., Greene et al.
2015). A "spectral bin" or "channel" is a set of pixels across the spectrum that we will combine ("bin") to
maximize the temporal precision per spectroscopic channel, without losing the spectral features in which we are
interested in measuring. For the case of GJ 436, in particular, a spectral bin of 20 pixels (which decreases the
NIRCam Grism resolution from ~1600 to ~80), would be enough to resolve the predicted spectral features in the
atmosphere of this planet.
If we assume a box-shaped transit, the transit depth precision (Precisiondepth) can be approximated by:
where Precisionpoint is the photometric precision per data point, Nout is the number of datapoints (integrations)
out-of-transit, Nin is the number of datapoints (integrations) in-transit, and SNRpoint is the SNR in one integration.
The time spent out-of-transit is 3.75 hours and the time spent in-transit is 1.02 hours. For our example science
program and this observational setup (NGroups = 5, RAPID readout, and SUBGRISM64 subarray), these times
correspond to Nout = 6589 integrations and Nin = 1792 integrations. From the ETC, we found SNRpoint = 217 ,
such that Precisiondepth is ~ 0.000123 = 123 ppm, prior to binning. When binning by a factor of 20, our Precision
depth
lowers by a factor of √20, such that we achieve a precision of ~28 ppm. If we assume that the noise for this
observation is Poissonian dominated, we thus need 3 exposures (i.e., 28 ppm /√3 ≈ 16 ppm) for this program.
We can repeat the same calculation as for F322W2 filter to assess the achievable precision and required number
of epochs for the F444W filter.
Note that the ETC does not fully account for systematic errors that affect the real spectrophotometric
precision.
See the Step-by-Step APT guide to complete the proposal preparation for this example science program,
where we will input the exposure parameters we derived here.
References
648
Greene, T. P., Line M. R., Montera, C., et al. 2016, ApJ, 817, 1 ( (arXiv)
Characterizing transiting exoplanet atmospheres with JWST
Latest updates
03 Oct 2019
649
Grism Time-Series of GJ 436b
Instructions are provided for filling out the APT observing template for the JWST NIRCam Grism Time-Series
Observations of GJ 436b Example Science Program.
On this page

Observations
Complete APT Observation Template for NIRCam Grism Time-Series
Target acquisition
Grism time-series parameters
Run Visit Planner
References
See also: NIRCam Grism Time-Series, NIRCam Grism Time-Series APT Template, JWST APT Video Tutorials
The Astronomer's Proposal Tool (APT) is used for submitting JWST proposals. There are multiple
components to an APT submission: generic proposal information, target information, and
exposure specifications for the proposed program.This guide discusses how to fill out the APT
observing template for the "NIRCam Grism Time-Series Observations of GJ 436b" Example Science
Program.
NIRCam → 30 NIRCam Grism Time-Series Observations of GJ 436b in APT. The APT file was created with
version 27.3. There may be inconsistencies or additional warnings or errors with other versions of APT.

650
After opening APT, we selected New JWST Proposal under the New Document pull-down menu. On the proposal
information page, we entered Title, Abstract, and Category of proposal and kept Cycle number at its default
value.

window. In our case, we chose the Fixed Target Resolver button and entered GJ436 which is the host star for the
planet GJ436b in the Object Name search box of the pop-up window. An entry for the selected object appears in
the pop-up window (note that the different name, ROSS 905, identifies the same object). By clicking Select
Object as Target, the target name and coordinates were imported to the APT observation template. Before
importing the selected target, a pop-up informs us that proper motions were detected for this object and
imported in the APT observation template.
We selected this target in the left-hand Tree editor to enable us to provide additional information in the Target
GUI. In the Name in the Proposal and Name in the Archive menu, we changed the name of the object from ROSS
905 to GJ-436. In the In the Category drop-down menu, we selected Star. In the Description menu, we selected
Exoplanets, M dwarfs, M stars. The J200 Coordinates are filled automatically with the values RA: 11 42 12.1287
and Dec: +26 42 11.04. In the Uncertainty field we added 0.01 arcsec both for RA and Dec. The Proper Motion
menu is filled automatically with the following information: proper motion in RA = 0.06679 sec of time/year,
proper motion in Dec = -0.81403 arcsec/year, and the Epoch box, with 2015.5. In the Annual Parallax field we
add 0.1025015 (arcsec).
Observations
Selecting Observations in the tree editor, we clicked on the New Observation Folder, and in the Label field, we
entered GJ-436b.
We next clicked Observation 1 in the tree editor to open the observation template in the active GUI window.
Since we will create more than one observation in this proposal (i.e., one for the filter F332W2 and one for
the filter F444W) we add in the Label field F332W2 Sec Eclipse, to avoid confusion.
651
In the Instrument pull-down menu, we selected NIRCam, and then selected the NIRCam Grism Time Series
template in the Template pull-down menu. Note that only parameters of interest to NIRCam Grism Time-Series
are shown in the GUI. In the Target pull-down menu, we selected GJ-436 which we defined above.
Complete APT Observation Template for NIRCam

Grism Time-Series
See also: NIRCam Grism Time-Series APT Template, NIRCam Grism Time-Series Target Acquisition
Target acquisition
A target acquisition (TA) is required for all the NIRCam time-series observations to ensure the target is placed on
the "sweet spot" on the detector. As described in the Step-by-Step ETC guide, a SNR ≥ 30 is required to ensure
the TA will succeed, otherwise the observation fails.
For this science program, we perform the TA on the target, so we kept the acquisition target in the Target ACQ
pull-down menu at its default value of SAME TARGET AS OBSERVATION. Using the results from the ETC
calculations, we selected RAPID for Acq Readout Pattern, and 3 Acq Groups/Int. For your own tracking purposes,
it is recommended you include the ETC workbook and calculation ID number in the Acq ETC Wkbk Calc ID field so
the TA SNR calculations can be verified by Instrument Scientists during technical reviews after the proposal is
accepted. In this example, we do not include an ETC workbook ID number in the provided APT file since a unique
ID number is generated when an example workbook is added to a user's list of workbooks.
Grism time-series parameters

We selected SUBGRISM64 from the Subarray pull-down menu and 4 from the No. of Output Channels pull-down
menu. Exposure/dith is left to the default value of 1. From the Short Pupil+Filter pull-down menu, we select
CLEAR+WLP4, whereas for the long wavelength filter, we selected GRISMR+F322W2 from the Long Pupil+Filter
pull-down menu. This observation is labeled F322W2 Sec Eclipse (Obs 1) in the accompanying APT file. From the
Step-by-Step ETC guide, we found that we need 5 Groups/Int and 8381 Integrations/Exp (F332W2 Sec Eclipse
(Obs 1)).
We propagated these parameters to the F444W Sec Eclipse (Obs 2) observation by right-clicking in the Tree
editor on F322W2 Sec Eclipse (Obs 1) and selecting Duplicate. This created a second observation identical to the
previous one.
In this observation folder, we changed the following parameters:
Label field: F444W Sec Eclipse

Long Pupil+Filterpull-down menu: GRISMR+F444W
Groups/Int field: 10 (derived in the Step-by-Step ETC Guide)
652
Groups/Int field: 10 (derived in the Step-by-Step ETC Guide)
Integrations/Exp field: 4577 (also derived in the Step-by-Step ETC Guide)
The yellow exclamation point indicates a warning for this exposure, which alerts the user that, due to the long
exposure (> 10,000 seconds), a High Gain Antenna move may be performed during the exposure which can
induce jitter that affects the science observation. This is an informational warning, and no action is required.
When clicking on the arrow, we expanded the "F322W2 Sec Eclipse (Obs 1)" observation in the
Tree editor, we note that there is a second warning at the "visit" level. This warning alerts the
user that the Data Volume for this visit exceeds half the maximum allowed of 58000.0 MB. This
is an informational warning that notifies, during planning and schedulability, that observations
must be executed after a downlink in order to not fill the Solid State Recorder (see also JWST Data
Volume and Data Excess). No action is required.

To observe the transit of exoplanet, phase constraints need to be applied to the proposal, which are specified in
the Special Requirements tab of the observation template. Two special requirements were already added by APT:
Time Series Observation, which signals the pipeline how to process the data and causes APT to give a warning
rather than an error about the exposure duration exceeding 10,000s, and No Parallel, which prohibits a parallel
observation from being scheduled simultaneously with this program.
We also specify here the phase constraints for the transit observation, to ensure the observation is scheduled at
the correct time. For this we use the Phase requirement, listed under Timing. In the phase constraints box that
appears, we enter:
Phase = 0.53496 to 0.55073,

Period = 2.64388312 days
Zero-Phase = 2454510.80162 HJD.
GJ 436has only 1 nearby bright star (ΔK < 7 mag), but will not contaminate the F322W2 grism spectrum if we
specify an Aperture PA Range constrain. To do so, we use the PA Range requirements, listed under Position
Angle. In the pop-up window we enter the following values 177 and 151 Degrees (F322W2 Sec Eclipse (Obs 1)).
For the F444W grism observation (F444W Sec Eclipse (Obs 2)), we modify the Aperture PA Range constrain in
the Special Requirements tab to prevent spectral contamination from nearby stars:
Aperture PA Range 177 to 331 Degrees

Aperture PA Range 357 to 151 Degrees
653
Each of the above observations should be duplicated twice to create a total of 3 secondary eclipse
observations in each filter to achieve the desired SNR on the final spectrum.
Run Visit Planner

The APT Visit Planner tool checks the schedulability of an observation and whether guide stars can be found to
support the observation. To check the schedulability of this observation as specified, we made sure the
observation was selected in the Tree editor and clicked on the Visit Planner icon in the Top Tool Bar. We then
selected Update Display in the resulting Active GUI Window. After a few moments, the Visit Planner returned with
a confirmation that the observation is schedulable (green check on the selected observation).
Because JWST has time-variable observational constraints – related to the position of the sun relative to the
observatory's orbit – each target's RA and Dec has a specific set of ranges of days that targets can be
observed. We can "zoom in" on one of those ranges: using the zoom slider bar above the figure and manually
adjusting the grey box to the right of that slider bar, we can isolate a the leftmost range of observing windows.
By zooming in on specific windows, we can see the specific calendar dates when this target can be observed by
JWST, given the phase constraint. It is good practice to confirm future dates of an estimated transit opportunity.

References
SIMBAD Astronomical Database
Latest updates
654
655

JWST Near Infrared Camera

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

JWST Near Infrared Camera

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JWST Near Infrared Camera

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Documentation for Cycle 1

This PDF document was updated on July 9, 2022. It is an

REPORT WEBSITE PROBLEMS

NIRCam Time-Series Imaging Target Acquisition

NIRCam Time-Series Imaging of HAT-P-18 b2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

JWST User Documentation Homepage

Latest JDox Updates

Near Infrared Camera

Near Infrared Imager and Slitless Spectrograph

Near Infrared Spectrograph

Opportunities and Policies

Methods and Roadmaps

Recommended Observing Strategies

Example Science Programs

Astronomer's Proposal Tool

Understanding Data Files

Science Calibration Pipeline

Post-Pipeline Data Analysis

Data Calibration Considerations

JWST Observer YouTube Channel

JWST Pocket Guide

"Read the Docs" (Data Calibration and Analysis)

Updated 01 May 2022

Article Updated Update description

JWST ETC 24-Feb-22 Added configuration dictionary examples

Pandeia Batch Mode 18-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

Pandeia 18-Feb-22 Updated examples and list for ETC 1.7.

Pandeia Reports 18-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

Pandeia Quickstart 18-Feb-22 Updated examples for ETC 1.7.

Moving Target ETC 15-Feb-22 Updated text on ETC template spectra.

JWST ETC Source 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

JWST ETC 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

JWST ETC Images 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

JWST ETC NIRSpec 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

JWST ETC Defining 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

JWST ETC MSA Full 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

JWST ETC MSA 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

JWST ETC Time- 14-Feb-22 Updated for ETC 1.7.

JWST Observing 25-Jan-22 Minor updates for clarification.

MIRI Imaging 20-Jan-22 Changed FAST to FASTR1 and SLOW to SLOWR1

Latest updates 01 May 2022

Originally published 11 Oct 2021

Additional linked documentation

Read the Docs

How to cite JDox

To cite the JWST User Documentation Website:

In-text ref.: (JWST User Documentation, 2016-)

JDox content contributors

JDox Project Team

JDox Deputy Project Lead

JWST User Support Project Scientist

JDox Content and Technical Editors

Originally published 01 Feb 2018

Proposal Planning Video Tutorials

JWST Data Pipeline and Analysis Video Tutorials

Originally published 28 Feb 2022

Updated October 29, 2020

Cycle 1 Call for Proposals

Proposal Preparation Handbook